Hidden Mysteries By
Dr Joshua David Stone
Copyright © 1997 Dr Joshua David Stone & Gloria Excelsias All Rights Reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the permission in writing from the copyright owner!
2
Dedication I would like to dedicate this book to our extraterrestrial brothers and sisters, Pan and the Nature Spirits, Archangels and Angels, to our friends from the Inner Earth, and lastly to the more hidden and lesser known mystery schools of all faiths that grace our planet. These Lesser known friends and servants of the divine, donʹt often get the gratitude and acknowledgment they so richly deserve, for the tireless and often unseen spiritual work they do on humanities behalf. My prayer here is that in the not too distant future there be much more open communication between us all, and the greater acknowledgment that we are all brothers and sisters in one universal and multidimensional family.
3
Table of Contents
Part One: Extraterrestrial Activity in this Universe Chapter 1………………………………………………………………………………………………….9 Extraterrestrials and Other Governmental Cover‐ups Chapter 2………………………………………………………………………………………………...31 Agartha in the Hollow Earth Chapter 3………………………………………………………………………………………………...43 Walk‐ins Chapter 4…………………………………………………………………………………………………48 Extraterrestrial Activity Chapter 5…………………………………………………………………………………………………50 The Pleiades Chapter 6………………………………………………………………………………………………....56 Orion Chapter 7…………………………………………………………………………………………………58 Ummo Chapter 8………………………………………………………………………………………………...60 Iarga Chapter 9……………………………………………………………………………………………..….63 Mars Chapter 10……………………………………………………………………………………………….66 Venus Chapter 11……………………………………………………………………………………………….70 The Ashtar Command
4
Chapter 12……………………………………………………………………………………………….80 Arcturus Chapter 13……………………………………………………………………………………………….87 Sirius Chapter 14……………………………………………………………………………………………….89 Hydra Chapter 15……………………………………………………………………………………………….90 The Grays Chapter 16……………………………………………………………………………………………….93 The Reptilian Race Chapter 17………………………………………………………………………………………….........96 Procyon Chapter 18………………………………………………………………………………………….........97 Cessna Chapter 19……………………………………………………………………………………………….99 Alpha Centauri Chapter 20………………………………………………………………………………………….......100 Lyra Chapter 21………………………………………………………………………………………….......101 Antares Chapter 22………………………………………………………………………………………….......102 Andromeda Chapter 23………………………………………………………………………………………….......104 Proxima Centauri Chapter 24………………………………………………………………………………………….......105 Ra 5
Chapter 25………………………………………………………………………………………….......107 Alabram Chapter 26………………………………………………………………………………………….......108 Zeta Reticulum Chapter 27………………………………………………………………………………………….......110 Vega Chapter 28………………………………………………………………………………………….......111 The Ataien Chapter 29………………………………………………………………………………………….......114 The Essassani Chapter 30………………………………………………………………………………………….......115 Implants Chapter 31………………………………………………………………………………………….......117 The Association of Worlds Chapter 32………………………………………………………………………………………….......118 Star People Chapter 33………………………………………………………………………………………….......122 The Organization of the Physical Universe Chapter 34………………………………………………………………………………………….......124 Summary
Part Two: The Ancient Mystery Schools Chapter 35………………………………………………………………………………………….......127 The Angelic Hierarchy Chapter 36………………………………………………………………………………………….......141 Pan and the Nature Spirits
6
Chapter 37………………………………………………………………………………………….......161 Evolution and Ecology Chapter 38………………………………………………………………………………………….......171 The Huna Teachings of Hawaii Chapter 39………………………………………………………………………………………….......182 The Egyptian Mysteries Chapter 40………………………………………………………………………………………….......197 Initiation in the Great Pyramid Chapter 41………………………………………………………………………………………….......215 The Science of Soul Travel Chapter 42………………………………………………………………………………………….......229 Healing with Color and Sound Chapter 43………………………………………………………………………………………….......243 Brahma, Vishnu, and Shiva Chapter 44………………………………………………………………………………………….......250 The Bhagavad‐Gita Chapter 45………………………………………………………………………………………….......259 The Vedas: God’s Revelation Chapter 46………………………………………………………………………………………….......268 The Sacred Paths of Yoga Chapter 47………………………………………………………………………………………….......284 The Yoga Sutras of Patanjali Chapter 48………………………………………………………………………………………….......306 The Church’s Contamination by Ego Chapter 49………………………………………………………………………………………….......312 An Esoteric Understanding of Judaism 7
Chapter 50………………………………………………………………………………………...........324 The Essene Brotherhood Chapter 51………………………………………………………………………………………...........338 The Kabbalistic Tree of Life Chapter 52………………………………………………………………………………………….......354 The Keys of Enoch Chapter 53………………………………………………………………………………………….......358 The Mighty I Am Presence Chapter 54………………………………………………………………………………………….......364 Sufism Chapter 55………………………………………………………………………………………...........367 Shinto: the Way of the Gods Chapter 56………………………………………………………………………………………...........370 Baha*i: the Worldʹs Newest Religion BIBLIOGRAPHY…………………………………………..…………………………………………374 About the Author……………………………………………………………………………………377
8
Part One:
Extraterrestrial Activity in this Universe
9
1 Extraterrestrials and Other Governmental Cover‐ups ʺ95% of all Extraterrestrials visiting our planet are of a positive nature.ʺ One of the areas of very great interest of mine over the last five years has been the area concerning the extra terrestrial involvement with our planet over the earthʹs history. This area of focus could probably take a thousand books to cover and would probably not even cover the surface of the topic. I will attempt to give you a brief overview of this subject. It is a very interesting phenomena that a great many very devoted and spiritual people have very little knowledge of the extraterrestrial involvement on earth. It will be my attempt to give some of the basics in this chapter. First off, Godʹs infinite universe is filled with extraterrestrial life. It is the height of egotism to think that we would be the only life forms in Godʹs infinite universe. Extraterrestrials have been visiting us since the beginning of time. In the chapter on creation, in my first book, I mentioned the electrical wars in Pre‐Lemurian times. Later I mentioned in Atlantis and Egypt how extraterrestrials visited in great numbers. If people had any idea how much extraterrestrial activity has been going on in the past and in our present they would be amazed. In Atlantis they helped with crystal technologies and in building the ʺGreat Crystalʺ, which was the power source for the entire civilization of Atlantis. The extraterrestrials have come from our galaxy, and other more distant galaxies. It is important at this point to say that I believe from the guidance I have received that ʺ95%ʺ of all extraterrestrial contact with the earth is of a ʺpositive natureʺ. Most of the civilizations are far beyond ours in technological and spiritual advancement. One of the basic laws they follow is that of respecting our free choice and never interfering unless they have been asked for help.
10
One of the reasons there have been so many sightings of UFOʹs is that we, on this planet, have moved into a fourth dimensional consciousness, and into sacred status as a planet, and this is a solar event. Each of the planets of our solar system could be likened to a chakra of the sun or of the Being that ensouls the solar system, whose name is Helios. When one chakra goes through a major transformation it affects all the other chakras. The extraterrestrial are aware of this transformation which the earth is going through and are very interested in watching it and helping us move to the new age. Many of the great advancements in earthʹs evolution have come from extraterrestrial help. One important thing to understand is that not all extraterrestrials have a human looking appearance. Our particular kind of physical body is called the ʺAdam Kadmonʺ type. There are many other types of bodies that God has created. Also let it be known that in past lives when we have incarnated on other planets we have inhabited some of these bodies ourselves. We need to get beyond our egotistical attachment to this particular human form and realize that we are part of a galactic, universal and cosmic family of intelligent life forms. Most of them are far more advanced than our civilization. One of the reasons that they are not more overt in visiting our planet and just making a landing on the White House lawn in full public view is that we, as a planet have been too war like. We have made some advancements technologically, but spiritually we have been a backwards planet. The Negative Extraterrestrials and the Dark Brotherhood This brings me to the subject which is the negative extraterrestrials. As I have already mentioned, at least 95% of all the extraterrestrials involvement on this planet is of a very ʺpositive natureʺ. The five percent who are negative, though, are very negative. It is part of my purpose in writing this chapter to make you aware of what is actually going on behind the scenes. The information I will share with you in this chapter has been confirmed over and over again from both earthly and spiritual sources. Some of the things I share with you may even shock some of you. However, I ask you to keep reading and keep an open mind, for I believe it is absolutely imperative for the people of the United States and the world to wake up. 11
Negative extraterrestrials were part of the fall of Atlantis and have been trying to control this planet and its people since the beginning of recorded time. In Godʹs infinite universe there are always two forces. Those that serve the law of One and those that serve more egotistical, selfish, fear based principles. This is true for us on earth. It is true for the extraterrestrials. By becoming aware of these egotistical factions we are less likely to be controlled by them. The purpose of this entire book and of this chapter is to make you aware of what is going on behind the scenes so you can become even more empowered than you already are. We cannot solve a problem until we know what the problem is. The problem, in its core essence, probably goes back to the Dark Brotherhood. The Dark Brotherhood is an organization much like the Great White Brotherhood, of spiritual hierarchy. The only problem is that these beings are working for a plan that is antithetical to Godʹs divine plan. In a sense these beings, both in the spiritual state and on the material plane have a plan that serves there selfish interests rather than Godʹs plan which is for the good of everyone. This dark force and brotherhood is nothing to fear, for as long as you own your power and donʹt walk around on automatic pilot, they can not affect you or harm you in any way. The problem is that a great many souls on this planet donʹt own their power and arenʹt attuned spiritually. They take drugs, and drink too much alcohol, and donʹt realize who they are, and why they are here. Their lives are focused on hedonism and materialism and all these things leave them vulnerable to the influences of dark forces. The negative extraterrestrials are obviously influenced by this dark separative, egotistical, fear based part of themselves. They have evolved technologically which can be seen by their flying saucers. However they have not evolved spiritually. They are forcing their will upon the people of the planet Earth. They are breaking what the TV show Star Trek called the ʺprime directiveʺ of noninterference and respecting of a free choice. Before going into a much greater explanation of this whole process it is necessary to explain one other group that has played and continues to play a pivotal role in this whole drama, and that is a group of men on this planet who make up what I call the ʺSecret Governmentʺ or ʺIlluminattiʺ. 12
The Secret Government There are a group of men in this world who, because of their lack of attunement to their own souls, have in a sense, been taken over by the Dark Brotherhood. These men have been taken over by selfishness, greed, and power, and are attempting to control the United States and the world at large to suit their own deluded, materialistic values. These men have no respect for the United States Government or any government on this planet. Their basic game is to control the world to serve their own interests and values, which are clearly selfish to the core. We hear of occasional scandals where they are caught, however the world as a whole does not realize the extent of their power and ruthlessness. Some of the scandals that are attributed to this group are: The assassination of John F. Kennedy, the assassination of Robert Kennedy, Watergate, Contragate, Iraqgate, the Savings an Loan debacle, the total control of the banking system, the control of the CIA, and the control of most of presidents and governments of the Unites States. They have financed a great many of their illegal projects through the CIA, by selling drugs. This secret government is known by many names, some of which are the Illuminatti, the Trilateral Commission, The Council on Foreign Relations, and The Olympians. They are in essence, representatives or instruments of the Dark Brotherhood on earth. A lot of these men are of great financial wealth, and hold positions of great political power. At the end of this chapter I have provided a diagram of some of the people involved. Some of the names of these people will strike familiar cords. It is time for the American people to wake up and reclaim their power and take back their government. I am happy to say that one giant step has been taken with George Bush, Dan Quail, and James Baker being voted out of office. James Baker and George Bush were very high up in the secret government organization. It is not the purpose of this book to spend too much time focusing on this aspect, except as it relates to the extraterrestrial situation. For now, I would like to focus on the modern history of the extraterrestrial movement and how the secret government has perpetrated the greatest cover‐up in the history of this planet. The most mind boggling thing of all is that they have been, for the most part, successful. 13
The Modern History of the Extraterrestrial Movement The UFO movement really began in 1936 when Nazi Germany recovered a crashed UFO. They had their top scientists working to copy and understand this technology. When the allied forces invaded Germany, this entire project and technology was discovered and sent shock waves through the United States government. In the 1940ʹs there was a great increase in extraterrestrial activity. The single most important event was probably the Roswell crash. The Roswell crash occurred on July 7, 1947 near Roswell, New Mexico. A UFO crashed and the bodies of four dead aliens were found. The corpses were of a smallish size, with large heads, basically reptilian in appearance. This again sent shock waves through the powers that be. Between 1947 and 1952 the United States Government obtained at least 16 crashed or downed alien UFO crafts and 65 alien bodies. One live alien was recovered. An alien craft was found on February 13, 1948 on a mesa near Aztec, New Mexico. Another craft was located on march 25, 1949 in White Sands, New Mexico. It was over 100 feet in diameter and a total of 17 alien bodies were recovered from the two crafts. Of even greater significance was the discovery of a large number of human body parts stored within both of these vehicles. This was coded as ʺUltra Top Secretʺ because of the perceived panic that might occur if this information leaked out to the general public. During the early years the United States Air Force and the CIA controlled the alien secret. The CIA was originally formed by presidential executive order for the express purpose of dealing with this alien situation. The live alien that was found had been found wandering in the desert from the 1949 Roswell crash and was named ʺEbeʺ. Ebe stands for extraterrestrial biological entity. Ebe had a tendency to lie and would only give answers to questions that he desired to answer. ʺEbeʺ began to open up more after the first year. In 1951 Ebe became ill. American doctors had no idea how to medically deal with Ebe because his system was chlorophyll based and processed food into energy much the same as plants do. On June 2nd, 1952 Ebe died. The movie ET. is based on the story 14
of Ebe. In an attempt to save Ebe and to gain favor with this technologically superior race, the United States began broadcasting a call for help into vast regions of space. President Truman had been keeping our allies, including the Soviet Union, informed of the developing alien problem. This had been done in case the aliens turned out to be a threat to the human race. During Dwight Eisenhowerʹs first year in office, which was in 1953, at least 10 more discs were recovered along with 26 dead and 4 live aliens. Eisenhower did not reveal the secret to the congress. In stead he turned to his friend and fellow member on the Council of Foreign Relations, (Secret government) Nelson Rockefeller. Eisenhower and Rockefeller began secretly planning a secret group to supervise this alien situation. This group became known as the MJ12. In 1953 astronomers discovered large objects in space which were moving towards the earth. At first it was believed they were asteroids. Later evidence proved that the objects could only be space ships. Project SIGNA intercepted alien radio communications. Project SIGNA, through radio communications using the computer binary language, was able to arrange face to face landings and contact with alien beings from another planet. The movie ʺClose Encountersʺ is a fictionalized version of this event. An alien was left with us after this meeting as a pledge that they would return and formalize a treaty. This initial group of aliens were from Zeta Reticuli and have often been referred to as the ʺgreysʺ. They are very small in stature, about four or five feet tall. They looked nothing like human beings of the Adam Kadmon style as we are used to. They had big heads, more almond shaped eyes and long arms. In the meantime a race of humanoid aliens landed at Homestead Air Force Base in Florida, and successfully communicated with the US. Government. This group warned us of this alien race that was orbiting the equator. They were warning us of the ʹgreysʹ, and a reptilian extraterrestrial race from Orion. The reptilian race have a reptilian looking head with a humanoid looking physical body. The advanced positive humanoid looking extraterrestrials offered to help us with all our technological and spiritual problems, however they had a
15
requirement. They demanded that we dismantle and destroy our nuclear weapons. Our government refused. A third landing occurred at Edwards Air Force Base in 1954. The base was closed for three days and no one was allowed to enter or leave during that time. Eisenhower arranged to be in Palm Springs on vacation. On the appointed day he was spirited off to the base. The excuse was given to the press that he was visiting a dentist. Five UFO craft landed, and Eisenhower met with the aliens. All these landings were filmed. This alien group again was the greys or beings from Zeta Reticuli. A formal treaty between the alien nation and the United States government was signed. We officially received our first ambassador from outer space who was the same being who stayed in the first landing. His name and title was his ʺOmnipotent Highness Krillʺ. The treaty, basically stated that the aliens would not interfere in our affairs and we would not interfere in theirs. We would keep their presence on earth a secret. They would furnish us with our advanced technological development. They would not make any treaty with any other nation on earth. They could abduct humans on a limited and periodic basis for the purposes of medical examination and monitoring of our development. With the stipulation that the humans would not be harmed, and would be returned to their point of abduction, and that they would have no memory of the event. The greys were supposed to furnish the majestic twelve group with a list of all human contacts and abductees on a regular scheduled basis. It was also agreed that each nation would receive the ambassador of the other for as long as the treaty remained in force. It was further agreed that the alien nation and the United States would exchange 16 personnel with the purpose of learning from each other. The alien guests would remain on earth. The human guests would go to their planet, and then return and then an exchange would take place. This was re‐enacted in the movie ʺClose Encountersʺ. It was also agreed that bases would be constructed underground for the use of the alien nation and that two bases would be constructed for joint use of the alien nation and the United States government. Exchange of technology would occur in the jointly occupied bases. These alien bases would be 16
constructed under Indian reservation in the four corners area of Utah, Colorado, New Mexico and Arizona, and one in the Mojave Dessert near Yucca, California. A secret military fund was put together to build 75 deep underground facilities. The excuse was that these were needed in case of nuclear war. It became obvious by 1955 that the aliens had deceived Eisenhower and broken the treaty. The secret government had basically sold out the American people without their permission. Abductions were occurring at hundreds of times the rate agreed upon. The records of these were not being provided. Animal mutilations were occurring all over the country. And there were reports of human mutilations occasionally happening also, although this was much rarer. It was also suspected that all abductees had not been returned. The Soviet Union was suspected of interacting with the greys and this later proved to be true. The greys were using humans and animals for a source of glandular secretions, enzymes, hormonal secretions, blood plasma and genetic experiments. The aliens said that this was necessary for their survival. They stated that their genetic structure had deteriorated and that they were no longer able to reproduce. They said that if they were unable to improve their genetic structure, their race would soon cease to exist. I, personally believe that this is true, however. The greys were also found to be impregnating human females and somehow causing an early termination of the pregnancies to secure a cross breed of the infant. They were also implanting humans on earth with both mechanical and non‐mechanical implants for biological monitoring and tracking purposes. It is hard to believe that the United States government has provided these clearly selfishly oriented beings underground military bases all over this country. In a set of papers I obtained, called ʺThe Dulce Papersʺ, it is said that over 18,000 greys live at the Dulce, New Mexico base alone. These papers say that the greys and the reptilian beings are in league with each other. Some of the technology in these bases was provided by the greys and is way beyond the understanding of the United States government. There are apparently seven levels or more, with each level downward meeting a higher
17
security clearance. In levels 6 and 7 are apparently nightmarish Frankenstein type experiments going on, mixing human and animal genetics. Some of the reports of things going on there are too disturbing to even mention in this book. Needless to say, what is going on is not in harmony with Godʹs divine plan. As time has gone on, the greys and reptilians have become more and more bold in doing whatever they please, to serve their own purposes. The United States government has delineated over 70 species of aliens trying to contact us. We have obtained and have in our possession over 40 flying saucer discs, many of which we have reproduced and are testing and flying ourselves. We have over 100 bodies of dead aliens. Alternative 2 and Alternative 3 Alternative 2 and Alternative 3 are, again secret programs of the ʺsecret governmentʺ having to do with the colonization of the moon and Mars. Alternative 2 was the program for the colonization of the moon. This occurred long before our first official public landing on the moon by astronaut Armstrong. Long before this we had already engaged in a joint venture with the Soviet Union, had set up bases there which continue to exist to this day. There are also alien bases on the dark side of the moon. There is also more gravity and atmosphere on the moon than we have been let to believe. For more information on this there is an excellent book by Fred Steckling which even has 125 NASA photographs blown up showing some of the strange things going on. The basic plan of the Alternative 2 program was to build a vast network of underground cities and tunnels in which a select representation of all cultures and occupations would survive in case of a nuclear holocaust on earth. Alternative 3 was a similar joint Soviet Union and United States plan to set up a similar colony on Mars. A space probe landed on Mars and confirmed the existence of an environment that could support life. Not long afterward the construction of a colony on Mars began in earnest. This information was obviously not released to the American people. 18
This colonization went on for many, many years, however it is my understanding that this project has been abandoned for reasons unknown. Many of you may have seen some of the NASA pictures of Mars, showing previous alien civilizations. There is a clear picture of pyramids and a sculpted face that is beyond a shadow of a doubt created by some form of extraterrestrial intelligence. There was apparently an Alternate 1 plan that had to do with the idea of using nuclear devices to blast holes in the stratosphere to let the greenhouse heat and pollution escape. This plan was abandoned as ill advised by the scientists in charge. (Thank God!) Apparently part of this secret government plan was also to depopulate the earthʹs population. As part of this plan there was the implementation of birth control, sterilization, and the introduction of deadly microbes to slow the growth of the earthʹs population. The plague of AIDS was created by the United States government as a form of bacteriological warfare. It was purposely given to specifically selected targeted populations including blacks, Hispanics and homosexuals. One of the ways they did this was to lace hepatitis vaccines with the virus. This was a bacteriological warfare experiment done on the people of the United States that has gone out of control. Another one of the great coverups of all times is that it can only be passed on through sexual involvement. From all the sources of information I have, this is blatantly false, and a lie, just as the World Health Organizations statement saying that the AIDS virus came from a monkey in Africa is. The AIDS virus can be passed in saliva. It is not a homosexual disease. Condoms donʹt always protect you because the AIDS virus is so infinitesimally small. It has been proven that the AIDS virus can live in an open air petrie dish for 10 to 14 days. One of the things killing people faster than the aids virus is the present treatment for the AIDS virus. From the information I have received, AZT, the common drug for the AIDS virus is absolute poison to the human body and is killing people much faster than even AIDS itself. Lastly, the biggest coverup of all is that there is no cure. People can and are being cured from AIDS. Hanna Kroeger, an herbalist from Colorado, has 19
come up with a cure for AIDS and many other doctors dealing with energetic medicine and holistic medicine are having marvelous results. The most important thing I can say in this entire book I will say right now. You are not a victim of AIDS. You are not a victim of the Dark Brotherhood. You are not a victim of the greys or reptilian race. And you are not a victim of your mind, emotions or physical body, or anything else in Godʹs infinite universe. You are God. God created you perfectly and has given you personal power and free choice. The only affect that anyone or anything has on you is that affect you let it have on you. No alien can abduct you if you own your God given power. The same principle applies across the board. You are not a victim of disease. There is no such thing as contagious diseases. This is another myth of the Dark Brotherhood. This applies to AIDS also. There are only people with low resistance. If you eat well, exercise, get sunshine and fresh air, think right, and spiritualize your emotions, and stay attuned to God, and your own true identity as the Christ, the Buddha, the Atma, or the Eternal Self, nothing can touch you including AIDS. The Secret Government and Politics The one president that wasnʹt under the hold of the secret government was John Kennedy. When he found out about a lot of the secret government activities he was planning to blow the whistle on some of them. This is why he was assassinated. If it isnʹt an obvious fact to you already, his assassination was part of a widespread conspiracy of the secret government, as was Robert Kennedyʹs death. Again the American people bought the story. It is amazing to me how the secret government is able to get away with the things they do. One of the main ways the secret government has financed all their projects is through drug money. George Bush was one of the original people that was approached to help the CIA start their program of selling drugs. His former Secretary of State, James Baker is even higher up in the secret government ladder than George Bush was. George Bush, as you know later became the head of the CIA. The fact that these men and the entire corrupt staff have been voted out of office marks a great awakening for the American people, 20
and the beginning of the end for the Dark Brotherhoodʹs reign of control according to Djwhal Khul. The secret government, or Council on Foreign Relations and Trilateral Commission are currently in complete control of the alien technology we have obtained and in complete control of the nationʹs economy. Eisenhower was the last president to apparently have a complete overview of the alien problem. The complete nature of their control can be seen when even the presidents of the United States are often not told what is going on. Succeeding presidents have only been told what the majestic twelve wanted them to know. These greedy selfish servants of the Dark Brotherhood must be stopped. It is time for the American people to fully wake up to whatʹs been going on and reclaim their government. The people who run the government are supposed to be the servants of the American people, not servants of their own selfish greedy interest. To take back our government, we must reclaim our power within ourselves and use our power to make changes in and on the earthly world. The time of living in a temple or a cave and just praying and meditating is over. We must bring heaven to earth. This is the divine plan. A great many spiritual people donʹt take enough responsibility politically for changing the earthly institutions of this world. Godʹs divine plan is not to ascend to God and forget about the earth. Godʹs divine plan is to make earth a heavenly place to live. This means changing the institutions and egotistical structures that have governed our planet. This will obviously be helped with the coming of the Lord Maitreya and the externalization of the Hierarchy that is now taking place. Again, however, it is not for them to do it. It is for us to do it, the common people. For we, in truth, are the externalization of the Spiritual Hierarchy. It is time for us to claim our power and take action, and support our president and congressmen on all levels of government. If we donʹt take an interest, then the only information they receive is from the greedy lobbyists whose only care is for their particular interest group. We need more spiritual people (politicians, lawyers, bankers, counselors, doctors, real estate agents, etc....) It is absolutely essential that we take responsibility now because if we abdicate our power, then we deserve what we are getting. If we donʹt own our power then someone else will. 21
The seeds of this revolution were seen in this last presidential election with Ross Perot and Clinton. The American people have voted for a change. We, as the American people must continue this change and momentum, and not fall back into passivity and automatic pilot. If we donʹt own our power and take back our government then the Dark Brotherhood, the secret government, the negative extraterrestrials will!!! Nikola Tesla Another one of the great coverups of the secret government and the military industrial complex has been the inventions of Nikola Tesla. Nikola Tesla was one of the greatest inventors in the history of this planet. Recent channelings have said that he actually was an extraterrestrial who was brought here as a young child. The Tibetan foundation channelings say he was a soul extension of a great cosmic being known as Melchizadek. He was raised in Yugoslavia and came to the United States in early adulthood. The secret government has systematically tried to strike his name from our history books because they are so frightened of the public learning about his inventions. Nikola Tesla was really a channel. Inventions would come to him in his mind in pictures and diagrams perfectly explained. He could create a prototype of his inventions right off the assembly line from what appeared to him in his consciousness. In his biography it was said that he was in telepathic communication with extraterrestrials. He was definitely here on a mission of service. The only problem is he ran into the Illuminatti and selfish greedy men in the later 1800ʹs and early 1900ʹs, that blocked the manifestation of his inventions. One of his inventions that would have revolutionized this world was a small antenna that would have been attached to the top of every house, office building, shop and factory. This antenna would have supplied all the electricity they needed without meters or wires of any kind. This antenna tapped the limitless universal supply of cosmic energy. Then people like J.P. Morgan told him to forget the idea because there would be no way to make money off people. Tesla was blocked at his every turn. If this invention were implemented, just look at the money people would have saved, the lack of 22
pollution that would be in the atmosphere, and the lack of need to fight wars in the middle east over oil. This was far too threatening for the secret government and military industrial complex and the greedy power elite. Tesla invented some sort of machine that could place an energy beam, or wall of light around the United States that could have prevented any country from creating war against us. He also built a machine that could be used for interplanetary communication. He invented a method to counteract gravity. He invented technology that could make planes and battleships undetectable by radar and actually disappear. He invented a system of alternating electrical current which far surpassed Edisonʹs inventions, however, was blocked again by the greedy powers that be. Tesla has been said to have made over 1200 inventions. Tesla designed what he called the sphere. A powerless aircraft that could have rivaled the jets of 1958. In 1891, Tesla built a cosmic ray engine, a free energy device, to utilize the cosmic rays. Tesla actually contacted spaceships on his interplanetary communication device. With Teslaʹs inventions all TV towers, telephone poles, towers and wires would not be required. His anti‐war machine that created the wall of light would have made Reaganʹs star wars project completely unnecessary. His antigravity machine would have allowed us to begin interplanetary travel, as the UFOʹs we see, are able to do. Nikola Tesla was a total humanitarian and selfless servant for mankind. Can you imagine what this world would be like if the government and powers that be used his inventions. The only real use of his inventions and technology has been by the military industrial complex, for warfare purposes which was not Teslaʹs intention. This is only one example of how the secret government and greedy industrialists prevent this world from evolving. What happened to Tesla is happening every day of the year to inventors even now. We hear in the news about some car that gets 200 miles to the gallon, or runs on water, or runs on solar energy, and the car and oil companies buy the patents and somehow prevent it from ever coming about. Do you ever wonder why more of what I am telling you doesnʹt come out on the television. Well, guess who owns the three main television networks. You 23
guessed right. Members of the Trilateral Commission and Council on Foreign Relations. Any time a controversial story surfaces, the powers that be go into action to stifle it. Other Governmental Coverups One of the most disturbing governmental coverups to me personally is the systematic conscious effort by the secret government, Illuminatti, and Dark Brotherhood, to poison the American people. First of all we have this enormous amount of canned, processed, frozen foods that fill 90% of our supermarkets that are filled with chemicals, and preservatives that are poisonous to the human body. Then on every street corner is a fast food restaurant filled with these same chemicals that systematically and gradually poison the liver and weaken the immune system. Our produce is then covered with pesticides. Our air is polluted from lack of strict environmental controls over cars and factories. We have ripped a gapping hole in the ozone level which causes certain rays from the sun to enter our atmosphere that is not healthy to the human body. They put mercury fillings into our teeth which are absolutely poisonous to the human body. Mercury is an extraordinarily toxic substance to the human body and usually within ten or fifteen years the fillings can begin to crack and this toxic substance is leaked into the physical body. In Los Angeles, and I am sure in other cities, they spray malathion to get rid of the medfly. It is such a toxic substance that the nights they spray, the entire city has to cover their cars with a car cover because the malathion will actually take the paint off your car. Yet that incredible advocate for the American people, the FDA says it is not harmful to the human physical body. It will take the paint off your car but wonʹt poison the physical body. A process like this is systematically destroying the immune systems of an entire city. Then to make matters worse, in many cities they fluoridate our water supply because they say it helps prevent tooth decay in children. Fluorine is poisonous to the human physical body. Then to continue this story they vaccinate our children which the average mother and father thinks is an incredible service the government is doing, which, in fact, is just the opposite. The vaccinations continue to break down 24
the immune system. Then the children are fed and given all kinds of sugar at school which continues the process of immune system weakening. Then because we have not used inventions like Nikola Teslaʹs there are incredible amounts of electrical power lines in our homes and cities which have a much more negative affect on the physical body than people realize. People are getting serious illness from sitting in front of computers all day. Police officers are getting cancer from using the police radar guns. This is why there have been recent inventions like the Tesla watch, which is another invention of Nikola Tesla. It protects an individual from these low grade electrical magnetic frequencies. There is an entire new field of technology called radionics and psychotronics which ideally uses machines to send oneself positive currents of energy for healing purposes. This, of course, has been stifled by the government and the AMA, and instead this technology is being used by the pentagon and war machine in both the united states and the Soviet Union for warfare purposes. They use these types of machines and actually build gigantic towers to send negative electrical frequencies of energy to destroy individuals and groups of people. This type of warfare is very insidious because the people being attacked cannot even see they are being attacked. This, unfortunately, is the warfare technology of the future which is being developed now and must be stopped. The secret government and Illuminatti have no respect for the environment. All they care about is power and money, so they allow our environment to be systematically destroyed which continues to destroy the health of the American people and the people of this world. The ocean, rivers, and lakes are polluted. We allow deforestation of the rain forests and the forests in the United States. This de‐forestation all over the world which screwing up the oxygen balance on the planet. We are also causing a green house reaction to occur from the burning of all the fossil fuels which arenʹt really needed. Then the minds of our children and ourselves are being systematically poisoned by all the violence and low life activity on television, which poisons our minds, emotions, and physical bodies.
25
The newest plan of the Federal Drug Administration is to irradiate our food. What this means is that they are already shooting radioactivity at our fruits and vegetables and other foods to kill microorganisms. The only problem is that radiation is the single most poisonous substance to the human body in Godʹs infinite universe. The secret government loves this idea for it is a way for the department of energy to get rid of their radioactive waste. To add insult to injury it has been decreed by the FDA that irradiated food does not require labeling. In those cases where it does have to be labeled, all they are required to do is print a sweet looking flower symbol with the heading ʺPico Waveʺ. The Dark Brotherhood has such a hold on our health system that there is even legislation on the docket now that is planning to take away our right to buy vitamins, minerals, and herbs in health food stores without a doctorʹs prescription. Another one of the major blunders of the FDA was the allowing of Nutrasweet on the market. This low calorie sweetenerʹs scientific name is Aspartame. Dr. Woodrow Monte, head of the Food Science and Nutrition Laboratory at Arizona State University says about Nutrasweet; ʺIf you tried to design a food additive that could cause problems for humans, youʹd have to try real hard to design one as bad as aspartame.ʺ He continues to say, ʺThis stuff is a drug, but is being used as a food additive.ʺ On Fluoridation of Water Dr. Robert Harris, Professor of Biochemistry of Nutrition, at Massachusetts Institute of Technology, says, ʺFluorine is a toxic element ...which has been shown to interfere with important processes in the body.ʺ Dr. Charles T. Betts, D.D.S. states, ʺFluorine is a poison which is cumulative in the body, similar to radium. No antidote is known.ʺ In regard to all the health related statements I have made in this chapter, I donʹt claim to be a medical doctor and for legal purposes I will say that these things I have said are just my personal opinion and you should consult your holistically oriented medical doctor in all cases. However, as a ʺconcerned citizenʺ, I believe that if you research for yourself what I have been saying, in my opinion, you will find it all to be true. 26
The secret government and Illuminatti have taken the power and control because we have given it to them. The American peopleʹs power can be seen in the last presidential election. The power of the people can be seen in the Soviet Union and Germany bringing an end to communism. People are waking up now. The time is now. We must, in mass consciousness, wake up from our apathy, laziness, and indolence in these matters. The first step is knowing the problem. This has been clearly stated. The second step is being part of the solution. What is the solution? The solution is many fold: One is to talk about these things with people, to raise consciousness, to support our political leaders, to write letters to our congressman and senators and legislators, to vote, to give money to causes we support. It is to write books or give lectures, to educate people. to pray, affirm and visualize what we want to happen. It is to take action in any way we are guided. No person can do everything, however God has given each of us a gift and part of the puzzle to fulfill. The Philadelphia Experiment One other of the great coverups by the United States government was another invention of Nikola Tesla, which was used in a secret military program called ʺThe Philadelphia Experimentʺ. The Philadelphia experiment began as an experiment by the US. Navy in achieving ʺradar invisibilityʺ for its battleships against the Japanese and Naziʹs during World War II. Some of the greatest scientific minds in the world were involved in this experiment including Albert Einstein and Tesla. They did a test run experiment on an empty battleship and the experiment not only provided invisibility from radar, but the ship actually disappeared from view completely from the physical eye. The US Navy was very excited about this and immediately wanted to put real Naval personnel on the ship for the next experiment. Nikola Tesla was dead set against this and he turned out to be right. The ship disappeared and returned, however many of the crew members had burst into flames, and were actually frozen into the steel structures of the ship itself. Many of the other men went insane. We were dealing with a technology that we had no business dealing with yet. According to Al Bielek, (one of the crew members), the ship was actually transported in time and space to a grassy area to the Montauk Army Base on 27
Long Island. The year was 1983. To Al Bielekʹs account a UFO craft was sucked along with the battleship and was later dismantled there. The navy tried one more experiment even after these disastrous results. However, this time again without a personnel. Once again the battleship, Eldridge, completely disappeared without even a waterline to mark its invisible presence. When it finally reappeared to physical vision the ship was damaged and half of its equipment was ʺmissingʺ. The powers that be, pronounced that they had had enough of such experiments. I have told of this account to just make you aware of some of the technologies the government is working with that are totally hidden from the American people. It is time for the American people to really know what is going on behind the scenes, instead of being treated like sheep. The ability to make a gigantic battleship completely disappear and teleport through time and space and return again is quite extraordinary. If this technology could ever be truly understood without harming the people involved, and placed in the hands of spiritual scientists, rather than the military, some of the possibilities and potentials are mind boggling. Many of the UFO space crafts are able to travel such long distances in such a short period of time, using technologies such as this. The Secret Government and a Staged Alien Attack There is one last scenario that many UFO researchers have uncovered that Djwhal Khul has confirmed to be a potential, which has to do with a ʺstagedʺ alien invasion. The reason for this is that with the end of the cold war and communism, it has left us without an enemy. There is no longer a reason to build weapons. There is no longer a reason to let the CIA and FBI have free reign in their secret government activities. There is no longer a reason to take away our rights and manipulate and control the people as they have been doing. They no longer have a reason to keep us in fear. If they canʹt keep us in fear, they canʹt control us in the same way. The secret government, the Illuminatti, the Trilateral Commission is very frightened of the prospects of peace, and certainly a world of spirituality, and the new age movement. Their area of expertise is domination, control, manipulation, exploitation, and deceit. One idea they are tossing around that 28
has been uncovered, is to stage a fake alien invasion to create a new enemy. The panic that will be created will allow them to continue their illegal activities under the guise of a world crisis. The secret government is also very frightened of the good aliens which make up at least 95% of all alien activity. This above mentioned idea may be a little more difficult with Bill Clinton and Al Gore as president. It would have been much easier with George Bush as president. This could be a last desperate attempt for them to stay in power, because on some level, I think they realize that the world is changing much faster than they can control. I think they unconsciously realize that there reign of terror may soon be coming to an end. Even though this may be the case, do not underestimate their desperate attempts to remain in power. It is an ʹabsolute factʺ that they murdered John F. Kennedy and Robert Kennedy. And every other president who has crossed them has either been assassinated or there has been assassination attempt. I have a video tape that I got from Bill Cooper that ʺclearly showsʺ that the man driving the car that John Kennedy was riding in killed Kennedy. It is as plain as day. You can see the gun, and him shooting it. These are desperate men who will do anything to stay in power. Their reign of terror will be coming to an end as we move into the new age. Please be on the look out for their deception. The secret government and Trilateral Commission is also very frightened of the positive extraterrestrials. They are quite aware of their desire for a more loving and spiritual society free of nuclear weapons and so on. They realize that if the positive extraterrestrials get the publicʹs attention this means the end of their power. This is another reason they are covering up what is really going on and another reason why they may try to stage a fake invasion, to try to stigmatize all alien contacts as being negative. I want to end this chapter by saying that there is, in reality, no way the secret government and Illuminatti can ultimately stay in power too much longer. There are too many spiritual forces at work that make their destiny inevitable, yet this doesnʹt mean that we can be passive and wait until it happens. They will be removed when we collectively awaken to the need to do so. 29
Channelings of Vywamus on the Subject of Negative Aliens and the Secret Government One of the finest channels on the planet, before she recently ascended, was Janet McClure, the founder of the Tibetan Foundation. In my research I came across a channeling she did in Sedona Arizona, on August 31, 1989 which was published in a wonderful magazine called ʺEmergence! A Journal for the Golden Ageʺ, published in Sedona, Arizona. In this article Vywamus said some amazing things and confirmed many things I had found elsewhere in my research. He confirmed that there are only about 5% of extraterrestrials that are causing problems. Of this 5% many have been scientists who have no understanding of their emotional body. This type of invasion which earth has been experiencing, He said, has occurred seven or eight different times in the history of our planet. Humanity has always won out, usually because of help from the Higher Forces. He said another very interesting thing about the secret government and Trilateral Commission. He said that 95 individuals are controlling our planet. They live all over the world and usually are connected to wealthy families of long standing. They are also connected to great banking conglomerates and great holding companies. These 95 people and their families are also connected into 35 other planets. What this means is that the Trilateral Commission, in a sense is not just on this planet, but is a galactic problem. The negative extraterrestrials are not very well united as a group, and this makes them a lot easier to deal with. The fact that they are run by their negative ego makes them very fragmented, and most concerned with their own self interest, which will be the thing that causes their fall. There are only a couple of planets, however, that have real power into the earth. Vywamus refers to them as not black or white, but more like gray in terms of their psychological make‐up. What this means is that they have a whole range of mixed intentions. It is interesting that Vywamus should use this expression given that the Zeta Reticuli beings are often referred to as the grays. Vywamus also confirmed that the CIA and this power structure do control the selling of drugs and use the money for the underground bases and secret 30
government activities. Vywamus also said that the negative extraterrestrial invasion didnʹt begin in 1947 with the Roswell crashed flying saucer. He said it has been going on for 500 years. 1947 is just when the United States discovered actual proof. Another fascinating insight to this alien situation is that the grays who are having all the physical health problems, are sick because they come from another ʹuniverseʺ. Vywamus termed it that they are ʺwearing the energy from another universe.ʺ Apparently you canʹt just change universes, because each universe has its own unique source and energy matrix. Vywamus says that these beings could be helped by spiritual Masters from the Galactic Core, or by healers on earth who allow Masters from the Galactic Core to work through them to change their energy matrix. Vywamus has been amazed that they have been able to survive as long as they have. Vywamus also said that there used to be a physical civilization on Mars that has now departed. He also confirmed that we, on earth, did have a base on Mars. He also confirmed that the secret government and their henchmen actually kidnapped people and forced them to go to mars and work on this project. The information on Alternative Three is all totally true. The colony has been dismantled in recent times, however. One other interesting piece of information from Brian Grattan, who wrote ʺThe Mahatma Bookʺ is that he says the anti‐Christ is on the planet and he is approximately 34 years old (1993) and he is an ʺArabʺ This is not surprising when you look at two of the most recent anti‐Christs (Sadam Hussein, Kohmeini). He will apparently look like a savior at first, however once he gets power he will be one of the worst that this world has ever known. He will not win, however, because the earth is moving into the status of a sacred planet and becoming forth dimensional. It has become much too advanced. There is such an enormous influx of spiritual energy occurring on this planet that their doom is inevitable. 31
2 Agartha in the Hollow Earth
ʺOur interest rightly begins just after your race exploded the first atomic bombs over Hiroshima and Nagasaki, Japan. It was at that alarming time we sent our flying machines, the ʺFlugelradsʺ, to your surface world to investigate what your race had done.ʺ THE KING OF THE HOLLOW EARTH
In the previous chapter I spoke of the greatest cover‐up of all time being the fact that extraterrestrials were visiting us from other planets. If that is the biggest cover up of all time, then the second biggest cover‐up of all time is the fact that there is a civilization of people living in the center of the earth, whose civilizationʹs name is known as ʺAgarthaʺ. This may be hard for some of you to believe. I know it was for me at first, however, I now have an absolute knowingness of the truth of this. To begin with, the Buddhists, in their theology fervently believe in its existence. They believe it to be a race of super men and women who occasionally come to the surface to oversee the development of the human race. They also believe that this subterranean world has millions of inhabitants and many cities, and their capital is Shamballa. The king of this world was believed to have given orders to the Dalai Lama of Tibet, who was his terrestrial representative. His messages were being transmitted through certain secret tunnels connecting this inner world with Tibet. The famous Russian channel, Nicholas Roerich, who was a channel for the Ascended Master, El Morya, claimed that Lhasa, the capital of Tibet, was connected by a tunnel with the inner earth, Shamballa. The entrance of this tunnel was guarded by lamas who were sworn to secrecy. A similar tunnel was believed to connect the secret chambers at the base of the great pyramid at Giza, and Agartha. The Indian epic, the Ramayana and the Bhagavad Gita are the two most famous texts of India. The Ramayana tells the story of the great Avatar Rama. The
32
Bhagavad Gita tells the story of Krishna. The Ramayana describes Rama as an ʺemissary from Agarthaʺ, who arrived on an air vehicle. This is quite extraordinary in that both the Buddhist and Hindu religions separately refer to Agartha. The first public scientific evidence occurred in 1947 when Rear Admiral Richard E. Byrd of the United States Navy flew directly to the North Pole and instead of going over the pole, actually entered the inner earth. In his diary with other witnesses, he tells of entering the hollow interior of the earth, and traveling 1700 miles over mountains, lakes, rivers, green vegetation and animal life. He tells of seeing monstrous animals resembling the mammoth of antiquity moving through the underbrush. He eventually found cities and a thriving civilization. His plane was finally greeted by flying machines, the type he had never seen before. They escorted him to a safe landing place and he was graciously greeted by emissaries from Agartha. After resting, he and his crew were taken to meet the king and queen of Agartha. They told him that he had been allowed to enter Agartha because of his high moral and ethical character. They went on to say that ever since the United States had dropped atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagosaki, they had been very concerned for their own safety and survival. They had decided that it was time to make greater contact with the outside world to make sure we didnʹt destroy this planet and their civilization with it. They had been allowed in for this express purpose, as a way of making contact with someone they trusted. To make a long story short, Admiral Byrd and his crew, upon their visit, guided in their plane back to the outer world, and their lives were changed forever. In January, 1956, Admiral Byrd led another expedition to the Antarctic and/or the South Pole. In this expedition he and his crew penetrated for 2,300 miles into the center of the earth again. Admiral Byrd states that the North and South Pole are actually two of many openings to the center of the earth. I canʹt but help think about Jules Vernes famous science fiction book, ʺJourney to the Center of the Earthʺ, which many of you may have read or watched the movie version movie. Admiral Byrd also states the inner earth has an inner sun. Admiral Byrdʹs theory is that the poles of the earth are convex, rather than concave. Ships and planes can actually fly or drive right in. 33
The American press announced Admiral Byrdʹs discovery, however it was immediately suppressed by our good friends, the secret government. Ray Palmer, the editor of ʺFlying Saucer Magazineʺ did a detailed story on Admiral Byrdʹs discovers. The United States government either bought, stole or destroyed almost every copy and then destroyed the plates at the printing press. I have been told that the exact same thing happened in respect to an article done on Admiral Byrdʹs discovery by the ʺNational Geographicʺ. The magazine was released and the U.S. Government gobbled up almost every issue. If the story wasnʹt true how come the government was so uptight? Another interesting fact is that the United States government does not let planes fly over the poles. All flights are directed to go around the poles, and any airline pilot flying in these areas will tell you this. Another interesting phenomena is the fact that the ice bergs are composed of fresh water and not salt water that drift from the poles. Another interesting question is why it is warmer nearer the poles than it is 600 to 1000 miles away from it. The opening of the poles may also be part of the reason for so many flying saucer sightings. In Dr. Raymond Bernardʹs book called ʺThe Hollow Earthʺ he tells of a man who confirmed Admiral Byrdʹs story. Dr. Nephi Cotton of Los Angeles reported that one of his patients, a man of Nordic descent, told him the following story: ʺI lived near the Arctic Circle in Norway. One summer my friend and I made up our minds to take a boat trip together and go as far as we could into the North country. So we put a months worth of food provisions in a small fishing boat and set to sea. ʺAt the end of one month we had traveled far into the north, beyond the pole and into a strange new country. We were much astonished at the weather there. Warm, and at times at night it was almost too warm to sleep. Then we saw something so strange that we were both astonished. Ahead of the warm open sea we were on what looked like a great mountain. Into that mountain at a certain point that ocean seemed to be emptying. Mystified, we continued in that direction and found ourselves sailing into a vast canyon leading into the interior of the earth. We kept sailing and then we saw what surprised us... a sun shining inside the earth. ʺThe ocean that had carried us into the hollow interior of the earth gradually became a river. This river led, as we came to realize later, all through the inner 34
surface of the world from one end to the other. It can take you, if you follow it long enough, from the North Pole clear through to the South Pole. ʺWe saw that the inner surface of the earth was divided, as the other one is, into both land and water. There is plenty of sunshine and both animal and vegetable life abounds there. We sailed further and further into this fantastic country, fantastic because everything was huge in size as compared with things on the outside. Plants are big, trees gigantic and finally we came to giants. ʺThey were dwelling in homes and towns, just as we do on the earth surface, and they used a type of electrical conveyance like a mono‐rail car, to transport people. It ran along the riverʹs edge from town to town. ʺSeveral of the inner earth inhabitants, huge giants, detected our boat on the river, and were quite amazed. They were, however, quite friendly. We were invited to dine with them in their homes, and so my companion and I separated, he going with one giant to that giantʹs home and I going with another giant to his home. ʺMy gigantic friend brought me home to his family and I was completely dismayed to see the huge size of all the objects in his home. The dinner table was colossal. A plate was put before me and filled with a portion of food so bit it would have fed me abundantly an entire week. The giant offered me a cluster of grapes and each grape was as big as one of our peaches. I tasted one and found it far sweeter than any I had ever tasted outside. In the interior of the earth all the fruits and vegetables taste far better and more flavorsome than those we have on the outer surface of the earth. ʺWe stayed with the giants for one year, enjoying their companionship as much as they enjoyed knowing us. We observed many strange and unusual things during our visit with these remarkable people, and were continually amazed at their scientific progress and inventions. All of this time they were never unfriendly to us, and we were allowed to return to our own home in the same manner in which we came... in fact, they courteously offered their protection if we should need it for the return voyage.ʺ Another different account about a visit to the hollow earth was cited by another Norwegian by the name of Olaf Jansen, and was recorded in a book called ʺThe Smoky Godʺ, written by Willis George Emerson. The term ʺSmoky Godʺ refers to
35
the central sun in the hollow interior of the earth which is smaller and less brilliant than our outer sun, of course, and hence appears as smoky. The book relates the experiences of a Norse father and his son who in their small fishing boat attempted to find the ʺland beyond the North windʺ, which they had heard about. A windstorm apparently carried them through the polar opening into the hollow interior of the earth. The book was published in 1908. It tells of the sonʹs experiences. They apparently spent two years there and upon returning through the South polar opening, the father lost his life when an iceberg broke in two and destroyed the boat. The son was rescued and told his incredible story. He was placed in a prison for the insane because no one would believe him. After being released and spending 26 years as a fisherman, he moved to the United States. In his nineties he befriended Willis George Emerson and told him his story. On his death bed he also gave him maps that he had made of the interior of the earth and the manuscript of his experiences. The book, ʺThe Smoky Godʺ, tells of his experiences. In the book he said that the people live from 400 to 800 years and are highly advanced in science. They can transmit their thoughts from one to another by certain types of radiations and have sources of power greater than our electricity. They are the creators of flying saucers, which are operated by this superior power, drawn from the electromagnetism of the atmosphere. They are twelve or more feet in stature. One other interesting side note is that in 1942, Nazi Germany sent out an expedition composed of some of its leading scientists in an attempt to find an entrance to the hollow earth. Georing, Himmler, and Hitler enthusiastically endorsed the project. The fuehrer was convinced that the earth was concave and that man lived on the inside of the globe. In ʺThe Hollow Earthʺ, Raymond Bernard also tells of a photograph published in 1960 in the Toronto, Canada Globe and Mail, which shows a beautiful valley with lush, green hills. An aviator claimed that the picture had been taken from his airplane as he flew ʺbeyond the North poleʺ. 36
Earlyne Chaneyʹs Channelings on Agartha and the Hollow Earth Civilization Earlyne Chaney, again the channel for Kuthumi, The Virgin Mary and Zoser, an Egyptian Pharaoh, tells a fascinating account of how Agartha came into being. This account is depicted in her book, ʺRevelations of Things to Comeʺ. She also personally had a hard time accepting the truth of Agartha, but her guides were absolutely adamant about its existence and its importance to our civilization now and in the future. Earlyneʹs channelings state that ages ago, very advanced souls came from other planets. Her channelings have termed them the ʺAnunnakiʺ. Their future offspring on earth called the Annu. It was these beings that brought the arks of the covenant that were used as laser guns and gravity control devices for the uplifting of the earthʹs civilization. The Anunnaki and the Annu helped to build the great civilizations of Atlantis and Lemuria. The Anunnaki departed and left the evolution of earth in the hands of the Annu, their offspring, which had mated with the earthlings. As time went on, as I have already told in the story of creation, Atlantis began to be taken over by the sons of Belial or the Dark Brotherhood. The Annu, realizing destruction of Atlantis was approaching, fled to other lands, especially Egypt. They helped to build the pyramids and monuments with their arks of the covenant. However, they also used these instruments to bore deep underground, building underground cities and tunnels. When the deluge and pole shift finally struck Atlantis and Lemuria they entered their inner earth cities. Their entrance was through the Great Pyramid. They sealed the pyramid, preventing the Earthians from discovering their underground passages, and the waters of the flood from entering. Shamballa, Earlyne says, is its central city. Agartha consists of vast continents, oceans, mountains and rivers. She says the population there is far in advance of ours. She says that civilizations of the Yukatan, Peru, Brazil, Cambodia, and Tibet, also went underground. She says that many of our space ships do come from the inner earth. She confirms the earth has an inner sun, and that the Aurora Borealis is a reflection of this. She also confirms that there are openings at both poles as Admiral Byrd said. An interesting side note to this is that the Egyptian government has found many of these tunnels and has tried to explore them for the last thirty years. They have recently sealed these tunnels in fear that tourists and visitors will venture into them and get lost forever. 37
In an absolutely fascinating account in a book by Robert Stacy‐Judd, a noted archeologist from California, he tells of being in the Yukatan, and entering the stupendous cave of Loltun with a party of six researchers. They apparently descended far into the depths of the earth and proceeded to get lost. They became very concerned when all of a sudden, from far down in the depths of the earth, a light came towards them. The light turned out to be a torch carried by an old blind hermit who said to them he saw them clairvoyantly, and knew they were lost. Even though blind, he proceeded to lead them back to the earthʹs surface. The men were exceedingly grateful and asked about where he lived. The old blind hermit told them that the cave was his home and that he only came to the surface every few months. When asked how he survived and found food and drink, he said that he was cared for by the ʹfriendsʹ who lived in the depths of the earth in the beautiful inner city. He paused long enough to have his picture taken, then disappeared back in the cave. I, personally, attended a lecture given by a woman named Sharula and her husband, Shield, who stated that she was something like 350 years old and came from the underground city of Telos, which apparently is a couple miles beneath Mt. Shasta. I listened very intensely to their teachings and have to admit they were both very sharp and knew their stuff, in a spiritual sense. I agreed with everything they said, however, I have to admit I did question her statement about being over three hundred fifty years old. The next day I was receiving a healing treatment from a friend who is exceedingly clairvoyant. I was telling her bout the lecture and what they had said, and she asked me if I had a picture of this person. My friend said that she could tell from a picture if what Sharula said was true. I happened to have the advertisement for the lecture in my car which contained a picture of both Shield and Sharula. Upon seeing the picture and looking at her aura from the picture my friend said that her aura was totally different than a normal human aura, that she felt that there was a good possibility that she was telling the truth about her age and home. My own intuition and inner guidance felt it to be true also. It was interesting to get this second confirmation. There are apparently underground tunnels and cities at various levels of the earthʹs crust through this planet. Many of these beings are apparently coming to 38
the surface now, just as extraterrestrials from other planets are now coming in great abundance. The Channelings of Djwhal Khul on the Hollow Earth Whenever I do research on a given subject I like to get Djwhal Khulʹs feedback on the information I have come up with. Upon sharing with Him what I have shared with you in this book, he had a number of interesting things to add. First off, he confirmed that Admiral Byrd did, indeed, travel to the inner earth as he said he did. He said that there is a sun in the inner earth, but it is different than our outer sun. He said that the aurora borealis was not caused by the sun of the inner earth, but from a different light source. he said that the opening at the poles were very wide and ships and planes can fly into it, however it is naturally protected by some kind of energy field. People can find it if they really search for it, however, it is slightly camouflaged by this energy field. He confirmed that there were entrances to the inner earth in Egypt, Tibet and the Yukatan, and also added that there were other entrances in the Bermuda Triangle, Soviet Union, and Africa. He said that there were different races in the inner earth just like on the surface of the earth, and some of them are quite tall. He also confirmed that the United States government and other countries are aware of the inner earth and are hiding the fact as they are with extraterrestrials. He also confirmed Earlyneʹs story of the Annu, and their escape into the tunnels just prior to the flood, however, also added that beings were also living there long before the Atlanteans came. Among the American Indians, the Navajo legends teach that the forerunners of man came from beneath the earth. The ancient ones were supposedly of supernatural powers and were driven from their caverns by a great flood (Atlantis?). Once on the surface, they passed on their great knowledge to the human race before once again seeking their secret sanctuary. The Pueblo Indiansʹ mythology also places their gods place of origin as being the inner earth. The inner world was supposedly connected to the surface people by a hole in the north. 39
The ancient writings of the Chinese, Egyptians and Eskimos speak of a great opening in the North and a race of people that live under the earthʹs crust. The writings say that their ancestors came from the paradise land in the earthʹs interior. In the Buddhist tradition, their ancient philosophy states that Agartha was first colonized many thousands of years ago when a holy man led a tribe which disappeared underground. The present population of this underground kingdom is believed to number many millions and these people are believed to possess a science far superior to any found on the surface of the earth. This science includes subterranean cars, which run at tremendous speed through underground tunnels. In the ancient legends of Quetzalcoatal, who was the great Avatar of the Aztec and Mayan race, it is told by ancient tradition that He vanished on a flying saucer for eight days and visited the subterranean world. The Russian explorer, Ferdinand Ossendowski, the author of ʺBeasts, Men and Godsʺ, relates his own experiences in Mongolia. In his travels he came across Mongolian legends in the belief of the subterranean world of Agartha, ruled by the king of the world, who resides in the holy city of Shamballa. The legend continues to tell how, in ancient times, a Mongolian tribe seeking to escape Ghengis Khan, hid in a subterranean land. They were shown a door which served as the entrance to the kingdom of Agartha. According to Ossendewski, who was considered the greatest authority on the subterranean worlds, Agartha extends through subterranean tunnels to all parts of the world. These tunnels extend under both oceans and all continents of the earth and there are swift moving vehicles which move through these tunnels. He believes that both the inhabitants of Atlantis and Lemuria have found refuge there. Hidden Cities Besides the hollow earth itself, there are over 100 subterranean colonies or sites underneath the earthʹs surface. These underground cities have been referred to as the ʺAgartha Networkʺ. All except one are located within the earthʹs crust not far below the surface of the earth. These cities vary in customs, yet do follow a common spiritual structure of living. 40
These underground cities follow the Melchizadek teachings. The Melchizadek teachings are an ancient priesthood that disseminates the teachings of the Great White Brotherhood throughout the known and unknown universe. The average population of these cities are 500,000. One of the largest is the one I mentioned, of Telos, underneath Mt. Shasta. It has over 1.5 million inhabitants. A second colony of approximately the same size is located beneath the Matto Grosso Plains region of Brazil. This Atlantean outpost is called Posid. Although Atlantis and Lemuria have become myth to most people on the surface of the earth, in reality they are just continuing their evolution underground. Other inner world capitol cities include Shonshe, a refuge of the Uighur culture, a branch of the Lemurians. Entrance is guarded by a Himalayan lamasary and the population is three quarters of a million. Rama is a remnant of the surface city of Rama, India and is located near Jaipur. Population is one million and the inhabitants are known for their classic Hindu features. Shingwa is a remnant of the northern migration of the Uighurs and is located on the border of Mongolia and China. It has a population of 3/4 million. Admiral Byrdʹs Diary In my research for this book I was able to get hold of a copy of Admiral Byrdʹs diary. I would like to quote a small portion of his experience of entering the opening at the pole and traveling by plane to one of the main cities in the center of the earth. Before actually quoting Admiral Byrd, I will just set the stage. They are flying over beautiful lush terrain, with mountains, rivers and streams. At one point Admiral Byrd sees what first looks like an elephant, but then realizes it is a mammoth prehistoric dinosaur type of animal. The external temperature is 74 degrees. Their radio is not functioning. Suddenly before them is a beautiful rainbow looking city off their port and starboard wings are two disc shaped flying saucers. The engines of the plane stop and craft is now under control of the flying saucers. The plane is landed for them and Admiral Byrd is taken to meet the king of the hollow earth civilization.
41
At this point I will now quote directly from Admiral Byrdʹs diary of his account of his conversation. ʺWe have let you enter here because you are of noble character and well known on the surface world, Admiral. I half gasp under my breath! Yes, the Master replies with a smile, you are in the domain of the Arianni, the inner world of the earth. We shall not long delay your mission, and you will be safely escorted back to the surface and for a distance beyond. But now, Admiral, I shall tell you why you have been summoned here. ʺOur interest rightly begins just after your race exploded the first atomic bombs over Hiroshima and Nagasaki, Japan. It was at that alarming time we sent our flying machines, the ʺFlugelradsʺ, to your surface world to investigate what your race had done. This is, of course, past history now, my dear Admiral, but I must continue on. You see, we have never interfered before in your raceʹs wars and barbarity. But now we must, for you have learned to tamper with a certain power that is not for man, namely that of atomic energy. Our emissaries have already delivered messages to the powers of your world and yet they do not heed. Now you have been chosen to be witness here that our world does exist. You see, our culture and science is many thousands of years beyond your race, Admiral. I interrupted, but what does this have to do with me, Sir? ʺThe Masterʹs eyes seemed to penetrate deeply into my mind, and after studying me for a few moments he replied, your race has now reached the point of no return, for there are those among you who would destroy your very world rather than relinquish their power as they know it... I nodded, and the Master continued: In 1945 and afterward, we tried to contact your race, but our efforts were met with hostility, our flugelrads were fired upon. Yes, even pursued with malice and animosity by your fighter planes. So, now I say to you, my son, there is a great storm gathering in your world, a black fury that will not spend itself for many years. There will be no answer in your arms, there will be no safety in your science. It may rage on until every flower of your culture is trampled, and all human things are leveled in vast chaos. Your recent war was only a prelude of what is yet to come for your race. We, here, see it more clearly with each hour... Do you say I am mistaken? I do, I answered. It happened once before, the dark ages came and they lasted for more than five hundred years. ʺYes, my son, replied the Master. The dark ages that will come now for your race will cover the earth like a pall, but I believe that some of your race will live through the storm. Beyond that, I cannot say. We see at a great distance, a new 42
world stirring from the ruins of your race, seeking its lost and legendary treasures, and they will be here, my son, safe in our keeping. When that time arrives, we shall come forward again to help revive your culture and your race. Perhaps, by then, you will have learned the futility of war and its strife ...and after that time, certain of your culture and science will be returned for your race to begin anew. You, my son, are to return to the surface world with this message...ʺ Admiral Byrd and his crew were led out of the great city at the close of their conversation, and taken back to their plane. Their plane was lifted into the air by some unseen force, back towards the opening of the poles at the surface of the earth. Their plane was released back to their command and before they knew it they were back flying over vast areas of ice and snow. On March 11, 1947, Admiral Byrd attended a staff meeting at the Pentagon and was ordered to remain silent in regard to all that he had learned, on behalf of humanity. He was reminded that he was a military man and that he must obey orders. One other interesting side note here is that Harley Byrd, a nephew of Admiral Byrd has continued his uncleʹs work. He revealed that 77 alien bodies were taken from an underground city and were being secretly studied by the U.S. government in holding tanks. He said he has seen the photographs as well as the bodies in the holding tanks when he worked in the offices of the U.S. Air Force Blue Book project in the 1950ʹs. At the end of his life, Admiral Byrd finally decided he could keep his experiences secret no longer and his diary and recollections were made available to the world.
43
3 Walk‐ins
ʺThe transfer is very much like major surgery on an electrical level. There are teams of spirit guides who help in this transfer just like one would have in major surgery in a hospital on earth.ʺ THE ASCENDED MASTER DJWHAL KHUL
Walk‐ins are soul extensions or people who take over the body of another adult human being who has chosen to leave their physical body. Djwhal Khul has told me that this is an occurrence that in the history of this planet has not been that common. However, it is occurring much more frequently recently because of the amazing shift this planet is going through as it moves into the new age. Djwhal said that there are as many as one million walk‐ins on the planet at this time. It is important to explain here that this process is usually governed and controlled at the soul level. The soul extension and/or personality who is walking out of the body usually has no conscious awareness of this procedure. It is usually the soul that has made the decision, although in some more rare instances the soul extension has requested this. In most cases the new walk‐in who takes over the body usually has no conscious awareness of the change. This transition period can take anywhere from three months to six years to transpire. It is usually very traumatic emotionally to the ʺwalk‐outʺ entity, because there is a process of sharing the physical body with the other entity for a period of time. In most cases the ʺwalk‐outʺ is not conscious this is occurring, however, so this is very disconcerting to the ʺwalk‐ outʹsʺ emotional body. Entities of all levels and states of consciousness can be walk‐ins and it is not limited to sixth dimensional beings, from the information I have received from Djwhal Khul. The walk‐in will only come into the new physical body, of course, if the walk‐out has agreed to this on a soul level. The second important ingredient is that the soul or higher self and spirit guides for the walk‐in, and walk‐out, feel that the physical vehicle is strong enough, and
44
the emotional vehicle stable enough for this process to work effectively. This transfer is very much like major surgery on an etheric electrical level. There are teams of spirit guides who help in this transfer just like one would have in major surgery in a hospital on earth. It is a very delicate procedure. It is very important here to point out the difference between being a walk‐in and what has been called possession. A possession is a forced entry into a personʹs auric field and can cause, over time, the existing entity living in that body to be booted out. Djwhal has told me that the negative extraterrestrials have at times tried to do this same process and have even succeeded at times. Most possessions, however, do not result in the existing entity being booted out of their body. This is very rare and nothing to be fearful about if you have any sense of your own personal power, a spiritual belief, and you are not a drug addict or alcoholic. Djwhal Khul has told me that Adolph Hitler was a walk‐in. The Dark Brotherhood facilitated the shifting of one of their high ranking members into Hitlerʹs body. Adolph Hitler was on the dark path himself before he left, but the new entity was even darker in consciousness. There is no karmic penalty when a walk‐in chooses to leave their existing body. The concept of a walk‐in is sometimes hard for people to believe. If you think about it, we are all walk‐ins in the sense that we all walk in to babies bodies. The only difference between this and a walk‐in is that the walk‐in is coming into an adult body rather than a babyʹs body. A walk‐in gets to skip all of the childhood phase which at first glance sounds pretty good. Djwhal has told me, however, that being a walk‐in is no piece of cake. It is also very traumatic to the walk‐in coming in a well as the entity who is walking out. The walk‐in in a sense, is taking on some of the karma of the walk‐ out. They are taking on the karma in the physical vehicle. Also all the brain memories of the walk‐out remain with the new walk‐in. Part of the new responsibility of the new walk‐in, is to balance and clear the personal karma that was left in the entity that has left. In most cases the entity that left was usually either very depressed or suicidal, or had just had a major accident. When a new walk‐in comes in they, of course, may be married and have children, friends and family. Because the brain memories are left by the walk‐out in the physical structure of the brain, the walk‐in is able to function in a 45
way that the new wife or husband and family may not realize that this is not the same entity. They will, in most cases however, notice a big change. They will attribute this to a change in attitude, not a change in entities. The other important thing to realize again, is that the walk‐in isnʹt consciously aware, in almost all cases, that they are a walk‐in. Since they have all the old brain memories of the walk‐out. They will be disoriented for a time, but also feel that this is where they belong. Djwhal told me that the Ascended Masters are not usually involved in this process. It is more the soul and spirit guides and the soul extension who make this decision. Once the exchange takes place walk‐ins live normal lives. Their motivation to be of service to the planet will depend on their level of spiritual evolvement. If you think about it, the concept of walk‐ins is rather expedient, for if an entity wants to leave the physical body it is a shame to waste that physical vehicle if someone else could use it for spiritual growth. It takes a very bold soul and soul extension to make this choice for it is not an easy or glamorous path to take. This period of history on our planet is such an exciting time in a spiritual sense that many entities are willing to take on this karma and risk it to be a part of the action. Physical bodies of all kinds are at a premium during this period of time. According to Ruth Montgomeryʹs spirit guides, they have said that the following people are walk‐ins: Lincoln, Ghandi, Benjamin Franklin, Emanuel Swedenborg, Meister Eckhart, Shankara, Moses, Quetzacoatle, Christopher Columbus. I have not confirmed the truth of this, however I bring this information forth for your discernment and consideration. Before a walk‐in comes into the new body they spend a great deal of time studying the akashic records and physical behaviors of the walk‐out to determine how to master the physical body and personal lessons and karma they are about to take on. The actual moment of exchange usually occurs during the sleep times. People who are contemplating suicide, might consider being a walk‐ out as a better alternative if it truly is their time to leave their body. I want to emphasize there that walk‐ins are not Ascended Masters. They are soul extensions who are still on the karmic wheel of rebirth at varying levels of initiation and spiritual awareness. Lord Maitreya who came into Jesusʹ body at
46
the baptism, would not be called a walk‐in. This process is esoterically called an overshadowing, where two entities, in a sense, share the same body. At some later date a walk‐in may begin to remember that they are a walk‐in. This can be an emotionally traumatic experience for some. The transfer usually took place during some traumatic event, serious illness or near death experience of the walk‐out. So a walk‐out is really donating their physical body to another soul to use instead of letting it die of natural causes or destroying it through committing suicide. In the transition period between the change over there are also, very often, physical health problems as well as emotional problems, as I have already mentioned. Very often, on subconscious levels there is a type of ego battle that is taking place between the walk‐in and walk‐out. The soul or higher self is conscious of the process, but remember, the soul extension or personality in embodiment is not conscious of what is going on, so it can be extremely confusing and a very wrenching process. The entire fiber of the soul must be completely removed from every cell of the physical body and four body system, and replaced with the soul fiber of the incoming walk‐in. It can be likened to having major heart surgery. Even though the new in‐coming walk‐in retains all the physical memories of the out‐going walk‐out, they donʹt retain the same feelings because it is a new entity. For example, in the case of a walk‐in coming in to the marriage of the old walk‐ out, the new walk‐in will retain all the physical memories ‐ so everything will seem normal in that sense, however will, on a feeling level, feel somewhat distant, strange and out of place. Physically everything will seem normal, but the new emotional body will not have adjusted yet. It is a pretty bizarre occurrence, if you really think about it, for a spouse or family dealing with it. The fact that the walk‐in doesnʹt realize they are a walk‐in helps in the adjustment process in the sense that they still have the physical memory banks of being married. After going through an adjustment period they will literally begin a new life. Walk‐ins tend to be of a more evolved nature, although there are exceptions to this. Walk‐ins usually donʹt awaken to the fact that they are walk‐ins, unless a spiritual teacher tells them of this fact, which does happen, and is happening with more and more frequency. What also helps in the adjustment process is the fact that they have had a long time to prepare for this event on the inner plane. 47
It is really in this last two or three decades that the phenomena of walk‐ins has really expanded. Previous to this it was a much rarer occurrence. The people who know the walk‐in and notice the change might say something like, ʺHe hasnʹt been the same since his accident.ʺ This is the extent, however, to which they will usually take this train of thought. When the actual exact changeover takes place, it occurs over a one night period while the physical body is sleeping. It is like a six hour heart surgery in an earthly plane hospital. The soul, the spirit guides, and the specialized spirit guide team of walk‐in and walk‐out specialists perform the metaphysical operation of slipping one soul extension out of the physical body and slipping a new walk‐in into the physical vehicle. When the Dark Brotherhood is involved in this process it would be more apt to call this a possession take over, rather than an actual walk‐in. Djwhal has told me that this increase in walk‐ins will continue for the next twenty to thirty years and then will begin to taper off again and become less common. Some walk‐ins have a specific focus to help other walk‐ins and these are the ones we see in our metaphysical newspapers who advertise themselves as such.
48
4 Extraterrestrial Activity This chapter will focus more on the positive extraterrestrial activity in our galaxy as a whole from a much larger historical perspective. We will also look at the civilizations on the Pleiades, Arcturus, and the Ashtar Command in an indepth fashion. If the common person on the street had any idea of how many extraterrestrial civilizations have contacted, or are currently contacting our planet, it would absolutely blow their mind. In the chapter on the training of Sanat Kumara to become a Planetary Logos, He told of how He incarnated into 900,000 different planets just in this Milky Way Galaxy. Godʹs universe is absolutely filled with life forms in the material universe, and all other dimensions of reality. It is part of the purpose of this chapter to expand our consciousness not only spiritually, but also in a material sense. The notion that the planet Earth is the only planet with physical life is just about the most egotistical notion a person could possibly believe. There is so much extraterrestrial activity occurring on this planet that, in this section, I am just going to be able to touch the surface. There are a number of main planetary systems that have been intimately involved in the earthʹs history since the beginning of manʹs physical inception upon the earth. These ʺprimaryʺ extraterrestrial planetary contacts are from: 1. Lyra 2. Vega 3. Zeta Reticuli 4. Arcturus 5. Sirius 6. Orion 7. Pleiades The United States government alone, is aware of 70 different extraterrestrial civilizations that are contacting the Earth. In reality there are thousands. The ones I have mentioned here are some of the main ones, although in this
49
chapter I will attempt to present to you as complete a picture as I possibly can. In my research from numerous sources I have begun to get a sense of Earthʹs galactic history. We have already discussed in ʺThe Story of Creationʺ, the spiritual history of Earth, and humanities development on the Earth. For the moment now, I would like to look at Earth in relationship to the Milky Way Galaxy upon which we live. To begin this discussion to get us warmed up, I would like to focus on the civilization on the Pleiades.
50
5 The Pleiades ʺThe activation of the twelve strands of DNA coincides with the activation, spinning, movement, and opening of the twelve centers of information.ʺ
BARBARA MARCINIAK PLEIADIAN CHANNEL
The Pleiades is a star cluster in the constellation of Taurus, which exists approximately 500 light years from Earth. There are apparently anywhere from 250 to 500 stars within this cluster, although only nine of them have been named. The Pleiades, in common every day knowledge, are often referred to as The Seven Sisters. We have received a great deal of information about the Pleiades from numerous sources. Billy Meier, from Switzerland, has had the most profound documented accounts of this kind of extraterrestrial activity than almost any person on the planet. He was first contacted by a female from the Pleiades, by the name of Semjase. She has said that she comes from the planet Erra, which looks something like that of the lower Swill Alps. Her race is human‐like in appearance. However, they are far advanced, both technologically and spiritually speaking. She has said that she has many purposes in coming. On her planet her profession is that of a communicator with other races. She has actually trained on her planet for this job. Her purposes in coming are: 1. To share with the Earth people that they are not alone in this universe. 2. To help guide us in terms of our terrestrial religions and their repression of the human spirit. 3. To warn us that there are a few negative extraterrestrial races that are visiting our planet whose purpose is to try and take over this planet for their own selfish purposes. 4. That our animalistic nature is destroying the ecological environment upon which we live. 5. Lastly, that they are here to help us both spiritually and technologically as long as we use this help in service of the Creator. 51
The Pleiadians are able to travel vast distances in the UFO crafts by entering hyperspace. They are able to overcome space and time and enter what they call nulltime. In that split second they can travel millions of light years. The entire trip from Earth to the Pleiades takes only seven hours. It would occur even faster, but they cannot enter or leave hyperspace too close to an existing planet. They only contact a civilization when the beings on that planet have become thinking, rational beings. Their average life span is over 1000 years of our time. Semjase is still quite young for she is only 330, which would correspond to 33 years of age from our perspective on Earth. She and her crew studied the Earth languages on her planet. This was accomplished by a machine that facilitated a hypnotic‐like state which allows the programming of the language skills into the subconscious mind. To learn a language on their planet takes 21 days, then nine or ten days to be able to speak it correctly. The entire process of learning a language on their planet takes 31 days. Semjase has said that her UFO craft are crash proof because of some kind of built in automatic device that calculates probability factors for failure of mechanical apparatus days before they happen. On some of their motherships they actually have androids which are half mechanical, half organic artificial beings that resemble man to a large extent. (Star Trek may be much more true to life than we all realized.) Semjaseʹs planet is 3000 years ahead of Earth in terms of its technology. They have cloaking devices on the UFO craft that prevent them from being seen, even if they are right in front of you. The Pleiadians totally believe in God, and reincarnation and are here only to be of service. They do not see themselves as perfect and superior to us, but rather as brothers and sisters in a greater spiritual family. They teach that clock time is a mental construction of Earth humans, and that we will never be able to travel very far in space until we fully realize this. The Pleiadians belong to a union of planets reaching far out into the universe, which involve somewhere around 127 billion people. They are also connected in even a larger sense to a group called The Association of Worlds. This is a
52
group of both physical and nonphysical beings from many different levels of consciousness. It has also been called a Galactic Confederation of Planets. It is their hope that Earth will soon rise above its barbaric, animalistic nature and be able to consciously join this association. There is another council from the Star System Andromeda, that all the galactic civilizations I have mentioned in this chapter are under the auspices of. Very often the Pleiadians walk among us, and the average person on the street would not be able to know this fact in the slightest. If they get in a jam for some reason, they can usually get out of it because of their ability to influence the thoughts of the average human being on Earth. They have viewing devices on their space craft that allow them to see into solid material. For example, they were able to see inside of the American and Soviet space craft during their maneuvers in space. Their motherships are almost like small planets. They can inhabit over 143,000 Pleiadians comfortably. Everything that is necessary for life is produced aboard the craft. The motherships are able to travel billions of light years in a second. When Semjase was asked if there was an end to the universe, she said that there was no end, however, they would come to a barrier where this universe touches the next one. She referred to this next universe as the Dal Universe. She said that this mothership was used for Intra‐Galactic patrol to oversee law and order. The mothership is over 10.6 miles long. The people of Dal universe are about 350 years more advanced than even the Pleiadians, technologically. The Pleiadians have become quite friendly with these beings. These beings from the Dal universe helped the Pleiadians with the building of their most recent motherships. Billy Meier had the opportunity to meet Semjaseʹs father. Her father was able to speak with Billy Meier in German because he wore an apparatus around his waist that was a language converter. They also have teleportation devices that allow them to teleport themselves, much like we have seen on Star Trek. One other time, curing some picture taking, Billy Meier noticed that a particular tree was missing, yet the ground where it once stood was completely normal in appearance. When asked about this, Semjase said that it was done by changing its time. 53
The Lyrian Civilization In 1977 a different space craft landed in front of Billy Meierʹs home. This craft carried three beings aboard, one of which introduced herself as Menara, from the Star system Lyra. She said that their planet had a population of 14 billion and also belonged to the Confederation of Planets. She said that her people worked closely with the Pleiadians and the people of the Dal universe. She said that her ship was constructed 300 years in the earthʹs future, and had been used for over 250 years already. The Lyrans technology is apparently several thousand years ahead of even the Dals. Alena, another member of the crew returned another time in her own ship. She said she came from the star system, Vega, which is a part of the Lyran constellation. The Vegans are apparently descendants from the early Lyrians, as are the Pleiadians.. The Lyrians were the original ancestors of our galactic family. Many thousands of years ago their civilization reached a very high technological level, however fell into disagreement and factions within their culture. These factions went to war and destroyed much of their society. Many of these beings from Lyra left in their star ships to colonize the Pleiades, the Hyades, and the Vega system. Some of these Pleiadians of Lyrian ancestors also came to Earth during the Lemurians and Atlanteans period. The Lyrians now have long evolved past the conflict, or war‐like stage of evolution. These other civilizations could be looked at as our galactic cousins. The Dals are a handsome Nordic looking race, much like the Northern European Caucasians. They are able to breathe our atmosphere without special equipment. It must be understood, however, that many, if not most of the extraterrestrials do not have the Adam Kadmon style of physical bodies that we have. It is important that this not scare us. God has created different kinds of bodies for the different types of gravities, and climate conditions. We are all brothers and sisters in a universal family, even if from our perspective, they look totally ugly, strange or distorted. One must realize that we look just as ugly, strange and distorted to them. Beauty is in the eye of the beholder. There are extraterrestrials who are small, tall, 54
reptilian‐like, insect‐like, crocodile looking, slanted eyes, no hair, big heads, long fingers, etc. The Star Wars bar scene, is more truth than fiction. The Pleiadians are able to breathe our atmosphere, however, prolonged exposure causes them to have sinus problems because of all the pollutants in the air. The Lyrian races began evacuating their home planet over 22 million years ago. They said that our earliest society on Earth was copied from the early visiting Lyrians. They first came when they visited life on Hyperboria. Hyperboria was one of the earliest continents on planet Earth in the earliest Prelemurian times. Madam Blavatsky writes about it in her thesis, ʺThe Secret Doctrineʺ. The Vegan technology is about 250 years ahead of the Pleiadians, and they are also in contact with the Dal universe and are being assisted by them. All these civilizations are guided by non‐physical beings who sit on the Andromeda Council. The Vegans are darker in skin color than the Lyrians with higher cheekbones and more triangular faces. The Vegans also helped to colonize star systems such as Altair, Centauri, Sirius, and Orion, among others. andromeda is a large spiral galaxy , the closest to the Milky Way at a distance of 2.2 million light years. Altair lies around 15 light years from earth. The Altair civilization is quiet and contemplative, and is given to peaceful philosophic pursuits. They are not currently involved in space exploration. More About the Pleiadians All Pleiadians have small gardens in which they work with their own hands. For them it is a way of staying touch with the Creator. They each work two hours per day in their factories, overseeing their automated machines and robots. The Pleiadians go to school until they are in their 70ʹs. Every person must be familiar with 12 to 20 professions. They do not marry until they are at least 70 years old. They mature in body in 12 to 25 years. They do not marry until they have completed their chosen education. The median age for those who marry is 110 years old. Both spouses must pass strict mental and physical examinations before they are allowed to marry. No one is forced to marry and many donʹt 55
Life on Erra is very peaceful and harmonious. The Pleiadians also have, apparently, a number of ground stations on Earth. One of these is in the Swiss Alps. This ground station has been in existence for 70 years. It is in an enclosed valley between some very high mountain peaks, and has no road or vehicle access to it. It is totally protected and cannot be seen from the air. The buildings on Erra are circular in formation, and they each have land around the home. Some of the flowers on Erra actually change color throughout the day to get maximum benefit from the sun. Horticulture is a very popular activity. The buildings they live in are sometimes made of glass or even quartz crystal that create rainbow patterns of light. The environment and atmosphere is very quiet and serene. There is note of the noise pollution we have on earth. The Pleiadians vibrate on the color spectrum of blue. They are, hence, very attuned to the ideals of truth and justice. The Pleiadians are one of the most advanced civilizations in our galaxy when it comes to music and dance. The new forms of music they are presenting to the earth will help to raise the vibrational frequencies of all who listen to it. This music of the spheres will help to open the higher chakras, which will open mankind to greater creativity and knowledge. They Pleiadians are also experts in the use of light as well as sound. They will be helping to bring forth on earth great advancements in the use of hologram work and laser technology.
56
6 Orion ʺThe Orion civilization was one of the very few that evolved into a state of technological advancement while still being in a state of intense spiritual conflict.ʺ
LYSSA ROYAL ‐ EXTRATERRESTRIAL CHANNEL
The Orion civilization was one of the very few that evolved into a state of technological advancement while still being in a state of spiritual conflict. In the Orion conflict there were two groups, the negative side who believed in the concept of serving the self. They believed if they served their self the whole would be served. This translates into seeking domination over others. The more positive spiritual side held the ideal of being of service to others. Does this sound familiar? It is the exact same conflict that occurred in Atlantis between the Sons of Belial and the Law of One. It is the exact same conflict that occurs in our present world today. Do you serve self or ego, or do you serve God? This Orion conflict played out for eons of time in a most destructive and disturbing manner. There were three groups that formed. These three groups were the dominators, the victims and the resistance. The dominators were the Orion Empire. The Black League was the resistance to the evil domination of the empire. Does this sound familiar? The movie, ʺStar Warsʺ, was actually based on this Orion conflict. The empire attempted to dominate mentally, emotionally, technologically, and even de vised ways to control using the psychic arts for an evil purpose. There was apparently a great spiritual Avatar that came forward and awakened the Orion people to the Law of Love and Forgiveness. This facilitated the beginning of a mass awakening for the civilization. There are parts of the Orion system that have awakened and parts that are still trying to dominate. One of those still trying to dominate in the Orion system is the reptillian race. 57
The positive Orions that are visiting the Earth are contributing their advanced mental power for the development of smoothly running systems of organization on Earth. These Orions vibrate and resonate to the color yellow, and beam this frequency to Earth for the purpose of stabilizing the intuitive powers within the human consciousness.
58
7 Ummo ʺExtraterrestrials from the planet Ummo have bases on Earth in at least eight countries..ʺ
ANTONIO RIBERA IN HIS BOOK ʺUFO CONTACT FROM PLANET UMMOʺ
In a book called ʺUFO Contact from Planet Ummoʺ, by Antonio Ribera, he tells of his extraterrestrial contact with a group of beings from the planet Ummo. They arrived in 1950 and lived on earth and established their bases and acclimatized themselves. It was in 1965 they began to make contact with 20 people in Spain. Most of these people had some openness to the possibility of extraterrestrials for they all belonged to a group called The Society of Friends of Space. The Ummites said they had other groups all over the world. The Ummites told Antonio Ribera that their planet orbited a star that astronomers refer to as Wolf 424. This star is 14 light years from our planet. They claimed that in 1948 they picked up a strange radio signal which they were unable to decipher. They eventually traced it to our solar system. The actual transmission occurred in 1934 and took 14 years to reach their planet. Later earthly investigations confirmed these facts. The Ummites were surprised at there being intelligent life on our planet and decided to investigate our civilization. They first landed in La Javie in Les Basses Alpes, in France. The landing was unobserved and in investigative party of four men and two women (who look much like earthlings) was left on Earth. Although similar in appearance, one marked physiological difference is that their fingers are very sensitive to light and other forms of radiation. For this reason they found it difficult to use our light switches, buttons, and electrical apparatus of all kinds.
59
It was in 1967 that the group from Madrid began to receive an extraordinary number of phone calls and letters from the Ummites. They hired a typist to type all their letters and told this person they were Danish doctors. When he became uncomfortable with the content of the letters they produced a tiny sphere, just an inch or so in diameter. This tiny sphere was placed in mid air and as the typist looked into it he saw a scene that had occurred the preceding day at home with his wife. There was no logical explanation how this could have been done unless they were telling the truth about themselves. The Ummites are extremely telepathic. They, very much, believe in the existence of the soul and in a Creator God. At the age of 13.7 Ummite children leave their families for teaching centers where they are prepared for adult life. They make practical use of at least 10 dimensions of reality and are aware of far more. They say one of the reasons they are able to travel such far distances in such a short time in their space craft is that they use folds and warps in the space continuum. They eventually opened bases on Earth in eight other countries. Researchers have received over 1,740 pages of written material from the Ummites in Spanish and French, and over 6,000 in all languages. Their ships have been photographed six different times with scores of witnesses to each sighting. Landing tracks were found left on the ground and metal artifacts recovered. The home planet is, in actuality, similar to Earth. They have a very advanced and sophisticated technology and are able to travel faster than the speed of light in their spacecraft.
60
8 Iarga ʺThe people of Earth do not have the values or ethics of an advanced civilization and this is blocking the way for the people of Earth to achieve ʹCosmic integrationʹʺ IARGANS The planet Iarga is a planet about ten light years from our Sun. I first became aware of their most advanced civilization when I read a book by Stefan Denaerde, and Lt. Col. Wendelle C. Stevens. His first contact occurred while on his boat with his wife. In the middle of the ocean they bumped into this flat metallic object laying in the water. He saw a body floating in the water and dived in to save the person. To his surprise the individual was wearing a type of metallic suit. Upon pulling him to safety, the metallic under the water lit up and another being came towards him with a human body, but an animal type face. Stefan tried to escape in his ship but it wouldnʹt move. The extraterrestrial beings got the body and then left. From the platform on the UFO craft they politely bowed. Stefan began to become more relaxed when they spoke to him in an English voice and thanked him for rescuing their crew member. They proceeded to tell him that they came from another solar system. This began a long discussion which ended up in an agreement between them for Stefan to spend two days with them on their ship, while they shared with him about life on their planet. I would like to share with you a little of what they had to say over these two days. They began by telling Stefan that they had not made themselves known to humanity because we, on earth, do not know the laws of higher civilization. They went on to say that we do not, on earth, have the values and ethics of an advanced civilization and this is blocking the way for the people of Earth to achieve cosmic integration.
61
To share advanced technological information to a backwards spiritually and socially developed planet would be a crime and against cosmic laws. They said that here we are carrying on probes to mars when half the worldʹs population lives in poverty and hunger. Cosmic isolation can only be lifted when a minimum of culture has been reached. The Iargans stand approximately five feet tall. They were originally amphibians. They have webs between their fingers and toes. They are a very advanced society compared to ours, both technologically and spiritually. This communication with Stefan was the first open physical contact. They invited Stefan into their space craft and showed him a type of holographic film of their planet and civilization. Their planet has a much thicker atmosphere, so the people of Iarga do not see bright sunlight, and see nothing of the moon or stars. Iarga is a green planet with a type of misty light. They refer to Earth as the blue planet. Temperature extremes are much less, but rain and snow can be ten times greater. The ocean is a bright green color. Their population is 100 times greater than that of Earth. Iarga is almost completely covered with water. Their amount of dry land is much less that that of Earth, so they have to be extremely efficient in how they run their society. Stefan viewed the most amazing transoceanic rail connections and housing facilities. They also have no money on Iarga. They have an entirely different kind of political and economic system based on total equality for all. They call this system cosmic economics. It is not like communism or capitalism. They hold selfless service, immortality, and cosmic integration as their highest goals. There are no class distinctions and chores are shared by everyone. The women are total equals to men. Their society is totally based on a type of ʺChristian loveʺ. Their sex drive is totally different than on Earth, for theirs is born completely of love and not lust. A man and woman relationship, based only on sex would be considered completely degrading. The consciousness is very much in tune with mind over matter. They view Earthʹs isolation as bring that not only of isolation from extraterrestrial intelligence, but also from God and the goals of His creation. Our isolation will end when the masses of humanity acknowledge God and their true purpose for being on Earth. 62
There is much more I could share about this most fascinating civilization, however, for the purposes of this book I just want to give you a taste and flavor of this most interesting galactic neighbor. These beings may look strange to us in appearance, but not in terms of what lives in their hearts and consciousness. For more information, I would recommend reading ʺUFO Contact from Planet Iargaʺ.
63
9 Mars ʺThe purpose of my coming is to help man return to God.ʺ
VALIANT THOR MARTIAN VISITOR
One of the most amazing extraterrestrial contact I have come across in my research was actually a physical visitation from a being from Mars. This being was a guest of the United States government for over three years. His name was Valiant Thor. His first known contact with government officials occurred in March 1957 when the Alexandria Police Department notified the Pentagon that two on duty police officers had picked up an alien. His physical appearance was similar to that of Earthlings. He was immediately shuttled underground to meet the Secretary of Defense and President Eisenhower. He warned President Eisenhower that the world was in a very precarious state and that if it continued to move in the direction it was going it was headed for self destruction. Besides the nuclear war dangers there was also world wide economic collapse. He also indicated that his raced lived underground. As I mentioned in other chapters, we have set up bases on Mars in the past, and NASA photos show past civilizations there. When I first came in contact with this story, I immediately asked Djwhal Khul about the truth or fiction of Valiant Thor. Djwhal told me it was true. Valiant Thor was immediately liked by those who met him. His ability in thought transference and his goodwill stood out. He and his people offered to help the human family. The president stated that he thought that if he took Valʹs help, along with the High Council of Venus, that it would throw the economy of the United States into chaos. Valʹs space suit, the NASA scientists found to be indestructible. Diamond drill bits and even lasers couldnʹt affect it. In private conversations with Dr. Frank Stranges, a UFO researcher, he said that his purpose in coming was also to help man return to God. He said that seventy seven of his crew were 64
walking among the people of the United States. Another interesting fact that astounded scientists was that he had no finger prints. Val was instructed by his High Council on Venus to leave on March 16, 1960. In the three years he was a visitor of the United States government, very few people took advantage of his guidance. On this date he dematerialized and departed his earthly mission. Dr. Frank Stranges, who had befriended Valiant Thor and listened to his guidance, was driving in his car a year later in Beverly Hills, California, when Valiant Thor appeared in the back seat of his car. Meetings such as this continued for the next several years. Communication bases around the world began to be set up in peopleʹs homes, with equipment far beyond our technology. One of the instruments was a holographic communicator that allowed you to see the person you are communicating with in such a real fashion that one cannot tell if the holographic image is real or not. Val also told of a starship or mothership that was their home base, that currently orbits above this planet. Dr. Frank Stranges also had the opportunity to visit Valʹs spacecraft. He was served food aboard the ship of a high protein value, and a drink that was green in color that tasted like papaya. The ship had no square corners, and the crew was briefed each morning only after a type of worship service. Dr. Stranges had a number of run‐ins with what people in the extraterrestrial movement call The Men in Black. From what I have been able to gather, they are a group of people on Earth, who physically intimidate and sometimes kill those people who are openly discussing the UFO phenomena. I have read of hundreds of cases of this occurrence. Some believe that they are from other planets. Djwhal Khul told me that they are from this planet. These men are very evil, and any person openly involved in this movement needs to be aware of their presence. At the time of the writing of this book in 1967, Val said that there were 103 victor class spacecraft on or near the surface of the earth from Venus, at some 287 locations. The first victor class UFO craft visited Earth nearly 6,000 years ago. The total number of crew on one victor class craft is 200. Many classes about Earth are taught on the crafts. Some of these are: 1. Earth sciences. 65
2. Earth people and their habits. 3. The fall of mankind and the salvation of Jesus Christ. 4. The psychology of the human being. 5. The reason for the human being. 6. The history of mankind. 7. The ultimate position of mankind in the universe.
66
10 Venus ʺTheir mission is to help the Adamic race (human) develop on mental, moral, and material levels.ʺ EXTRATERRESTRIALS FROM VENUS The planet Earth has been contacted by the planet Venus for at least the last 18.5 million years. This is because Sanat Kumara, our Planetary Logos, came from Venus with 105 brother Kumaras to initiate the Spiritual Hierarchy for our planet. Venus is a sister planet who embodies the love focus. She is a sacred planet, and serves as an elder brother or sister in a planetary sense. Many of you may not know that Jesus came from Venus for He is also a Kumara, as did Buddha. The actual extraterrestrial contact story I would like to share with you is from a book called, ʺThe White Sands Incidentʺ, by Dr. Daniel Fry. The book tells the story of a Mr. Rolf Telano and his extraterrestrial contact with a Venetian named Borealis. Borealis is part of an extraterrestrial race called the ʺNorsʺ, who are one of the elder races or guardian races of our planet. However, before I get ahead of myself, let me start from the beginning of this most interesting story. The story begins when Rolf Telano, on a deserted country road, saw a UFO craft land around seventy feet in front of him. The craft was spheroid in shape, however, flattened at the top and the bottom. The vertical dimensions of the UFO craft were 16 feet and the horizontal dimensions about thirty feet. Rolf went up to get a closer look and reached out to touch the craft when a voice sharply said, ʺBetter not touch the hull, pal, itʹs still hot!ʺ ʺTake it easy, youʹre among friends.ʺ It turns out that this craft was a remote controlled cargo craft and there were no extraterrestrials aboard. The Venetians who were controlling the craft
67
were in a mothership nine hundred miles above watching this whole affair. They were communicating to him through the communication system on the craft. The cargo craft was on an exploratory mission to bring samples of the Earthʹs atmosphere so that Borealis could get accustomed to the atmosphere before embarking on his mission to actually live on Earth. Rolf was invited to go for a ride and was told if he liked, they would travel to New York and back in thirty minutes. Given the fact that New York was 2,000 miles away, that meant they would have to travel 8000 miles an hour. He was told he would not feel the acceleration in the slightest. He accepted their offer and they were true to their word and gave him one of the great experiences of his life. He was told that tens of thousands of years ago their ancestors actually lived on the earth in the civilization known as Lemuria. They built a great empire and developed a great science and technology on the planet, however eventually had to leave. During a second contact with the Venetians they requested his help in their mission to be of service to the planet Earth and its people. They told him that it would not be easy and he would probably not be believed and deeply ridiculed, however, that he would receive great satisfaction for assisting the survival of his race and would also gain considerable knowledge and understanding. They also told him that if he refused there was no penalty, however, they would have to erase his memory of their meetings with him. Rolf agreed to help. This contact occurred in 1950 when the masses of humanity were not quite as open as they are now. They wanted Rolf to write a book and share his experiences and their message with the Earth that Earth was not alone in the universe. Borealis was actually a High Priestess of the Mother Temple on Venus. They are monotheists and refer to God as the Unnameable, which, interestingly enough, is very similar to Judaism on our planet. The Nors are mortal beings although not physical in the sense that we are physical. They didnʹt use this term, however, I think you would call them 68
etheric beings. They are able to make themselves physical as we are with either their own mind power, or special instruments they wear around their belt. They regard themselves as our brothers and sisters. According to Borealis, in 1950, the Nors were the largest operating group of extraterrestrials in our solar system at that time. Their advanced mind power allows them to materialize into any race or even animal form, if necessary. Their actual looks normally are similar to our Nordic races, who, they say took their name from them. This particular race of Nors live in several different solar systems. They have bases and colonies on Mars and Venus. They also have a base on the Moon, as do several other groups of extraterrestrials. Other extraterrestrial groups often use Mars and Venus as check in points since they are the closest planets in proximity to Earth. Borealisʹ present home is not on Venus but on a higher frequency level world which is somewhat larger than Venus. This is much like Sanat Kumara and the Kumaras who first came to Earth from Venus who were also etheric beings. The control of their UFO craft is done manually, automatically, or by mind power. The Venetians who control or operate these craft are much more skilled in the mental sciences than the rest of their people. There are many UFO craft operating around the Earth that most people donʹt see unless they are clairvoyant or the Venetians choose to materialize their ships. They are basically using seven different types of UFO ships, besides the mother ships that transport the smaller craft. Five of these carry crews while two are robotic in nature. Two of the craft are crescent in shape that resemble a disc from which a bite has been taken out. Another one is cigar shaped and is about 100 feet long and 25 feet wide. Another type of craft is doughnut shaped. The last three are spherical or ball‐shaped in nature. Their space patrols work under a sort of Galactic Council, composed of representatives of all the advanced planets. This space patrol executes the orders of the Galactic Council and can serve as an armed services in extreme cases. They guard backward planets such as Earth from outside threats. They also serve to give ethical and scientific information where appropriate under Universal Law. 69
Their crews are made up of men and women and often families travel together. These craft are heavily armed in a military sense with disintegrators rays that make an H‐bomb look like a bow and arrow. These weapons are, however, hardly are ever used, but are available in an emergency. Their people on Venus have a much higher ethical and moral standard than the people on Earth. Their highest ethical foundation is that of Universal Brotherhood. They regard all intelligent beings on all planets throughout the universe, no matter what type of physical bodies, as their brothers and sisters. They may at times, be of a low level of evolvement, however they are still brothers. They teach that each of our inner selves are part of the Unnameable One. To hurt a fellow brother or sister, to them would be no different that biting off your own tongue or gouging your own eye out in a fit of anger. In a spiritual sense, other people are as much a part of us as we perceive our physical bodies to be part of us now. When we harm our fellowman we are literally harming ourselves. The people on Venus are highly telepathic. Moral pressure, hence, becomes a powerful instrument on Venus, for it is hard for anyone to conceal anything. Divorce on Venus is almost unknown. Their life span is several thousand years, and then they do get old. Since everyone believes in reincarnation, what they do is choose in advance two trusted friends to be parents for their next body, before they even die. Wouldnʹt that be nice on Earth! Their population is relatively stationary because of their long span and children are much rarer than they are on Earth. Children are not seen as possessions, but rather as friends who require a temporary amount of care and protection until they have regained their previous memory. Their mission is to help the Adamic race (human) develop on mental, moral, and material levels. They have been working with our planet since its inception, however, usually come in greater numbers during times of crisis. This present transformation on this planet from the Piscean to the Aquarian age is one of these times. Since the dropping of the atomic bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki, they have been especially focused on our planet for obvious reasons.
70
11 The Ashtar Command ʺThe Airborne division of the Great White Brotherhoodʺ COMMANDER ASHTAR One of the most interesting and intriguing extraterrestrial groups of them all is that of Commander Ashtar and the Ashtar Command. Commander Ashtar is the man who is in charge of the Airborne Division of the Great White Brotherhood, or Brotherhood of Light. Commander Ashtar and His vast extraterrestrial army of workers of over twenty million, work closely and in conjunction with the Ascended Masters. Besides the twenty million personnel under His command in our solar system, of which He is in charge, there are another four million members and workers on the physical plane. Commander Ashtar, Himself, is a great and noble being approximately seven feet in height with blue eyes. His body type is that of the Adam Kadmon which means it is similar to ours of Earth. He evolved from the planet Ashtar, and the planet Venus, in His development as a soul. He has never had an embodiment on planet Earth. Although Commander Ashtar is in charge of the space fleet in our solar system, He is not restricted to this sector of space in terms of His service. He represents our solar system in the council meetings of our galaxy, and universes throughout the greater omniuniverse. One of the important things to understand about Commander Ashtar and His army of workers, and fleet of extraterrestrial aircraft, is that they are etheric in nature. They do not have physical bodies like we do, however they are able to manifest physical bodies, and manifest their aircraft onto the physical plane anytime they want. A person seeing them would not think of them any differently than you or I.
71
Most of the life on the other planets in our solar system is etheric in nature. Sometimes for this reason these beings have been called etherians. They would not be considered disincarnate beings for they do have bodies. They are in a state of evolution just as we are, and their life on their plane is not that much different than ours, except that they have transcended much of the lower self and astral desire that the people of Earth struggle with so frequently. Commander Ashtar also works closely with the Angelic Kingdom, most specifically with Archangel Michael. Commander Ashtar is an extremely loving and gentle man but stern and adamant in His mission to serve, educate and protect humankind throughout the solar system. Commander Ashtar and His crew do not wish to be seen as Gods, but rather as comrades and equals with us on paths of ascension and beyond. Two of his main missions are to spiritually educate mankind to their true mission for being here, and secondly to defend and protect the Earth and the solar system from hostile and selfish extraterrestrial groups. People have no idea of the gratitude that is entitled to Him and His tireless crew and workers. Ashtarʹs First Contact Commander Ashtarʹs first open contact with planet Earth came in the 1950ʹs through a man by the name of George Van Tassel. On July 18, 1952, George was given a telepathic message from a space intelligence by the name of Portla, that their chief was about to enter this solar system for the first time. Then followed the first message from Commander Ashtar. I would like to share with you some fragments of this first message. ʺHail to you, beings of Shan (Earth). I greet you in love and peace. My identity is Ashtar, Commandant Quadra Sector, Patrol Station Schare. .....The purpose of this organization is, in a sense, to save mankind from himself. Some years ago, your time, nuclear physicists penetrated the Book of Knowledge. They discovered how to explode the atom. Disgusting as the results have been, that this force should be used for destruction, it is not compared to that which can be. ...We are concerned, however, with their attempt to explode the hydrogen element.
72
When they explode the hydrogen atom, they shall extinguish life on this planet. They are tinkering with a formula they do not comprehend. We are not concerned with manʹs desire to continue war on this planet, Shan. We are concerned with their deliberate determination to extinguish humanity and turn this planet into a cinder....ʺ This is quite a powerful message, I am sure you would agree. The full message can be read in a book by Tuella called, ʺAshtar, a Tributeʺ, which I highly recommend reading. It is no accident that the extraterrestrial activity increased one hundred fold after we dropped the atomic bomb on Nagasaki, and Hiroshima. In developing this most dangerous technology, we were now endangering the entire solar system itself, and hence even the galaxy. It was upon this occasion that the extraterrestrial forces throughout our solar system, galaxy, universe, and even universes, were mobilized to help Earth and prevent this from happening. In the sacred teachings it is said that a planet in our solar system called Maldek, did obliterate itself from just this process of tampering with nuclear weapons and technology. The real battle that the Ashtar Command is fighting, is for the minds of the people of Earth. Will we serve the soul and spirit, or the lower self, negative ego, and astral materialistic desire. Commander Ashtar also works very closely with the Christ, and also with Jesus who, in the higher planes is called Sananda. Commander Ashtar literally has millions of space ships at His disposal for emergency purposes. He not only has His own fleet, but also unlimited numbers of crafts available from the Galactic fleets, and even universal fleets, if he should make the call for help. In many of the Ashtar channelings there has been talk of an evacuation by these fleets if Earth would go through massive earth changes and/or catastrophe of some kind., From the information I have received, this danger has now passed and the project evacuation is no longer valid or needed. The Ashtar command also has mother ships that are anchored in space that are as long as 100 miles in diameter. These motherships contain entire cities with literally millions of people and a thriving society. The Ashtar command
73
is part of a great confederation of planets, first in our solar system, and then in our galaxy. In the center circle you have the Ashtar Command which is in charge of our solar system. Then you have the interplanetary confederation which is a larger group of planets in our sector of space. Then you have the Galactic Confederation of Planets. Then still larger there is the Inter dimensional Federation of Free Worlds. Each of these councils work in conjunction with the planetary, solar, galactic, and universal Spiritual Hierarchies. The Universe is divided into different sectors of space, and how, also, of course, there is the acknowledgment of the different dimensions of reality. Commander Ashtar is the representative from our solar system to these different council meetings through the universe. Each of these confederations, and federations is accountable to the one above it in terms of the hierarchy of authority. These different confederations have not openly accepted us into their circle because of Earthʹs egocentric, materialistic, war‐like nature. The Ashtar Command has most definitely made advanced and physical contacts with Gorbechev and Ronald Reagan, and have been listened to, to some extent. However, the bottom line is that our government leaders are always more interested in military technology than spiritual growth. Hopefully, in our new administration this will begin to change. These confederations and the Ashtar Command are not allowed to interfere with our free choice, unless we interfere with other members of the universe, which atomic and hydrogen bombs would certainly do. So eventually, instead of the United Nations on Earth, we will have the Federation of United Worlds. We will move from the one world attitude, which we havenʹt even achieved yet, to the one solar system, one galaxy, one universe, and eventually one omniuniverse. It will be a great day in the evolution of planet Earth when it can take its rightful place in solar, galactic, and universal affairs. It is also important to understand on a spiritual level that each planet has its own Spiritual Hierarchy, just as each solar system has its own Solar Hierarchy, and on up the ladder throughout the galaxy and universes. These
74
Hierarchies work in perfect unison and harmony with these confederations and federations. The Ashtar Commandʹs entire function is to be of service, and they go wherever they are needed throughout the sector to fulfill this function in any way they are needed. Many of the crew members return to their home planets for vacations and there are shifts that do take place. Their extraterrestrial crafts have been patrolling our system for many ages, long before they made open contact in the forties and fifties. The Ashtar Command and the Negative Extraterrestrials There are many extraterrestrial civilizations throughout the galaxy, universe, and omniuniverse that have come to Earth to collect data and perform experiments for their own selfish purposes. They are not here to be of service. Some of these extraterrestrials are of what might be termed a neutral nature, and some are serving the Dark Forces. There are also negative extraterrestrials who openly oppose the Great White Brotherhood and the Ashtar Command. They would seize the planet and take it over if they could. It is the Ashtar Command and civilizations like that of Arcturus, that have protected us from this taking place. Just like in Star Trek, there are bands of renegades in their star ships, that are escorted out of our sector by these commands. Many of the Ashtar Command walk among us on our streets on Earth without us even being aware of it. The Ashtar Command serves in a certain sense as heavenʹs policemen. In the channelings of Tuella, she has said that there are six planets in the Orion system, and a group called the Deros, from inner space, that have had to be cordoned off. One of the problems the Ashtar Command has is that if our government makes legally binding agreements with certain negative extraterrestrial groups, they are not allowed to interfere with our free choice, unless we are endangering our solar system and galaxy. The number of negative extraterrestrials is small in number compared to the vast number of positive extraterrestrials, however, the negative ones are quite dangerous if not controlled. Thank goodness for the Ashtar Command. As a 75
general rule, the cigar shaped UFO craft are potentially the dangerous extraterrestrials. There are a few exceptions to this rule. New Agers and UFO Enthusiasts In my life and studies into the fields of spirituality, and UFO research, I have noticed and observed a very strange division of sorts between these two areas of focus. For some very strange reason they seem to be very separate in peopleʹs minds. Many very evolved spiritual people have no connection or understanding of the extraterrestrials. On the other side of the coin, a great many of the UFO enthusiasts have no connection to the spiritual realities of life. One of my purposes in writing this book is to integrate and blend the two movements for, indeed, in truth they are one. Star People Some of the people reading this book might be considered star people, or incarnated representatives of the Ashtar Command or other extraterrestrial groups. In truth, we all are really ambassadors and visitors, for no one is really from the planet Earth. We are all visiting here and going to school, and performing our appointed missions and service work. Because of the ending of the Piscean Age and the ending of other major planetary and solar cycles at this time, the space commands are increasing their communications and interactions with their incarnated representatives. The channelings suggest that only one third of these incarnated representatives have truly awakened to their full mission. Part of the purpose of this book is to awaken or more fully awaken people to these connections and their full mission on earth. The Mother Ships These great mother ships or space cities have, in most cases, 12 levels. The first level is for the entry and exit of UFO air craft. The second level is a vast stockroom of supplies for all the other levels of the ship. The third level is a zoo, with animals from many worlds. The fourth level is the agricultural research, farmland, gardens, and orchards. 76
The fifth level is the housing center for technicians and persons working on the first four levels. The sixth level is the recreational level, with vast parks and landscaping. The seventh level is the medical complex. The eighth level is housing for evacuees, should that ever be needed. The ninth level is the university compound. On this level are libraries, halls of wisdom, concert halls, and cultural activities. Level ten is where the visiting dignitaries from all dimensions come. The eleventh level is the headquarters for the Ashtar Command and the Great Rotunda Meeting Hall. Level twelve is referred to as the dome. It is the pilot control center and officerʹs observation deck. Visitors are allowed to come here by appointment if they come in a group. Down through the center of the mother ship is a circular shaft which is a power reactor for the entire craft. Ashtar has described one particular mother ship called the ʺShan Cheaʺ as the largest of these orbiting cities that encircle the solar system. This is the ship that Commander Ashtar apparently lives on most of the time. Trapped Essences In an absolutely fascinating transcript from the Tibetan Foundation, Betty J. Dix, channeled Ashtar on the subject of ʺtrapped energy in the Earthʺ. In this transcript, Ashtar spoke of later days in Atlantis when the sons of Belial (egocentric people and/or lords of materialism) trapped many peopleʹs ʺessences within pseudo crystalsʺ. When I speak of this, I donʹt mean to say that the soul extension or incarnated personality itself was trapped, but rather a certain portion of the soul extensionʹs energy was trapped. The pseudo crystals are not true crystals. True crystals would not allow this to happen. The sons of Belial created these pseudo crystals to look like regular crystals. Ashtar has said that some of these crystals are coming to the surface of the planet now. Ashtar says that these crystals donʹt feel right when you pick them up. The energy in them feels dead. In order for souls to go to their next level in evolution this trapped essence of the soul needs to be released. Souls on the inner plane are now requesting that this work be done because of the great transformation that is now taking place on Earth. 77
Ashtar is requesting us, as Light Workers, to help in this most important work. The crystals donʹt have to be physically broken to release the energy, but rather just work with energetically. Some of these pseudo crystals can be placed on crystal clusters and asked to be programmed to heal and release the energies that have been trapped inside. It can also be requested that the pseudo crystal form heal, and become a true crystal. Interestingly enough, when the trapped essence leaves many pseudo crystals will just disappear. Some will transform into another form, and others into a true crystal in its beginning stages of conscious development. Ashtar has stated that these pseudo crystals are all over the planet. Especially in Africa, South America, and the United States. Once the essence is released, the essence will usually return to the soul. In some cases the trapped essence may need some guidance to return to the soul. In Atlantis towards the ending time, the sons of Belial actually created ʺentrapment machinesʺ to accomplish this process. They were able to do this process without the machines, but the machines did it faster. He also said that implants were used to pull out the essence. It is very important to make people aware of this phenomena for most people have never heard of this. Ashtar said that if a person would put 20 pounds of crystals, as many as five pounds could be the ʺpseudo crystalsʺ. To work with these pseudo crystals in meditation, release the trapped essence and transform these pseudo crystals is a great service we can render to a great many souls. These pseudo crystals can also be worked without coming in physical contact with them. There are some that will have to be physically touched to facilitate the releasing process. The more Light Workers release these trapped essences the more this allows others to come to the surface of the planet, for many are trapped in the earth. Ashtar says that in the future the earth will be of such a great magnitude of light, the energies and essences will be unable to stay. Most of these pseudo crystals look like clear quartz, smoky quartz, and a lavender color amethyst. You will not be able to tell that it is a pseudo crystal by just looking at them. You will also have to feel them to know for sure. Ashtar says that there are 78
hundreds of thousands pseudo crystals. Clairvoyantly the difference between the pseudo crystal and a real crystal can clearly be seen. Major Grid Points That Need Clearing Another service that Light Workers can render the Ashtar Command and the Great White Brotherhood is in the cleansing of certain grid points on the planet. The earth is covered in energy meridians much in the same way that we, as humans, have acupuncture meridians. These meridians on the earth have been called lay lines. There are certain grid points on the earth similar to our acupuncture points on our physical bodies. When one of these points gets blocked in our physical body there is a stagnation of energy flow which eventually leads to disease. The same is true of the planet Earth. Commander Ashtar has pointed out, in this same transcript some of the grid points on the earth that need clearing. There is one major one in the center of the Pacific Ocean. Another in the northern part of Canada, close to the Arctic Circle. These unstable forces have been stored there since the time of Atlantis. There is another one directly below New York City. This point is also tied to the chaotic energy of the city itself. Ashtar is requesting humanityʹs help in releasing these unstable forces which will also help to heal the Earth Mother, herself. Some additional points are south of the Hawaiian Islands, almost on the equator. Another one is off the coast of Africa, also close to the equator. Two points in Russia, and also the North and South Poles. Another one is underneath the tip of South Africa. This last one is partly why there is so much dissension there. There are also some blocked points beneath Columbia, Ecuador and the Gulf of Thailand. The best way to help in the cleansing of these points is to do it in a group dynamic. This can be done by following a grid line until you come to a blockage. Calling for the help of the soul, monad, Great White Brotherhood, and Ashtar Command, a laser light can be visualized into it. Ask for the soul and monadʹs help in guiding the amount of laser light that is needed during that particular meditation. 79
Under Ground Ashtar Command Conferences One of the ways that the Ashtar Command can be contacted is during the night while we sleep. In these conferences there are physical beings, etheric beings, and beings from other planets. These conferences occur at least twice monthly. Many of the Light Workers attend five or six of these conferences a year. One example of one of these dealt with how to clean up the pollution in the air, sea, and ground. Sometimes these conferences last for as long as two or three weeks every night. Many beings attend in their astral bodies. Commander Ashtar is very pleased to see how fast the light is growing on Earth, and to see the unfolding spiritual commitment of so many Light Workers on Earth.
80
12 Arcturus ʺArcturus is one of the most advanced civilizations in our entire galaxy.ʺ EDGAR CAYCE Edgar Cayce has said in his channelings, that Arcturus is one of the most advanced extraterrestrial civilizations in our galaxy. It is a fifth dimensional civilization which, in reality, is like a prototype for Earthʹs future. Its energy works with humanity as an emotional mental and spiritual healer. It is also an energy gateway through which humans pass during death and rebirth. It functions as a way station for nonphysical consciousness to become accustomed to physicality. The book, ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ has described it as the mid‐way station or programming center used by the physical brotherhoods in our local universe, to govern the many rounds of experiments with physicals on our end of the galaxy. Some of the most fascinating information comes from a book by Norma Milanovich called, ʺWe, the Arcturiansʺ, which I would highly recommend buying. I personally, of all the extraterrestrial civilizations, am most drawn and attracted to Arcturus. This is probably because of their total focus in every aspect of their society to the path of God realization. For this reason I will spend a little more time in this section sharing with you what I have learned about their most wonderful civilization. I also have the good fortune to know someone who is living on this plane of existence, who is from Arcturus. She is one of the most amazingly spiritually gifted people I know. My connection with her and her work has greatly enhanced my own life and spiritual path. The Arcturians teach that the most fundamental ingredient for living in the fifth dimension is love. That negativity, fear and guilt must be overcome and be exchanged for love and light. Arcturus is the brightest star in the Bootes constellation, which is approximately 36 light years from earth.
81
The Arcturians work in very close connection with the Ascended Masters whom they refer to as the brotherhood of the all. They also work very closely with what they refer to as The Galactic Command. The Arcturians travel the universe in their starships, which are some of the most advanced in the entire universe. One of the reasons that Earth has not been attacked by more warlike negative extraterrestrials has been these civilizationsʹ fear of these advanced starships of the Arcturians. These ships are the state of the art technology, which is far beyond anything I have mentioned so far in this chapter. One of the starships circling the earth is called the Starship Athena, named after one of the Greek Gods. The Arcturian society is governed by what they call the elders. These beings are fevered by the people of Arcturus for the advanced knowledge, wisdom, and extremely high vibrational frequencies. The higher the vibrational frequency, the close one is to light, or spirit or God. The Arcturians are very short in physical stature, about three to four feet tall. They are also very slender. They also all look very much alike in appearance. The Arcturians pride themselves in this because this erases the pettiness of comparison of looks which is so predominant in our society. The Arcturians are the most loving and non‐judgmental beings you can possibly imagine. Their skin is a greenish color. They have very large almond shaped eyes. They only have three fingers. They have the ability to move objects with their minds, and are totally telepathic. The source of food is an effervescent type of liquid that is highly vitalizing to their entire being. Their eyes are a dark brown or black color. Their main source of seeing is actually through their telepathic nature, not their physical eyes. Their sense of hearing even transcends their telepathic nature. They also have an ability to sense with the back of their heads. The average life span is from 350 to 400 of our earth years. Their highly developed spiritual nature has allowed them to never age, since they have the ability to transcend time and space. They terminate the life when the contract that has been arranged for their existence is up. There is also no sickness on Arcturus, it was eliminated centuries ago. 82
On Arcturus they do not have extreme temperatures. Their civilization is one that has transcended duality and lives in oneness. The different professions on Arcturus are determined by a personʹs vibrational frequency and the colors in their aura. For example, those that are in charge of taking care of their children must have violet as the predominate color in their aura for only the wisest souls are allowed to associate with the young. The same is true for those that are allowed to give birth. They are screened and tested in terms of their auric and vibrational frequencies, and when chosen by the elders to give birth to an Arcturian child, an amazing process occurs. The vibration of both individuals involved is raised to a seventh dimensional frequency for the birthing process to insure only bringing in the most highly evolved soul. Reproduction is an honor on Arcturus and one of the highest professions. This seventh dimensional frequency is that of an Ascended Master. The actual act of reproduction is not done in a physical sense as we understand it on earth. On Arcturus it is done through a type of mind link, where the male and female energies are perfectly balanced. Through this procreation process, some kind of electron force flows through the two beings, which creates another being that is a replica of the light. The new life form is then taken to a special room that emanates the proper vibrational frequencies until they are ready for integration into a family unit on Arcturus. Many beings from our Arcturus are seeded onto other planets, because the high council has ordered this as a great act. On Arcturus there is no competition. Every thought, word, deed, and product created is judged by its ability to raise the vibration closer to God or it does not exist on Arcturus. A personʹs frequency of vibration is directly related to the mastery they have over their body, emotions, thoughts, actions, and creations. Arcturians have total mastery over these aspects of self. They have developed, as individuals, and as a society of transcending the ego or separative lower fear based self. Success is only judged in terms of the measure of their light frequency. On Arcturus they have untold numbers of machines that are constantly checking the vibrational frequencies each individual on the planet is manifesting. If one particular Arcturian gets feedback that they are not meeting their own goals for their evolution, then immediately the elders send fellow teachers to help that individual. 83
There is never any comparison with others, only comparison with oneʹs own goals. All scores of these frequency measuring machines are kept private, except for the elders and Ascended Masters. The only way to evolve on Arcturus or anywhere in the universe, for that matter, is to be of service, so other fellow Arcturians are happy to help in any way they can. Arcturians live very much in a group consciousness since they recognize all are one. If one individual is having problems meeting their goals, then that affects everyone. On Arcturus, everyone truly is their brotherʹs keeper. Each person grows at the level and speed they feel comfortable with. These machines that I mentioned, might measure the frequency level of the amount of love, patience, tolerance, and non judgmentalness.. Wouldnʹt that be great in our society, for people to receive this kind of feedback constantly. Another interesting thing on Arcturus is that they do not have liquids on their planet like rivers, lakes, oceans. Given this fact, they are fascinated by our use of water on our planet for recreation and power usage. They also remark that they have many ingredients on their planet that we donʹt have on earth. The basic energy form that they use is one of liquid light. By studying Arcturus, we are able to get a glimpse of what our future holds for us on planet Earth. The Arcturian Starships The Arcturian star ships are the finest in the entire universe. They are operated by a power source of crystals that do not come from their planet. The crystals come from a planet in the Milky Way that has not been discovered by our earthly scientists. These crystals have a way of conducting light energy from the Great Central Sun. The Arcturians say that they no longer use computers because they have long ago outgrown the use for them. They have other systems that are far more advanced. They also have a section of the star ship which is like a replication of the planet Arcturus. It somehow has the ability to take any crew member back to Arcturus in their etheric body. This helps to strengthen and rejuvenate crew members who are away from home for long periods of time as they traverse the universe and universes. Earthʹs frequency is very harsh for Arcturians because of their fifth dimensional frequency. 84
Arcturians donʹt eat in the same way that we do. In some way they are able to ingest energy I guess kind of like a breathairian would in our society. The Arcturians only sleep for a short time once a week. Sleep, for the Arcturians is a time to travel in soul and connect to higher spiritual realms of consciousness. This activity is given the highest priority in the Arcturian society. Another room in the Arcturian starship has a complete data bank of every aspect of Earth life, and life on other planets as well. Arcturians are able to ingest information through their telepathic abilities and through their nervous system. This process is similar to ingesting food, but on a more energetic level. They are able to assimilate information at a rate of one hundred times faster than the average human being on earth. Another section of their ship is a room that strengthens the vibration of all who enter it so they will not be overwhelmed by the strongest vibrations on planet Earth. The Arcturians are also able to travel through time. They also have shuttle craft that are actually global in shape. These global shuttle craft, they use for activating energy points and grids on Earth that have been lying dormant on Earth for many centuries. The Arcturians have been working with Earth since life first started on this planet. The Arcturians have many bases on Earth, and also three bases on the Moon. Many of their bases on Earth are inside mountains. Arcturians can manifest physically, but also exist in the etheric type state, so physical matter is not an obstacle to them. They also have a vaporizing section of the star ship that can instantly make any person or object disappear. They would only use this on a person if the crew member had died. The amazing thing about this machine is that whatever is vaporized can be re solidified at any time in the future by just checking the ships records. The more I learn about Arcturus, the more and more the TV show, Star Trek is becoming a living reality. Many souls are brought to the Arcturian starships during dream state where they are worked on and helped. The Arcturians never invade a personʹs free choice as the greys are doing. The Arcturians are here to assist the Earth to enter the fourth and fifth dimensions of reality. They are here to help us raise our vibrational frequencies. They stand as the guardians and protectors of higher consciousness in the universe. 85
They are based in every country on the planet, and in reality, have bases all over the universe. They are here to educate us. Two of the groups that they have had the most difficult time dealing with out our planet are the government and the military. They have met with them, however, all the politicians and military is interested in is military technology, not spiritual enlightenment. The Arcturians could help in even a greater and more open capacity than they are now, but the people who govern the United States and our world are totally and completely materialistically and egotistically centered, and hence rebuke the help of these incredibly advanced beings. So instead, the government makes a deal with the greys who are very selfish beings only interested in taking over the world for their own selfish purposes. This is a sad commentary on how the people of the United States have allowed themselves to lose control over their government. The government has sold us out to the dark forces for the purpose of greed and power, which has totally backfired on them and unfortunately on us. If it were not for the Ascended Masters, and selfless beings such as the Arcturians and the Ashtar Command, we would really be in deep trouble. Other Arcturian Technology These vaporizing machines and machines to transfer a person into another dimensional frequency are also used to decode a personʹs entire genetic structure and physical body. The Arcturians have said that there is not a being in any galaxy or universe they have visited, that they could not heal by using these machines to diagnose the problem and then make the minutest corrections. These machines can also be used like in Star Trek to transfer beings from one location to another. Another mission of the Arcturians is to transfer gigantic crystalline beds of crystals to certain locations on the Earthʹs crust. This usually results in much activity around these areas, and an energization of the planet Earth, herself. There are countless numbers of machines throughout the star ship that are constantly monitoring each crew memberʹs vibrational frequency to make sure there is no depletion taking place, and each person is growing and emanating love and light as their soulʹs purpose has designed. This 86
information is, again, kept private except for the elders who will then design programs to help that individual make the needed corrections so they and the group may realize God more fully. Arcturians see no separation between themselves and others. To help another is to help oneself, and vice versa. The Arcturians have met with many Presidents and Premiers of many different countries and have exchanged some information on an equal basis. The Arcturians have made an interesting observation in that every time they make contact with the governmental leaders, they are always immediately turned over to the military commands, which makes the Arcturians wonder who is really in charge. The Arcturians have also stated that they have made contact with the beings of the hollow Earth, which I have written extensively about in this book. The Arcturians are currently working with thirty three different countries. The basic curriculum of teaching of the Arcturians is to teach each person to know their Godself. This is done through education, medicine, healing, arts, and entertainment. One of the ways they have communicated is to write letters which are then teleported where they want them to be placed. In other cases they have appeared physically. Other ways they have made contact is through telepathy or channeling, and also bringing soul extensions aboard their ship. This is only done if the person has given its permission in the etheric state. One last method of communication is through a personʹs dream state. The Arcturians follow a code which is much like the prime directive in the Star Trek show. This code prohibits them from interfering with a civilization unless they are specifically requested to come. Our prayers on Earth and the request from the Ascended Masters, Angels, and Celestial Beings, has brought them to us during this most critical turning point in Earthʹs history, as we move to the golden age. 87
13 Sirius ʺDuring many of the Egyptian dynasties it was quite common to have a visitation from a Sirian in the disguise of one of their Gods ...The Mayans were, in a sense, tourists from the Sirius realmʺ LYSSA ROYAL Sirius was one of the first areas to be colonized by beings from the Lyran Star group and is more advanced in a metaphysical sense. Djwhal Khul says Sirius is one of the more advanced training centers or universities to which the Ascended Masters may travel. The path to Sirius is one of the seven paths to higher evolution that each soul must choose upon achieving the sixth initiation and/or their ascension. The star Sirius is known as the Dog Star, and is a member of the constellation of Canis Major. It lies approximately 8.7 light years from Earth. It is one of the most brilliant stars that is observable in the night sky. In thinking of Sirius, then we must think of them in terms of being a group consciousness of both physical and non physicality. The third dimensional Sirians visited both the Egyptian and Mayan civilizations in times past. The Sirians gave the Egyptians much advanced astronomical and medical information. The Mayans apparently had a very personal relationship with the Syrians. Much information was shared, and it is interesting that the Mayan race seemed to just vanish off the face of the Earth at a certain point in their history. The Sirians left behind time capsules for our future generations to discover, one of which was supposedly the crystal skull. Robert Temple wrote a very interesting book called, ʺThe Sirius Mysteryʺ. In this book he studied tribal cultures in present day Africa, whose most sacred and secret traditions are based on a cosmology of knowledge that they say was received from the star, Sirius. In this book he traces the Dogon tribe, and three related tribes back over 5,000 years. He shows how these civilizations
88
contained great wealth and learning, and knowledge of physics and astrophysics. The Dogon tribe also had a whole system of spiritual initiation that reminds me somewhat of what I have taught in my series of books. Another group of extraterrestrial beings visiting us from Sirius, Ruth Montgomeryʹs spirit guides refer to, as the Kantarians. They are inter‐ dimensional extraterrestrial beings. They apparently had physical contact with our race in its early beginnings. At this time they are working with us without direct intervention. They were instrumental in helping us at the time of Atlantis during that cataclysmic period. They also, at that time, mixed with us genetically. Their views currently on Earth is that they will not consider a more active partnership again, until we outgrow the tendency as a people, to be exploitive, judgmental and manipulative. They refer to Sirius as a remarkable star in that it gives free rein to development of all talents that are usable for the common good. The Kantarians also serve as protectors of their people who are incarnated here, and with whom they had previous ties. The extraterrestrial fleet of flying saucers is much smaller than the Ashtar Commandʹs, but equally dedicated to helping Earthlings. They refer to themselves as the Kantarian Confederation. The guides also refer to Sirius as a star system where the residents are seldom permanent residents. It is a meeting place for those who have mastered their own planetary systems and are preparing there for further duties and missions. They talk about it as an important way station for Earthlings who wish to continue their spiritual development. The beings from Sirius who are visiting Earth are very good at the practical application of very advanced theoretical ideas that are being brought forth from other very advanced extraterrestrial civilizations. They are here to ground and make usable these advanced ideas and technologies. Sirius helped to build the great pyramids and temples of Egypt. They also helped in the building of many of the tunnels and pathways to the Inner Earth. They will be very involved in the future in establishing the Golden Age on this planet.
89
14 Hydra There is another extraterrestrial civilization that is visiting Earth that I donʹt know a lot about, who come from the planet Hydra. These beings are most skilled in the areas of agriculture, archaeology, and creating with their hands from the substances of the earth. They excel at creating products of great beauty from the Earthʹs energy. These beings are the sensitives and artists of our galaxy, and have a deep connection to the land. Each civilization that is visiting us carries a specific vibration and focus of energies. Each civilization has a different area of expertise. The combination of all these different groups helping Earth in a positive manner is helping to propel the earth into the new age in a most holistic and well rounded manner.
90
15 The Grays In a recent chapter I spoke about the Grays and the secret deal they made with the United States government to abduct human beings for alien technology. In this chapter I would like to give you a little more in‐depth understanding of the grayʹs culture, where they come from, and why they are doing what they are doing. In reality, the Grays are commonly broken into three different types; The Orion Gray type 1 The Orion Gray type 2 Gray species 3 Besides these three categorization of different Gray species, there are also 22 subspecies. Some of these Grays come from the star systems, Rigel, Ursa Major, Draconis, Zeta Reticuli. It is essential that the Grays be understood, for they are one of the main negative extraterrestrial groups that are trying to take over this planet for their own selfish purposes. There are apparently two kinds of Grays stemming from Orion. What might be referred to as the larger Grays and the smaller Grays. The smaller Grays have actually been cloned by the larger Grays and that is why they all look the same. The abductions are for their genetic experiments which include cloning, DNA enrichment, and cross‐breeding with human beings. The Grays have a genetic weakness in their digestive systems which is one of their main motivations and reasons for all this genetic work. The Grays are based on a type of group consciousness, rather than an individual consciousness. Their religion is science, not true spirituality. Their social structure is based more on obedience and duty. They are attempting to take over this planet not through military force, but rather through covert mind control. Since our government sold us out to these negative aliens, even they realize the fix we are in. If we try to attack these aliens in a military sense it would be suicide. They are far more
91
technologically advanced than us. One of the main ways to protect yourself is to stay attuned spiritually, and stay in your power. The Grays look at fear and victim consciousness as permission to intrude. The tall Grays seem less prone to the frailties than the smaller Grays are. Their basic program is service to self. They are using this planet as a supply depot, for biological materials (people and cattle mutilations.) They are very telepathic in nature. Our world is not the only world they have tried to conquer. The Grays from Zeta Reticuli have the ability to magnify their mental field in order to maintain control over humans. These different species of Grays are members of a network which is a type of loose alliance to which all have common purposes and aims. The Grays from Rigel were the ones that made the secret deal with the US Government. They are small with yellow/greenish skin. When they are lacking a specific glandular substance in their bodies from the digestive problems, they appear to look greyish. They are from a solar system that revolves around Rigel, which is a double bluish/white star about 800 light years from Earth. The digestive problems were caused by exposure to radioactivity during a nuclear war many thousands of years ago. They derive nourishment from the glandular secretions and enzymes they extract from animal mutilations. The Rigelians are almost entirely devoid of emotions. They are not capable of direct interbreeding with us, but rather do it in laboratories. They have the ability to disintegrate matter into energy. This is how they pass through walls and roofs, and transport abductees from their homes. Part of their mind control on us deals with a type of telepathic hypnosis they are able to induce. One facet of this is their ability to make people forget consciously they have been abducted for the moment. They also use this ability to try and control our leaders. This is also done through the placing of implants, both mechanical and metaphysical in nature. The Grays have bases all over this planet, especially in the United States as I mention in the previous chapter, and also on the dark side of the moon. They have also made clones of human beings as well. These clones are cloned into android type bodies. The degree to which the Grays have interpenetrated our society is massive. 92
They are impregnating human females on a massive scale, and later extracting the fetuses. Most of their biological materials comes from the cattle mutilation. However it s a known fact that at times they have done human mutilations. These materials have been found on their crashed UFO crafts. There are some books on the market saying that they are our friends, and that we agreed to these abductions. I am here to tell you not to believe it for a second. These beings are very disturbed beings and are here to take over this planet for their own selfish purposes. They look at us in a similar way that the unconscious mass of our society looks at animals. The Zeta Reticulans appear to be divided into two different groups. There is one group that appears to be a little more tolerant towards human beings. The other group is interested in colonization and conquest of planet Earth. The tall Grays have one base near the Aleutian Islands. The taller Grays seem to have influence over the Reticulans and the Beeletrax species of Grays. These Grays have no stomach and digest their food by absorption through the skin or under their tongue. They have been cloning themselves instead of the practice of reproduction we use on Earth. Each time they reclone, however, the genetic copy becomes weaker, which is part of their problem. Their attitude towards humans is tolerance towards inferiors. They are technologically superior, however, spiritually and socially backwards.
93
16 The Reptilian Race The Reptilian race is the other extraterrestrial race that is most negative, destructive, and evil in their intent. These extraterrestrials are human in shape, however, have reptilian type faces. They also have scales which makes their skin water proof. They have three fingers with an opposing thumb. Their mouth is more like a slit. They average from six to seven feet in height. They are well suited for space travel because they are able to hibernate. They are cold blooded biologically, so must have a balanced environment to maintain body temperature. The soldier class can bury themselves in the ground and wait long periods of time in order to ambush an enemy. The leader of this specie are called the Draco. They have special wings, which are like flaps of skin. There is a second group of their race that does not have wings. The soldier class and scientists of their race donʹt. In an emergency they can survive on one very large meal every few weeks. These Reptilians have been interacting with Earth for a very long time. On their home planet they apparently live underground. This Reptilian species apparently directs the efforts of the working class which are only about four feet tall. These beings would be considered another one of the subspecies of the Greys. The command progression in this Reptilian society are the Draco who are the winged Reptilians first in command. Secondly the Draco who are the non winged Reptilians. Then the Greys. This group, along with the Greys, pose the greatest danger at this time to planet Earth. How to Protect Oneʹs Self The specific aim of the Reptilians and the Greys is to take over planet Earth through covert mind control methods, much like the Illuminati and Secret Government is trying to do on Earth. These two groups are intimately
94
connected. Most people think of world takeover only in terms of military means such as bombs and guns. They donʹt need to do this if they can control the people, and world leaders through mind control, hypnosis, and brain implants. The key question is, What do we do to stop this? Our government has sold us out because of their greed for power and world domination and now they canʹt stop what they have started. The first step is for the American people to reclaim their government. One good step has been made in booting George Bush, Dan Quail, and James Baker and his whole corrupt crew out of office. This is just the beginning. We must force our government to release all the knowledge they have about extraterrestrials to the American people and the world at large. Half the battle is won if the people of the world know what they are dealing with. If people knew what was happening they would not be so much on automatic pilot. The only way to protect ourselves is through the strength of our consciousness. If a person is attuned to God and the Masters, and owns their personal power, and has self mastery over their energies, they have nothing to worry about. The world needs to wake up spiritually and psychologically, and stop being victims. It is this victim consciousness that allows them to be abducted and manipulated. If ever you sense them around, just pray, affirm, and visualize protection for yourself. Your connection with God and the Masters will bring you immediate protection. The only true hope for this planet is a mass spiritual awakening which, in truth, is beginning to occur. This spiritual awakening must also lead us into political action to remove the Secret Government and Illuminati from power. It is these beings that are controlled and manipulated, implanted, and hypnotized by the negative extraterrestrials. Part of our strength is also to think as individuals. The Greys are a group memory complex that has very little ability to think on their own. It is time now to make people aware of what is really going on. Share the information in this book and others like it with your friends. Do more research on your own. If enough people become aware, the one hundredth monkey effect will begin to occur. It is already happening.
95
We have a tremendous opportunity with Bill Clinton and Al Gore in office. Let us take advantage of it, and take responsibility as we never have before. The people reading this book are the Light bearers for the new age. It will only happen if we do it. The world will change when we change it. This change begins in consciousness, which leads to individual and group action. The Secret Government, Illuminati, and negative extraterrestrials are more vulnerable now than ever before. Our government and world is ripe for an overthrow in a positive sense. We will never have a better opportunity than we have in the next ten to twenty years, with the spiritual forces that are now at work on this planet. I challenge you to fully reclaim your power, and light, and be about the Fatherʹs business on your this most noble mission to our beloved planet Earth.
96
17 Procyon One of the more positive extraterrestrial groups are from a solar system that revolves around Procyon. Procyon is a binary yellowish/white star that rises before Sirius in Canis Minoris, about 11.4 light years from Earth. They have been nicknamed the Swedes. They are humanoid in nature with blond hair. They have a very strong positive spiritual attitude towards the humanity of Earth. The United States government was not interested in negotiating with the Procyonʹs because they would not give them new weapons systems. The Procyonians have apparently cross bred with us at many stages in our evolutionary development. This was done for a much more noble purpose than the Greys. The Procyonians have a philosophy of service to others rather than service of self. They have been involved in trying to protect us from the evil activities of the Greys and Reptilians. They are able to travel in time and between dimensions of reality. They frequently use mechanical vehicles for this, but are not dependent on them. The term Procyon translates into English as ʺThe home of those who travel through time.ʺ The Procyonians serve the Law of One. They are here to help us help ourselves, totally respecting our free choice.
97
18 Cessna Another very interesting extraterrestrial contact was reported by a man named Robert Hurlburt, of Starke, Florida. He was hiking in the Green Mountains of Vermont when he came across a man sitting beside a stream. To make a long story short, he had a long conversation with this man while hiking and camping together that day and following night. This being told him that his name was John and that he came from the planet Cessna. I will now quote what he said, from Ruth Montgomeryʹs book, ʺAliens Among Usʺ; ʺJohn went on to tell me about this planet that he claimed to be from, that it was warm, temperate planet with abundant flora and fauna. The atmosphere had a thick cloud cover and consisted of a high quantity of nitrogen, with oxygen and traces of other gasses, some of them familiar to earth, some not. He stated that this planet had two moons and traveled in an elliptical orbit around its sun. He said it was slightly larger than Earth, had two polar caps, and a population of around 500 million; That population control was strictly adhered to, meaning reproduction was not a haphazard occurrence; that there were seventy major centers of population; That there was no pollution or disease. The inhabitants had a life expectancy of 160 years; That a central committee of seventy representatives controlled the government and each member was elected by one of the seventy major cities by electoral vote of the populace; That there was no crime or famine, and everyone worked in unity to assist one another. The primary concerns of the people were scientific achievement, research and study of alien cultures, and bringing peace to all cultures. They had begun space exploration over twenty centuries ago. Their space vehicles varied in size and shape and were capable of speeds exceeding the speed of light, and were powered by drawing energy directly from the sun.
98
He stated that this culture had been sent to Earth to study us and somewhat to share its technology with us, but as yet we were not prepared to handle such power. He referred to us infantile.ʺ The next morning upon awakening on his camping trip, John was gone. Robert later contacted a woman who John said he had told his story to, upon arriving home. The woman confirmed she knew him and knew that he was a space man. Ruth Montgomeryʹs spirit guides also confirmed the truth of Johnʹs story.
99
19 Alpha Centauri The extraterrestrials from Alpha Centauri vibrate and resonate on the band of violet light. This civilization has enormous scientific and technical knowledge that is of the highest quality in the universe. The Alpha Centaurians are very theoretical. Part of their mission on Earth is to help raise the Earthʹs scientific, technical and theoretical knowledge. Their mission is to also find ways to make this knowledge understandable to our society, since they are so much more advanced. One of the ways they are doing this is by telepathically linking up with some of our most advanced scientists. Because these beings are so incredibly intelligent and are of such a high vibration, they sometimes have a difficult time grounding these ideas on the earthly plane. The beings from Sirius whom I have already mentioned are very good at bridging this gap, because they are very good at the practical application of these ideas, and making these theories usable for our third dimensional society. The Sirians are the workers and doers of the earth.
100
20 Lyra The extraterrestrials from Lyra, as I have previously mentioned, have brought a migratory quality and freedom of spirit to planet Earth. These beings arenʹt as attached as most to their home planet. They have been called the chameleons of the universe because of their ability to adapt to new environments on different planets. The Lyrans radiate much light from their head center, but apparently find it difficult to stay in the heart center while in the Earthʹs atmosphere. They are a very advanced civilization and are not used to the lower vibrations that exist in the earthʹs atmosphere. The Lyrans are used to total freedom of expression and movement. They are almost opposite of the Arcturians who are very ordered and systematic. The Lyrans are the independents of the universe. They would be also the exact opposite of the Zeta Reticuli civilization in this regard. The Lyrans are very loving beings and fluctuate through a wide range of frequencies on the color spectrum. As mankind advances more on Earth and moves into the Golden Age, we will be having even more contact with the Lyranʹs civilization.
101
21 Antares The extraterrestrials from Antares, I do not know a lot about, other than the fact that Antares serves as an inter‐dimensional bridge to Andromeda, which is one of the highest estraterrestrial civilizations in our entire universe. Apparently some souls upon physical death pass through the Antares gateway to reactivate their soul memory. Antares lies in the constellation of Scorpius. It is a binary star of fiery red and emeral green.
102
22 Andromeda In 1972 a world famous Mexican scientist and university professor became a UFO contactee from a group of beings from the planet Inxtria from the star group, Andromeda. Professor Hernandezʹ main contact was from a human looking woman by the name of Lya. This contact lasted for over a ten year period and the professor had the opportunity to travel on her ship on four different occasions. He was told that they were carrying out a well conceived and ordered plan of collecting data and conducting studies and analysis of our planet and its inhabitants. They seemed to also have a stunning ability to predict future events on Earth. He was told that Lyaʹs age was approximately 1000 years old. Lya and her group were part of an investigative group that were studying other planets besides Earth throughout the universe. A lot of the interaction was very scientifically based. They warned Professor Hernandez of the danger of the nuclear testing done on Earth, and the adverse effect it was having on the atmosphere. They said much of the extreme weather, cyclones, and hurricanes were being caused from this process. They also were most concerned about the chemical weapons that were being used and tested above all else. This concern has turned out to be prophetic because, as I have mentioned earlier, the AIDS virus that plagues our planet is part of this chemical warfare testing program of the United States government. The Professor was told that around 1990 we would discover new sources of energy coming from space itself. They also predicted that in around the year 2015 we would be able to obtain energy from sound. Beings from other worlds come to Inxtria to observe the vibrational changes of sound. Sound can be used to preserve bodies or cadavers. Sound can be used to control the climate. They said it can also be used to heat a habitation
103
without irritating the inhabitants. They said that the most dangerous weapon we face is the hate among our own people. They also said that in their galaxy of Andromeda, there are thousands of stars similar to those of our planetary system. They described their planet as being from Beta Andromeda. The main focus on their work with the professor seemed to be in respect to how we are ecologically destroying our planet, and he was given much scientific evidence to substantiate this. A belief in God was, and is essential and integral to their whole cosmology.
104
23 Proxima Centauri Another very interesting case involved a German woman by the name of Herr Horst Fenner, who was traveling in Bolivia at the time in 1976. She was camping in the Amazon jungle east of Trinidad, when she encountered a landed disc‐shaped metalic craft in an open forest clearing. Two fair skinned blond male people came out of the craft who were very handsome in physical looks. They each wore a language translator on their belts the size of a pack of cigarettes. They began to speak to Herr Horst Fenner in German, and told her that their home planet orbited a small sun in the star system, called Proxima Centauri. They were entirely human in every way and were even able to breathe our atmosphere. One of the menʹs name was Kahun and other, Athar. They said that Proxima Centauri was the next solar system closest to Earth, at a distance of 50 million kilometers. They told her that they often come to Earth to observe events here and to consider the development of the species in evolution on this planet. They spoke of other cosmic races that come to Earth regularly. They also said that other space races are visiting the other planets in our solar system, also, and some have established surface monitoring stations on these planets. They warned Fenner of the danger of contactee publicizing her encounter, and spoke of Billy Meier, in Switzerland (whom I have written about in this book in regard to the Pleiades), who had all kinds of death threats after coming out with his information.
105
24 Ra A most fascinating and highly spiritual contact came through Carla Rueckert, Don Elkins, James Allen McCarty. Carla was in telepathic communication with an extraterrestrial race called the Ra. They landed on earth approximately 11,000 years ago in an extraterrestrial mission to help Earthlings with their mental and spiritual evolution. Their main focus geographically, was in Egypt and the Mayan civilization. The Ra refer to themselves as a sixth density social memory complex. They no longer have physical bodies,. They are Light beings, however they are able to materialize bodies as they need to. They came to Egypt in bell shaped UFO air craft. They refer to themselves as humble messengers of the Law of One. They no longer operate in linear time as we do on Earth. They refer to themselves as a social memory complex, although still do have individual identities within this understanding. They attempted to help in technical ways, in terms of the healing of mind/body/spirit, through the use of crystals. They were also involved in the building of the Great Pyramid of Giza. They made some contact in the Holy Land, also. The Pharaoh they contacted was Ikhnaton, in the Eighteenth Dynasty. The Pharaoh accepted the teachings of the Law of One, however his priests only gave this teaching lip service. The pyramids they helped create were used for spiritual initiation, and in this current day and age they refer to the great pyramid as a piano out of tune. They apparently originally had some connection with the planet Venus, however, no longer do now. In their physical manifestation on Earth the physical bodies had a golden luster because of their high vibration. They did not apparently stay too long in Egypt, once they realized that what they taught was being distorted. They stayed a little bit longer in South America, where they had a little more success.
106
They also speak of having to go to the Saturnian Council before receiving permission to come to Earth. This council is one of the main guardians of Earth from extraterrestrial activity. They also speak of Earth being under quarantine, which is something that was also mentioned in the chapter on the Ashtar Command. The Ashtar Command, under the guidance of the Saturnian Council protects Earth from unwanted and selfishly oriented extraterrestrial civilizations. This quarantine is not impregnable so sometimes certain negative groups do get through. The Ra group belong to the inter‐planetary Confederation of Planets, which I spoke of in the chapter on the Ashtar Command. They say that this confederation comprises over 500 planets. The Galactic Confederation is comprised of many different confederations, just as the inter‐dimensional federation of free worlds is composed of many galactic federations. The Ra group is working towards becoming seventh density dimensional beings. They no longer have physical contact with Earth, however, do have spiritual contact through dreams, visions, meditation, and spiritual forms of guidance.
107
25 Alabram Ruth Montgomery, in her channelings of her spirit guides, writes of another extraterrestrial civilization that is just beyond the andromeda Galaxy. The beings on this particular planet have a similar physical appearance to us, but with great enlarged diaphragms and lungs. This is because the oxygen on this planet is so weak that an Earth person could not exist. This planet has millions of people on it like ourselves. Their birthing process is different than us in that they carry the fetus for a shorter gestation period in their stomachs, and regurgitate it when the time for giving birth. At that moment the new baby is extremely small. It reaches full maturity in only seven years. The beings on this planet have extremely large brains and are able to absorb information through osmosis, and are very telepathic. They drink liquid similar to water and live on foods that are grown in caves and tunnels hollowed out beneath the surface of the earth. The reason for this is the star that serves as their sun is so hot that it would burn the plants if they were planted on the surface of the planet.
108
26 Zeta Reticulum The extraterrestrials from Zeta Reticuli are some of the most well known and often seen space visitors. They are the three to four feet tall beings that are so involved in the abduction process. They are very science oriented and share more of a group mind, and are not as individualistic as we are on Earth. They are also mentally developed to a fault, in the sense of their emotional sensitivity is not as developed. The channelings of Lyssa Royal suggests that they come from a planet called the Apex planet in the Lyran system. This was a planet that was very similar to Earth. Their spiritual growth, however, did not match their technological development which finally led to a planetary cataclysm. The atomic explosions caused the plant life to deteriorate, which led the civilization to build underground shelters. It was during this underground period in their history that they began reproducing through cloning techniques, which is part of the work they continue in their abduction work on the human race. One of the other conclusions they came to was that their emotions were the cause of their surface destruction of their planet so they no longer allowed emotions in their lives. This, from our Earthly perspective, is like ʺthrowing the baby out with the bath waterʺ. The Zeta Reticuli, according to Lyssa Royalʹs channelings in her book, ʺVisitors Withinʺ, are more benign. There is another group of Zetas called the ʺNegative Zeta Reticuliʺ who were more power hungry, that are causing a lot of problems. Lyssa Royal, in her channelings also states that the previous atomic blasts caused the previously known Apex planet to fold the space time continuum around their planet which caused them to emerge on the other side of a dimensional doorway when they finally came to the surface thousands of years later. Part of the reason they are doing all their abductions of humans and animals is that the generations of cloning using the same genetic material has caused
109
their evolutionary growth to become very inbred and stagnant. In truth their race is actually dying. The Zeta Reticuli are also creating a hybrid race of both human and Zeta origin.
110
27 Vega Vega is a star within the constellation of Lyra. It is one of the first Lyran civilizations to develop a unique and cohesive identity which led to the later seeding and colonization of Altair, Centauri, Sirius, And Orion. The beings from Vega manifested a psychology that was opposite to the belief and actions of the Lyrans. This caused many conflicts and wars between the Lyran and Vegan Races.
111
28 The Ataien In a fascinating article in the Sedona ʺJournal of Emergenceʺ magazine, Dorothy Roeder channeled an extraterrestrial being whose name was Ranosh, of the planet Ataien. Dorothy is an exceptional channel and has brought forth some fascinating information from this civilization. This civilization which is far in advance of our civilization on both spiritual and material levels has definitely made physical contact with the Earth in the past. Often this has met in disaster mostly because they donʹt have the same kind of physical body appearance that we have. They physically look like a gigantic insect. More specifically, they look like a gigantic praying mantis. The term mantis actually means ʺdivineʺ. The Greeks and Bushman tribe of Africa considered the praying mantis to have super natural powers. Ranosh, in this article, says that this belief stemmed from a race memory of a time when they physically intervened on behalf of Earth to avert a catastrophe. The catastrophe had to do with Earth being invaded by aliens from another universe. This was in the very distant past in Earthʹs history before humanity was actually physically incarnated. The Ataienʹs used their advanced mind powers to immobilize the evil aliens. Although the Ataienʹs look like insects, they do not prey on other life forms as insects on Earth do. It is interesting that in Lyssa Royalʹs book, ʺPrism of Lyraʺ, the beings whom she called the ʺfoundersʺ, whom she referred to as the creator of all the other beings, were also insect‐like in nature. Again, it is important to get out of our egotistical frame of reference and realize that we probably look as ugly to them in a physical sense as they would to us. For a long time, the Ataiens lived on plant juices. They have evolved now to the point where they can live directly off the energy of light. They still enjoy eating however they donʹt need to eat any more.
112
Another interesting fact about the Ataienʹs is that they have wings. They donʹt need them to travel, however, they fly for enjoyment and meditation. In terms of size they are over six feet tall. Their coloring ranges from light gray to gold. They become gold as they age. They only die if they choose to die. One of the unique things bout the culture is that they have a very strong group consciousness. They are most definitely, however, capable of individual thought. They have learned to create together a flow of thought and feeling that creates harmony for the whole race consciousness. In this regard they are different from humans on Earth who are much more individualistic in nature. The negative side of this is separation and negative ego. The positive side is that we have great diversity and creativity. The Atiens are intrigued with this diversity and creativity since they much more have chosen the path of group consciousness. The positive side of their path as a race, is the group sharing, love, and attunement to the source flow on a collective level. The negative side is that they miss a little bit of the diversity that we have. In this sense both of our civilizations can learn from each other. The Ataiens have developed the ability to travel in other dimensions in a soul travel sense. They say that they do not travel forward or backward in time, but rather laterally. This has been one of their main interests as a culture over the past 1000 years. They have computers that are actually biological in nature. They can record information into the computers with a type of mental telepathy. The computer, in a sense has become an extension of their own consciousness. To say they are more advanced than our computers is a vast understatement. Although interested in our diversity, they most definitely feel that they chose the right path in seeking group cohesion which, in truth, is spiritual consciousness. In truth, as we all know, there are no such things as separate individuals, that is an illusion. There is only one being in the infinite universe and that is God. Now that the Ataiens have achieved this ideal of group consciousness, they can now, in harmony with the Divine Plan, explore the diversity of creation. The Ataiens are most open to sharing their experience and knowledge of how to achieve world harmony which Earth is so greatly in need of. Earth has 113
begun to move in this direction, however, we are still very far from the ideal in a collective and individualistic sense. Humanity still has too much separative consciousness. The Ataiens can be great teachers for us in this regard. They are also good teachers for us in letting go of our attachment to the Adam Cadmon type of physical body, and to recognize all beings throughout Godʹs infinite universe, regardless of their physical body type, are our brothers and sisters in God.
114
29 The Essassani Many people in the new age movement are aware of the channeling work of Darryl Anka, and his channelings of Bashar. Bashar is an extraterrestrial being from a civilization known as Essassani. The name Bashar, in Armenian, means messenger. Darryl Anka has actually seen Basharʹs spacecraft in broad daylight over Los Angeles. The society that Bashar lives in is telepathic. Bashar is not his real name. In his society he is a commander of some kind. The term Essassani means ʺplace of living lightʺ. Essassani reminds me a little bit of the word essence. Darryl Anka has described their physical looks as Eurasian in feature with enlarged eyes. They are about five feet tall with whitish/gray skin. The females have white hair, and the males have no hair. The Essassani civilization is approximately 500 light years in the direction of the Orion constellation. This civilization is not physical as we understand physicality. They live on a higher vibration so the star system they are from is not visible. Bashar communicates to us through what we, on Earth, would consider to be the future. If you ever have the opportunity to experience Darryl Anka channel Bashar, it would be well worth your efforts. It is quite a high energy experience.
115
30 Implants The main negative extraterrestrial groups that I am aware of are the Greys, the Reptilians from Orion, and a group called the Deros. These are all physical extraterrestrials and I would not recommend attuning to them because you donʹt want to attract them. As long as you stay in your power and stay attuned to the Christ force you have nothing to be concerned about. There are a very small number of negative extraterrestrial groups as compared to the positive ones. As I have mentioned, the Ashtar Command, Arcturians, and other highly evolved extraterrestrial groups protect the planet from most of them. I do want to make people aware of the issue of extraterrestrial implants. Most people think of these as just of a mechanical nature. There are many types of implants that have been placed in people in their subtler bodies. There are implants that have been placed in the astral, mental and etheric bodies also. Many people get frightened when this subject gets discussed and there is not need for this to happen. I have been told from sources of knowledge that I highly respect, that just about every person on planet Earth has them and this has been going on for the last ten million years. People have been functioning with them and living their lives and being successful for eons of time and will continue to do so. This does not mean, however, that they are helpful to your spiritual path. These implants can be removed in a very simple process that takes anywhere from 45 to 60 minutes. There are many people on the planet who are doing this work. My wife does this work with the help of Djwhal Khul and Vywamus. Anyone interested in having your implants cleared can contact us and it can be done over the phone and is very inexpensive. Our address will be in the back of the book. These implants on the different planes of reality are many sizes and shapes. They also have many different functions. One of the many functions is to suck
116
our light and energy from us. Some are used for a type of telepathic control. Some are to try and block us from our spiritual goals. They can be found in the chakras, in the glands, organs, above the head, and really all over the body. They are usually implanted in childhood, or at times of physical, mental, or emotional crisis and/or illness. Again, everyone has them and we can still function with them quite well, however, when we do have them it prevents us from operating at our full optimum potential. I could probably write a whole book on this subject, however this is not the time or place. I do highly recommend having them removed. The spiritual path is one of refinement and purification on all levels. You want to purify your physical body from toxins, and your emotional body from negative emotions, and mental body from impure thoughts, and your etheric body from impure energies. In the same sense for total God realization and optimum performance at some point in your spiritual progression you want to remove your extraterrestrial implants. This is a subject that very few people on planet Earth are even aware of, because very few people can even see them except for the physical mechanical ones. As we move towards the full realization of the new age this is something that is going to be coming more into the foreground of humanities awareness and that is why I am including this section in this book. These implants can subtly block our clarity, our vitality, our health, and prosperity. Please contact my wife, Terri, and myself if you feel guided to have them removed at this time. 117
31 The Association of Worlds Lyssa Royal, in her book, ʺThe Prism of Lyraʺ (which I would highly recommend), has described the Association of Worlds in the following manner: ʺThe Association is a group of physical and non‐physical beings from many realms who come together for a number of purposes. Some have called them a Galactic Confederation or Federation. There is no hierarchical structure of authority inherent in the association. The primary purposes for their interactions with Earth are: 1. To gently nudge humanity toward a greater awareness of itself and its place within the association. 2. To prevent a critical number of nuclear explosions on Earth, which can cause a rip in the fabric of space/time, affecting the galactic neighborhood.
118
32 Star People ʺThe term star born refers to the feeling and knowingness by some people that they have come to Earth from another planet or star systemʺ BRAD STEIGER ‐ AUTHOR The term Star People was popularized by two books written by the well known metaphysical author, Brad Steiger and his wife Sherry Hansen Steiger. They wrote two books, one called ʺStar Peopleʺ, and another called ʺStarbornʺ. The term Starborn refers to the feeling and knowingness by some people that they have come to earth from another planet or star system. Now it is important to understand here that everyone on planet Earth is an extraterrestrial, in the sense that we all came from heaven or God, and are all just visiting here. Even though this is the case, some peopleʹs past life history is more centered in the school house called Earth, and other people have been a part of other schools in the cosmos first. One is not better than another, they are just different pathways people have taken on their way back to the Creator. Many of the star people have memories of these other star systems and/or experiences with other UFO beings. Almost all these people saw themselves as here to be of service to mankind as we move into the new age. If the definition of star born includes having lifetimes on other dimensions of reality as Brad Steiger seems to indicate, then, in truth, every person on earth is a Star person. Brad Steiger tells in his book, ʺStarbornʺ, that he borrowed the term star people from the traditional Native American Indians. They believed that the stars are the residences of spiritual beings who have a connection with the people on Earth. Brad Steiger began to make a list of some of the qualities of star people that he found in his investigations. Some of these qualities and characteristics are as follows:
119
1. Eyes with an extremely compelling quality. 2. Great magnetism and personal charisma. 3. Very sensitive to electricity and electromagnetic fields. 4. Very sharp hearing. 5. Lower than normal body temperature. 6. A high percentage have an extra or transitional vertebrae. 7. At a young age, some kind of extraterrestrial, religious, or mystical experience. 8. A tremendous sense or urgency to fulfill oneʹs mission. 9. 65% were female and 35% male. 10. 90% have experienced a oneness with the universe. In Brad Steigerʹs book, ʺStar Bornʺ, he has compiled some interesting statistics on star people from the extensive research he has done with his questionnaires. The following statistics I have extracted from his book for your amusement and edification. Much thanks to Brad Steiger for his most interesting research. In the paired percentages below, the first number indicates the survey reponses in 1983; the second, the update taken in 1990. Chronic sinusitis ‐ 83%/94% Extra or transitional vertebrae ‐ 32%/34% Unusual blood types ‐ 28%/26% Lower than normal body temperature ‐ 92%/88% Low blood pressure ‐ 75%/70% Hypersensitivity to sound, light, odors, etc ‐ 97%/70% Swollen or painful joints ‐ ‐87%/70% Pain in the back of the neck ‐ 93%/73% Adversely affected by high humidity ‐ 84%/70% Have difficulty in expressing or dealing with emotions ‐ 74%/71% Experience a persistent feeling of great urgency to accomplish oneʹs mission ‐ 85%/92% 74% report out‐of‐body experiences. 57% claim the ability to perceive auras. 63% have experienced a white light during meditation. 50% have been able to accomplish dramatic healings of themselves or others. 38% practice automatic writing. 55% believe that they have received some form of communication from a higher intelligence. 60% have perceived spirit entities. 120
55% have experienced clairvoyance. 57% have made prophetic statements or experienced prophetic dreams or visions that have come to pass. 38% report the visitation of an angel. 37% reveal the manifestation of a Light Being. 35% feel that they have been blessed by the appearance of a Holy Figure. 50% are convinced that they have a spirit guide or a guardian angel. 40% admit to having had an invisible playmate as a child. 20% state that they once spotted an elf, a ʺwee personʺ. 14% have witnessed the activities of the fairy folk, the ʺgentryʺ. 34% are certain that they have encountered alien entities of an extraterrestrial or multidimensional nature. 55% report an intense religious experience. 72% claim an illumination experience. 90% have experienced telepathic communication with another entity, material or nonmaterial, human or alien. 48% are convinced that they have seen a ghost. 42% have perceived the spirit of a departed loved one. 67% accept reincarnation as reality and have experienced prior‐life memories. As we have already observed, 78% believe that they have lived a prior existence on another planet or in another dimension. 37% have survived a life‐threatening illness: 34% have been involved in a severe accident; and 55% have had a near‐death experience. In the fall of 1988, the editors of ʺBetter Homes and Gardensʺ did a survey in their magazine on the subject of religion and spirituality. This survey had nothing to do with the subject of star people, however, I thought you might find their results interesting. Their magazine reaches 36 million readers each month. The most that had ever responded to a survey they did was 25,000. This survey drew a response of 80,000 people, and more than 10,000 attached thoughtful letters. Their results as listed in Brad Steigerʹs book, ʺStar Bornʺ were as follows. (It must be said that this was not a scientific poll, but still clearly significant.) 89% believe in eternal life. 87% envision a heaven, but only 80% expect hell. 121
86% believe in miracles. 80% accept that prayer and meditation can lead to miraculous cures for diseases. 73% believe that it is possible to receive direct communication from God. 30% perceive of an astral realm 13% accept that it is possible to channel messages from the spirit world. 11% say that they believe in the reality of reincarnation. Brad Steiger also told of a Gallup Poll that was done around 1990 that was more scientifically accurate in terms of polling and the following results were found. 43% claimed to have undergone an unusual spiritual experience. 15% had a near‐death experience. 46% accept the possibility of life on other planets. 23% believe in reincarnation. 71% expect life after death. 95% believe in God or a Universal Spirit. Father Andrew Greeley, who holds a Ph.D. in sociology, together with colleagues at the University of Chicago, released the following polling data in the 1987 issue of American Health as also described in Brad Steigerʹs book. 42% of the adult population in the United States believe that they have been in contact with the dead, usually a deceased spouse or sibling. 29% have visions. 67% have experienced some manifestation of ESP. 73% believe in life after death. 68% perceive the afterlife to be Paradise; and 74% expect to be reunited with their loved ones after death.
122
33 The Organization of the Physical Universe
ʺThe stationary isle of paradise is the geographical center of infinity and the dwelling place of the Eternal God.ʺ THE URANTIA BOOKS
The Urantia book, for those of you who are not familiar with it, is another book that is truly a revelation of God. It is written by a commission of universal beings who reside in the capital of our superuniverse. In their writings they refer to Earth as ʺUrantiaʺ. I would like to share with you just two paragraphs from this book which deals with this question of how our physical universe is organized. These paragraphs I have referred back to many times since I first obtained this book. ʺYour world, Urantia, is one of many similar inhabited planets which comprise the local universe of ʺNebadonʺ. This universe, together with similar creations, makes up the super universe of ʺOrvontonʺ, from whose capital ʺUversaʺ, our comission hails. Orvonton is one of the seven evolutionary superuniverses of time and space which circle the never‐ beginning, never ending creation of divine perfection ‐‐‐ the central universe of ʺHavonaʺ. At the heart of this eternal and central universe is the ʺStationary Isle of Paradise, the geographic center of infinity and the dwelling place of the Eternal God.ʺ ʺThe seven evolving superuniverses in association with the central and divine universe, we commonly refer to as the ʺgrand universeʺ. These are the now organized and inhabited creations. They are all a part of the master universe, which also embraces the uninhabited but mobilizing universes of outer space.ʺ As I began to meditate on this description, what I began to realize is that the entire infinite universe is like one gigantic atom. The stationary isle of paradise is the only stationary point in all of creation. It, hence, is like the
123
nucleus of the atom. The super‐universes, universes, galaxies, solar systems are like the electrons, or protons and neutrons. Djwhal Khul once told me that the Monad had a nucleus to it. This made sense to me for the microcosm is like the macrocosm. To look at the smallest physical particle in the material universe, is to, in truth, get a glimpse of God in the macrocosmic level also. The Urantia book also states that the physical universe extends infinitely. The stationary isle of paradise is not a time creation but an eternal existence. It is the perfect and eternal nucleus of the master universe. The master universe includes all that I have told you about so far and also embraces the uninhabited but mobilizing universes of outer space. The Urantia book then divides the outer space regions into four levels. The first, second, third, and finally fourth outer space level. The fifth level they call open space. It states that the grand universe has an aggregate evolutionary potential of seven trillion inhabited planets. The grand universe includes everything in the universe but the outer space levels I have just mentioned. There is a potential for even more inhabited planets if the outer space levels are included. Our particular universe of Nebadon is one of the new universes in Godʹs creation. It lies on the outer edge of the grand universe. So our universe, from a physical standpoint is on the outer edge from the geographic or physical standpoint of the center of the universe. This, of course, has no effect, from a spiritual standpoint of being close to God, because time and space is really only an illusion of linear time.
124
34 Summary I have dedicated a great deal of time to talking about extra‐terrestrial civilizations in this chapter because I feel that it is time for the people of Earth to expand out of their egocentric self and reality. It is time to understand that our planet is part of a greater solar system, galaxy, universe, and omniuniverse of extraterrestrial life. Our solar system is just one of thousands upon thousands of solar systems with life in our galaxy. Our galaxy is just one galaxy of infinite numbers of galaxies with life within our universe. Our universe is just one universe with extraterrestrial life of infinite numbers of universes with physical and non physical life. Many of these life forms are totally different from life as we know it, yet all are an expression of God and evolving back to the Creator as we are. It is time for humanity to take its rightful place with the ʺInter‐ dimensional Federation of Free Worldsʺ within this omniuniverse. For too long, we have been run by our ego, which has made us think such absurd thoughts such as we are the only life in Godʹs infinite physical universe. Our planet is nothing more than one infinitely small electron in Godʹs infinite physical body. It is time for humanity to make this electron a healthy one and not a cancerous one. If the electron that is planet Earth can function in harmony, then the solar system that is an atom in Godʹs body can be healthy. If the solar system can function in harmony and in attunement to God, then the Milky Way Galaxy, which is nothing more than a molecule in the body of God can function in a healthy manner. If the galaxies or molecules can function in harmony then the universe, which might be considered an organ in the body of God, can function in a healthy manner. If the infinite number of universes function in a healthy manner, then Godʹs physical body will be healthy.
125
It is a fact that we are infinitely small in the grand scheme of things, however, we are also essential for the Divine Plan to be complete. One electron, not functioning properly, throws off the electrical and physical balance of the entire atom, molecule, and organ. This is why these extraterrestrial civilizations are so anxious to help us. For to help us is also to help themselves for, in truth, we are all one. We are all God. Just as there is a spiritual Hierarchy of interconnectedness, there is also a limitless connectedness on the physical and material plane. It is time for the people of planet Earth to recognize not only the oneness of planet Earth, but also the oneness of our solar system, galaxy, universe, and omni‐universes on the physical level. Earth has been isolated from the solar, galactic, universal, confederations and council meetings that interconnect all of physical reality because of our complete and total egocentrism and lack of belief in God and our true purpose for living. These chapters on the extraterrestrials have been a systematic attempt to expand our consciousness beyond the artificial shell and fence that has been created by our ego, and the Illuminati and secret dark force government that we have allowed to run our country and planet Earth as a whole. When we can break out of this stranglehold, we will be openly and most graciously removed from our cosmic isolation and accepted as conscious members of the infinite interconnected physical universe that is one of the seven heavens of God.
126
Part Two:
The Ancient Mystery Schools
127
35 The Angelic Hierarchy
ʺ I saw them with my bodily eyes as well as I see you; and when they left me, I wept; and I fain would have had them take me with them, too.ʺ JEANNE DʹARC
Djwhal Khul, in his teachings, has outlined seven great kingdoms that are evolving on planet earth. 1. Mineral Kingdom 2. Plant 3. Animal 4. Kingdom of Humanity 5. Kingdom of Souls 6. Kingdom of Planetary Lives 7. Kingdom of Solar Lives Each of these kingdoms is, in a sense, an incarnation of God. There is only one being in the infinite universe and that is God. We are all an expression of this One being, and this includes the mineral, plant and animal kingdoms. In this book, so far I have been focusing on the kingdoms of humanity, souls, planetary and solar lives. In this chapter I would like to focus on the mineral, plant and animal kingdoms, along with two other kingdoms of a totally different order than human beings. These two kingdoms are that of the Angels, and the Elohim. The Angels and the Elohim are a totally different species of beings than human‐kind. I will begin this chapter with attempting to explain these two distinct kingdoms of beings.
128
The Elohim The Elohim are the creators Gods. These are the Beings that God created to help Him create the infinite universe. In some teachings the Elohim are referenced as the though attributes of God, where the angels are referenced as the feelings of God. The term Elohim means ʺAll that God isʺ, and is plural which means many Gods. This is an interesting fact because this term is used in the old testament over 2,500 times as the name of God. So God did not create the universe Himself, He had helpers, which are the Elohim. The term Elohim is also one of the power names of God in the Kaballah, which is the book of Jewish mysticism. In the Kaballah, it is referenced as the ʺDivine Motherʺ. The term Yod Hey Vod Hay or Jehovah is referenced as the divine Father. The term Elohim is one of the most powerful mantras a person can say. Paul Solomon, in his channelings of the Universal Mind, was told in these channelings to have his students use this mantrum in their meditations above all other mantras. This is quite an interesting piece of information, given that Paul Solomonʹs training before beginning his source channelings, was as a Southern Baptist minister. The Greek word for the Elohim is Exousiai. Rudolph Steiner, the great German mystic, called the Elohim the Spirits of Form. In the bible it describes the Elohim as saying ʺWe and Our Imageʺ, that humans are created. The book, ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ refers to the Elohim as those beings that created the world by the will of YHWH, YHWH being the Jewish name for the Godhead. The Elohim and Angels might be thought of as the left and right hand of God. They are direct extensions of the Creator. Each Elohim has a male and female aspect. and there are seven Great Elohim, just as there are seven great rays emanating from the Creator. The names of the Seven Mighty Elohim are: 1. Hercules and Amazonia 2. Apollo and Lumina 3. Heros and Amora 129
4. Purity and Astrea 5. Cyclopia and Virginia 6. Peace and Aloha 7. Arcturus and Victoria The Angels There is a lot more information available about the angels than the Elohim because the angels work very closely with the kingdoms of earth. The study of angels is a vast subject and I will attempt to give you the basics and a skeletal sketch of their function on this planet and also throughout the Cosmos. The first important thing to understand about angels is that they do not have free will as we have. A lot of people donʹt realize this. Angels are direct manifestations of the Creator, have no will separate from their source. As I mentioned already, they are like Godʹs right arm. When we pray to God, God does not come Himself, he sends His angels. There is an entire Hierarchy of Angelic beings just as there are in the human, planetary, and solar kingdoms of human beings. Angels are governed by Archangels. The Archangels are the directors and the angelic hosts do the work. They do have specific likes and dislikes and individual characteristics. They have been created to perform certain tasks and they do a wonderful job in performing these tasks. The Archangels and the Seven Great Rays The following is a chart of the seven great rays and the Archangels who govern and serve on these rays. Also listed are the attributes and qualities of Archangels and Chohans who serve on these rays. 130
THE SEVEN SPHERES Ray Master First El Morya Second Kuthumi Third Venetian Fourth Serapis Bey Fifth Hilarion Sixth Jesus Seventh St. Germain women), Mystics
Archangel Michael Jophiel Chamuel Gabriel Raphael Uriel Zadkiel
Qualities Natural Service Protection, Power Rulers, Executives Initiative Illumination, Wisdom Teachers, Students Perception Love, Tolerance, Arbitors, Gratitude Peacemakers Purity, Resurrection, Artists, Musicians Artistic Development Concentration, Truth Doctors, Inventors Scientific Development Devotional Worship, Priests, Ministers, Ministration, Peace Healers Ordered Service, Diplomats, gentlemen Culture, Refinement (or
Diplomacy, Invocation
The Orientals refer to Angels as Devas. The Angelic evolution is a parallel to that of human beings. The angels who cooperate with the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet are more focused on the ʺformʺ aspect of our planet. The Hierarchy is more focused on the consciousness that lives within the form. Because angels do not have free will, they are not yet ʺself‐consciousnessʺ as we are. They evolve through feeling, and not the power of conscious thought. Angels seek to feel where human beings seek to know. It is important to understand that there are angels working on all the different dimensions of reality. Those angels of the higher planes consciously cooperate with the Hierarchy and are considered totally equal to all ranks and grades within the Hierarchy. When people think of angels, they are usually thinking of the Archangels that sit at the throne of God and perform services for God at humanʹs request. This is not a true picture of the whole process. There is a Hierarchy of Angelic Beings moving down all the dimensions all the way down into matter itself. It is angels or devas that are the mother of all form. There are untold numbers of fairies, gnomes, elves, elementals, nymphs, dryads, fauns, nature spirits, salamanders, sylphs, undines, brownies, satyrs to name just a few. Every plant, nature area, forest, meadow, has a hierarchy 131
of devas that are responsible for it. All dense physical form, be it an animal, plant, mineral, or precious stone, are being created by these infinitesimal elemental beings under the direction of devas who are in charge of their particular manifestation. Later in this chapter I will go into much greater detail in explaining the kingdom of the nature spirits and elemental kingdoms, but for right now I would first like to give you an overview of the working of the angels of all the planes and dimensions of reality. Angels are genderless, or maybe a better term is androgenous. They have both male and female characteristics. The word angel itself is derived from the Greek word, angelos, which means messenger. They are the heavenly messengers of the universe. We are in a third great wave of angel contact on this planet. The first wave was in biblical times. The second wave came at medieval times and in this third wave they are reaching out to everyone. Angels have appeared throughout history to individuals at critical times in history. Many people do not know this, but Mohammed, who was the prophet for the Islamic religion, was a channel for the Archangel Gabriel. Mary, the Mother of Jesus, was told by Archangel Gabriel that she was going to have the Christ child. Gabriel came to the prophet Daniel to help him interpret his dreams. Jacob wrestled with the angel. There are many good books about angels, and channeled by angels in more recent times. The two books I would recommend most are, ʺAsk Your Angelsʺ, by Alma Daniel, and the ʺStar Seed Transmissionsʺ by Ken Carey. This last book is a channeling of the Archangel Raphael. It is one of the most profound channelings I have ever read. It is possible to get the book on audio cassette tape with Ken Carey reading the book which is even more profound than reading it yourself. The book, ʺAsk Your Angelsʺ, is the best overview of the Angelic kingdom I have found. The goal of the deva or angelic evolution is to become individualized, and then to become humans in a future cycle. This occurs for all devas below the rank of Solar Pitris. The term Pitris is an esoteric term for angel. Another interesting fact is that it is also possible for humans to, on occasion, enter into the Angelic Kingdom. 132
Another fascinating fact about angels is that it is possible for them to incarnate into physical bodies and take on human form. Some of the people you know may actually be angels rather than of the human kingdom. At some point in the far and distant future it is part of the divine plan that these two evolutions should come together. Another interesting fact is that all the angels that have not yet achieved individualization and free choice status will eventually be pulled back into source and cease to exist when their mission is complete. One last interesting fact is that some angels actually do have wings. The Spiritual Hierarchy of the Angelic Kingdom Most people do not understand that there are many different kinds of angels. The angels that most people are familiar with are called the Seraphim. There are many other kinds however, as I have listed in the following diagram. First Sphere Second Sphere Third Sphere Heavenly counselors Heavenly Governors Heavenly Messengers 1. Seraphim 4. Dominions 7. Principalities 2. Cherabim 5. Virtues 8. Archangels 3. Thrones 6. Powers 9. Angels Angels The angels are the beings that humanity is most familiar with. They are the ones that work closest with humanity. The angels work under the direction of the Archangels. They are the worker bees. Each person has a guardian angel, and this being would fit into this category. There are infinite numbers of angels that work with us or are available to us. Some of these are: Angels of Healing, Illumination, Creativity, Nature, Music, Dance, Writing and Literature, Protection, Emotions, Politics, Science and Technology, Devotion, Purity, Information, Salvation, Environment, Transformation, Peace, Art, Relationships, Purity, Ceremonial Order and Magic. All one really has to do is invoke them and they are happy to come and serve. 133
The Archangels The Archangels have a higher rank than the Angels. In some systems of thought they have been called the Overlighting Angels, since they serve larger areas of human life. It is the names of the Archangels that we, in the Western world are most familiar with. The most well known are the Archangels that head the seven great rays of God. Each of these Archangels also has its feminine counterpart. Ray 1. Michael and Faith Ray 2. Jophiel and Christine Ray 3. Chamuel and Charity Ray 4. Gabriel and Hope Ray 5. Raphiel and Mother Mary Ray 6. Uriel and Arora Ray 7. Zadkiel and Amethyst One other system of understanding the archangels is to see them in relationship to the Kabbalistic Tree of Life. This system of understanding presents some of the Archangels that you might not be as familiar with. In a later chapter I will spend a great deal of time explaining the Kabbalistic Tree of Life, however, for our purposes in this chapter I thought that you might find this interesting as to its relationship to the Archangels. Principalities At even a higher level than the Archangels are the Angelic Beings called the Principalities. These Beings are the guardians of large groups, like cities, nations, or multinational corporations. One of the Beings holds, for example, a unified global order in its heart for planet earth. Powers The lowest level Being in the second sphere or Hierarchy of Angels is called the Powers. They are the bearers of conscience, and the keepers of the collective history of earth. The angels of death and birth are part of this group. These Beings are able to draw down the energy of the Divine Plan for 134
earth, that enables Them to bring a vision to humanity of the spiritual interconnectedness of things. Virtues Above the Powers is another set of Angelic Beings called the Virtues. The Virtues are able to send out massive amounts of Divine energy and virtuous qualities to humanity on earth. Dominions Above the Virtues in the Angelic Hierarchy are the Dominions. These Angelic Beings govern the activities of all the Angelic Beings and groups that work below them in this second sphere. They might be called the divine bureaucrats. They also help to integrate and blend the material and spiritual worlds. The Dominions do not have much contact with individual soul extensions on earth. Thrones The Thrones are the third level of the first sphere or Hierarchy of Angels. They are the heavenly counselors, and companion Angels of all the planets. Cherubim The Cherubim are the heavenly counselors that work above the Thrones in the Angelic Hierarchy. They are the Guardians of the Light throughout the universe. They usually do not have much personal contact with beings on earth. ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ says that these Beings are also involved with the keeping of the celestial records. The Urantia book speaks of how the Cherubim work very intimately with the Sanobim. They work as helpers and assistants to the Seraphim which are the Angels at the next level up on the first sphere of the hierarchical order of angels. 135
The Urantia book also has divided the cherubim into three categories. 1. The first is the ascension candidates. These cherubim are the most advanced and have the opportunity and potential to become Seraphim. 2. The second category is the midphase Cherubim. 3. The third level of Cherubim the Urantia book refers to as the Morontia Cherubim. This term is by no means meant in a derogatory way. It is interesting however, that the term moron, which is so negatively stigmatized in our culture probably came from this spiritual category of angels, who are not as advanced as the ascension candidates. All this category means is that they will probably remain in their jobs as Cherubim and Sanobim. The midphase Cherubim will also probably remain in their present position with a few of the more gifted ones achieving limited Seraphic service. In all essential endowments the Cherubim, and Sanobim are similar to Seraphim. They have the same origin but different destinies. They are very intelligent, efficient, affectionate, and almost human‐like. They usually serve in pairs. The Cherubim and Sanobim are the faithful and efficient routine workers on planets throughout the universe. They do not serve as attending angels to human beings. That is a Seraphic privilege. When assigned to a planet they enter a local course of training including a study of the planetary usages of languages. They are continually engaged in efforts of self improvement and most of all proper service of their mission. The Seraphim The highest order of angels in the first sphere is the Seraphim. These are great celestial angels that are supposed to surround the throne of God. They are the regulators of the movements of the heavens and have untold responsibilities in the administration of Godʹs infinite universe. There are twelve Master Seraphim that are working with the supervision of planet earth. 1. The Epochal Angels ‐ These celestial Beings are entrusted with the oversight and direction of the affairs of each generation and root race. 2. The Progress Angels ‐ These Seraphim are entrusted with the task of initiating the evolutionary process of the successive social ages. They foster the development of the inherent progressive trend of evolutionary creatures. 3. The Religious Guardians ‐ These are the angels of the churches.
136
4. The Angels of Nation Life ‐ These are the angels of the trumpets, the directors of the political performance of earth life. They are also involved in international relations. 5. The Angels of the Races ‐ These angels work for the conservation of the evolutionary races regardless of political and religious affiliations. 6. The Angels of the Future ‐ These are the angels that forecast and predict the future age and are hence the architects of future eras. 7. The Angels of enlightenment ‐ These angels are involved with planetary education, along with mental and moral training as it concerns individuals, families, groups, schools, communities, nations, and whole races. 8. The Angels of Health ‐ The healing corps of angels. 9. The Home Seraphim ‐ These angels are dedicated to the preservation and advancement of the home, which is the basic institution of human civilization. 10. The Angels of Industry ‐ This group of angels is involved with fostering the industrial development and improving economic conditions for the people of the earth. 11. The Angels of Diversion ‐ These angels foster the values of play, humor, rest and human leisure. 12. The Angels of Super Human Ministry ‐ These are the angels of the angels. These Beings are assigned to minister to all other superhuman life on planet earth. The Cosmic Seraphim The book I have mentioned, called ʺThe Urantia Bookʺ, is like an encyclopedia, not of planet earth, but rather of Godʹs infinite physical universe. It is so unbelievable in its scope of information that it is almost impossible to read except in little tidbits and excerpts. Whether the information is all accurate is hard to say, but what I would say is that it is hard for me to believe that anyone could make up such vast amounts of super detailed information about the nature of the organization of the universe. I bring this point up only to share with you what this book says about the cosmic order of the Seraphim far beyond the scope of this infinitesimally small planet called earth. ʺThe Urantia Bookʺ has divided the Seraphim on the cosmic level into seven great groups. Each of these seven great groups is then subdivided into seven 137
subdivisions in terms of the cosmic hierarchy of Seraphic Angels, administering to planets and star systems throughout the omniuniverse. The Cosmic Hierarchy of the Seraphim 1. The Supreme Seraphim A. The son‐spirit ministers B. Bestowal attendants C. Universe orientation D. The teaching counselors E. The directors of assignment F. The recorders G. The unattached ministers. 2. Superior Seraphim A. The intelligence corps B. The voice of mercy C. Spirit co‐ordinators D. Assistant teachers E. The transporters F. The recorders G. The reserves 3. Supervisor Seraphim A. Supervising assistants B. Law forecasters C. Architects D. Ethical sensitizers E. The transporters F. The recorders G. The reserves 4. Administrator Seraphim A. Administrative assistants B. Justice guides C. Interpreters of cosmic citizenship D. Quickeners of morality E. Transporters 138
F. Recorders G. Reserves 5. Planetary Helpers A. The voices of the garden B. The spirits of brotherhood C. The souls of peace D. The spirits of trust E. The transporters F. The recorders G. The reserves 6. The Transition Ministers A. Seraphic Evangels B. Racial interpreters C. Mind planners D. Morontia counselors E. Technicians F. Recorder ‐ Teachers G. Ministering reserves 7. Seraphim of the Future A. Categories not listed for this group. Each of the groups I have listed here are groups of Angelic Beings that serve Godʹs divine plan in some cosmic capacity. The reason I have included this little section is to give you an intuitive sense of the vastness of Godʹs networking of Divine Beings through His universe. This is just one group of angels. Because of space in this book I am not including a deeper explanation of all the specific functions of these Beings beyond their title. If you would like to look up this information, I would recommend reading pages 426 to 442 in the Urantia book. This book is obviously a channeled book. The channeling comes from a commission of Beings from a planet or star system called Uversa which they say is, the capital of one of the seven superuniverses of time and space of which earth is a part, called Orvonton. 139
Nature Devas There are many types of devas, both subhuman and super human. There are also many different hierarchies of devas that are distinctly different from the human kingdoms Hierarchy, although work in perfect harmony with the other hierarchies. Djwhal Khul has referred to The greater builders as the Solar Pitris (Angel). The lesser builders are referred to as lunar Pitris (angels). The lunar Pitris are all the nature spirits. Each group of devas has some specific work and method of development whereby they attain their goals and evolve. The violet devas path of evolvement lies through feeling, and education mankind, and in perfecting the physical body. The green devas path of service is focused in the realm of magnetization of energies which protect plant and vegetable life, and sacred spots on the earth. The white devas work lies in guarding of individuals of the human family, and control of the water and air elementals, and the fish kingdom. The devas evolution is speeding up now in accordance with the human family. There is another group of devas that have recently arrived from another planetary scheme. They have passed through the human kingdom and are equal in rank with certain members of the Hierarchy and have chosen, like Bodhsattvas, to stay and work with the earth plane. Djwhal Khul has said that there are twelve of these Angel Masters of sorts, and four work in the violet group, five in the green group, and two in the white group. Working under these groups that I have mentioned in the above paragraph are three subsidiary groups which work under the violet, white and green devas. Group 1. Here are found all the elementals working with the etheric doubles of mankind, and all elementals working with the etheric bodies of all inanimate objects. The violet devas are on an evolutionary path. The elementals are on the involutionary path, and their goal is to evolve into the deva kingdom with the violet color. Group 2. In this group are found the fairies and elves who build and color the flowers. The elementals who work with the vegetables, fruits, and with all the verdure that covers the earthʹs surface. Also connected with this group are 140
the devas of magnetization that are connected to stones, talismans, and the sacred spots of the earth. There is one last group of devas that are in this group that are found around the habitations of the Masters who live on earth. Group 3. These work with the elementals of the air, sea, the sylphs, water fairies, and the devas who guard human beings. The Solar Pitris are omnipresent superphysical agents of the creative will of the Logos. They are directors of all natural forces, laws, processes, solar, interplanetary, and planetary. The Solar and Lunar Pitris (angels) are all subservient to and expressive of God and Godʹs will. The devas live on all planes of consciousness, etheric, astral, mental, and spiritual. The tiny individual devas which make up the soul body or causal body come from the sun and are hence also called the solar Pitris. The lunar Pitris make up our lower bodies. At some point in the distant future the human evolution and devic evolution will come together. As we learn to work more closely with the deva evolution, they will teach us how to heal and control our etheric bodies to a greater degree. There are also devas with which humanity does not have direct contact that play a crucial role in transmitting prana and life force to mankind from the sun.
141
36 Pan and the Nature Spirits
ʺI am a servant of Almighty God and I and my subjects are willing to come to the aid of mankind in nature if he affirms belief in us and asks for our help.ʺ PAN
Nature spirits are themselves an angelic order. These devas and nature spirits hold the presiding patterns that oversee all living and growing things on planet earth. This includes the mineral, plant, and animal kingdoms along with the creation of the four elements of fire, air, earth, and water. Even our human bodies are governed by these nature spirits. In this last example the nature spirits would be the spiritual equivalent to the infinite numbers of cells, organisms, and microorganisms that work together to help our organs, glands, and physical body to function properly. The world of devas and nature spirits is the most wonderful and fascinating reality a person can possible imagine. It is a world filled with fairies, elves, gnomes, sylphs, salamanders, undines, brownies, satyrs, dwarves, goblins, fauns, trolls, elementals, and last but not least Pan, who is the God of the nature spirits. It is a world so fascinating that it makes ʺAlice in Wonderlandʺ look completely unimaginative. To begin this discussion, there are two groups that must be differentiated. The devas would correspond to our idea of an architect. They are the angelic beings that are the guiding force which gives form and structure and energy to the plant world. They carry the archetypal patterns for each of the material forms. The nature spirits are a little different in function than the devas. The nature spirits actually do the work of building the plant world. The nature spirits actually channel the etheric forces they receive to physically build the
142
particular plant pattern they are receiving from the deva. The nature spirits are like the physical workers who carry out the plan. They express great delight and joy in their work. They vary in size from a fraction of an inch to elves that are three to four feet tall. All nature spirits are under the God, Pan. He is a most loving Being who serves God by guiding all the nature beings who work under His authority. Pan is half man and half goat in appearance. Unfortunately He has been negatively stigmatized in our society and this is all based on illusion. A Glimpse Into the World of Nature Spirits The nature spirits are, for the most part, composed of etheric matter, so very few people on planet earth are able to see them in their full glory, variety and numbers. Probably one of the best accounts I have ever found is in my studies of the Findhorn material. Findhorn is a spiritual community in Scotland. It was started by Peter and Eileen Caddy, and Dorothy Maclean and Lena Lamont. Latter in the development of this community David Spangler and a man by the name of R. Ogilvie Crombie became very involved. The fascinating thing about this group of people was that they each had very specific and unique talents. Eileen Caddy was a channel for God. Dorothy Maclean was a clear channel for the deva kingdom. David Spangler was a channel for a being called Limitless Love and Light. R. Ogilvie Crombie had the gift of being able to clairvoyantly see and talk to the nature spirits. The combination of all these four individuals covered all the bases of inner guidance into these unseen worlds. A fascinating story was told by Peter Caddy. Peter was not a channel, but rather represented the human worker aspect of their group. Peter was the one who was in charge of the physical work of creating the Findhorn Garden. One day he asked a young man by the name of Dennis to cut back the bushes that were interfering with the growth of some of the trees in the garden. The problem was that there were ʺgorse flowersʺ that had just bloomed covering this particular bush. Peter boldly ordered Dennis to cut the bush anyway.
143
Dorothy Maclean, the channel for the devas, was almost in tears saying that Peter was butchering them. Peter was quite stubborn and said, ʺOh, donʹt be so damned silly.ʺ The next thing he knew after destroying the flowers, he got an emergency call from Crombie. Crombie asked Peter what he was doing to upset all the nature spirits in the garden. Peter didnʹt know. Crombie came to Findhorn and found himself surrounded by a throng of little gorse elves who were all extremely upset. They said to Crombie, ʺWe thought Findhorn was a place where there was cooperation between man and the nature spirits. How, in heavenʹs name, could they have done such an awful thing as destroy our homes?ʺ It turns out that the elves lived in the gorse blossoms. They went on to tell Crombie that they had all left the garden and refused to work there any longer because of this thoughtless destruction. Crombie went on to explain to the elves that this had been unintentional, and that this type of cooperation was new, and that they were all extremely sorry. Later a little ceremony was held in front of the bushes and Peter apologized profusely. The elves accepted his apology and agreed to return to work. If this happened to Peter in the Findhorn garden, can you imagine what the nature spirits go through on planet earth as a whole. In our culture today mankind takes a totally scientific mechanistic attitude towards nature. We have absolutely no relationship to these infinite number of tiny beings that are in actuality doing all the work. We grow crops almost in defiance of nature, with chemical fertilizers, insecticides, which banish the fairies from our gardens, let alone the cruelty and selfish wanton destruction we perpetuate upon it. It is a wonder these wonderful little beings are willing to help us at all. On the other side of the coin, fairies will draw close to those who love them, and love to grow things. They are obviously very forgiving beings, something that humans could learn from. Some of these nature spirits will evolve to the angelic kingdom. It must be understood that even the stones are inhabited by these tiny etheric beings. Have you ever stopped to think what causes a flower to bloom, or be a certain color, or have a certain fragrance? It is these tiny etheric beings that work ceaselessly to manifest these things. Behind all of nature are beings large and 144
small, working under the direction and control of an angel on one of the seven great rays. These nature spirits are carrying the life force that they receive to beautify the form, color, and fragrance of flowers and plants. Something you might not be aware of is the fact that the plant kingdom on planet earth is one of the most advanced in this entire Milky Way galaxy of planets. It would behoove us humans to enjoy more often, the wonderful work the nature spirits are doing even though mankind has lived like a parasite instead of a caretaker of his environment. The fairy spirits working in our gardens usually do not take much notice of humans, however they do very much respond to hour harmonious and loving thoughts. Another very interesting fact is that these little beings are also connected to the jewels we wear, if the wearer loves and treats them kindly. R. Ogilvie Crombie Crombie tells a most fascinating story of his first encounter with this kingdom. His story really began when he was four years old, when he dropped a penny into a wishing well and prayed that he would be able to see fairies and talk to them. Little did he know that 63 years later, God and the nature kingdom would grant his wish and prayer. His first experience came one day upon walking in the botanical gardens of Edinburgh. He sat down under a tree when all of a sudden a figure appeared dancing around a tree about 25 yards away. It was three feet tall and he realized it was a ʺfaunʺ. A faun is a being that is half human and half animal. It had shaggy legs ending in cloven hooves, pointed ears and chin and two little horns on itʹs forehead. This faun danced around a tree three times, and then sat down cross legged in front of Crombie, having no idea that Crombie was actually able to see him. When Crombie said, ʺhelloʺ he leaped into the air with a start. To make a long story short, he wet on to tell Crombie that his work was to help the trees. He also said that the nature spirits have lost interest in the human race since they have been made to feel that they are neither believed in nor wanted.
145
He went on to tell Crombie that his name was Kurmos. He also wanted to know why human beings wrap themselves up in such strange coverings? Crombie and Kurmos had a long talk, and Kurmos even came back with Crombie to his apartment. He ended by saying that he would come if Crombie called him in the gardens again. Kurmos was true to his word. About a month later Crombie had an even more extraordinary experience. He was walking along the National Gallery and he became aware of a figure walking beside him that was taller than he was. It was a faun radiating a tremendous power. A conversation ensued and he became instantly aware that this was Pan, the God of all nature. Approximately one month later Crombie was walking in a nature area and he saw a large figure lying on the ground. It was a monk in a brown habit with the hood pulled over the head. As this Being stood up, it was Pan and He was over 25 feet tall. Pan smiled and said, ʺI am a servant of Almighty God and I and my subjects are willing to come to the aid of mankind in Nature if he affirms belief in us and asks for our help.ʺ This was the beginning of a reconciliation between Pan, the Nature spirits and man. Approximately four months later Crombie was walking and all of a sudden Pan appeared at his side. Pan quickly stepped behind Crombie and then walked into him so that they became one, and so Crombie could see the world through Panʹs eyes. The moment this happened the woods were alive with a myriad number of beings. He saw elementals, nymphs, dryads, fauns, elves, gnomes, fairies, and other beings too numerous to categorize. He saw two beautiful elfin creatures three or four feet tall. He saw tiny little beings not more than a fraction of an inch swarming around a toadstool Many of the nature spirits danced around Crombie in a ring. All of the nature spirits were welcoming and full of joy and love. Crombie felt like he was outside of time and space, which he was. As he walked he was aware of holding Pan‐pipes and having shaggy legs with cloven hoofs. Crombie began to dance down the path himself. When Crombie had reached the spot on the path where the experience began, Pan withdrew His presence and Crombie walked home in silence. 146
The Elemental Kingdom The four basic elements of nature are fire, air, earth and water. Within each of these four elements are nature spirits that are the spiritual essence of these four basic elements. The nature spirits that make up the earth are called gnomes. The nature spirits of the water are called undines. The nature spirits of fire are called salamanders. The nature spirits of the air are called sylphs. These beings are made up of an etheric substance that is unique and specific to their particular element. These elemental beings are living entities oftentimes resembling humans in shape, and inhabiting worlds of their own. They have the power to change their size and appearance almost at will. They cannot, however, change elements. A gnomeʹs work is specific to the earth, and cannot change into a fire, air, or water elemental. The elementals take their orders from the devas. These little elemental beings are not immortal. When their work is done they are absolved back into the ocean of spirit. They do remain individualized as humans are. These tiny beings are animated by the thought power of the lower angels and so in themselves are thought forms of sorts. In reality, however, everything in Godʹs universe is created from thought. These beings may be etheric thought forms, however, they have etheric flesh, blood, and bones. They live, propagate offspring, eat, talk, act and sleep. They cannot be destroyed by grosser material elements such as fire, air, earth and water, because they are etheric in nature. The live until a great age. The gnomes of the earth have the shortest age of the four. The average age of life is from 300 to 1000 years. The following chart gives a list of some of the sub‐beings that make up each group. Gnomes Undines Salamanders Sylphs Pygmies Oceanid Fire spirits Air spirits Sylvestres Oreades Satyrs Nereides Dryads Limoniades Hamadryads Naides Durdalis Water spirits Elves Sea maids Brownies Mermaids 147
Earth spirits Pans
Potamides Water spirits
Gnomes The female gnome is called a gnomides. There are many types of gnomes as I have listed. These beings have great power over the rocks and mineral elements of the earth, and also over the mineral elements in the animal and human kingdom. The pygmies work with the stones, gems, metals, and are supposed to be the guardians of the hidden treasures. There may be some association here with the leprechauns. The gnomes build their houses out of a substance that resembles alabaster, marble and cement. Some gnome families gather and live in large communities, and other indigenous to the substances in which they work. The pygmies are also involved in the cutting of crystals, and the developing of veins of ore. They type of gnome most frequently seen looks like a dwarf and is twelve to eighteen inches tall. These beings are called brownies or elves. They usually look rather old with white beards. They can be seen scampering out of holes in the stumps of trees and sometimes vanishing into the tree itself. The gnomes meet at certain times of the year in great conclaves, where they discuss the beauty and harmony of nature, and the prospects of a bountiful harvest. The King of the gnomes is called Gob. Hence his subjects are often called goblins. The gnomes marry and have families. The gnomes are said to have insatiable appetites. They earn their food by their very diligent and conscientious work. The gnomes have dwellings, clothing, manners, customs, languages, and governments of their own. They often live inside the earth. They usually wear caps on their heads and have long, tight leg coverings, wearing a tunic, with a band around the waist. The gnomes are very kind and friendly to humans. They are repelled by humans who are selfish and misuse their power. They respond well to love as do all the elementals, and nature spirits. The food they eat is a food that is 148
composed of their own element. and not any kind that we humans eat. There is a queen gnome, however I do not know her name. When man develops etheric vision he will be able to see these wonderful beings. Undines The undines are the elemental beings that compose water. They are able to control, to a great degree, the course and function of the water element. The undines, etheric in nature, exist actually, within the water element and that is why they can be seen with normal physical vision. The concept of the mermaid is connected with these elemental beings. These beings are beautiful to look at and are very graceful. They are often seen riding the waves of the ocean. They can also be found in rocky pools, or in marshlands. They are clothed in a shimmery substance looking like water, but shining with all the colors of the sea, with green predominating. The undines also work with the plants that grow under the water, and with the motion of water. Some undines inhabit waterfalls, and others rivers and lakes. Every fountain has its nymph. Every ocean has its oceanids. The undines closely resemble humans in appearance and size, except for those inhabiting smaller streams or ponds. The undines often live in coral caves under the ocean, or on the shores of lakes, or banks of rivers. Smaller undines live under lily pads. The undines work with the vital essences and liquids of plants, animals, and human beings. They are present in everything containing water. There are many families of undines as I have listed on my chart. The ruler of the Undines is a being called Necksa. The undines love, serve and honor her unceasingly. They are emotional beings, and very friendly to humans, and very open to being of service to human beings. The smaller undines are often seen as winged beings that people have mistakenly called fairies. These winged beings are seen near flowers that grow in watery areas. They have gossamer wings and gossamer clothing. 149
Salamanders The salamanders are the spirits of fire. Without these beings material fire cannot exist. You cannot light a match without a salamander being present. There are many families of salamanders, differing in size, appearance, and dignity. Some people have seen them as small balls of light, however most commonly they have been seen as lizard like in shape, and about a foot or more in length. The salamanders are considered the strongest and most powerful of all the elementals. Their ruler is a magnificent flaming being called Djin. Those who have seen him say that he is terrible and yet awe inspiring in appearance. Salamanders have the ability to extend their size or diminish it as needed. If you ever need to light a campfire in the wilderness call to the salamanders and they will help you. It has also been said that salamanders and the other elemental beings can be mischievous at times. For example a fiery temper and inharmonious conditions in a personʹs home can cause these beings to make trouble. They are like children in that they donʹt know what they are doing. They are greatly affected as are all nature spirits by mankindʹs thinking. Sylphs The sylphs are the air spirits. Sylphs are the highest of all the elementals, because their element is the highest vibratory rate. They live hundreds of years, often reaching 1000 years and never seeming to get old. The female sylphs are called sylphs. The sylphs are said to live on the tops of mountains. The leader of the sylphs is a being called Paralda, who is said to dwell on the highest mountain of earth. The sylphs often assume human form, but only for short periods of time. They vary in size from being as large as a human, to much smaller. The sylphs are very volatile and changeable. The winds are their particular vehicle. They work through the gasses and ethers of the earth and are kindly towards humans. 150
They are usually seen with wings, looking like cherubs or fairies. Another of their functions if to help man receive inspiration because of their connection to air which is associated with the mental aspect. The sylphs are drawn to those who use their minds, particularly those in the creative arts. Other Types of Elementals There is another type of elemental being that is different from the spirits of the four elements I have just mentioned. These beings are called elementals, also, but are created by thought from elemental essence. This is one of the reasons why it is so important for humans to control their thoughts. Even the elementals of the fire, air, earth, and water are greatly affected by our thoughts, for the good or bad. As I have previously mentioned, negative thoughts such as violence, depression, and fear actually create these little elemental beings. Edgar Cayce, in his Universal Mind readings, used to always say that ʺthoughts are thingsʺ. These elementals that are created by our negative thoughts are called astral elementals. As long as a person strives for self mastery over their three lower vehicles or bodies, physical, astral, mental, and serves their soul and the ideal of love, no person will be troubled or hurt to any degree by these elemental entities. An example of the creation of the negative elementals might be seen in a person who is an alcoholic. By drinking too much alcohol this person may fall into a drunken stupor, and then see very unpleasant creatures that are not really hallucinations, but in reality elemental forms created from the thinking of his lower self which is out of control. Other types of people who give free reign to their anger and violent passions will actually see a different type of elemental being that looks like an army of devils. They are creatures about twelve to eighteen inches in height, a fiery red, with horns and a tail. These can actually be seen by psychics. Depression will create elementals of a more clinging nature. On the other side of the coin we can create elementals of a happy and service oriented nature. All thought which is repeated over and over again draws to it the elemental substance. One example would be the mother of a son or 151
daughter who is sent out to the battle field to do service. The love of the mother that goes forth day after day and surrounds her beloved child with prayers and visualizations of protection will create an actual thought form which is then ensouled by an elemental. This elementalʹs task is to carry out the wishes of the person who created it, in this case the mother. It becomes almost like a shield of protection surrounding the person as the elemental being strives to carry out the pattern of the thought. Djwhal Khul has stated that it is important that man should refrain from manipulation of these forces until that time when he has unfolded the consciousness of the soul and attained a certain level and degree of self mastery. For just as the astral elementals can cause problems for a person who lives in victim consciousness, so can the devas of the astral plane. If a person is victim of their physical body, feelings, emotions, desires, and thoughts, they can also be controlled by devic life of a lower order. All dense physical form, be it mineral, plant, animal, human body, no matter what it is, is created by these elemental beings under the direction of a deva, who is under the direction of a Higher Deva, who ultimately is under the ultimate Divine Architect who is God Himself. The Findhorn Garden Dorothy Maclean was the woman in Findhorn who could communicate with the deva kingdom. During the first year that the community of Findhorn was in operation they grew 65 different vegetables, 21 different fruits, and 42 different herbs. This was quite amazing since none of the people involved had ever done gardening before. Dorothy would contact the individual deva of each plant and welcome it to the garden and ask it for guidance. Besides guidance as to the physical components needed for the soil, the most important thing they could do, as told to them by the landscape deva, was to radiate a sense of love and appreciation to the plants. By the end of the year of following the directions of the devas, they grew 42 pound cabbages and a broccoli that fed three families for several weeks. This was all done on sandy ground with barely an inch or two of soil or grass. In one of the channelings of the devas they said to Dorothy, ʺat this we rejoice 152
and are glad, for the connections between us are greater than you realize and it seems strange to us that you should be so unconscious of so much of your own being. We see you rather like an iceberg with seven/eighths of your consciousness submerged and only an eighth alive. ...We are in line of consciousness from the one great whole to the smallest unit of life and therefore we perform the miracles which you see in the growth of the seed...ʺ More of the Devas The devas are differentiated from the nature spirits and/or elemental beings I have already described. The devas hold the archetypal pattern and plan for all physical forms on earth. The devas direct the energy that is needed for the materializing of the physical plane. The devas direct the energy to build the minerals, plant life, animals, and human bodies. Most people think of this as natural law. In truth it is the devas or angels that carry out this law. They do this work ceaselessly and joyously. There are individual devas for, letʹs say, a carrot plant, and there is an overlighting deva that is in charge of all the carrot plants in the whole world. So the devas are the architects and the nature spirits and elementals are the crafts people who do the work. The nature spirits receive not only the blueprint but also the energy to physicalize the plan. The devas, in truth, have no particular form. The word deva actually means ʺshining oneʺ. They take on form as needed and when moving into a relationship of some kind. The forms they take in regard to humans, are correspondent often with the thought forms that humans hold of them. ʺAngels have wings, and dwarves have pick axes.ʺ Most people grow their gardens just physically. From the devas point of view, a garden must be grown physically and spiritually. The number and kinds of devas are infinite, because of the infinite variety of physical substances on planet earth. The plant life on planet earth, as I have mentioned previously in this book is one of the most evolved kingdoms in our entire galaxy, according to Vywamus. 153
The nature devas and elementals are so used to being ignored and not seen that it brings them great delight to be able to work with humans who are willing to work with them and treat them as equals, and appreciate the wonderful work they do. Mankind must come to understand that the minerals, plants, and animals are not just here to serve us, but rather we are also here to be of service to them. In Buddhism these kingdoms are looked at as total equals with mankind, which is as it should be. We are each here to express and glorify God perfectly. There are devas of the flowers, plants, landscape, lakes, rivers, soil, garden, manure, rain, wind, elements, trees, to name just a few. Each change in structure and color of a flower, for example, calls in another group of builders. When the actual flower itself appears the fairies appear. They are very appreciative of human admiration. When flowers are cut the fairy builders may accompany the bloom for some time. Every garden not only has a beautiful sight and smell, but also a sound. When a flower blooms perfectly it creates a full chord sound that is the keynote of that flower. This can be listened to in a meditative state. Clairvoyant Sightings of Nature Spirits There is a book that I would recommend that every one order from your metaphysical bookstore. It is called ʺPictures of Fairiesʺ, by Edward Gardener. In this book there are actually five pictures of photographs of nature spirits. These pictures were made famous by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle in the early 1900ʹs. He, of course, was the writer of Sherlock Holmes. These pictures may be the only actual photographs of nature spirits ever recorded, and they are absolutely beautiful and breathtaking to see. I have xeroxed and enlarged them at the print shop and have them hanging in my office. If you are not clairvoyant and have ever wanted to see actual pictures of fairies and gnomes, then get this book. In this book it also tells of what the two young ladies and Geoffrey Hodson, who are all clairvoyant, saw in the glen where these pictures were taken. I
154
would like to share a number of their clairvoyant sightings and descriptions from this book. Water Nymphs ʺI saw a water sprite. It was an entirely nude female figure with long fair hair, which appeared to be combing or passing through its fingers. Its form was a dazzling rosy whiteness and its face very beautiful. The arms were long and graceful, were moved with a wave like motion. It sometimes appeared to be singing.ʺ Wood Nymphs ʺTwo tiny wood elves came racing over the ground past us as we sat on a fallen tree trunk. Seeing us, they pulled up short about five feet away and stood regarding us with considerable amusement but no fear. They appeared as if completely covered in a tight fitting one‐piece skin which shone slightly as if wet. They had hands and feet large and out of proportion to their bodies. Their legs were somewhat thin; ears large and almost pear‐shaped, pointed upwards.ʺ Brownies ʺHe is rather taller than the normal, say eight inches dressed entirely in brown with facings of a darker shade, big‐shaped cap, almost conical knee breeches, stockings, and has thin ankles, and large pointed feet like gnomes feet. He stands facing us, in no way afraid, perfectly friendly and much interested.ʺ Fairies ʺFrances sees tiny fairies dancing in a circle, the figures gradually expanding in size till they reach eighteen inches, the ring widening in proportion. Elsie sees a vertical circle of dancing fairies flying slowly round. The fairies who are dancing have long skirts, through which their limbs can be seen. Viewed astrally, the circle is bathed in golden yellow light, with the outer edges of many hues, violet predominating. There is a tinkling music accompanying all this. It appears to have more of the aspect of a ceremony than a game. Frances sees two fairy figures performing as if on the stage, one with wings, one without.ʺ 155
Fairy ʺElsie sees a big beautiful fairy quite near: It is nude with golden hair, and is kneeling in the grass, looking this way, with hands on knees, smiling at us. It has a very beautiful face, and is concentrating its gaze on me. This figure came within five feet of us, and after being described, faded away.ʺ Fairy Band ʺThere has suddenly arrived in the field, a fairy director with a band of fairy people. Their arrival causes a bright radiance to shine in the field, visible to us sixty yards away. The director is very autocratic and definite in her orders. and holding unquestioned command. The band spread themselves out into a gradually widening circle around her, and as they do a soft glow spreads over the grass. They are actually vivifying and stimulating the growth in the field. Each member of the band is linked to the leader by a thin stream of light.ʺ Golden Fairy ʺOne especially beautiful fairy has a body clothed in transparent shimmering golden light. She has tall wings, each of which is almost divided into upper and lower portions.? Gnomes and Fairies ʺThe gnomes are like little old men, with little green caps, and their clothes are generally neutral green. The fairies themselves are in light draperies. I have also seen them in the conservatory of my house, floating about among the flowers and plants. The fairies appear to be perpetually playing, excepting when they go to rest on the turf or in a tree, and I once saw a group of gnomes standing on each others shoulders like gymnasts on the stage. ...They always look happy, as if they were having a real good time.ʺ Findhorn and Perelandra If you are interested in learning more about the devas, nature spirits and the elemental kingdom the two best sources of information are the books about Findhorn, ʺThe Findhorn Gardenʺ, by the Findhorn community, and a book about Perelandra called ʺBehaving as if the God in all Life Matteredʺ by Machaelle Small Wright.
156
Machaelle is able to see and hear the invisible forces of nature much as Dorothy Maclean was able to do at Findhorn. Machaelle started a 20 acre farm in Virginia dedicated to a co‐equal relationship with the devas and nature spirits. She is an extraordinary woman, and I couldnʹt recommend more highly, getting her book. It is really one of the most interesting books I have ever read in regard to understanding the nature kingdom. In this section I would like to share with you some more of the interesting insights into the devas and nature spirits I have learned from studying her material. Machaelle gives a very interesting description of how a plant is actually grown. She describes the archetype or pattern of each plant that the deva is in charge of as a package of energy. The devas very gradually bring this package down through the dimensions of reality. Once the package reaches the etheric level, it is then the job of the nature spirits to take over. Nature spirits, like devas, are bodies of light energy. The nature spirits are slightly denser in vibration because of their closer proximity to earth. If you wanted to change the color of a vegetable or flower you would have to talk to the devas in charge and they would help to change the package. If you were concerned as to how to care for the package once grounded into the etheric and physical plane, then, you would have to communicate with the nature spirits and elementals. Every garden needs to have a special place where humans are not allowed to enter. This was communicated to both Dorothy at Findhorn and to Machaelle. It doesnʹt have to be right in your immediate garden, but close by. It is also important to realize that the creation of a garden is a co‐creatorship between the devas and nature spirits and the human kingdom. Most humans pay no attention to the devas and nature spirits. On the other side of the coin, Machaelle tells how she went to the other extreme for a while and exhausted herself doing every little thing the devas and nature spirits wanted her to do. She was finally told that this was not the proper attitude. The devas and nature spirits just want an equal relationship, not to be totally in charge. She was also told by the nature spirits that the best time to transplant was in the evening around ten oʹclock, because that is when the energy of the plant is 157
in the roots. During the day the energy was in the stems and leaves of the plant. Manifestation One of the subjects that the devas and nature spirits insisted that Machaelle work with is the understanding of manifestation. What I am about to share with you is one of the most extraordinary sequence of events I have ever come across. This sequence of events began slowly and then began to build so I will begin from her initial training. She was told to decide what it was she wanted to manifest and then to contact the deva directly involved with that item. She began initially with the desire to manifest hay for the garden. She contacted the hay deva and made the request, very clearly, specifically, and concisely for what she needed. Two days later someone called spontaneously and guided her to the exact amount of hay she needed ‐ for free. Machaelleʹs next more profound and accelerated lesson in manifestation came when she decided she needed one cubic foot of manure. She connected with the devas connected with the manure and clearly visualized her exact need. The following is an exact quote from Machaelle upon connecting with this deva. ʺAs soon as I connected, I felt myself lift (vibrationally) to a very familiar level ‐ the level where astral traveling is done. There we waited until, suddenly I felt a third energy enter my awareness. We had been joined by the energy of the manure. With great care, we all three moved down in vibration more slowly than I had ever experienced in meditation ‐ or perhaps it was simply more clearly than I had ever experienced. As we moved from one level to the next, I could feel the shift in the manure energy. Eventually, I felt the manure take on a sense of physicalness. I sensed atoms, then molecules, then cells. I sensed form within the manure energy. Eventually, even smell. At the moment I touched down, from my own meditative state, I opened my eyes, and there before me was the cubic foot of manure.ʺ This is extraordinary!!! I know Sai Baba can do it, but he is the Cosmic Christ. Here is a woman who, just with attunement to God and the devas and nature spirits, is able to manifest instantly. The principle is quite similar to the way the devas and nature spirits manifest a plant. The deva visualizes the 158
archetypal pattern and package in the spiritual dimensions. Once the image is set, the energy is called forth, and slowly descended downward through the dimensions of reality. Upon reaching the etheric plane the nature spirits begin using their energy to physicalize the pattern, in the form of the visualization of the devas. Do you see that Machaelle just used the same principle? The only difference being that she visualized the archetypal pattern herself and the devas worked with that. The principle otherwise was the same. In Machaelleʹs next meditation she manifested a squash seed that manifested right in front of her. Her next experience was in manifesting ʺtoolsʺ. There are actually devas of the tools for the garden. She described the almost instant manifestation of tools as going into meditation and going into the void. On the level just outside of the void she would make herself become a hammer. With the help of the devas she would then descend downward through the levels, until the etheric level, where the nature spirits would jump in and do their work. When she opened her eyes there was the hammer. She speaks of the experiences with great humility, and could not do them without the help of the nature kingdom. This may give us a new and more profound respect for the powers they have. From this example you can see how in the Findhorn Garden, even with terrible soil and weather conditions and environment, that they were able to grow 42 pound cauliflower. Most of the gardens and farm land around the world are now without nature spirits. They have been so mistreated, abused, unappreciated and literally raped, that they have retreated from humanity. Without their help the amount of energy that actually grounds into the physical form is at its bare minimum. What we end up with is empty food with no energy and light in it. The nature spirits end up going to forested areas where man does not frequent. Findhorn and Perelandra grew such large and wonderful produce because the devas and nature spirits were invited to help, and worked with as co‐partners. Another fascinating story of inter‐relatedness of all things has to do with an early phase of the Perelandra Garden. Machaelle was preparing to visit Findhorn and had tons of other responsibilities. She changed her attitude towards the garden of being more like a drill sergeant. She stopped enjoying it and got totally goal oriented instead of finding the balance of goal and process. 159
Shortly after taking this attitude she found the brussel sprouts plants that had been three feet tall attacked by hordes of bugs. She immediately attuned to the deva of the brussel sprouts and it said, ʺWhen you look at the garden now, you see a half empty glass. you focus on the negative. You deal in only the work to be done. You no longer see the beauty and what is being accomplished here. Your attitude has unbalanced the energy of the garden, leaving it vulnerable to being overpowered and destroyed by insects. Since you have altered the balance, it is important for you to reestablish the balance. You must understand the power contained in thoughts and attitudes and the integral part they play in the balance of the whole.ʺ Most gardeners look at balance in terms of only the soil composition, water, and sunlight. These physical components are only one part of the true balance that needs to be sought in the garden. Machaelleʹs negative attitude alone caused the garden to be attached by insects. Closing Down a Garden for Winter Machaelle thought the closing of the garden would take one day. It ended up taking seven days. Just as when a baby is born you want to give it as non‐ violent a birth as possible, The same is true of death. In the chapter in this book on, ʺThe Science of Death and Dying and the Bardoʺ, one can see the extreme importance of learning how to die properly. The same is true of a garden. Machaelle tuned into each plant that had become part of the garden and thanked it for its presence and released it from the garden. Even though many of the plants were already dead from the frost, the energy or consciousness of the plant was still in the garden. In a sense one could say metaphorically, that the soul had not left yet. The nature spirits that had worked in the garden moved to the elemental annex, which was the name of the special spot in the garden for just devas and nature spirits. This process allowed for the proper ʺBardoʺ experience for each and every plant in the garden. Quite a powerful experience as I am sure you can feel and imagine. 160
Other Interesting Information from the Devas and Nature Spirits Some spiritual people who are involved with gardening have gone to the other extreme and think that if they deal with the devas and nature spirits they donʹt have to concern themselves with the physical needs of the plant for proper nutrients, like bone meal, manure, nitrogen, lime and water. That would be like saying that we, as humans, donʹt require healthy food in our bodies because we are spiritual Another very interesting point is the issue of how the devas and nature spirits feel about the eating of plants by humans. Machaelle was told that this was part of the plant kingdomʹs service to humanity. The nature kingdom celebrated in this special relationship. The nature kingdom just wishes mankind would appreciate and celebrate this understanding in a non‐selfish manner.
161
37 Evolution and Ecology ʺWhat I would tell you is that as we forge ahead, never deviating from our course for one momentʹs thought, feeling or action, so could you. Humans generally seem not to know where they are going or why. If they did, what a powerhouse they would be.ʺ
PEA DEVA AS CHANNELED BY DOROTHY MACLEAN OF FINDHORN
The Animal Kingdom The main difference between man and animals is in the type of consciousness displayed. Human beings have self consciousness and an individual soul. Where animals are guided by more of an instinctive consciousness, rather than reasoning mind as in mankind, and are connected to a group soul. It is possible for more evolved animals usually have a domesticated nature to evolve eventually into the human kingdom. This doorway was open prior to Atlantis and was then closed at that time except for special cases. Sai Baba has said that his pet elephant Sai Bita will be a human in his next lifetime. If more people realized that animals can evolve into humans, then people might treat them with more respect. It is absolutely atrocious how animals are treated in our society. They are not looked at as equals as they should be. Every animals is God visiting us in physical form. Animals also reincarnate. In one of the Cayce readings a woman asked if she had known her cat in a past life. The Universal Mind said, through Cayce, that her cat had been with her in an incarnation in Egypt as a pet lion. Eventually over eons of time the entire animal kingdom will transfer to the lower levels of the human kingdom. Since animals have group souls, individualization is the portal of entry into the human kingdom. An animal may experience life as an individual as a domesticated animal, or sometimes in a pack of animals or as a loner. It is usually through the animals interaction
162
with humans that their goals of fully expressing as an individual are achieved. The animal kingdom serves in the capacity of being a type of emotional buffer for mankind. Animals are very sensitive to emotions. We have all seen how animals will growl at certain people and not at others, depending on the vibration the human is putting out. Animals are able to absorb and to a certain degree transmute negative human emotions and imbalances. Wild animals are apparently able to take in the imbalance of massive group action such as war, famine poverty, and mass death. The animals who serve as our pets do the same thing for their individual human caretakers. Dogs and cats will diffuse an argument by asking for love and attention. Other times the companion animal will reflect those human emotions of a negative nature in their own behavior. Recently my sister went through a very powerful emotional crisis, and a week later her cat stopped eating for four days and almost died of thyroid failure. A spiritual teacher told her that her cat was running the crisis energy through her little body and it was much too powerful for it. As soon as my sister disconnected emotionally from her cat in this manner she was fine. Findhorn and the Animal Kingdom There is a wonderful story about the animal kingdom that occurred in the first year at Findhorn. Because of all the compost that was being spread around there were a great many earth worms. Earthworms are the favorite food of the moles. The moles attacked the garden building tunnels everywhere. Dorothy MacLean began to meditate and tuned into a rather scary looking great king mole with a crown on his head sitting in an underground cavern. She proceeded to explain the situation to him and promised not to hurt his moles. She also suggested that he go to a neighboring area close by that was not used for gardening. Lo and behold the moles left the garden. Several years later when Findhorn was given the neighboring area of land, there were the moles exactly where she had asked them to go. 163
Perelandra and the Animal Kingdom There are a number of fascinating stories that occurred at Perelandra of a similar nature. As part of Machaelleʹs desire for good soil she put out a call for earthworms. Sure enough when planting season came there were earthworms everywhere. The problem was that it was impossible to till the soil without killing earth worms in the process. Machaelle got very frustrated and declared out loud that she was going to have a fifteen minute tea break and when she returned she wanted the earthworms out of a particular row of soil. When she returned the earth worms were out of the row. When she was done working she said, ʺYou can come back now.ʺ and they did. Machaelle had a similar problem with moles in her garden also. She spoke with the mole deva and thirty minutes later she looked up and saw a whole band of over 100 moles heading towards the open field exactly where she asked them to go. She tried this one more time with cabbage worms. They had infested all her vegetables. She connected with the deva of the cabbage worm. She requested that they leave all her vegetables except four special ones that were specifically being planted for their purposes. When she woke up in the morning all the worms were gone except for the one plant at the end of each row that was specifically designated for them. Can you imagine if the farmers and gardeners of the world would communicate with the minerals, plants and animals. We would need no insecticides and pesticides. This applies even to our home. We can ask the deva of the ants or cockroaches or fleas to ask them not to enter the house. One interesting story on this subject. Sai Baba was asked if it was ever permissible to kill insects invading oneʹs house. Sai Baba said it was permissible and no karma would be incurred if the insects were invading the house, but karma would be incurred if you killed them outside. Even a better method, however, would be to just tune in and ask them to leave. Why not?! An ant, flea, and cockroach are God incarnate. Everything has its place in nature, and all kingdom resound to the call of God.
164
In the future those people choosing to eat meat will receive their meat from cattlemen who put out a call to the overlighting deva of cattle, and draw to themselves those cows that wish to serve humanity in this capacity. Eventually mankind will evolve out of the eating of meat, however, humanity is not at that level of evolution yet. Certain animals are willing to serve in this capacity as a service to mankind if it is part of the divine plan. The above mentioned example would be an ideal way for this to happen. The Wonderful Pig Story One of my favorite stories of all time has to do with a set of tapes I once listened to told by John Robbins, who wrote Diet for a New America. This is a wonderful book and I highly recommend it. In these tapes I remember him telling a story about a pig farmer he visited while doing research for his book. He was invited to dinner but did not let on about who he was. I forget a lot of the details, but the gist of the story was that the pig farmer was basically running what might be called a pig concentration camp. The pigs were stacked in super small cages one on top of each other. In the most horrendous of conditions a person can possibly imagine. The pig farmer, towards the end of dinner, intuitively picked up on who John Robbins was and slammed his fist on the table in anger and the wife left the room. John Robbins was rather frightened. However, the man calmed down and then proceeded to talk. He explained that he was just trying to make a living and compete with the other pig farmers. He told a story of how, as a young child, he had a pet pig who was super smart. The pig actually, if I am not mistaken, even saved him from drowning in the lake one time. One day the pig farmerʹs father told his son that they were going to have the pig for dinner. The boy was crushed. The father made him choose between the pig and him. It was after that that the boy started to shut down emotionally. John Robbins sent a copy of his book to the pig farmer. The pig farmer was disgusted by the book and actually threw it in the toilet. He was also getting severe migraine headaches, on a regular basis. Finally his wife fished the
165
book out of the toilet and dried it off and said maybe if he read the whole thing his headaches would go away. One day after reading the book the pig farmer decided to sell his pig farm. The headaches immediately stopped. John Robbins received this information in a letter and didnʹt hear from him for a while. Approximately a year later he received another letter that not only had the pig farmer sold his pig concentration camp, but he had bought a new farm and opened a pig petting zoo where children from all over the communities could come and learn about how smart pigs were and could pet and play with the pigs. The pigs had become his pets and no longer were locked up in cages. Needless to say, the pig farmer had never been happier or more at peace with himself. Last Comments on Animals Animals are our younger brothers. We are here to help them as they are here to help us. We can help them just as we can help a young child. We can help them evolve and become more spiritual. For example an unevolved dog would be one that is rabid and biting everyone. A more evolved dog is happy and loves and serves his master to the highest abilities. Domestic animals usually take on the personality of their master. A vicious dog comes from a vicious owner. A dog owner who trains his animal to hunt and kill and be an attack dog is degrading the animal spiritually. Just the opposite should be occurring. We should be teaching our animals to be of the Christ consciousness and to realize our Godly nature to the fullest. In truth every encounter with an animal, no matter what kind, is a ʺholy encounterʺ. God meeting God!!! It is time for mankind to be of service to the mineral, plant, and animal kingdoms instead of looking upon these kingdoms as nothing more than objects of service to self. The American Indians and Nature Spirits The American Indians may have had the best relationship and understanding with nature. They would love the flowers and talk to their brother trees, and running water. They would talk to the great spirit of the mountain and even
166
the blades of grass. For everything is alive with the Light of God. The Great White Spirit lives within every creature, plant, and stone. The color of flowers are brought to them by nature spirits and fairies who are working through the central stems of the plants. The flower actually is taking upon itself the color of the fairy spirit working with it. The American Indian would pray over an animal after it had to be killed and thank it for its service. This is nothing like the white man who would kill the buffalo just for sport. The Indians walked softly on Mother Earth. There is much that we could learn from their example. The Devas and Manʹs Relationship to the Earth Mother The nature spirits work under the directorship of the devas. In the Findhorn community it was Dorothy MacLean who had the gift of being able to communicate with the deva kingdom. In her first experience in the very beginning of the Findhorn community before it had even gotten off the ground, she made an attempt to speak with the garden pea. She got an immediate response from the deva of the garden pea. The garden pea deva said, ʺI can speak to you, human. I am entirely directed by my work which is set out and molded and which I merely bring to fruition, yet you have come straight to my awareness. My work is clear before me ‐ to bring the force fields into manifestation regardless of obstacles, and there are many in this man‐infested world. While the vegetable kingdom holds no grudges against those it feeds, man takes what he can as a matter of course, giving no thanks. This makes us strangely hostile. ʺWhat I would tell you is that as we forge ahead, never deviating from our course for one momentʹs thought, feeling, or action, so could you. Humans generally seem not to know where they are going or why. If they did, what a powerhouse they would be. If they were on the straight course of what is to be done we could cooperate with them! I have put across my meaning and bid you farewell.ʺ This is quite a message from a little pea deva. Its message is so very true how mankind as a whole had been totally unappreciative of the work that the devas and nature spirits do for us. Science has turned nature into a cold 167
mechanistic process completely devoid of spiritual life. Science has become a nightmare to the soul and spirit of all things. The motto of science is that all that exists is what you can see with your physical eyes, and senses, and nothing can be farther from the truth. The pea deva referred to this world as ʺman infestedʺ. This reminds me of the movie ʺEmerald Forestʺ about the rain forests of South America. The Indian tribe living there called the white people the ʺtermite peopleʺ because of the way they were destroying their forests. The way mankind has lived upon the earth has been like a parasite. We are destroying the rain forests, polluting the air, rivers, lakes and oceans. We are destroying the ozone layer, and the fossil fuels are causing a green house affect. We are using up and wasting our natural resources. We are junking up space with our satellites and our earth with nuclear waste we donʹt know what to do with. Man has been a cancer to the earth mother. His selfishness, greed, and self centeredness will lead to his destruction if he doesnʹt change his ways. Besides the violence he has perpetrated upon the earth mother, Pan, the devas and the nature spirits, there has been a complete and total lack of appreciation for all that they have done for us. Vywamus has said that the earth mother herself has actually had to pull away from humanity because of the hurt and injuries she has suffered. There has been a long‐standing pattern of lack of integration and cooperation between the seven kingdoms. As the human kingdom awakens to the kingdom of souls, it will also help to awaken them to the most beautiful kingdom of minerals, plants and animals. Look at the atrocities we perpetrate on animals in the name of science, luxury, sport, and greed. If man realized that these being were fully capable of becoming human in a future life they might think twice before acting as they do. If they donʹt think that they could just consider that the animal before them is God visiting them in physical form. What they do to that animal, they are doing to God, for that animal is God. The earthʹs surface is the skin of the earth mother. Look what we do to it. We cover it up with cement pavement, buildings, and cities, and destroy all the vegetation. The earth canʹt breath. The destroying of the rain forests is 168
causing an oxygen imbalance on the entire planet. Then we do strip mining, and explore nuclear bombs underneath the earthʹs surface. Djwhal Khul has said that every time we explode a nuclear bomb underneath the surface of the earth it causes an earthquake somewhere else on the globe. All I can say is that the earth mother, Pan, the devas, and nature spirits sure must be forgiving and loving beings to carry on so valiantly as they have for the last ten million years. They have been physically, emotionally, and mentally violated to an extent that no individual can possibly conceive. Minerals, plants and animals are living beings just as we are, who are in a state of evolution just as we are. They are God incarnating into form in infinite varieties of expression. The United States finally has a Vice President, Al Gore, and a President, Bill Clinton, who are advocates of the environment. Vywamus has said that on July 1, 1986 a new communicative link was set up between the five kingdoms, mineral, plant, animal, human, soul. the human kingdom began to learn beyond its first steps. It is interesting that around this time we began celebrating ʺEarth Dayʺ, and the ozone, greenhouse, rain forest controversy came to the public awareness. We also had the harmonic convergence, and hands across America. Intuitively, it does seem like a small shift has taken place. This chapter dealing with the sum of the hidden mysteries of nature is my attempt to do my part in furthering this raising of consciousness. The Secret Life of Trees In my research for this chapter I came across a wonderful little book called, ʺSecrets from the Lives of Treesʺ, by Jeffrey Goelitz. Jeffrey developed a spiritual relationship with trees that allowed him to communicate with them and with the nature spirits that work with the trees. I would like to quote one specific section of his book in regard to what role trees play on earth. What I am quoting is a channeling of a spirit called Good Friend, which he often utilized to help in his research. ʺTheir main purpose on the planet is to help all beings evolve to a higher consciousness. Trees have a non threatening energy for humans to pick up on, as are many things in nature, like plants, flowers, and meadows. They 169
bring to the world peace and tranquillity. Wood, food, and beauty are then extras within the subpurpose of a tree. The energy they give out goes indiscriminately towards everyone. Trees do not have what you would call a learning or growing pattern of right or wrong. They are more in harmony with the planet and would not be able to take a left‐hand turn, as humans can. Trees provide essence levels of energy for the planet to use. .....There is also a wisdom band in trees because they have been on the planet much longer than humans. They hold a higher vibration of the truth. Throughout the ages trees have been used as spots for higher teachings. Buddha, Jesus, and many others held their classrooms in a grove of trees... A tree puts out a higher, clearer vibration which enables people to receive more clarity. Even in the other worlds there are what you would call etheric trees that many teachings are given under...ʺ The following is a very short quote from the same book on the role of nature spirits with trees. ʺBecause trees are extremely important to the planet, there are a lot of spirits working with them. Just as trees have light coming from their essence band on the other side, the nature spirits have a different band of energy sent down to them, which they put through their system and adapt for the treeʹs use. They supplement the treeʹs energies that earth negativity would otherwise alter. In a city devas help the trees tremendously, letʹs say in a city park, by putting out positive energy. As devas work with trees, plants, or whatever job they have, they evolve.ʺ The Mineral Kingdom Everything in the universe is in a state of evolution including the mineral kingdom. Again, the gnomes are the elemental beings that specifically work with the mineral kingdom. The most evolved gemstone is the diamond. This is something women have known for a long time. The diamond is followed by the emerald and lapis lazuli. People have a hard time realizing that not only are animals alive, but so are plants and minerals. The signature of life in the mineral kingdom is the different crystalline formations and patterns that the minerals and gnomes create. People donʹt realize that there are live and dead minerals. 170
When a stone is cut from its quarry its vital force and life supply has been cut. The gemstone is still evolving and growing while it is in its natural rock formation. That is not to say that a rock should never be cut from the quarry, but it is no longer a live rock just as when one cuts a flower. Fairies may accompany a newly cut flower to its new home, and the same is true of gemstones that one keeps in the home or wears on oneʹs finger. Sometimes nature spirits will accompany the gemstone you wear on your hand. In reality the mineral kingdom may be the most important of all the kingdoms to earth life. It makes up the crust of the earth upon which we live. The mineral kingdom also provides the basic source of nutrients for the three higher kingdoms. The plants are rooted in the mineral soil. Plants then serve the animal world and human world to feed and nourish the physical bodies of both human and animal life. Animals are then a food source for the human kingdom. Without the mineral kingdom the other three kingdoms could not survive on earth. In the evolutionary process each kingdom acts as the mother from which the succeeding ones are born. The offspring thus depends upon and draws life and sustenance from the preceding kingdom from which it has sprung. The mineral kingdom is spirit at its densest form of vibration. Minerals and crystals have a profoundly healing affect on the human body and even in a garden, for that matter. It is time that we appreciate the great service the mineral kingdom is rendering us on multifaceted levels. 171
38 The Huna Teachings of Hawaii ʺThe Huna teachings are the clearest form of psychology and religion on the planet.ʺ
UNIVERSAL MIND
AS CHANNELED BY PAUL SOLOMON
I was first exposed to the Huna teaching by Paul Solomon who is the channel for the Universal Mind and whom people call the next Edgar Cayce. In Paulʹs channelings, the Universal Mind said that the clearest form of psychology and religion on the planet was the Huna teachings of Hawaii. I immediately went out and got everything I could find on the Huna teachings. The following is the essence and core of their teachings. One other remarkable occurrence that I came upon in my research for this book was the fact that the Egyptian teachings involved with becoming initiated into the Order of Melchizadek in the Third Dynasty were almost word for word the teachings of the Huna of Hawaii. The Psychology and Teachings of the Kahuna The Huna teachings are an ancient secret science that has come to Western man through the work of a man by the name of Max Freedom Long. Max Freedom Long got his initial start in the teachings of Huna from a man named William Tufts Brigham. Brigham had spent 40 years living in Hawaii, trying to get at the secret of the Huna teachings. He was able to obtain much information, however, was never able to get at the core of the teachings. At the age of 82, as synchronicity would have it, he and Max Freedom Long met. Mr. Long had heard of Mr. Brighamʹs interest in Huna, and had searched him out. Mr. Brigham knew after a short chat, that this was the man who would carry on his study and search for the substance of the Huna teachings that he was unable to find.
172
Max Freedom Long studied the work of Brigham and did carry on his work and study. He, however, came across the same stumbling block that Brigham came to. The Huna teachings were an ancient teaching that was passed on by word of mouth. Every effort that Max Freedom Long made to get at the teachings, he was shunned. The few Kahunas left in Hawaii would not speak to him. For many years he was stuck at this impasse. In 1935 he had a breakthrough. Upon waking from a sleep, he had the insight to make a fresh translation of the recorded chants and prayers from the ʺrootʺ words. The Hawaiian language is made of words built from short root words. The fresh translation from these root words was the key that unlocked the secret to how it is believed that the Kahunas did their magical feats. Max Freedom Long spent the next 40 years studying and working with the Huna teachings, until his death in 1971. It was at this time that the apprenticeship was passed on to a man by the name of Dr. E. Otha Wingo. It is Mr. Wingo who is head of the Huna Research Associates, and who is the author of the Twelve Lesson Huna Correspondence Course. The Correspondence Course is for the practical application of the Huna teachings. I have personally found the Correspondence Course to b quite helpful. The presentation I am about to make are hence the interpretations of Huna as understood by Max Freedom Long and Dr. E. Otha Wingo. I will refer to their interpretations in this chapter as the Huna teachings. The core and essence of the Huna teachings is that man is made up of three selves or minds. These can be most easily called the subconscious mind, the conscious mind, and the superconscious mind. It is the conscious mind which the Kahunas called the uhane or middle self. This middle self is the part of man that is conscious of his own existence, and has the ability to reason. It has also been given free will to create in life as it pleases, along with the low self. The subconscious mind was called the unihipili or low self. It is the part of us that presents the unconscious material to the conscious mind, so it may reason for or against it. The low self is the storehouse of all memory, and the seat of the emotions. Its form of mentation is considered to be that of animal level reasoning. The term low has no reference to rank of importance, rather only to the fact that it is below the level of consciousness of the middle self. And to the fact that its bodily center is in the solar plexus rather than in the physical head region. 173
The third part is the High Self, called the Aumakua by the Kahunas of old Hawaii. The High Self is the ʺolder, utterly trustworthy parental self of spirit.ʺ This Higher Self lives at a higher plane of consciousness, outside of the physical body. It will not intervene in the affairs of oneʹs life unless asked to do so. This is understood to be some cosmic law the High Self must adhere to. The High Self has a higher form of mentation than the middle or low selves. It is the part of us that is supposed to give us our dreams, intuitions and premonitions through the subconscious self. Huna teaches that it is the High Self who constructs our future from the thoughts, hopes, and fears of the middle and low selves. The High Self is supposed to be able to see into the future as far as oneʹs thoughts have been crystallized. As thoughts change daily in the life of the middle and low self, so does the future according to Huna teachings. Huna also teaches that communication with the High Self occurs quite naturally during sleep. It is in this contact at night time that most of the thoughts of oneʹs day are supposedly averaged by the High Self and used in some mysterious mechanism to materialize conditions in the future. In the Huna teachings, all three selves have their proper part to perform in the life of each individual. Life, health, and happiness has to do with the integration, blending and harmonizing of these three selves. The other most basic teaching of Huna is that people are made up of 10 basic elements. To understand this concept it is necessary to understand the basic triad of Mind‐Force‐Matter. I have already mentioned the three levels or grades of consciousness, (Subconscious, Conscious, Superconscious). It was believed then that the basic vital force or energy in a personʹs body was divided into three voltages. The lowest voltage was that of the lower, or subconscious self. This same vital force or energy, when used by the middle self or conscious mind, was thought to be raised to a higher voltage. In the same way when this vital force was raised to the level of consciousness of the High Self, it was raised again to even a higher voltage yet. In summary, the basic vital force or energy of a person would change according to which mind or self was using that energy. The last element of this triad is that of matter. Huna teaches that each of the three selves has a shadow body or etheric body. An etheric or shadow body is a metaphysical body, that is thought to be an exact duplicate of everything that 174
exists in the physical world. It is this energetic mold that holds any physical form together. It is believed that not only do our three selves have a shadow body, but also everything that has ever been created. The shadow body of the low self is said to be a mold of every tissue of the physical body. The low self shadow body, hence, looks exactly like the physical body except is metaphysical in form. Huna teaches that all memory is stored in this shadow body of the low self. The shadow body of the middle self is supposedly an energy body in the physical head region. The low and middle selves, hence, interpenetrate the physical body with their shadow bodies. The High Self has a shadow body also, however it does not interpenetrate the physical body. The High Self is supposed to be connected to the low self through an energy cord. This energy cord has been called the silver cord in other mystical teachings. I have so far mentioned 9 elements. The 10th element is the physical body, which is the vehicle or instrument in which the low self and middle self operate and live. Huna teaches that the high Self expresses all the divine qualities ...compassion, patience, love, forgiveness. It is the ideal to which we as middle selves are supposed to aspire. It is a step advanced in the mental powers and creative abilities. The Higher Self is also considered to be a combined community of spirits. They are considered to be individual in identity, and yet one with all other High Selves at the same time. The High Self is also considered to be a perfect blending of masculine and feminine. The High Self is hence an androgynous spirit or self. The shadow bodies of each of the three selves was said to be made of an ʺakaʺ substance. This aka substance has a sticky and elastic quality to it, and can stretch without breaking. This substance is also a perfect carrier and conductor of vital force. According to Huna teachings, the lower self shadow body is capable of changing shapes temporarily or permanently to form a connecting thread between the middle and High Self. A person who has a good relationship, and strong rapport with their lower and Higher Self have developed these aka threads into aka cords. It is upon these aka threads and/or cords that vital force and thought forms can travel.
175
Every time we contact our lower self, Higher Self, any object, or person in the world we are sending out these aka threads. When contact is made between two persons, a long sticky thread is drawn out between them. Further contact adds other aka‐threads, and these are braided together into aka‐cords. This aka‐cord results in a strong rapport between the two individuals. Telepathic communication, according to Huna, has to do with the traveling of vital force, and thought forms through these aka cords. This telepathic sending of thought forms and vital force, can occur between the middle, lower, and Higher Selves, and/or between two persons who have a strong aka‐cord connection. Every thought we think was thought to have a shadow body around it also. In other words it is a thought ʹformʹ. As a thought is formed it was said to be fastened by a thread of this aka substance to the threads that came before it. This concept is the explanation given for the association of ideas as known in modern psychology. In other words, as oneʹs conscious mind holds any given thought, all other thoughts attached to the thought form pulled will follow suit. Another extremely important point in the Huna teachings is that of vital force or mana. Mana or vital force is the basic energy of all things. Huna teaches that mana or vital force is taken from the food and air by the low self and stored in the low selfʹs body, also known as the shadow body. This vital force in the lower selfʹs shadow body can be used for any thing the middle self wants. This mana, when used by the middle self is hence raised from the shadow body of the lower self to the physical head region of the middle self. The mana , when used as the life force of the middle self, is changed in some subtle way. This force, when raised like this, is called ʺthe willʺ, in modern psychology. When the middle self does not use this will power as it should, the lower self acts out and flirts from one activity to another without carrying out any suggestion or commands effectively. The lower self or subconscious self, in Huna, is thought to be like a child. It needs to be loved, and it needs to be treated firmly and in a disciplined manner. A real physical child if spoiled and not given any discipline will act out. It is the same with the lower self. This is why it s essential that the middle self raise the mana or vital force for use as will power. The middle self is the reasoning mind which is like the parent of the lower self, just as the Higher Self is the parent of the middle self. The three selves are hence levels and gradations of consciousness. 176
The Kahunas believed that everything in the universe was in a state of evolution. This went for the elements, plants, insects, animals, lower selves, middle selves and Higher Selves. They saw the entire universe in levels and gradations of consciousness. The Kahunas believed that God was a triune being, just as people are triune beings. They believed that God was a trinity of levels of Spirit. They termed these three levels Ku, Kane, And Kanaloa. This concept of God correlates with other religions such as Christianity (Father, Son, and Holy Spirit), and Hinduism (Brahma, Shiva, and Vishnu). The Kahunas believed that the process of evolution was one of moving through these levels of consciousness, back to eventual at‐one‐ment with God the Creator, or Ku. In making prayers to the Higher Self, the process is very similar to the process between the lower self and middle self. Once the middle self has raised the vital force from the shadow body of the lower self to use as ʺwillʺ, it can do whatever it wants with this energy. This will can be used for physical exercise, or controlling the lower self, or thinking, or praying or whatever... The process of prayer to the Higher Self is the raising of the vital force or mana to the next voltage up from the middle self. The key issue here that is very unique to the Huna teachings, is that it is the low self that takes the thought form prayer to the Higher Self. If the low self has a complex of sin, guilt, unworthiness, or doubt, it will not deliver the prayer. The low self uses the mana or vital force that the middle self has raised, and sends that vital force up the aka‐cord or silver cord, with the thought form prayers. Huna teaches that the High Self cannot manifest a personʹs prayers unless it receives the needed vital force or mana from the middle and low selves. It is essential according to Huna teaching hence, to accumulate a surcharge of vital force before beginning to pray to the Higher Self. A great deal of emphasis in the Huna teachings is given to how this is done. As I mentioned before, a certain amount of vital force is created from the food we eat and the air we breathe. I will list now a number of ways the Huna have taught to accumulate this extra energy: 1. Asking and commanding the lower self to build up a surcharge of vital force for use in prayer. 177
2. Physical exercise 3. Deep Breathing ‐ which causes more blood sugar to be burned. (main method) 4. Postures. 5. Nutritious food. 6. Visualizing vital force rising like a fountain of water, from the base of the spine up through the top of the head. 7. Mental attitude of gaining personal power and strength ‐ (Attitude of preparing for a race). 8. Proper sleep and rest before hand. 9. Affirmations ‐ spoken out loud ‐ (ʺThe Universal life force is flowing into me now ... I feel itʺ). In conjunction with the need for vital force to send to the Higher Self is the need for the ʺClearing of the Pathʺ. The Clearing of the Path, is the removing of all thought forms that would sabotage the prayer. The thought forms that sabotage a prayer can occur on the conscious or subconscious mind level. For example, if a person makes a prayer for healing, and then says when they are through that this isnʹt going to work, then they are obviously sabotaging their efforts with antithetical thought forms. What can also happen is that a person is consciously behind the prayer, however, the subconscious mind isnʹt. What may happen in this case is the lower self may deliver the prayer, but ruin it with thought forms of doubt or fear. Another possibility is that the lower self will refuse to deliver the prayer at all because of its fixations of guilt and unworthiness. The relationship and understanding between the middle and low self is hence, essential, before one can even get the High Self effectively involved. Huna teaches that the only sin there is, is that of Hurting Another Person. They believe that it is not possible to sin against God or the Higher Self. To ʺClear the pathʺ according to Huna, one must make amends or balance out the hurts that were inflicted upon another. This can be done in an infinite number of ways as long as the lower self is convinced along with the middle self that amends is being made. The use of some kind of ʺPhysical Actʺ or ʺStimulusʺ is usually more convincing to the lower self. Any act that is perceived of as a sacrifice or a service to others can be a help in balancing out these guilt complexes and feelings of unworthiness. 178
The middle self and lower self must also be trained to know what truly is sinful in contrast to what is dogmatic traditional concepts of sin and religion. Once the clearing of the path is achieved, the lower self can send the accumulated mana and thought form prayers right up the aka‐cord (antakarana) to the Higher Self. The last step in this process before this can be accomplished is to create a proper thought form prayer. Huna teaches that thoughts are like seeds. They believed that in some strange unknown way, the Higher Self uses the thoughts we think, to create our future. The action of prayer was a way of sending new thought forms to the Higher Self for an action that is desired for materialization, in and on the earth plane. In making prayers the Kahunas stressed the importance of preparing very carefully the thought form seeds one wishes to create. The one rule was that what asks for does not hurt others, and that it is a reasonable request of something that is sincerely needed for self or others. It is suggested that the exact wording of the prayer be written out on paper, so an exact picture of what is desired can be visualized. It is also essential that the prayer be worded in the positive rather than negative language. Huna teaches that a prayer for healing should be worded in a way where what is seen is the finished product or healed result. This is in contrast to saying a prayer where the illness or injury is mentioned. An example of a poor prayer, according to Huna, would be saying, ʺHeal my injured leg.ʺ Mentioning the injured leg, according to Huna, is presenting a negative seed thoughtform. A better way to say this would be, ʺI ask that my leg be healed so that I may run and jump and walk to my hearts content with perfect ease and balance and comfort.ʺ In this example the thought form seed does not mention the injury, but rather the visualization of the healed result. The visualization of the thought forms desired is a way of strengthening the seed thoughts that are sent to the Higher Self. In summary, the Huna prayer method begins with first ʺClearing the pathʺ. This means the removing of any negative thought forms in the middle and/or low self that would prevent the low self from taking the thought form prayer to the Higher Self. Step two is the creating of the exact thought form prayer, and writing it out on paper, while developing a strong visualization of the healed result. Step three is
179
the building up of an accumulation of vital force in the shadow body of the lower self for the use of the middle self when the prayer action begins. When these three steps are achieved the prayer is to be formed by wording it aloud three times over, using the will to impress the prayer on the low self, and to build strong thought form clusters. The prayer, when thus made, is held in mind and the low self is ordered to reach out and take to the High Self (Soul). When an answering electric tingle is felt, the prayer is recalled or even spoken again aloud so that it can be sent to the High Self with the extra supply of vital force needed to materialize the thought forms of the prayer into immediate or future events. The ending or closing portion of the prayer should be made definite. Otherwise there is the danger of mixing a jumble of contaminated thoughts into the prepared thought form seed picture. The Kahunas would end their prayer with the words, ʺThe prayer takes flight. Let the rain of blessings fall.ʺ This is an important point, because, as I said previously, the Higher Self can and will only manifest what we ask it to. The statement of ʺLet the rain of blessings fallʺ, is the request for the prayer to be answered. The formal ending of a prayer can be delayed 15 seconds to a minute, to allow the low self to do its work of sending the vital force and thoughtform prayer up the aka‐cord (antakarana). During this time it is essential that the middle self relax, so as to not call the low self immediately back to begin another task. Once the prayer is definitely completed, it should be let go of, to the keeping of the High Self. All that is then needed on the middle and low self level is the ʺfaith and trustʺ that the prayer will be answered as requested. Any other thoughts besides this would be a sabotage to the prayer procedure. How the prayer will be answered should be left to the workings of the High Selves. Another extremely important point according to Huna teachings, is for the middle self, or person asking for the prayer, to do everything humanly possible to help manifest the prayer. The middle self and lower self have to continue doing their part in the process of living. Just because a prayer is made doesnʹt mean a person can just go and sit in their room and wait for the prayer to manifest. The middle and low self must continue to do their part to manifest the prayerʹ without negative thinking.
180
Another point is to not speak of the prayer with any persons who would add doubt or negative suggestion to the manifestation of the prayer. Huna teaches that if a prayer is made for the healing of another, this individual must be cleansed of all negative complexes as a preliminary act, otherwise his low self will prevent the healing. The last point in this discussion of the Huna prayer method, is to be prepared to make the prayer action in the exact same manner daily, until the desired result is accomplished. The phenomena of instant healing by the High Self, according to Huna, involves the shadow or etheric body of the low self. As stated before, the shadow body of the low self is a perfect metaphysical mold of the physical body. A bone may break in the physical body, however, the blue print or perfect mold in the etheric will not be affected. The shadowy mold is affected by what happens in the physical, however, the perfect mold can never be destroyed. The process of instant healing is one in which the mold is emptied of broken or diseased tissues and is refilled with basic substances to conform to the uninjured mold. This is done by the High Self in some unknown way and manner, once it is asked for and the path cleared, and the needed vital force is given to make the change. Huna teaches that this same process is what accounts for the phenomena of apports. This usually refers to the moving of physical objects over long distances by disincarnate spirits. The explanation the Huna teaching gives is that the disincarnate spirit somehow obtains an accumulation of extra vital force, and uses this vital force to dematerialize the physical object into its etheric or shadowy form. Then moving the object to the desired place, and materializing it back into physical earthly form. Huna teaches that it is also possible for the High Self to control such things as the weather, animals, insects, plant life, and/or anything on this third dimensional plane of reality. The phenomena of spirits materializing at a seance is thought to occur by the spirit using the vital force of the medium and the group to form themselves into denser matter. Another interesting anecdote on this issue of vital force and its uses by the Kahuna has to do with times of war in Hawaii. The Kahuna would take a ʹstickʹ
181
and fill it full of vital force and throw it at the oncoming enemy. When the stick would touch the person, they would be knocked immediately unconscious. The process of psychometry, according to Huna, is the ordering of a low self to follow the aka threads of an object back to its owner. This owner may be on the other side of the world, or in the astral plane. It apparently does not matter to the low self. The thoughts and memories and appearances would be noted, and then are brought back and given to the middle self. The low self shadow body, as I said before, is an exact metaphysical duplicate of the physical body. The low self hence has five inner senses, just as the physical body has five outer senses. The low self can be taught and trained to go and get information that it would be impossible for middle self to get. The phenomena of astral travel is when the low self, or, the low self and the middle self, leave the physical body for a period of time and travel in the astral frequency. The Hunas taught that every person does this every night in their sleep, however, they just donʹt remember when they wake up. It was believed that after physical death, the person would make a thoughtform world of ʹpurgatoryʹ in which they would live as in a dream, all such things they needed to live out. The last point I would like to discuss in relationship to Huna, is that of their concept of ʹnormal livingʹ. The point being that the integration of the three selves was the goal. The Kahunas believed that each living thing was in its intended stage of evolution, and there was sufficient time for all to grow upward. They believed that family life was good and that all normal living was good. They did not preach a doctrine of asceticism or self denial. They believed that the low self was just as important in the workings of life as was the High Self. They believed that God could not be reached by going straight up, but rather by living properly and normally on the earth with oneʹs fellowman!!! 182
39 The Egyptian Mysteries
ʺThe all is mind: The universe is mental.ʺ HERMES THOTH
What I am about to share with you in this chapter is one of the most fascinating true stories in the history of mankind. Archeologists have been trying to figure out for centuries what really went on in ancient Egypt. However, because they only approach the subject from their left brain and are not open to right brain information, their hypothesis, with no judgment intended, has been very inaccurate. It is possible to know exactly what went on in ancient Egypt, and to know exactly how the pyramids were built because of the great prophets and mystics of our time who are just able to read the Akashic Records (the storehouse of all knowledge). In my research for this chapter I have extensively studied the Edgar Cayce files and the profound channelings of Earlyne Channey on the subject. I have also extensively studied the transcripts of the Tibetan Foundation. I have read the 100% total recall of past life memories of Elizabeth Haiche in her wonderful book called ʺInitiationsʺ. I have carefully studied Earlyne Channeyʹs totally lucid past life memories in her book, ʺInitiation in the Great Pyramidʺ. I have studied the Paul Solomon channelings in the great pyramid. I have read another interesting book of total past life memories from the Akashic records called ʺThe Winged Pharaohʺ, by Joan Grant. I have studied Manly P. Hallʹs material on ancient Egypt. The mind boggling conclusion I have found is that they all basically told the same story. What I am about to share with you are the true secrets of what really happened in ancient Egypt, as read from the Akashic Records. To understand what really went on in Egypt we must go back in time to the continent of Atlantis, just before itʹs destruction, as I mentioned in the chapter on ʺThe Story of Creationʺ. The great prophets and masters of Atlantis who served the Law of One, could see the final destruction of Atlantis coming and
183
began to guide its spiritual community to leave. The story of Noahʹs ark is the biblical version of this event. (One little side note on this subject is that Noahʹs ark has actually been found. There was a television special that showed it caked in ice on top of Mount Ararat in either Turkey or Iran. When the snow melts in the summer it can be clearly seen. If you ever get a chance to see this television special on the subject, do watch it. The ark they found is gigantic, and because of the moving glacier, has split in half, however the different rooms inside can be clearly seen.) The Atlanteans traveled in all directions and went all over the world. One of the main places they went was to Egypt. One of the great teachers that was present at this time was Thoth‐Hermes. Thoth was an incarnation of the Buddha. (See chapter on Thoth‐Hermes and the Seven Great Universal Laws.) Thoth was a spiritual Master of the highest order and began to help the Egyptian civilization develop spiritually. Thoth also brought with Him from Atlantis, many great spiritual teachers. Thoth was also very connected with the positive extraterrestrials and the Great White Brotherhood. With His coming to Egypt both of these groups helped in Trothʹs efforts. Needless to say they were very successful and Egypt became one of the greatest civilizations to ever exist on this planet. The extraterrestrials came from Sirius, and the Pleiades. The combination of this great nucleus of teachers and spiritual Masters over a long period of time, helped to build the pyramids and temples throughout Egypt. It must be understood that the Egyptian civilization previous to the coming of the Atlantean and other groups, had been in operation for over 100,000 years, according to the Tibetan Foundation channelings. You must realize that man has been on earth for over 10.5 million years. Their real advance in consciousness didnʹt occur until the Atlanteans came with their advanced spiritual and technological advances that they had received to a large extent from extraterrestrials visiting Atlantis. The existing Egyptian civilization had a hard time assimilating the great number of Atlanteans into their land. Thoth and His group were highly respected, even looked at as gods. However, not all the Atlanteans were at the spiritual level of Thoth. This difficulty in assimilating the great number of souls who were pouring into Egypt went on for many generations. 184
When the time of the great flood was about to occur, a great many of the Atlanteans utilized the great many tunnels that existed underneath the pyramids to go and live in the inner earth. (See chapter on the Hollow Earth and the Story of Agharta.) The Atlanteans, hence were leaving for two reasons. One was to escape the possible flood that might overtake Egypt. Secondly they were leaving because they werenʹt being accepted by the existing Egyptian civilization. This vast network of tunnels were built with the use of the ark of the covenant and smaller versions of the ark that utilized a staff with an ankh on it. These instruments could cut through stone like a knife through butter. They could, in essence, dematerialize any object at will instantly. However, it was only the great initiates that were able to use them. The hollow earth people are hence descendants of the Atlantean and Egyptian civilization to a great part. Many of the extra terrestrials inter‐breeded with the women of Egypt and brought forth many children. These children were quite advanced. For the physical structure of a child does affect the consciousness. It was really the extra terrestrials in conjunction with the Great White Brotherhood that brought the plans for the building of the great pyramid, many of the smaller pyramids, and the sphinx. Many of them were part of a package. The step pyramid of Zoser is the oldest. This initial pack was designed to lay upon the lay lines or electrical grid points of the planet. The Great Pyramid of Giza is actually in the geographic center of the earth. Some of the latter pyramids were simply burial tombs. Many of the great pyramids in Mexico and in the Mayan civilization were built around the same time, for Atlanteans and extraterrestrials traveled there also. The Incas were part of this Atlantean migration. In Peru and Bolivia are pyramids and such made with extraterrestrial help. Atlanteans also went to India and Tibet, and all through South and Central America. It must be understood also, that they did have flying machines in Atlantis. There were also space beings that came from the planets within our own solar system, according to Earlyne Channeyʹs channelings. 185
The Anunnaki and the Arks of the Covenant The Anunnaki were the extraterrestrials that came from Sirius. They first visited Atlantis and brought with them the ʺArk of the Covenantʺ. The ark of the covenant looked much like what we saw in the movie ʺRaiders of the Lost Arkʺ. It was a transmitting device of high frequency energies. This device, in conjunction with mini arks of the covenant, which could be worn around an initiateʹs neck, or used on a staff, could be used like miniature laser beams. The pyramids were built by the use of these devices obtained from the extraterrestrials known as the Anunnaki. The rays from this device could cause the nullification of gravity. Ten thousand pound stones could be levitated in the air. A one pound rock could be made to weigh ten thousand pounds. This was how the Great Pyramid of Giza was able to be constructed. It had nothing to do with millions of slaves and pulleys and all that stuff materialistic archeologists fantasize about. The children of the Anunnaki were called the Annu. At some point in Atlantis the Anunnaki left to return to their own world and left the earth in hands of the Annu. It was the misuse of the arks of the covenant in relationship to the great crystal that destroyed Atlantis when the sons of Belial or the lords of Materialism gained too much power. The arks and the smaller version ankhs could also be used for healing and the curing of diseases. In times of danger they could be used as weapons of war and would kill instantly. At the time of the great flood, it was many of the Egyptian Annu that took many of the arks and ankhs with them into the inner earth cities. They entered these cities from underneath the great pyramid. They then sealed the entrance to the underground cities with their arks so they could not be followed and so the flood waters could not enter. This colony of Annu have remained in the inner earth ever since. The religious order they follow is the Order of Melchizadek. This occurred around 12,000 BC. The Great Pyramid The great pyramid in reality is like a great antenna. It was originally encased in white limestone which caused it to glow and sparkle. According to Earlyne Channey, in her book, ʺRevelations of Things to Comeʺ, floating in 186
suspension at the top of the pyramid was a mammoth crystal. Around this crystal was a border of pure gold. The capstone actually floated in space slightly above the pyramid because of the tremendous currents of energy that were flowing up from the center of the earth. There is an underground shaft that goes down deep into the earth right in the center of the pyramid. In this shaft were microwave generators. In the heart of the capstone was an ark of the covenant. Occasionally the capstone would be changed to a copper one or one made of Lapis Lazuli. Now it is important to understand that the arks of the covenant had to be charged by the use of mental powers. Once it was charged it functioned on its own, but it took a great spiritual initiate and Master to do this. The great pyramid, in conjunction with the capstone with the ark of the covenant inside of it, distributed light and energy throughout Egypt. One of the great Masters, who may also have been there in the physical at the creation of the building of the pyramid, was Osiris. He was a great spiritual Master who was assigned to bring the teachings of the Order of Melchizadek to earth. The Order of Melchizadek being the large cosmic branch of the Great White Brotherhood teachings. Djwhal Khul has told me that Osiris, Isis, and Thoth were all actually people, not mythology as modern historians conjecture. Each of the pyramids acted as a generator of force, especially when they housed an ark of the covenant. The ark was like a psychotronic generator, or miniature nuclear reactor except without the adverse radiation of our modern day nuclear power plants. The great pyramid was actually a receiving device of cosmic energy and also a sending device of the earthʹs own planetary Kundalini. The great pyramid was created in such a way as to be totally aligned with the cosmic current of our solar system and the great central sun itself. The crystal golden capstone acted like the third eye of the entire planet, according to Earlyne Channey. The crystal capstone also served as a universal communication device that allowed the ʺvoice of Godʺ and the Spiritual Hierarchy to be heard in a much easier manner. The pyramid was built to be a place of initiation for the Great White Brotherhood. The great pyramid has a square base and is constructed of huge blocks of yellow limestone weighing as much as 54 tons each. The precision is so exact 187
that the joints are hardly discernible. Each of the four sides of the great pyramid is a perfect equilateral triangle which slants inward and upward from the base in proportion of ten to nine, until they meet at the apex. The great Sphinx is a stone figure of a human head with a lion body. It is out of a single block of stone and is 189 feet long. If I am not mistaken, I think it is in the Sphinx that the Hall of Records lie. That contains all of the records of the Atlantean civilization. As I have mentioned previously, it is John of Penile, who is the incarnation of John the beloved (Kuthumi) who will open this record hall in this century. Edgar Cayce said that the great pyramid and Sphinx was built around 10,000 BC. It took about 100 years to complete. The arks of the covenant contained within it a pulsating crystal infused with a living light in our present time the ark of the covenant and capstone to the pyramid have been removed. The pyramid or house of light, has lost much of its former power. It is still considered the greatest house of light on earth. It was only the shape of the pyramid that allowed it to withstand and sustain the massive amounts of white light that ran through it at its peak. The pyramid symbolizes the spiritualization of matter. The Anaki came to accelerate this process for mankind and then left. Besides its function as a temple for initiation, the great pyramid was also an observatory to chart the celestial heavens. It also served as an insulation chamber for the ark, so that the general population would not be endangered by the incredible spiritual force that was being generated. Each part of the pyramid also had a chakra, according to Earlyne Channeyʹs book, ʺInitiation in the Great Pyramidʺ. The heart chakra was the kingʹs chamber. The third eye was the capstone. The chamber of rebirth and the well of life were other chakras. The Story of Ra‐Ta What I am about to share with you now is an absolutely fascinating birdʹs eye glimpse into ancient Egypt through the eyes of the Universal Mind as channeled by Edgar Cayce. A great many readings were done about ancient Egypt because Edgar Cayce had a past life at the time of the building of the great pyramid. His name at that time was Ra‐Ta. He was one of the great prophets and Spiritual Masters of his time. It was from his great works in that 188
lifetime, that the Universal Mind said that Edgar Cayce was able to do what he did in his life as Edgar Cayce. This absolutely fascinating story begins around the year 11,016, before the coming of Christ, or 300 years before the massive earth changes in Atlantis. There lived a group of people in the Caucasian Mountains of Eastern Europe of the white race. Their rulerʹs name was Arart. Arart was greatly influenced by a young godly priest by the name of Ra‐Ta. Ra‐Ta prophesied that the tribe of Zu would march on Egypt and rejuvenate or help the culture for the betterment of both races. Egypt would become the leading nation of the day. Abart, appointed his son, Araaraat, to rule to quell the political turmoil. The former king of Egypt, King Raai, married one of the beautiful daughters of the invaders which also helped to calm the political unrest. Emigrants were coming to Egypt from India, Mongolia, and Atlantis in great numbers. The Atlanteans of a more or less evolved nature brought with them their slaves and ʺthingsʺ. Ra‐Ta became the high priest of Egypt. He was interested in both the physical and spiritual evolution of man. He taught the law of the one God, as opposed to the worship of the sun that was very prevalent at that time. The social order of Egypt was much less advanced than that of the Atlanteans. Ra‐Ta made many trips to Atlantis and other places enhancing his knowledge and stature. He gained in popularity and influence. The high priest Ra‐Ta and his associates began setting up social codes to conform with the worship of the one God. They helped to create civil laws, penal codes, and moral ideals for the people. In one of Ra‐Taʹs trips to Atlantis he met Hept‐Supht in the city of Alta. Hept‐ Supht was the custodian of the record of the spiritual and religious secrets which had been handed down from generation to generation. Hept‐Supht was very much interested in having the laws of the Children of One be preserved in Egypt. Upon Ra‐Taʹs return home he built a Temple of Sacrifice and the Temple Beautiful in Egypt. The Temple of Sacrifice was a hospital or health care center. The Temple Beautiful was a school of higher learning and vocational training. 189
The Temple of Sacrifice was a physical and spiritual hospital. It was there that he helped to correct the deformities of the ʺthingsʺ, on a physical, as well as spiritual level. They used surgery, medicines, electrical therapy, massage, spinal adjustments, diet, music, colors, dancing, song chanting, and meditation as healing modalities. The idea was to clear the carnal desires and mental and physical defects. They also used the flames of the altar fires for purification. It often took as long as six and a half years to make the complete change in these individuals. Ra‐Ta was very successful in this endeavor for the ʺmixturesʺ or ʺthingsʺ began to disappear altogether from the face of the earth at this time. When the involvement with the Temple of Sacrifice was complete the patient graduated to the Temple Beautiful and to courses in vocational and spiritual training. The people who worked in the temples were men and women. The two sexes were seen as total equals. They both wore long flowing robes. Music was instruments in healing and the raising of vibration spiritually. Instruments such as flute, lyre, harp, and viola were used. Ra‐Ta spent much time traveling, and much time in prayer and meditation. This greatly enhanced his psychic abilities. After returning from one of his protracted journeys a group of priests who were more attuned to the sons of Belial (negative ego and materialism) had incorporated carnal sexual practices, blood sacrifice, and drug use in the form of strong drinks into the temple practices. This was the same problem that occurred in Atlantis between the Law of One and the sons of Belial. This small, but powerful group of priests, plotted a way to get rid of Ra‐Ta. Their plan was to use one of the temple dancers who worked in the Temple Beautiful. She was regarded throughout the land as the most beautiful woman in all of Egypt. Her name was Isris, which later changed to Isis. She was deceived by the evil priests to talk Ra‐Ta into having a child which would produce one of the most perfect physical and spiritual babies in all of Egypt. Isis was tricked into doing this by the priests, for she did not realize their evil intention. Ra‐Ta gave into the idea for many reasons, even though there was a law in Egypt that he had written that said that a person could only have one companion or spouse. She gave birth to a daughter by the name of Iso. Upon 190
the birth of the child, the evil priests cried for his banishment. The King Araaraat was in great conflict, but finally agreed to banish Ra‐Ta for breaking his own law. He traveled with 232 of his most devout followers, including Isis, and Hept‐Supht, to Abyssinia, south of Egypt. The king kept the child Iso as a hostage. She died at the age of four years old. Great conflict and fighting occurred in Egypt. The evil priests and sons of Belial wanted to keep the ʺthings and mixturesʺ as slaves, as well as their carnal sexual practices, and blasphemies to the temple life. Meanwhile in Abyssinia, Ra‐Ta in nine years helped to bring peace and prosperity to the people living there. Hept‐Supht (who had migrated to Egypt from Atlantis) returned to Egypt to help create a reconciliation between Ra‐Taʹs group and the king. Things were in such turmoil in Egypt that Ra‐Ta was invited back. Ra‐Ta was 100 years of age at this time. The announcement of his return caused rejoicing through Egypt. From that time onwards Ra‐Ta was known as Ra. Ra is a name for God in the Egyptian language. Isis became influential in working for the rights of women. Years later she came to be worshipped as a goddess. Upon Raʹs return the Temple of Sacrifice and Temple Beautiful were cleaned of all profane practices. A period of social and spiritual rebuilding began anew. By this time word had spread around the world of the wonders taking place in Egypt. Learned men and priests came from all over the world to see Egyptʹs spiritual and material accomplishments. They came from China, Mongolia, India, Norway, and Peru. Egypt became a leader among the nations of the world. The records that Hept‐Supht brought from Atlantis also proved invaluable. The site that was selected for the safe keeping of these records, and esoteric content of the law was the fertile plains of Gizeh. This area was determined to be the mathematical center of the earth, and also safe from earthquakes and floods. The Sphinx was also constructed at this time. In the right forepaw of the Sphinx a passage was made to lead to the entrance of the record chamber. This was to remain undiscovered and protected by a mystical code until mankind as a whole had overcome his negative ego and lower self. It was then that the great initiate would come to open these records for the glory of humanity and God. 191
The exact dates of the construction of the great pyramid, according to Edgar Cayce, was 10,490 to 10,390 BC. According to Cayce the actual construction and engineering were worked out by Hermes, a descendant of Hermes Trismegistus, also known as Thoth. Djwhal Khul told me that Thoth did help from the spiritual plane in the great pyramids construction. Metatron, the archangel, also helped in its building and energizing with cosmos light. Cayceʹs readings confirmed exactly what Earlyne Channeyʹs readings said about its construction. The great pyramid is a record in stone of the history and development of mankind. This record in stone is from the time of Ra and King Araaraat, to the year 1998. The records and prophecies of this great pyramid are written in the language of mathematics, geometry, and astronomy. Many of you are aware of the pyramid prophecies. The pyramid accurately predicted the birth and death of Jesus Christ, to the year, day and hour. 1936 was prophesied as a year of disturbances, turmoils, storms, war, and land upheavals. After 1956 a time of adjustment follows. The pyramid prophecies end in 1998 which is a time for the coming of the ʺMasterʺ. The accuracy of the pyramid prophecies is quite unbelievable, for the Master it speaks of is here and his name is the Lord Maitreya, the Planetary Christ. This was predicted 12,400 years ago. It also must be remembered that Jesus, himself, took his final initiate degrees along with John the Baptist in this pyramid. I would like to end this section with a quote by Edgar Cayce in a fabulous little book called ʺThe Origin and Destiny of Manʺ by Lytle Robinson. ʺThen with Hermes and Ra ...there began the building of that now called Gizeh. ...that was to be the Hall of the Initiates of that sometimes referred to as The White Brotherhood...ʺ Much of the information for this section was researched from Lytle Robinsonʹs book, ʺThe Origin and Destiny of Manʺ. If you would like to learn more on this subject I would highly recommend getting it. Edgar Cayce may be one of the greatest channels of information this world has ever known. 192
Earlyne Channeyʹs Past Life as A High Priestess in the Order of Melchizadek In one of the most interesting books I have ever read, called, ʺInitiation in the Great Pyramidʺ, by Earlyne Channey. Earlyne has total recall of her experiences going through all seven levels of initiation in the great pyramid in approximately the Third Dynasty, at the time of King Zoser. King Zoser was a God realized Pharaoh who, in this lifetime, is an Ascended Master spirit guide for Earlyne Channey, along with Khutumi, and Virgin Mary. King Zosar, at that time, was a Ptah (Supreme Master of the Lodge and Light and Order of Melchizadek). In this book she tells this fascinating story right out of the Akashic Records, of being born into a family where both her mother and father were seventh degree initiates within the Order of Melchizadek. Earlyneʹs name was Nefre‐Tah‐Khet. From the moment of her birth she was destined to become a high priestess within the temple. She tells of the incredible event when two spaceships arrived at Memphis. This event created great excitement in the entire nation. One spaceship arrived from Peru. Another spaceship arrived from a remnant island of Atlantis. Shortly after, a third enormous UFO craft arrived from outer space. The arrival of these space craft transformed Egypt. One particular being who arrived, the Egyptians called, Imhotep. It was under his guidance and friendship with King Zoser that Egyptian civilization greatly accelerated. These beings brought with them the arks of the covenant. It was explained to Earlyne that the major earth changes that had taken place had caused the planet to be thrown out of alignment. This had caused the great pyramid to be out of alignment with the great cosmic current. This prevented the Kundalini energy from the earth to rise as it once had. It was the Melchizadeks who were the Ptahs and High Priests of the Great Pyramid now. Only those initiates who passed through all seven levels of initiation in this Great House of Light were called Melchizadeks. The Melchizadeks were revered almost like Gods in Egypt at this time. When the extraterrestrials brought a new Ark of the Covenant the priests and high priests were ecstatic with joy. This is what happened at the time of Zosar according to Earlyne.
193
The original Ark of the Covenant had been had been brought around the year 13,000 BC. I believe the Third Dynasty, in which Earlyne lived, would refer to 3,000 BC. Her father told her that the great pyramid had been built three thousand years earlier. Under Imhotepʹs guidance, upper and lower Egypt were united. Great advances in culture, art, and architecture were achieved. Zoser and Imhotep constructed the step pyramid at Saqqara. As a child, Earlyne trained at the school in Heliopolis. I bring this up because the Edgar Cayce readings say that Jesus and John the Baptist trained at the same school 3,000 years later. Earlyneʹs Training to Become Initiated Her earlier years she studied the teachings of Thoth‐Hermes. She was placed on a strict vegetarian diet. Her diet consisted of vegetables, fruits, nuts, seeds, grains, plant proteins, milk from sacred cows, and goats, and cheese. She also was given special herbal concoctions. She was taught body movements, asanas, postures, mudras, breath control, and meditation. As I have mentioned in another chapter, the Egyptian teachings, in part, were almost identical to those of the Huna, or Kahunas of Hawaii. Instead of explaining these here, I have set aside a whole chapter for the presentation of these wonderful teachings (See chapter on ʺHuna Teachingsʺ.) The essence of her training was to unite her conscious and subconscious mind with her super conscious mind or soul. In Egyptian, the soul was referred to as the Aumakua. Part of her training was to work with subconscious by the use of a pendulum. She was taught to chant and listen to the sacred sound of aum. As Earlyne developed, she was taught psychic development, and channeling. She developed the ability to speak to her Higher Self and spirit guides. She became proficient at telepathy, and the ability to control the weather, and communicate with the nature spirits. She learned about astronomy, astrology, and alchemy. She had to learn to get rid of negative tendencies such as anger, pride, envy, and impatience. She was trained in the language of symbology, dreams, hieroglyphic writings.
194
She was trained in the study of magic and the ability to control the genies that protected the sacred tombs. The genies were angelic like beings that actually do exist. (I confirmed this with Djwhal Khul.) She learned to use the words of power, and to use amulets, gemstones, and talismans. The greater mysteries were only taught to the temple initiates, while the lesser mysteries were taught to the general public. She had to work with daily affirmations and prayers to reprogram her subconscious mind. Over time her clairvoyance, clairsentience and clairaudience developed. She was trained in the sacred science of geometry. She had to learn the sacred signs, grips, and passwords needed to gain admission to the lodge. She had to learn to use the power in her eyes as a type of eye ray to hypnotize animals. She was trained in moral, and spiritual development and in the refinement of her character. She was taught the importance of raising oneʹs sexual energies into the higher chakras and not be overtaken with carnal desire. She was trained in the art of raising the kundalini in a safe gradual manner as she progressively went through the seven levels of initiation. She was taught to clear her negative emotions, and rise above the animal nature. Her physical body was being gradually trained to build the power in her nervous system to withstand the gradual increasing vibrations of each coming initiation. She was taught how to commune with the angels. She was trained in a sacred form of dance that put one in tune with the spiritual world. She was taught the cosmology of the universe. She was trained in the science of how to unite her ego with her spirit. She was taught to face and overcome her own dweller on the threshold. She became proficient at psychometry and inner smelling. She was trained in the science of soul travel. She was trained to merge with clear light of God, as most of us attempt to do during our own death and subsequent Bardo experience. Elizabeth Haich and Her Training in the Great Pyramid Elizabeth Haich, in her wonderful book called, ʺInitiationʺ, sent through a similar type of training that Earlyne Channey went through. I will not repeat 195
those courses of study which I have already mentioned, however, Elizabeth was also trained to create emotions at will. The final result of these exercises allowed the initiate to keep oneʹs emotional composure and imperturbability at all times under all circumstances. Hence the transcendence of duality and all attachment. She was taught to balance the twelve sets of opposite characteristics: Keeping silent versus talking Receptivity versus resistance to influence Obeying versus ruling Humility versus self confidence Lightning speed versus circumspection To accept everything versus to be able to differentiate Ability to fight versus peace Caution versus courage To possess nothing versus to command everything To have no ties versus loyalty Contempt for death versus regard for life Indifference versus love. She was trained in the importance of keeping silent. She was trained in the psychic abilities and concentration, to give expression only to the divine and not to the satanic, to remain in absolute mastery of physical, emotional, and mental forces. She was trained in detachment and observance of the lower bodies and to most of all identify oneself with the soul and Eternal Self. She was taught how to control all her physical organs, for example, how to slow the heart beat. She was trained how to differentiate the Divine Self from the personal ʺIʺ self or ego. She was taught the seven octaves of vibration. Physical ‐ Mineral and Plant Emotional ‐ Animal Mental ‐ Average man Intuitive ‐ Genius Atmic ‐ Prophet Monadic ‐ Divine Wisdom and Universal Love Logoic ‐ God/Man This is how her Egyptian teachers framed the seven octaves of God. She was trained how to use the Arc of the Covenant staff for healing. She was trained 196
in sacred geometry. She was taught to control the lower self and carnal nature. She was taught to not fear death, or be attached to people or things. She was taught to put union with oneʹs soul and spirit above even the highest form of human love. She was taught to overcome the pull of desire, and the physical appetites. She was trained to put others before self, and not fear death. Summation These last two sections tell of the incredible training an initiate had to go through to be accepted and be able to pass the seven levels of initiation. In the next chapter I will share with you the fascinating detailed accounts of what actually went on in the Great Pyramid of Giza during these actual initiations. 197
40 Initiation in the Great Pyramid
ʺThe all is mind: The universe is mental.ʺ HERMES THOTH
I personally find the subject of initiation one of the most interesting of all subjects. Initiation deals with specific requirements, procedures, and rituals that take place in the process of achieving oneʹs ascension and union with God. In an earlier chapter I have gone into great detail describing the process of initiation as described by Djwhal Khul in the Alice Bailey writings and in modern times. That chapter dealt, in great detail as to the process of moving through the seven levels of initiation as seen by the Great White Brotherhood and Spiritual Hierarchy. In this chapter we will look at the seven levels of initiation as seen by ancient Spiritual Masters and Ptahs of ancient Egypt. As I describe these initiations, I would recommend that you look within self to see if you have passed these tests in your own consciousness and life, on your path to union with God. In my opinion all these initiations that I will describe from different viewpoints are still totally applicable to this day. In a sense, the reading of this chapter can be used as a point of initiation, self examination, and as a springboard to greater focused commitment to your own spiritual path. Initiation To begin this discussion I would like to talk a little bit about what initiation as seen by the ancient Egyptian Ptahs, priests, high priestesses, and Hierophant. First off the initiations were divided into seven graded stages, levels, and degrees.
198
Depending on the period of history we are dealing with, the exact procedure was different. In this chapter I will share three different experiences of initiation as read from the Akashic records. They all were very different in their procedure but essence of what they were teaching were all the same. In general usually during the higher initiations the initiate was placed in an Sarcophagus like coffin. They were put into an altered state of consciousness, and underwent a test of meeting oneself. For example, if in the initiates subconscious mind there was a fear of snakes, then in this dream state of consciousness which seemed absolutely totally real to the initiate, he or she would have to overcome this fear. The overcoming, in part, had to do with the realization that what they were facing was their own dweller on the threshold, or their own fear. As soon as they would have this realization, and would overcome the fear which is just a state of mind, then the snakes would immediately disappear. Initiation in the great pyramid were in actuality very similar to the 3 day bardo experience we all face upon death of our physical body. The experiences we will have will seem totally real, although what we are experiencing is just the meeting of our own dream pictures. The Egyptian spiritual Masters set up a way to accelerate spiritual growth by allowing a disciple to experience this process before having to physically die. The idea in the bardo experience is to merge with the light. The same is really true in the Egyptian initiations. The idea is, no matter what you go through, to put union with God first. The initiations are, in essence, tests to see if the disciple will succumb to other temptations on the seven octaves of oneʹs being. The Egyptians believed that these dream pictures lying latent in the subconscious mind, would, with absolutely certainty, become real events on earth if the disciple didnʹt experience them during the initiation process. Initiation allowed one the opportunity to resolve these issues and oneʹs relationship to oneʹs dweller on the threshold (glamour, maya, illusion, ego) in this type of meditation rather than in oneʹs present earthly life or in future physical incarnations. In essence, a person was experiencing their own personal karma from the beginning of all of oneʹs past lives. Instead of appearing as future, you were now given the opportunity to experience them as dreams that seemed totally 199
real. Initiation, hence, was the process of going down into the depths of your soul to accelerate the process of experiencing your personal karma as state of consciousness or dream pictures during the initiation process. In a sense, we go through a similar process every night when we go to sleep. During our dreams we are experiencing the return of that which we set in motion through our thoughts, words, and deeds the previous day in our dream state. The only difference is that we are usually not conscious enough in our dreams to be able to change them when they are happening. This can be done, however, and it is called lucid dreaming. It is a state of consciousness to strive for, in which you are totally conscious yet still dreaming. In that state of consciousness you can change the sequence of events that are occurring in your dreams if you donʹt like the process of what is going on. The process of initiation in ancient Egypt is very similar to this. By experiencing your karma in this dream state, you then have met the law and do not have to experience in physical reality or a future lifetime, if you can pass the test. One of the things that happened in the higher states of initiation in the great pyramid is that many initiates didnʹt pass the test and physically died in the sarcophagus and passed on to the spiritual world. They gained spiritually by all they went through, however did not complete the whole process. What I will be sharing with you about the personal odyssey of Elizabeth Haich in her life in Egypt is an example of this in part. She didnʹt physically die but she didnʹt complete her training because of not passing a particular spiritual test. I will get to her story in just a little bit, but before I do this I would like to speak a little more about the process of initiation in general terms. During the process of initiation the candidates body was subjected to higher frequencies of energy, corresponding to the level or degree of initiation the candidate was taking. With the influx of that energy the candidate would become conscious on higher level. During the final seventh level of initiation, all the currents of force of all seven levels of consciousness were conducted through the body, from the lowest gradually to the highest. The initiate, hence, is given the opportunity to pass through tests and become conscious on all seven levels of consciousness. 200
Without the proper training a candidate who had not been prepared properly within their nervous system and consciousness, by going through the proceeding initiations, would actually burn up, or spontaneously combust, from the higher frequency of energy at that highest seventh level. During the initiation process all unconscious portions of the soul and unconscious become conscious. The passing of the initiation involves experiencing all this material as it comes up at each graded level of initiation, and secondly the need is to master that force through oneʹs consciousness and spiritual gifts. In Elizabeth Haichʹs experience of initiation, in her book by that title, she prepared for a long period of time to take her initiations, and then took them all at once while lying in the sarcophagus. Earlyne Chaney took her initiations one at a time and only laid in the sarcophagus for her seventh initiation. The other six initiations were tests of another sort that were set up by the Ptah, and Hierophant. The God realized Being manifests and controls all seven levels of creation, however, identifies oneʹs self only with the seventh. He uses the other levels, but is identified on the highest plane. If the initiation is not passed then those dream pictures will have to be experienced as real events in outer reality in either that life or a future one. Each level seems totally real, so in a sense the initiate was going through seven different deaths and rebirths. The passing of all seven levels of initiation allowed one to become a high priest or priestess, which was also called a Melchizadek. Elizabeth Haichʹs Initiation in the Great Pyramid of Giza After going through the great amount of training as I mentioned in the last chapter, Elizabeth was permitted by the Ptah to take her initiation. Again, in Elizabethʹs particular experience she took all seven levels of initiation at the same time which was completely different from Earlyne Chaneyʹs experience. Earlyne had to wait sometimes five to ten years between some initiations. My intuition is that this would be the norm. This is also more similar to the way Djwhal Khul has described initiation from the teachings of the Great White Brotherhood. I do not mean to discount Elizabeth Haichʹs experience, for, as you are about to see, it was quite fascinating. 201
Her experience began by three days of prayer, meditation, fasting, self introspection. Upon still deciding she was ready, her spiritual Master Ptahhotep, guided her to get into the sarcophagus and lie down. To make a long story short she begins to experience an awful monster, which was the personification of evil itself. This energy force proceeds to take over her consciousness and blend its energies with hers. Horrified, she comes to her wits, and begins to disidentify with this energy and to affirm her identity as the Eternal Self, free from fear and evil. This process continues for a while and finally the monster disappears and she has passed her first initiation. It is only after the monster has left that she realizes that she has had a horrible dream. During the experience it seemed totally real. Her second initiation began when she found herself in a room with soft reddish light. Pleasant, well mannered people began offering her wonderful food and drinks in golden vessels. She was tempted with the most wonderful delicacies you can imagine, however, she affirmed to herself that the desired God above the pleasures of the palate and refused politely. She had passed her second initiation. The dream images faded away, even though they had seemed totally real. Her third initiation began when she found herself in a room with attractive men and women dancing together and lounging on couches in heated sexual passion. An attractive man begins to talk with and tries to come on to her in a romantic and sexual manner. Elizabeth, having grown up from childhood in the temple, had almost no experience with relationships so in a sense she was protected because of this. Her lack of experience made her not tempted in the slightest and proceeded to lecture the man in the debasing exceedingly degrading way all the people in the room were letting their lower self and carnal passions completely take over their consciousness. She proceeded to describe love between two people in more Godly terms, rather than carnal terms. The man turned into a flaming spirit, and tried to possess her, and force himself upon her. She remained strong and affirmed, ʺI Am That I Amʺ and the vision passed. (Side note: Elizabethʹs lack of experience in romantic relationships proved to be her downfall in her later life. Ptahhotep had warned her as a young child not to ask to be initiated because of her lack of experience in this area. She was adamant, however, and three different times came to Ptahhotep and asked to be initiated even though he had adamantly refused every time 202
saying she was not ready. Upon the third time he had to give in, for it was written in their laws if a candidate asked three times and was refused each time but continued to ask to be initiated, then he had to agree even though it was ill advised. His prophecy turned out to be correct, for even though Elizabeth passed this initiation and her later ones, during her probationary period in learning to stabilize the energies from the sixth to the seventh level, she succumbed to the temptations of this initiation and the one following even though she had passed it during the initiation process. It was because she was still on probation that this was able to take place. In Earlyne Chaneyʹs initiations, which I will describe after Elizabethʹs experience, she, once passing the seventh initiation, was not in danger because of the difference in the initiation process of the two periods in history.) Upon passing the third initiation, Elizabeth moved to the fourth initiation. In this initiation she was confronted with her twin flame or twin soul on spiritual levels. This experience did not contain the carnal sexual energy of the last experience. It was much sweeter and loving in a spiritual sense. Elizabeth, however, was adamant about her commitment to put her union with her own soul and spirit, even above her soul mate or twin soul, and she passed this test. Elizabethʹs fifth initiation was a very long experience of a future life during World War I or World War II. Her children and husband were her closest friends and spiritual comrades from her life in Egypt although they didnʹt know it, but she did. She had great love for her family, and to make a long story short was confronted with death of her son, husband, family, and self. This was a spiritual test of confronting death and to see if she would put her total faith and trust in God. It also had to do with the lesson of attachment. Elizabeth passed this test by seeing the eternal self in her entire family and not just seeing them as physical bodies and personalities whom she loved. She also affirmed her faith and trust in God during the tests of this long drawn out experience of what seemed long war torn Europe. She passed because she surrendered all into Godʹs hands, and put God even before death itself. These images then faded even though it was absolutely totally real as if it was actually happening while she was going through it. 203
This brought Elizabeth to the sixth initiation. She found herself under a crystal blue sky in which she was confronted with seven steps that she had to climb. The first step had to do with mastery of the physical body. The second step had to do with mastery of the vital forces within the physical body. The third step had to do with mastery of the emotional body. The fourth step had to do with mastery of the mental body and all self doubts. The fifth step. Each step she climbed she found she had grown taller physically. The fifth step she had to pull herself up like climbing a mountain. This step was so high that it took great difficulty, but upon finally doing so she realized that she no longer had a physical body but was in her spiritual body. The sixth step could only be climbed by the demonstration of universal love. Upon passing this test she finds another person reaching this step at the same time she did. This person begs her to help him climb to the seventh step. Elizabeth forgets about her own journey and proceeds to help this person reach the seventh step. Upon doing so she finds herself upon the seventh step, for upon forgetting about herself in the service of others she realized God. She had to transcend her self centered desire for initiation only for herself. Summation These experiences of Elizabeth are outlined in great detail in her book, ʺInitiationʺ by Elizabeth Haich. If you would like to read and experience her more in‐depth version, I would highly recommend getting her book. These are all tests that each one of us must pass even in this day if we are going to achieve ascension and full self realization. The Initiations of Jesus Christ in the Great Pyramid of Giza Both Edgar Cayce and Levi in his book, ʺThe Aquarian Gospel of Jesus the Christʺ, tell of Jesus Christʹs experiences of being initiated in the Great Pyramid of Giza. Edgar Cayce tells of how John the Baptist was also initiated here, as was Plato. In the Aquarian gospel of Jesus the Christ it gives a very short narration of the initiation and spiritual tests that Jesus went through in the Great Pyramid. 204
The first initiation Jesus passed was that of the test of sincerity. The second brotherhood test was that of justice. The third brotherhood test was that of faith. The fourth brotherhood test and initiation was that of philanthropy. The fifth brotherhood test was that of heroism. The sixth brotherhood test and initiation was that of divine love. In passing the seventh brotherhood test he received the highest degree which is that of the ʺChristʺ. These tests are documented in ʺThe Aquarian Gospel of Jesus the Christʺ, by Levi, if you would like more information. The Initiations of Earlyne Chaney in the Great Pyramid of Giza Earlyne Chaneyʹs initiations in the Great Pyramid were quite different in some respects from Elizabeth Haichʹs experiences. From the time she was born she was being prepared to become a high priestess in the Order of Melchizadek. Her actual training began at 3 years old. It wasnʹt until the age of twelve that she was allowed to take her first initiation. It was only the final initiation or seventh degree where she was to lay in the sarcophagus as Elizabeth Haich had done. In some ways without judging the two experiences, Earlyneʹs seemed more powerful because of the great amount of time, training, and preparation that had to be done before she was even allowed to take each initiation. Her first initiation began by fasting for three days on vegetable and fruit juices and special herbal concoctions. All of Earlyneʹs initiations were quite complex and long lasting so I am only going to give the briefest account. For the full explanation please do read her book ʺInitiation in the Great Pyramidʺ. In the first initiation she was blindfolded and her wrists were tied together with a manacle. She was spun around several times and then told to move towards the light. She was in total darkness and all of a sudden she was engulfed in a tremendous storm with hail and lightning and thunder. The water rose to her waist. Without the use of her hands, she kept losing her balance and falling in the water. Earlyne then opened her crown chakra and her spirit guide began to guide her where she needed to go.
205
Upon passing this part of the test her blind fold and manacle was removed. Suddenly this gigantic man came towards her and put a dagger to her throat. She vowed to not give away the secrets of the lodge and the man took the knife from her throat. She then realized that 49 judges and/or high priests were present, watching her. She was given instruction and then baptized three times which symbolized the purification of the different aspects of her nature. The experiences she went through were symbolic. The blindfold has to do with the blindness of the human race, reminding her that she could not find the inner light with the physical eyes, but only with the eye of the soul. The dagger at the throat symbolized the sword of karma, which would occur if she became disobedient to Godʹs laws upon taking these initiations. The battle against the elements were to test her courage and perseverance. Earlyne was then led to a place between two columns, where stood a ladder of seven steps. At the top of the ladder were thirteen gates of different dimensions. The next part of her initiation was to climb the seven steps and choose which gate she would go through to pass her future initiations. Her inner guidance told her that only one of these gates would allow her to take any future initiations. If she chose wrongly no further initiations would be allowed. With the help of her inner guidance she chose the right door. She was then given a new cream colored robe, and a lambskin apron of pure white. At each initiation the initiate would be given a new colored robe and apron. Her white apron was to symbolize the need to purify and control the passions of the physical form. Each new apron symbolized control over another one of the seven bodies. She also received her first of seven ankhs, the pewter tau cross of the first degree initiate. She learned the secret sign of the first degree and was given the secret word of the first degree which meant discrimination. It also meant to turn away from the attractions of the outer world. She was also given a ring with a crystal on it. She was told that the ring would reflect her future progress as her light unfolded. She was also given a bracelet of pewter with a signet of the first degree. The ring she received also served to protect her from negative vibrations. It was a charmed talisman.
206
When They spoke to her They referred to her as a child to reduce the outer ego into a state of humility. Earlyne had passed initiation number one. Initiation Number Two After seven more years of intensive training Earlyne was given permission to take the second initiation. It began again with three days of fasting, prayer, and meditation. She had to memorize the signs, grips and passwords to gain admission to the lodge. The initiation began when one of the priests ran towards her and tossed a live serpent directly at Earlyne. Earlyne threw it to the ground and hypnotized it with the power of her eyes as she had been trained. She also talked to the serpent as the incarnation of God that it is. She was congratulated by the assembly for passing the first part of the initiation. In the next part she was led to a strange creature called a griffin that was twirling a wheel containing four spokes. Her test was to give the meaning of this entire symbol. The griffin had a body of a lion with wings and talons of an eagle. Her inner guidance told her that the griffin symbolized physical man with spiritual attributes which would allow him to fly into the heavenly spheres. This allowed man to control the wheel for the four seasons and elements of nature. She had passed the test. She was given a new secret word which had to do with the negative nature of matter which she was to learn the secrets of. She was given a new apron, and Ankh. She was given five years to prepare for her next initiation and was told what she needed to study upon and master, which had to do with self mastery over her mind and psychic faculties. The symbolism of the live serpent had to do with escaping the illusions of the astral plane and demonstrating mastery over this plane and the animal kingdom in a loving way. Her father explained to her that the griffin on the wheel also symbolized mankind being caught in the wheel of reincarnation and the need for mankind to overcome its lower nature and lower self. The control of the serpent also had to do with the raising of the serpent power or kundalini. The directive of the second degree initiate was ʺTo know, to will, to dare, and to keep silent.ʺ 207
Initiation Number Three The initiation began by entering an entrance that had the words ʺGate of Deathʺ. As Earlyne walked through this area she came upon a sarcophagus where lay a body of one of the great Ptahs or high priests who had just been assassinated. Swarms of officials came running towards Earlyne and wanted to know if she was responsible. She was roughly dragged into the hall of the high priest. The Hierophant apologize for her mistreatment and as a recompense offered her a golden crown that would help her in her future trials. She was about to grab it when her inner guidance warned her that this was a test. She then threw the gold crown to the floor in disdain and the Hierophant proceeded to strike her with a forceful blow. She was wrapped in mummy bandages, leaving only her face exposed, and taken through a gate that said sanctuary of spirits. She was taken in a boat downwards to the judge of the dead. The bandages were removed. She was given instruction and told that she was going to have to stay in this underground sanctuary of the dead until the judges could determine whether she had mastered the sciences of the soul, magic, and alchemy. She was told she would spend a good portion of the rest of her life in these pits until she passed these tests. The symbolism of the initiation she had gone through so far had to do with the question of whether she had anything to do with the assassination of her own Higher Self or soul. The golden crown she was offered symbolized the test of the temptation of worldly power and wealth over God. Her being wrapped in bandages symbolized the soul being bound by ignorance, superstition and fear. The removal of the bandages in the lower cavern symbolized the shedding of the physical body at death. The probationary period in the sanctuary of the dead symbolized a time of temporary imprisonment in the lower astral realms after death to impress upon the incarnated personality that he or she must live in a way that doesnʹt cause imprisonment after death in these lower astral worlds. Earlyne was then tested by the tribunal on her psychic, intuitive and magical skills and passed her test. She was given a new robe and apron and ankh. 208
Earlyneʹs Fourth Initiation This initiation began when Earlyne and her priest guide were attacked by figures wearing hideous masks, and brandishing weapons. The priest sprang go her defense pleading with her to run and make her escape. Earlyne refused to run and fought, but was soon overpowered. They were blindfolded and a cable tow was placed around their necks. They were physically bruised but not seriously injured. Upon the removal of the blindfold they were in front of the assembly of priests and she was complimented for not running to save her own life, but fought to help the priest. The attackers represented the animalistic nature, and negative emotions, and temptations every initiate must overcome. Earlyne was then given a bitter potion to drink. Her physical fatigue and aching body lifted and she was then given a sword of righteousness. She was told to strike off the head of the foe that she would meet in the valley below. She traveled to the valley below to meet her foe, but to her surprise her ʺtwin soulʺ or ʺsoul mateʺ whom she recognized, came towards her. She sprang forward to meet him when her inner guidance warned her that this was a test. Her psychic senses told her that this being who looked totally real was really more of a type of hologram and not a living being at all. She proceeded to chop off his head. This was obviously a test to not succumb to romantic love over union with God. (Similar tests to Elizabeth Haichʹs experience on really all of the initiations in terms of the symbolic meaning.) She was told that she would one day meet her twin flame but only when the time was right. The symbolism of the chopped off head symbolized victory over human carnality and temptation which was the death of the base desires of the negative ego and lower self. Only by slaying the lower nature could the initiate hope to merge with the Higher Self, soul, and spirit. The passing of the fourth initiation allowed her now to attend all the sacred meetings. She was given a new robe, apron, ankh. Part of her training for the next initiation had to do with learning to soul travel, and gain mastery of the elements of nature. 209
Earlyneʹs Fifth Initiation In this initiation Earlyne was told that she was to watch a theatrical drama in which any members of the Order of Melchizadek would take part. She would be a spectator and not take part. The drama depicted the battle between the divine Horus, and hideous monster Set. Set had a hundred serpent heads and was like a dragon of ancient mythology. The divine Horus overcame the dragon with his superior spiritual and physical strength. The symbolism was that of the battle all initiates go through on the physical plane. We all must be like spiritual warriors and remain detached from the temptations and desires of the lower self and negative ego. Earlyneʹs watching and not participating symbolized this need for detachment and objectivity. The destruction of Set symbolized victory of good over evil and the removal of all negative emotions, lower self, desire, fear and separation from the consciousness of the initiate. The dragon, Set, symbolized the kundalini power turned downward instead of upwards, which resulted in lust, greed, hate, jealousy, and anger. The divine Horus represented the upturned kundalini, leading towards soul and spiritual merger and liberation from the wheel of rebirth. Earlyne received her new robe, ankh, apron, and secret word. The secret word had to do with ʺchemistryʺ. the chemistry had to do with the alchemy of changing lead into gold. On the human level this had to do with changing the base human nature into the divine spiritual nature. Earlyneʹs Sixth Initiation This initiation began with being taken on a type of small boat into a super large lake where she was blindfolded. She was towed into the middle of the lake where there was no sight of land in any direction. Her blindfold was removed and her companions left in another boat and rowed off into the mists. A gigantic storm was approaching. Earlyne had to use her knowledge of astronomy. The storm hit with tremendous velocity threatening to capsize her boat many times. There were no stars, no moon, no light of any kind, just pitch black in the storm.
210
Earlyne was extremely fearful, when her inner guidance told her to use her spiritual powers to communicate with the nature spirits of the storm to ask them to stop and help her. She called aloud to the undines (water spirits) and the sylphs (wind spirits) and they immediately came to her aid and stopped the storm. She then used her astronomy knowledge to guide her boat in the right direction. Earlyne had passed her sixth initiation. Earlyneʹs Final Seventh Initiation The seventh initiation could only be taken with the permission of the Pharaoh and the Master Ptah. In this initiation the divine self was to forever unite itself with the soul and spirit. The initiate would become a Melchizadek Priest or High Priestess. Each initiate was also called a prophet or an opened eye. This initiation took place in the great sarcophagus. The soul would leave the body, much like the death experience and the kundalini would rise. The initiate would have the opportunity to merge with clear light of God just like in the bardo experience. This would lead to merger with God, and complete liberation from the bondage of matter. The God being would then have mastery over the seven octaves of vibration. The little ego merges with the divine ego. As a preparation for this final initiation Earlyne spent three days alone in the Sphinx temple. As Elizabeth Haich described in her experience, Earlyne would have to confront her own dweller on the threshold. She would have to meet the though forms of a lower nature that had not yet been destroyed in the deepest recesses of her subconscious mind. Earlyneʹs lesson in this upcoming initiation was to meet and conquer them. They must be brought into her conscious awareness, otherwise they would have to be made manifest physically in this or a future incarnation. Only when the dweller of the threshold (glamour, maya, illusion, negative ego) has been confronted fully and subjugated can the initiate truly see God. These base metals much be changed into gold. The initiateʹs frequency must match that of the clear light of God. If this does not happen, only a partial awakening can occur. Some initiates who took this initiation didnʹt emerge alive for their bodies could not handle the high voltage of the clear light frequencies. Hence, they passed on to the spiritual world without passing the initiation. 211
The initiation began with Earlyne drinking what has been called ʺAmritaʺ which is an ambrosial nectar of the gods. As she drank her spiritual faculties began to awaken and expand. They traveled to a subterranean chamber called the Pit of the Fiery Ordeal. The dwellers of the threshold began to appear!!! Vile insects, crawling reptiles, crocodiles, swarming bats, stinging asps, dead ghosts began to surround her. They looked totally real, however her inner guidance reminded her that they only represented thought forms she had created during her incarnations on earth. Earlyne had thought her mind was purified, but on the deepest subconscious level she was mistaken. She was experiencing not only this life but all her lifetimes. The clear light of God could not enter a consciousness filled with pride, judgment, fears, and lower self character qualities. She was guided to use the power of her ankh around her neck as a type of Ark of the Covenant, and proceeded to de‐energize these creatures. She then began to chant the words of power (see chapter on Words of Power, Repetition of the name of God, Mantras.) The creatures began to evaporate. Then a being that was half human, half dragon began to attack her. She wondered to herself what she could have done in a past life to create such a monster. She prayed. To her astonishment her twin flame appeared and they proceeded to fight this monster with ʺthought power and raysʺ. Using these rays in conjunction with a crystal they were able to kill the beast. She embraced her knight and twin flame and they were immersed in love energy. When her inner guidance said, ʺBeware the womb door.ʺ Channeling this energy sexually could cause the need for a future immediate need for incarnation in a future life. She affirmed to herself that this was not the time to meld in love with her knight and twin flame even though he had helped to save her life. She had passed the first part of her initiation. The divine Ptah whom she referred to as Thoth, took her to a deep cavern within the Great Pyramid called the Well of Life. Here she was wrapped in an animal skin and laid her body down and was taken in her soul body up the shaft of the Well of Life in the Chamber of New Birth, also known as the Queenʹs Chamber. In this chamber her soul was ʺborn againʺ. She was merged with her divine senses of clairvoyance, clairaudience, psychometric touching, smelling and tasting. this new birth was taking place
212
in her soul body not her physical body. It was then she felt her male and female aspects merge and become united. She was then given a choice whether to remain on the spiritual planes, or whether she chose to return to her earthly physical body. Earlyne chose to return to her physical body and began her descent downwards. She felt herself take on the different envelopes, sheaths, and bodies as she descended back to the physical body. She realized that this was much like when a soul extension comes into incarnation. She had to pass through the Hall of Judgment. She passed before each of the 49 judges, and then came before the scales which weighed the seed atom (recording device of all past karma that resides within the heart) against all Earlyneʹs good deeds and good karma. The two sides were weighed in front of her. The seed atom with all the bad karma was placed on the scale first and tipped it far down to the left. Thoth then placed a white feather on the scale which was the symbol for her good karma. With the white feather came a gleaming white stone. The scale tipped strongly to the other side and the heart seed atom merged with the white stone. Earlyne stood victorious!!! The four Lords of Karma replied, ʺGo thou forth! We obliterate thy faults. We annihilate thy sins. We have weighed thy heart and it has not been found wanting.ʺ The passing of this phase of her initiation allowed her to then go to the ʺgreat sarcophagusʺ for the final stage of her seventh initiation. She lay down in the sarcophagus and the priests began to chant the OM mantra. Thoth performed a blessing over her head and intoned, ʺThou art crowned in the Hall of Death that hereafter, thou mayest wear a Crown of Life that fadeth not away.ʺ Earlyne was then given a golden ankh with a radiant crystal which was placed about her neck. He then pointed his staff directly at her third eye and as the voltage entered she began to leave her body. Thoth prayed, ʺAlmighty and Everlasting Architect of the universe, into Thy keeping we commend her spirit.ʺ Earlyne was not being given the opportunity to merge with the Clear Light of God. As she arose she could see the etheric pyramid of light that superimposed upon the physical pyramid. Approaching now from far away was a
213
resplendent light, like that of a thousand suns. Earlyne merged into the heart of this light!!! As she merged into the light there was her spirit guide throughout all her incarnations which all of a sudden transformed into her twin flame. They were one and the same being. Then all of a sudden ʺIsisʺ appeared. The Lady of Light unrolled a scroll from which Earlyne was to absorb the prayer and password ʺfor the food and drink of the dwellerʹs houseʺ, which was the writing which confers perfection. She was told that now she was clothed in the power and crowned in light, that she must traverse the scenes of her former weakness. Isis took her by the hand and the soul traveled to the star Sirius. It was there that she saw a glorious temple carved out of crystal diamond. Upon reaching the temple they were asked by whose name they sought admission. Isis said ʺIn the name of the Anaki, the Mighty Ones, Sons of Melchizadek the Just, The Grand Carpenters of the universe of worlds and men, by whom all things are made.ʺ They mounted seven steps and stood in the midst of the white light. It was here that the initiate officially became the Melchizadek, the Ascended Master. Here Earlyne was crucified. The Rod of Power ignited at the base of her spine which charged the kundalini with the force of resurrection. Every cell of her being was filled with light and she was fully resurrected. Complete merger of the soul extension with the soul and spirit was made. The personal ego had merged with the Divine Ego. Earlyne was completely liberated and a free spirit. In the final stage of this initiation she went before ʺOsirisʺ and received His blessing. The entire initiation took three full days as Earlyne returned to her physical body. Summation First let me say that in no way did I do justice to Earlyneʹs experiences. All the material from this section was received from Earlyneʹs book ʺInitiation in the Great Pyramidʺ. I have valiantly tried to give you the bare essence of her experience, so you could have a vicarious experience of your own in experiencing what it was like to be initiated in ancient Egypt.
214
For some of you this may have triggered past life memories of your own. For others I hope it serves as an inspiration for similar initiations we will all be taking in the future. I cannot recommend more highly that you get Earlyneʹs book and read the whole story. I hope my small endeavor here has sparked your interest to study and learn more in this regard. One interesting addendum to this story. During the final stages of Earlyneʹs initiation Isis told Earlyne that ʺWhen the signs of heaven point to the dawn of the Age of Aquarius and a rebirth of the mysteries, you will come again, my last born Isis. You will come again to hold the torch high. And you will remember the days of your anointing and the ankh cross with the crystal eye. ʺAnd you will wear again the new symbol of the mysteries and Melchizadek. The symbol of the new dispensation... the seven pointed star with the unfolded lotus in its heart. A host of the liberated little ones will come teaching the inner way, and you will be among the host.ʺ This, of course, was a prophecy of Earlyneʹs future mission to be reborn in this century as Earlyne Chaney. Earlyne, with her husband, has created a mystery school called Astara, which has been going on for forty years. It is interesting that two of the greatest prophets of our time, Earlyne Chaney and Edgar Cayce (Ra‐Ta) were both seventh degree initiates in the Great Pyramid. It is because of this that they are able to bring through the incredible information they have. Even the great Master Jesus went through this experience. My personal feeling is that the intense reading and studying of this material with a reverent and committed attitude is having the opportunity to go through these initiations oneself in a type of meditation. The careful study of this chapter and adjunct materials I have recommended, in my personal opinion will be worth its weight in gold. That is ʺspiritual goldʺ!!! 215
41 The Science of Soul Travel ʺIn my Fatherʹs house there are many mansionsʺ THE MASTER JESUS The science of soul travel is something that has intrigued seekers of the spiritual path since the beginning of time. Soul travel is something that every person on planet earth does every night when they sleep. The different bodies travel to their prospective planes of consciousness. I personally, am an advocate of soul travel as opposed to astral travel. Soul travel is where you separate from your physical body and travel to the higher dimensions of Godʹs universe. Astral travel is where you separate from your physical body and travel to the astral plane. If you travel in your astral body, the highest and only plane you can travel in is the astral plane. The astral plane is again, the plane of glamour and illusion from the perspective of the Ascended Masters. If you travel in soul body you can travel through the astral, mental, up into the soul plane itself. It is also possible to travel in our mental body and, in truth, in all of our seven bodies. When we become Ascended Masters we will travel in our glorified Light body. People travel in their mental body all the time and donʹt realize it. When you intensely think about someone and maybe intensely wonder what they are doing, you are projecting your mental body there and trying to tune into them. Those who are on the spiritual path go when you are sleeping, in your soul body to the ashram of the Master with whom you are associated on the inner plane of your particular ray time. Now here comes the big question. If all this is going on how come we arenʹt aware of it? The answer to this is that sometimes we remember faint recollections of this when we wake up in the morning. We may remember attending classes or learning some important information or guidance or direction. Sometimes we
216
remember flying in our dreams, which is usually a sign that we have been astral traveling. Sometimes we may remember visiting someone in our other bodies. Other times we may have a lucid dream, which is where we are dreaming but we are totally conscious while we are dreaming. This is definitely a form of soul travel, for we are awake in our dream body. If you have this type of lucid dream definitely use your wakefulness to create your reality in the dream state that you want to. I will give some tools later in this chapter for encouraging this type of experience to come about. Now the real science of soul travel is to learn to leave your body and travel in your soul and be lucid and conscious while doing it, and to be able to create this experience at will. The only problem is that for most people on this planet this is not the easiest thing to do. We all have had the experience when we meditate, to a certain extent. We all have experienced going on guided meditations into outer space or the spiritual world. Most often it is a fragment of ourselves that is going, or our mental body that is going, and it is not a complete out of body experience. In this chapter I will attempt to give you some tools and techniques that make this experience of a full out of body soul traveling experience more likely to happen. Why Soul Travel? Soul travel allows us to have a direct experience of God. It gives one an absolute knowingness that we are not our physical bodies, in truth. Soul travel allows us to travel to seven dimensions of reality and explore, not just one dimension of reality. Conscious soul travel, allows us to meet with the masters in our other bodies and be guided by them and bring this information back to earth. Rudolph Steiner, who was past president of the Theosophical Society, and then broke away and started his own society, received much of his knowledge by soul traveling for long periods of time and then bringing back vast amounts of advanced esoteric scientific knowledge.
217
One of the greatest soul travelers of all time was the poet, Saint Kabir (past life of Sai Baba), who never read books but received all his knowledge directly from God through soul travel. When you have this experience it is usually best to call for your spiritual teacher while out of body, so you have a guide to these inner worlds. Just as when we travel on the earth plane to a strange country we often hire a trustworthy guide to show us the best spots and teach us about their country. The same is true of soul traveling. When we travel in our soul body, we travel with the power of our minds. If we want to go to Saturn all we have to do is think Saturn and we are instantly there. There is no time or space once we leave our body, just as we all know that energy follows thought, and that our thoughts create our feelings, emotions, actions and what we attract into our lives. The secret of soul travel is really the same thing. We project our minds where we want to go and the body will follow. This is the key breakthrough point of learning to soul travel. Usually we project our minds but our full body does not follow, at least consciously, that is. I remember my first out of body experience. It came as a result of going on a short fast. I had not eaten all day, and I spent the day doing counseling. When I got home very late, I didnʹt want to eat right before bed so I just skipped a couple of meals. As I lay in bed I felt this feeling of, something like wind blowing through me. I closed my eyes and was enjoying it and next thing I knew I was out of my body floating up towards the ceiling. I was aware how I could guide where I was going with my mind. This experience was totally different from partially leaving the body in a guided meditation type of experience. I was definitely out of my body and saw it laying on the bed. Next thing I knew I was up in space and it was beautiful. The only problem is that I got scared that I was going to fall, and the second I gave into the fear, I began to fall. I prayed to God for help and the next thing I knew I was back in my physical body and my heart was pounding a mile a minute. There are many friends I have who can soul travel or astral travel at will any time they want, and have proven it to me. I, personally, am not as proficient at it as they are. That is why I have studied about it so extensively and tried to 218
learn everything there is to know about it and how to create it for myself and others. There are a number of spiritual organizations that specialize in the science of soul travel. The most well known is probably Eckancar, which was founded by Paul Twitchell. Two other well known spiritual teachers who were part of Eckancar and left to start their own spiritual organizations were Darwin Gross and John Roger. Darwin Gross was actually the head of Eckancar after Paul Twitchellʹs death, I believe, however, after a time there was some kind of division in the organization and he stepped down and formed his own group. The following chart is a conglomeration of all three of these groups. Since I am so closely affiliated with Djwhal Khulʹs ashram, I personally donʹt use their system or format. Every spiritual teacher seems to have different names for the different dimensions of reality. Even though this is the case, I do find their cosmology quite fascinating. The Science of Soul Travel Mantras Mantra/chant Alayi (senses) Kala (emotion) Mana (memory) Aum (mind) Baju (intuition) Sugmad Shanti Hum Aluk Huk Hu (unknown) Unspoken Unspoken word
Dimension Ruler
Sound
Color
Physical Elam Thunder Brown to Green Astral Jot Niranjan Roar of the Sea Pink to Red Causal Ramkar Tinkling of Bells Orange Mental Omkar Running of Water Blue Etheric So Hang The Buzzing of Bees Violet Atma Lok Sat Nam Single not of Flute Gold to White Alakh Lok Alakh Purusha Wind Yellow to White Alaya Lok Alaya Purusha Humming Sound White Hukikat Lok‐Hukikat Purusha ‐Thousand Violins White Agam Lok Agam Purusha Music of Woodwinds (unknown) Animi Lok Animi Purusha Sound of Whirlpool Sugmad Lok Submad Purusha ‐Music of the Spheres (unknown) Sugmad Sugmad Music of God (unknown)
219
You will notice in the chart, first the names of the dimensions of reality. Then you will also see on another column the sounds coming from these planes. Even though I donʹt relate to their cosmology as to how they describe the dimensions of reality, the sounds that come from these different planes I know are accurate. This is something I have learned about in my training from studying the Eastern paths and in particular Sabda or Nada Yoga. Even Paramahansa Yogananda has spoken of these exact same sounds coming from each of these dimensions of reality. Then you will also see the mantra that is associated with each of the different dimensions of reality. One of the secrets of soul travel is to chant these mantras or others that you already know of, and the sound will actually carry you to the dimension of reality with which it is associated. This is something that I would recommend that you experiment with, for example, in this chart, the mantra ʺAumʺ is associated with the mental plane. I checked this out with Djwhal Khul and He told me that this was true. He also told me a fascinating bit of information. Amen Lemurian Root Race Aum Atlantean Root Race Om Aryan Root Race Ong The new Meruvian Root Race which is just coming in now. If it is OK with your inner guidance, you might experiment also with some of the mantras on this chart. Especially, I would recommend the ʺhuʺ mantra which Djwhal Khul has associated with the third eye chakra in His teachings through the Tibetan Foundation. You will also notice on the chart, the listing of the colors that are supposed to be associated with the different dimensions. All three of the organizations that specialize in the science of soul travel that I mentioned in the beginning of this section, deal very much with the light and sound of God. In this chart you will also notice the name of the Cosmic Being who is supposed to govern each dimension, which I find quite interesting. For example, the Sikhs use a mantra, sat nam, which they got from Guru Nanak or maybe even Kabir. Sat Nam turns out to be the Cosmic Being that governs the soul plane.
220
Paramahansa Yogananda, in the Self Realization Fellowship, teaches the meditation hong sau, which means, I Am the Self. He says it is actually the sound of the breath as humans breathe. It is closely associated to the so ham mantra. Interesting enough, if you look at the chart, ʺSohangʺ is the name of the Cosmic Being who governs the etheric plane in their system. In the system of Eckancar, they call God ʺSugmadʺ, which I had never heard before studying Eckancar. One other interesting association is the Cosmic Being, Omkar, on the mental plane. In Sai Babaʹs ashram, the morning practice of chanting aum twenty one times to start the day, is called Omkar. These synchronicities are enough to definitely get oneʹs attention. The great spiritual Master who guided Paul Twitchell, was Rebazar Tarz. Of all the spiritual Masters associated with all these various groups, I, personally, had the best feeling about him of all those involved. I think there are certain Masters that specialize in the soul traveling experience and He is one I most definitely trust. The nice thing about learning to soul travel is that you can shed your other bodies (physical, etheric, astral, mental) and travel to the highest planes of God. Another person who tells a fantastic story of his soul travel experience was J.J. Hurtak in his introduction to ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ. He tells of being taken out of his body and guided by Enoch, and Metatron into the highest spiritual planes, where the 64 keys of Enoch were implanted into his third eye. On his return to earth he wrote ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ, which can only be described as a revelation from God. The practice of soul travel is really the beginning stages of learning to bilocate. The first step is to travel some place in your soul body. The next step for us to learn will be to travel to a distant location and even bring our physical body with us. If we can bring our soul body, why canʹt we bring all our bodies. At the time of ascension and our sixth initiation we will all be able to do this if not before. According to Paul Twitchell, once we learn to travel in our soul body we can travel to the highest spiritual plane without limitation, where the other bodies below the soul level are limited to the plane with which they are associated. 221
Another advantage of soul travel is that there is much service work that can be done on the inner plane. C. W. Leadbeater, of the Theosophical Society, learned to travel out of his body at night and have total recall. He would take disciples every night to the home of El Morya, Kuthumi, Lord Maitreya, for teaching in the Himalayan mountains. His students often would not remember very much, but he would remember much of the teachings and what went on at their different initiations. Guru Nanak, the founder of the Sikh order, was also an expert in soul travel. He followed right along in the footsteps of Kabir. Another advantage of learning to soul travel is that if one should physically die before their ascension they can consciously leave their body at will at death. In India this is called Mahasamadi. Paramahansa Yogananda demonstrated this at his death. He gave a lecture and then just left his body. Pythagoras taught his disciples to go out through their crown chakra and gain control of their body and environment from a distance. One of the most important practices in dealing with soul travel is to learn total self control over your mental and emotional bodies. It is our attitude and attention and state of consciousness that determines where we go. Soul travel is not for someone who is not in control of their energies. The soul can leave the body through any of the chakras, just as in the case of death. I would recommend always leaving out of the crown if possible, or at least the third eye. You must control you mind during this experience because it is your thought that will determine where you will be instantly traveling. Indulge in negative emotions and you will end up in the lower astral plane. The three keys to soul travel are the use of thought, light, and sound. as one begins to soul travel, they will find their sensitivity to and awareness of the light and sound will greatly increase. The practitioner can also use beams of light and sound to travel on. Guru Nanak tells in his writings of being taken by angels to the fifth plane where he stood before the ʺSat Namʺ, the Cosmic Being governing that plane. Appolonius of Tyanna (Master Jesus in His next incarnation and a fifth degree initiate), had the ability to be in two places at once. 222
The Master Sai Baba is another striking example of this most remarkable ability. Zoroaster (Buddha) was taken in His soul body into the higher realms where he appeared before the Supreme Being. It was here that He was given His mission in the material universe. In His life He was to have many such experiences which are recorded in His writings. Mohammed had similar soul travel experiences of traveling to the seven heavens, and recorded his experiences in His writings. Hermes (an incarnation of the Buddha again) was reported to have traveled in His soul body to the higher worlds and met Osiris. Osiris took Hermes to the highest spiritual worlds. This was all recorded in His book, ʺThe Vision of Hermesʺ. We can see here that the potentials in learning to soul travel are unfathomable. This brings me to the question of whether there are any dangers of out of body experience. Danger of Out of Body Experience On meditating on this subject, a couple of thoughts come to mind. The first is again to try and travel in your soul body rather than you astral body, so as not to be limited to just the astral plane. Secondly there is the issue of what happens if you run into trouble in an out of body experience. This can happen especially in the astral plane. The first safe guard is to always travel with your spiritual teacher until you become a master at it. Donʹt be a big shot and go exploring on your own when you are a beginner. Secondly, if you run into trouble you can start praying for help. Thirdly is to immediately project yourself back to your physical body. Paul Solomon told a story of how he tried to get into an inner plane mystery school without being invited. He was surrounded by all these dark figures. He has recommended saying your name, which is the mantra of your particular physical body. One other danger I heard of was a lady I met who would astral travel all the time. She was traveling for about 45 minutes and when she came back to her body she couldnʹt get back in. Her fear attracted all kinds of dark astral figures that started to glob on to her. 223
She was screaming at the top of her ʺastral lungsʺ when Sai Baba appeared and yelled, ʺsilenceʺ. He got rid of the lower astral beings, and told her that the reason she couldnʹt get back into her body was that she somersaulted out of it, and the law states that if you somersault out, you have to somersault back in. Sai Baba then picked her up and somersaulted her back into her body. Stories such as this must be a warning that out of body experiences not something to play with lightly. You need a trustworthy guide. Pray for protection and the help of your spiritual teacher and the Ascended Masters before you start the exercises I will be giving you. As long as you are under the care and guidance of the Ascended Masters you will be fine. People run into trouble when they innocently and unconsciously donʹt ask for this help. Soul travel, in actuality, is a very normal and natural thing once you learn how to do it. It will take no effort at all once the ability is learned, which is true of any new habit. I do not mean to scare you with this section, but rather to keep the whole process in the proper perspective.
The Techniques Leading to the Ability to Soul Travel In this section I will give you a whole list of tools and techniques and you can experiment with them and use your intuitive guidance as to which ones you gravitate towards. Begin all these techniques with a prayer of protection and ask for help from your soul, monad, spiritual teacher, and the Ascended Masters. 1. Lie on your bed and make sure you will not be bothered by the phone ringing or interrupted in some fashion. Get comfortable and then place your attention in your third eye. Visualize a blank screen and then visualize your place of destination. Your destination can be some place in this world or in a higher dimension. In the beginning it could be another room in your own house or a friendʹs house, if you feel more comfortable. The idea is to visualize your destination with all your five senses. See it, feel it, hear it, smell it, taste it, touch it. Make it so real it is like you are not just seeing yourself there, but rather you are actually there. Remember the law that wherever your thought goes, your body must follow. 224
2. The second method is the same as the first, except you think about being there rather than visualizing it. Some people visualize better than others. Both methods are equally as effective. Ideally, you can use both of these methods simultaneously. In the experience of soul travel you will all of a sudden find yourself in the place you were thinking and visualizing about. 3. One of the ways to condition yourself for an out of body experience is to read and study about it. This serves as an auto‐suggestion to your subconscious and to your soul to create the experience. I would add to this, praying to your soul, monad, spiritual teacher and Masters for their help in helping you to have this experience. Be patient. It may take some perseverance and patience at first. Some people can do it quite easily, others have to practice more. We all have our strengths and weaknesses. 4. Go to bed at night deeply concentrating on some place you want to go. Make this desire super strong. Make your destination on this dimension or one of the higher spiritual planes. Allow yourself to fall asleep with this being the last thought on your mind. This is based on the law stated in the Bhagavad Gita when Krishna said that where you go when you die is the last thought in your mind. The same is true when you go to sleep. If you go to sleep watching the news, you might end up in Somalia or Bosnia. This technique is from Paul Twitchellʹs book, ʺEckankar, the Key to Secret Worldsʺ. He suggests that trying this method causes one to wake up often out of their body floating above themselves. If this does happen, then immediately think of your destination again and you will find yourself instantly there. 5. The next technique is also from Paul Twitchellʹs book, which I am varying slightly. As you are falling asleep just say to yourself over and over again. ʺI am leaving my body. I am going to ____________! 6. Another method is to say a mantra over and over again, whether inwardly or out loud. And allow your consciousness to ride the sound current to its destination on the inner planes. See yourself like metaphysical surfing, riding the wave of sound or light, if your are more visual.
225
7. Go through your entire body and give it suggestions to relax. You might like to use a type of self hypnosis or relation tape. When your physical, emotion and mental bodies are totally relaxed then give yourself the suggestion that you are not leaving your body out of the top of the head through the crown chakra. Visualize and see yourself doing this. 8. Go to your metaphysical bookstore (such as the Bodhi Tree bookstore in Los Angeles) and buy guided meditation tapes for leaving the body. 9. Imagine a cone on the top of your head, imagine passing through it and popping out through the top of it. 10. Imagine a rope coming down from your monad and soul. See yourself holding on to it and your soul and monad pulling you right out the top of your head while you hold on to the rope. Actually ask your soul, monad and Ascended Masters to pull up the rope. 11. Visualize yourself in your merkabah vehicle (like a double terminated crystal) and see yourself spinning inside your body in a clockwise motion. Spin faster and faster until you spin like a top right out of your crown chakra. 12. Try any one of these techniques after fasting for the day. Food tends to ground you in your body until you master the technique and habit of doing it. 13. Imagine that you are looking at yourself in a mirror. Then transfer yourself into the mirror image and look back at yourself. 14. Stare at a candle in a darkened room for fifteen minutes until you are in a deep hypnotic state and then give yourself the suggestion that you are now leaving the body. Experts suggest that the more relaxed you are, the easier it happens. People often say, also, that they hear a crackling or popping sound as they leave. 15. Another technique from Scott Rogoʹs book, ʺLeaving the Bodyʺ, is to imagine yourself as like steam rising from a hot rag, or steam kettle on the stove. See the steam just rising up right though the crown chakra. 16. Other techniques of Scott Rogoʹs are to concentrate on a space a yard or two in front of the body and try to step into it. 226
17. Concentrate on a spot above the head and try to rise up into it. 18. Visualize a horizontal bar above your head. With your spiritual arms pull yourself right out of the body and give your spiritual body a command as to where you want it to go. 19. Just to imagine or pretend you are soul traveling may be the best method of all. If you pretend enough, pretty soon you will find yourself doing it. Fake it till you make it. This will give a super powerful message to your subconscious mind. 20. Write out on a piece of paper that ʺI am leaving my body tonight and traveling to __________!ʺ Put this piece of paper under your pillow or under your mattress. The subconscious mind often needs a physical stimulus to be convinced. 21. Write in your journal as you are going to bed, that you are going to leave your body tonight. Write this 21 times right before bed and then put the notebook under your pillow. This will definitely get the suggestion into your subconscious mind. 22. Imagine that you are flying, like superman, every night before bed, to various destinations. 23. Visualize a spot in the corner of your bedroom. In your mind, project yourself there and look back at your body. Make this as real as possible. See every detail. Hold this until you either leave your body or fall asleep. This, again, will be a powerful suggestion to your subconscious mind. 24. During the daytime say to yourself 100 times a day, ʺI am going to leave my body while I sleep tonight and remain lucid.ʺ Part of what makes this happen is super intense desire. Make up your mind that you are going to have this experience if it is the last thing you ever do. Pray to God religiously three times a day for the next six months for His help in making it happen. Paul Solomon told a very interesting story about healing that has a correlation here. He said that if a person was willing to give their entire life to caring for and healing another person in total and complete selfless service, then they could heal in an instant. 227
The correlation here is that if you would be willing to practice and work with these tools for you entire life and build up that much desire and intention then, in reality, you could have the experience any moment you desire. You are God, and energy in all its various forms follows thought. If you 100% make up your mind, it is going to happen and if you are willing to practice and pray and do the exercises, then it will. It has to, because you are God!!! We are just conditioned through many lifetimes and this one, to identify with the physical body at all costs. This is the nature of the ego. 25. Another method is to practice this as you fall into the hypnogogic state. The hypnogogic state is that state between sleep and wakefulness. It is a state of hypersuggestability, and deep meditation. You can practice giving yourself the suggestion here right before falling asleep at night and as you are just waking up in the morning or in the middle of the night when you wake up and turn over, give yourself the suggestion and command, ʺI am leaving my body and going to (wherever you want).ʺ If you need to, add the suggestion that you will be ʺconscious, aware and lucidʺ during this experience. 26. Visualize yourself standing next to your own physical body and inspecting it. 27. Another friend of mine would leave his body by squeezing an object as hard as he could for as long as he could until he was exhausted and the object fell out of his hands. Then he would give himself the suggestion to project right out of the body. 28. Another avenue for learning soul travel is to go at it through lucid dreaming. If you can become lucid while dreaming, you can give yourself the suggestion while traveling in your dream body. One technique might be saying to yourself as you are falling asleep, ʺI am lucid in my dreams.ʺ Say this over and over again as you are falling asleep, or write it in your journal. Another technique from Stephen Labergeʹs book, ʺLucid Dreamingʺ, is to count backwards from 100 down to zero. At each count backwards say, ʺIʹm dreamingʺ. Just the intent to be lucid in your dreams will begin to make it start to happen. A very excellent technique from Stephen Laberge’s book, ʺLucid Dreamingʺ, which I highly recommend, goes as follows. When you awake from a dream, 228
go over it in your mind until you memorize it. Then go back to bed and give yourself the suggestion ʺnext time Iʹm dreaming, I want to remember and recognize I am dreaming.ʺ Then visualize yourself as being back in the dream as you memorized it, only this time, see yourself realizing that you are lucid in the dream. Give yourself this suggestion and visualization a number of times before falling back to sleep. This particular technique is extremely effective for inducing a lucid dream. 29. Another technique for learning to soul travel is to lay in bed and visualize yourself hovering above your bed looking down at yourself. Visualize this super clearly and then do a reversal and become the other you that is now looking at your physical body lying on the bed. 30. This next method is a real interesting one. I found this in a book called, ʺHave an Out of body Experience in 30 Daysʺ, by Keith Harary and Pamela Weintraub. I am shortening their method for my purposes. The idea is to pick an outdoor spot like in a park, for example. Then pick an indoor spot other than your bedroom. Go to the outdoor spot and close your eyes and then imagine you are having an out of body experience. Open your eyes and look around the park pretending you are out of your body. Then go to your indoor spot and do the same thing. Donʹt fiddle around with physical things, because you would not be able to do this of you were out of your body. Make it totally real. Then go back to your bedroom and lie down and imagine that you are back in the outdoor spot, as you remembered it when you were practicing or imagining being out of your body. Do the same for the indoor spot. Then imagine you are floating above your body as you fall asleep. If you wake and you are out of your body, give yourself the suggestion immediately to go to your outdoor spot and then indoor spot. 31. One last technique is to lay in bed and rotate your soul body like you are rolling over, while the physical body remains in the same position. In a sense you are separating from your physical body by twisting out of it. Once you are separated, then leave through the crown chakra.
229
42 Healing with Color and Sound ʺAum is the arrow, Brahman is the target.ʺ SATHYA SAI BABA Everything in life is made up of energy. Becoming a Master has to do with oneʹs ability to change and transform energy from one form to another. This can be done through prayer, affirmation, visualization, breathing, physical activity, and many other methods too numerous to mention. Two of the most powerful methods of transforming energy is through the use of light and sound. This subject has been dealt with somewhat in the chapters in my first book on ʺThe Science of the Twelve Raysʺ and the chapter on ʺMantras and Words of Powerʺ. In this chapter I am going to expound on some of the other differing methods that can be used in this regard.
The Spiritual Meaning of Color The following information on the spiritual meaning of color, I have extracted from a book called, ʺThe Aha Realization Bookʺ, by Janet McClure, the founder of the Tibetan Foundation. This book is a channeled book by Vywamus, the higher aspect of our Planetary Logos. There are many books on color, however, this information I am presenting here, is from one of the highest Spiritual Beings that is currently working with this planet. He has brought through some added information that goes far beyond the standard information on color we are most aware of. Red: ʺThe dynamic energy associated many times with thrusting into new/unknown areas. Your association with the male polarity, whether you are in a male or female
230
body, your association with the evolutionary process and for many of you, with the evolving Source. Orange: The mental body, in both its logical and conceptual form, your association with structure or organization. Your ability to see the whole picture in any situation and in your life and in regard to the whole. your ability to use the fifth dimension. For many of you, this color links you into a crystalline association with the mineral kingdom on the Earth. For about 50% of you there is a link here into the overall energy grid system associated with the Earth. Yellow: This color is associated with clear thinking, intelligence and the means to freeing misperceptions through a magnification process, has third dimension transformational qualities. It has healing associations, especially when the healing moves through the Earth and back into the individual. Helps focus or gather energy together thus helps the mental qualities to be more focused, addresses scattering and the memory area, connects in directly with the physical aspects of Sanat Kumara and thus forms a chain or linkage system to the Solar Logos, Helios. In this connection, also see the color gold. Green: Associated with healing, associated with growth and evolution, associated with harmony and tranquillity. Associated with a clear use of the emotional body, specific connection to the fourth dimension, has an artistic development connection including painting, music, and dance. Is able to draw from the Source level itself, a perspective of wholeness thus addresses the area of allowing unlimitedness. Blue: Blue helps balance the polarity area through the association of love and wisdom. Is an opener and a carrier of the electrical or silver energy ‐ they blend together as the body becomes lighter. Is associated with purity of purpose and love. Helps to clarify purpose area through balancing
231
and blending. Emphasis on service to the plan, keeps lighting up the plan. Indigo: Identifies a deep source level connection and holds a focus on it. Helps to clear areas on separation, has often been associated with the Christ Consciousness energy, seeks to blend spiritual perspectives through a decrystallizing process. De‐crystallizes in the surrender area, has seven levels which de‐crystallize as one ʺascendsʺ through them. Violet: Transformation. Purification, transmutation, what has been called ceremonial ʺmagicʺ or invoking through an integration of all of the other colors and what they represent, helps integrate all of what has been learned on Earth, helps heal ʺpolarity splitsʺ, helps heal the emotional body through its association with the spiritual body, helps cleanse and purify the physical structure, helps align the mental and spiritual perspectives. Closely associated with St. Germain, closely associated with the New Age. Pink: Associated with the heart energy and its characteristics, particularly love, compassion, and gratitude. Helpful i softening any crystallization in the will area, helps the surrender process and reaches into and supports what is new, what has begun. Thus helpful in realizing divine support. Many times associated with the angelic kingdom. Silver: Is a symbol for the electrical energy of the soul. Symbolizes the use of the soulʹs energy, works with being in the flow, will seek to break up or decrystallize blocks in the use of electricity, in all of its forms including all electrical and electronic devices used on the Earth. many times associated with the angelic kingdom. Addresses the lightening perspective. Helps deal with blocks in the electrical flow of the physical structure through a penetrative process, helps anchor more of the soulʹs energy in the cellular level. Gold: The ʺperfect integrator.ʺ The accepting of the soul level is emphasized. The accepting of wholeness on every level is 232
emphasized. Emphasizes linkage systems. Deals with full abundance. Helps to integrate the co‐creator level, deals with putting together the pieces of any area that has seemed scattered. Connects through the Sanat Kumara or the planetary link directly to Helios or the Solar Logos consciousness level. helps to develop through de‐ crystallization more heart radiance. Seeks to help soften perspectives which need blending and thus they blend more easily. Deals with ʺkingship/queenship.ʺ Deals with assuming oneʹs full power through the true identity level. Awakens within one the true reality level. Broadens the creative base through allowing it to flow. Accelerates blending levels of creativity together. Often acts as a ʺlaunchingʺ into an integrated level of creativity. Color Healing Using Candles There are many ways that color can be utilized. The first that I would like to suggest is lighting colored candles. Light the colored candle that is appropriate for what you are attempting to manifest. If you want truth and purity, light a white candle. If you want to gain knowledge, light a yellow candle. Light a pink candle to send love. Light a blue candle for the resolution of some spiritual problem. Green candles are good for all money and material concerns. Lavender candles are especially good for healing. Silver candles are good for protection. As you light the candle say a little prayer and state what you need. It is important to be specific. Thank God for granting you what you need. The candle keeps your prayer and the color it is radiating continually manifesting that specific energy as long as it is lit. Color Healing Using Lamp Radiation This is a wonderful method that I have used myself very often. The idea is to get a small lamp and get different colored light bulbs. You can shine the type of light you need on to you in bed or while reading as you sit, sleep, or rest.
233
Sometimes certain colored light bulbs are hard to find so at photography stores you can buy ʺcolored gelsʺ that can be taped over the lamp. If you are reading and you want more energy use an orange colored light bulb or gel. If you need physical healing you might use a green light. If you want mental stimulation use a yellow light. If you want a more spiritual feeling use a blue or violet light. It is really fun to play with the colors and it is really easy to switch them around. Colored Water Healing This is a wonderful healing modality. The idea is to place the colored gels I spoke of, and wrap them around a clear glass water bottle. Place the closed glass water battle with the gel covering it outside in the sun. The sun will shine through the colored gel into the water and energize it with the sunʹs energy and with the color frequency of that particular gel. You can, hence, drink the green healing vibration, or whatever color you desire. The water will not change color to the naked eye, however will most definitely contain that frequency of energy. Color Breathing Another method utilizing color is to breathe different colors into your body. Red, orange, and yellow are magnetic and should be visualized as flowing up from the earth toward the solar plexus. Blue, indigo and violet are electrical and are breathed in from the ether downward. Green is the balancer of the spectrum and flows into the system horizontally. When breathing, breathe deeply and bring air into the lower abdomen. The best time to practice is before breakfast or dinner. Color Visualization Another way to utilize color is to just affirm and visualize yourself bathed in any given color you choose to resonate with. This can be seen as a ball of light, a tube of light in any creative you can think of. You might just affirm to 234
yourself that ʺI am now filled with emerald greenʺ. You are God, and anything you affirm or visualize takes place, for your word is law, and you create with your mind. Radiant Color Magnetism This technique deals with channeling color through your hands for healing purposes. This can be done on yourself or can be done on a friend, animal, or plant you want to heal. It is just a matter of affirming and visualizing that you are doing this and it will be done. Color Healing and the Rays One of the most powerful ways of doing color healing is through calling forth from God, one of the twelve rays. This again can be done through calling forth the actual color of the ray, the number of the ray, or the spiritual quality of the ray. I would refer you back to my first book on this subject, ʺThe Complete Ascension Manual for the Aquarian Ageʺ, and the chapter on ʺEsoteric Psychology and the Science of the Twelve Raysʺ. For your convenience here, I will list the twelve rays and their corresponding colors. First ray Red Second ray Blue Third ray Yellow Fourth ray Green Fifth ray Orange Sixth ray Indigo Seventh ray Violet Eighth ray Green / Violet luminosity Tenth ray Pearlescent Eleventh ray Orange / Pink luminosity Twelfth ray Gold Just call these rays in from Source, and see and feel yourself bathed inwardly and outwardly in their energy. They are always available, all you have to do is ask for them. Study the other chapter if you need a refresher course on the 235
soul qualities that each of these colors embody. Calling forth the rays is a most powerful color healing technique. Color Healing and the Twenty‐Two Chakras Another color healing process that in actuality is just as powerful as calling in the twelve rays and their colors is to call down your twenty‐two chakras from higher dimensions into your physical and etheric body. Each of your twenty two chakras embody a certain color. As you spiritually evolve, your chakras descend downwards. Once you master your third dimensional chakras, the fourth dimensional chakras begin to descend into your body. Once you master your fourth dimensional chakras, the fifth dimension chakra begin to descend. One of the fastest ways to accelerate your spiritual growth is to call these higher chakras down into your body to experience them and their corresponding vibration. They are happy to come down, however, must be asked. They look like bodies of light, and once anchored in your body will run their high level color frequency through your body to help you raise your vibration. They will not remain fully anchored until you are spiritually ready, for they donʹt want to burn your body out. They will only bring in as much high frequency color energy as you can handle. Ask your monad and mighty I Am Presence to guide the whole color chakra meditation process. In my book on ʺSoul Psychologyʺ I have gone into much greater detail explaining all the twenty two chakras, however for your convenience I will list the twenty two chakras and their corresponding colors here. 236
Twenty‐Two Chakras and Their Corresponding Colors Here Chakra Number Color More Spiritually Evolved Color One Red Violet Two Orange Indigo Three Yellow Four Green or Pink Five Blue Djwhal Khul has recommended blue with an orange triangle in the center Six (third eye chakra) Indigo or Gold Seven Violet or Rainbow White These are the third dimensional chakras, and the secondary colors I recommended. Here are, in a sense, the higher more evolved aspects of this third dimensional grid. Eight Emerald green and Purple Nine Blue/Green Ten Pearlescent Eleven Pink/Orange Twelve Gold Thirteen Pale Violet/Pink Fourteen Deep Blue/Violet Fifteen Light Golden White Sixteen Light Violet/White Seventeen Multi‐White Eighteen Pink/Gold Nineteen Magenta Twenty Violet/Gold Twenty‐One Blue/Gold Twenty‐Two Platinum Color Healing Through the Clothes You Wear This is very straight forward. It might also suggest that you have your colors done to see if your physical body resonates best with Summer, Autumn, Winter, or Spring colors. When you want to embody or cultivate a certain
237
quality, consciously wear that color or wear jewelry or gemstones that carry that vibration. The Planets and Color Healing Sun Gold or Bright Yellow Moon Silver Mars Red Venus Blue ‐ Blue/Green Mercury Yellow or Orange Jupiter Purple or Violet Saturn Olive Green Uranus Electric Blue, Pale Green, or Citrine Neptune Dark Blue, Indigo, Grays, Green Pluto Yellow, Pale Green, Navy Blue Earth Lavender Blue Astrology and Color Healing Capricorn Black and White Aquarius Blue with Silver Lights Pisces Soft Azure Aires Red Taurus Yellow Gemini Violet Cancer Green Leo Gold Virgo Purple Libra Yellow Scorpio Crimson Red Sagittarius Deep Clear Blue of a Morning Sea Musical Notes and Their Correlating Colors C Red C# Violet D Yellow 238
D# E F F# G G# A A# B
Glint of Steel Pearly Blue Dark Red Bright Blue Rosy Orange Purple Green Glint of Steel Soft Blue
A Simplified Understanding of Colors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Violet Indigo Blue Green Yellow Orange Red
Spirituality Intuition Religious Inspiration Harmony and Sympathy Intellect Energy Life
Classical Music Compositions of Tremendous Healing Value Schubert Ava Maria Mozart The Magic Flute Verdi Aida Beethoven The Nine Symphonies Tschaikowsky Swan Lake and Sleeping Beauty Wagner Parsifal, Lohengrin Handel Messiah Mendelssohn Midsummer Nightʹs Dream Bach Passion of St. Matthew Wagner Tannhauser Pachobelle Cannon in D Major This music might be thought of as music of the spheres. A person cannot help but be healed and uplifted by listening to this type of music. Music was used in healing temples of Atlantis for just such a purpose. The science of sound 239
and music in the future will allow doctors to heal cancer with just the power of sound. I would recommend that every person get a set of tuning forks at your local music or metaphysical store. You can tune your chakras and clean out unwanted negative energies every day by using them. Note Color Kundalini Chakra C Red Muladhara D Orange Svadisthana E Yellow Manipura F Green Anahata G Blue Visuddha A Indigo Ajna B Violet Sahasarara A friend of mine is going to a practitioner who, with the use of some kind of specialized computer, can listen to your voice and tell you what notes you are missing or over using. From this information he can do an entire personality workup which is totally accurate. He, then, teaches you to re‐integrate the missing tones and demphasizes the overused tones which totally change the personality. Specific Music Associated with Specific Colors In a wonderful little book called, ʺHealing with Music and Colorʺ, by Mary Bassano, she has done some interesting research as to correlating certain pieces of music to the basic specific color spectrum. This information will allow you to put on red music or green music, or whatever your mood is. Blue Music Classical Air on a G String by Bach Ava Maria by Schubert The Swan by Saint‐Saens 240
New Age Divine Gypsy (Instrumental arrangement of Yoganandaʹs Cosmic chants) A Crystal Cave (back to Atlantis) by Upper Astral Vocal Selection: Be Still by Rosemary Crow United Research ‐ Black Mt., N.C.
Indigo Music Classical Traumerei by Schumann Adagio Movement from Symphony no. 1 in C Minor by Brahms Poeme for Violin and Orchestra by Chausson New Age Angel Love by Aeoliah Inside by Paul Horn Venus Music from The Planets by Holst Violet Music Classical Piano Concerto in B Minor by Tschaikovsky Liebestraume by Listz Gregorian Chants New Age The Great Pyramid by Paul Horn Neptune Music from The Planets by Holst Eventide by Steven Halpern
Red Music Classical March Militaire by Schubert
241
Sousa Marches The Sailorʹs Dance from Red Poppy Ballet Suite by Gliere New Age Mars Music from The Planets by Holst On the Edge by Mickey Hart Diga Rhythm by Mickey Hart
Orange Music Classical Hungarian Dance no. 5 by Brahms Habanera from Carmen by Bizet Cappricio Espagnole by Rimski‐Korsakov New Age Winterfall Music by Paul Warner Jupiter Music from The Planets by Holst Eagleʹs Call by Bruce Hurnow
Yellow Music Classical Arabeske by Schumann Fountains of Rome by Respighi Piano Concerto no. 26 by Mozart New Age Lemurian Sunrise by Warner Dawn by Steven Halpern Kitaro Ki by Kitaro
242
Green Music Classical Melody in F by Rubenstein Violin Concerto in E Minor by Mendelssohn Clair de Lune by Debussy New Age Pan Flute by Za Mir Ocean by Larkin Fairy Ring by Mike Rowland
243
43 Brahma, Vishnu, and Shiva ʺThe mind may be said to be of two kinds, pure and impure. Driven by the senses it becomes impure, but with the senses under control, the mind becomes pure.ʺ
THE VEDAS
Hinduism is the worldʹs third largest religion with over 500 million followers. Hinduism began in India, and over two‐thirds of its followers live in India. Its followers believe that Hinduism goes back over 4000 years, and is the oldest of all religions. The objective of Hinduism is to achieve union with God which the Hindus call Brahman. Brahman is the all pervading God. The term Atman refers to the Eternal Self which is our true identity. The sacred Hindu writings called the Upanishads point out that Brahman and Atman are one. According to Hindu doctrines, the ideal life consists of four stages. 1. The period of discipline and education. 2. The life of the householder and active worker. 3. Retreat for the loosening of the bonds. 4. The life of the hermit, preparing for death and union with God. Hindu worship is individual as contrasted with group and congregational worship of some of the other major religions. Most houses have a room or a corner of a room for worship (puja). Where there are pictures or a statue of a particular image of God. Hinduism recognizes tens of thousands of lesser gods that all come under the umbrella of the one God Brahman. Hinduism also recognizes the divine descent of an Avatar. An Avatar is a God realized being on earth. The two main Avatars of Hinduism are Rama and Krishna. Rama lived over twenty thousand years ago and Krishna lived around 5000 BC. There have been other Avatars, however, these two are the most well
244
known and revered. Mahatma Ghandi said in his autobiography that one of the keys to his success was the chanting of the name of God all day long. The name he chanted was Ram or Rama. Ghandi was also greatly influenced by the sacred Hindu book, ʺThe Bhagavad Gitaʺ. The Bhagavad Gita is the story of Krishna. The book, ʺThe Ramayanaʺ is the is the story of Rama. The Bhagavad Gita is part of a much larger book called the Mahabarata. When Ghandi was assassinated the last words he said were Ram. For Krishna said, in Bhagavad Gita, that where you go when you die is the last thought in your mind as you die. Ghandi went to Ram or God. Sai Baba, who is now living in India is the most popular Avatar since Krishna. Krishna, of course was a past life incarnation of the Lord Maitreya who is the president or head of the Great White Brotherhood. Sai Baba, in reality, is much more popular than even Krishna or Rama, in terms of the present time of history. What is meant by this is that when Krishna and Rama lived their lives were focused in small villages and not very many people realized that they were divine incarnations or Avatars. Sai Baba, because of our modern society, media, books, airplane travel, has been able to reach far more people than Krishna or Rama ever did at the time They lived. Of course, after their death their legends , as studied from the Ramayana and Bhagavad Gita, has spread greatly. So Hinduism recognized that many people need a ʺpersonal Godʺ that they can feel close to and visualize in their mind. This has often, unfortunately, been construed to be polytheism, which is not true. The fact is that Godʹs infinite universe does have infinite numbers of lesser Gods that run the universe at stepped down levels of frequency. Hindus recognize that all these millions of lesser gods are all a part of Brahman. Hindus recognize Brahman first. then it is broken down to the famous Hindu trinity of Brahma, Shiva, and Vishnu. Brahma, I should say is different than Brahman. There are three main sects of Hindus; Those that worship Brahma, those that worship Shiva, and those that worship Vishnu. Brahma is referred to as the male manifestation of Brahman. He is the Creator Aspect of the Trinity. Vishnu is the preserver and Shiva is the destroyer. 245
Brahma was once an important god but has declined in popularity over the centuries. The two most important sects are those that worship Shiva and Vishnu. Vishnu is worshipped in the form of the Avatars. He has supposedly had ten incarnations. The two most famous are, again, Rama and Krishna. Sai Baba has said that He is an incarnation of Vishnu also. Although He also said that He is an incarnation of the Lord Dattetreya. The Lord Dattetreya is the incarnation of Brahma, Shiva, and Vishnu all in the same body. I think you are beginning to see the profundity of Sai Baba. It is also understood that Sai Baba is the Cosmic Christ. Lord Maitreya is the Planetary Christ, Sai Baba holds the same position on the Cosmic level (see chapter on Sai Baba). The path of worshipping Shiva is also very popular along with one other smaller Hindu sect that worships the Divine Mother aspect of God. She has been described as the embodiment of Shakti energy. Among the aspects of the Mother energy most widely worshipped is that of the wife of Shiva, Parvati. Vishnuʹs wife is Lakshmi, who is the Goddess of Good Luck and Good Fortune. The great Hindu saint of the 19th century, Rama Krishna, for a time, was a devotee of the Divine Mother aspect of God. There are many minor gods that the Hindus worship and pay homage to, and call on as needed. One is Ganesh, the elephant headed god. Hindus call on Him when they have obstacles in their life. Hanuman, the monkey God, is the embodiment and perfect example for selfless service. For it was Hanuman who helped Rama in the story of the Ramayana, get back his wife Sita, who was kidnapped by an evil demon. Some of the other minor Gods are Durga, the warrior goddess. Kali, the bringer of war and destruction, Indra, the war and water god, Surya, the sun god. Chandra, the moon god. Saraswati the goddess of wisdom, and Agni, the god of fire. As we can clearly see, Hinduism is quite a colorful religion. One last note here, I would like to make about Sai Baba. He has also said that He is the embodiment of Shiva and Shakti, in this lifetime. In His last past live as Shirdi Sai Baba, He was the embodiment of the Shakti energy. In His future life as 246
Prema Sai Baba, He will be the embodiment of just the Shakti energy. So Sai Baba is the embodiment of Brahma, Shiva, Vishnu, and Shakti all in the same body. There has never been another like Him in the history of Hindu tradition. He is all the Gods in one body. There are pictures of the gods and goddesses in almost every home and shop, and the smell of sweet incense is everywhere. Another very interesting thing about Hinduism is that there is not one single book like the Bible or Koran or Dhamapada of Buddhism that espouses its teachings. There are, in actuality, many different sets of books. I have mentioned two already in the Ramayana and the Mahabarata which contain the Bhagvad Gita. Then there is the Upanishads, the Vedas, the Puranas and others. The main message of the Upanishads is that each person or soul (Atman) is part of the world soul (Brahman). The world soul, Brahman, is within all things. Through the cycle of reincarnation, man finally realizes Brahman through realizing that he is the Eternal Self (Atman). The Bhagavad Gita, which means ʺSong of Godʺ, was written by Vyassa, who was an incarnation of the Buddha. It is the story of Krishna and His disciple, Arjuna. Krishna is Arjunaʹs (Spiritual Warrior) spiritual teacher and charioteer. It tells of a great war and battle that is about to begin between two sects of the family of Arjuna. The Bhagavad Gita is the conversation that ensues between Krishna and Arjuna. Arjuna loses his faith and clarity, and is consumed by negative ego, just as the battle is about to begin. The Bhagavad Gita is the story of how Krishna re‐ awakens Arjuna to the divine realities of life. The Bhagavad Gita, in my personal opinion, is one of the most profound books ever written. This being the case, I have decided to dedicate a whole chapter in this book to its discussion. It is Krishnaʹs (Lord Maitreya ‐ as written down by Buddha ‐ Vyassa) revelation of God to Arjuna. It may be one of the most influential spiritual books ever written on this planet. There are many universal ideals in Hinduism such as truthfulness, kindness, unconditional love, the fulfilling of oneʹs dharma (mission), selfless service. One of the keys to understanding Hinduism is the primary desire of all Hindus to achieve moksha (liberation) from the wheel of rebirth. The idea is to get rid of all desire except for this all pervading desire which comes 247
through the realization of the Atma (Eternal Self). This is a state free from the bondage of karma. This is achieved, in part, later in life through the renunciation of the over identification with the material world. Another path or set of teachings that are intimately involved with the path of Hinduism is that of yoga. The Hindus recognize many paths back to the creator and this is embodied in the yogic teachings. The many paths of yoga is such a profound subject that I have dedicated an entire chapter to this subject which I have called ʺThe paths to union with Godʺ. During morning, afternoon, or evening worship, the devout Hindu sits in front of their altar and meditates, prays, and reads spiritual texts. Incense is often lit, and flowers and food are sometimes placed on the altar. The Hindus believe that their sacred text, the Vedas, was revealed by God to seers called Rishis in ancient times. Sai Baba attests to the truth of this fact. In Hinduism it was predicted 5000 years ago that a future Avatar would come called the Kalki Avatar, at the end of the Iron age. Sai Baba is that Avatar the Hindu religion has been waiting for. The unique thing about His coming is that He transcends Hinduism, for He says that He is in all forms and will come to you no matter what form of God you worship even if it isnʹt one of the Hindu gods. Another key principle of the Hindu faith is the need to overcome maya or illusion. It is that state of consciousness that is over identified with the material universe and hence creates the illusion of separation and lack of unity with God. There are many paths to achieving this transcendence of man as can be seen in the chapter on yoga. Hindus very much believe in the Law of Karma. The physical body that the soul lives in during the next life will depend greatly on oneʹs action in this life. If one does good deeds that one will be reborn at a higher level. This leads us to an understanding of the Hindu caste system, for it is tied to the understanding of rebirth to the Hindus. Hinduism divides society into four large classes. At the top are the Brahmins (differentiated from Brahman, and Brahma) who are considered the purest and perform all religious ceremonies. Next are the Kshatriyas, who are the rulers and warriors. The third group are the Vaishyas who are the traders and craft workers. Fourth are the Shudras, the ordinary workers. The fifth group 248
are outside the caste system called the ʺuntouchablesʺ, who do all the dirtiest jobs. This classification has been outlawed in modern India but attitudes are sometimes slow to change. Caste plays an important part in the life of a Hindu. It would probably determine your job, whom you married, economic status, and who you would share food with. Respect for elders is also a very important part of the Hindu value system. It is the elders who actually choose marriage partners for their children or grandchildren. The bride then usually goes to live in the groomʹs home. Old peopleʹs homes in America would be, and are, very shocking to the Hindus. Every new born has an astrological horoscope done, which I personally think is a fantastic ritual and service to the child. The name the child is given usually has to do with some special religious meaning. The most important ceremony of childhood is the initiation of the sacred thread. It usually takes place between the ages of eight and eleven. It is a sacred ceremony where the Brahmin priest hangs a long loop of thread made of several strands twisted together over the boyʹs left shoulder and under his right arm. This sacred thread is then worn from that day onward the rest of the life. This ceremony is looked on as a second rebirth. Those who wear the thread are called ʺtwice bornʺ. After this ceremony the boy begins to study the sacred writings and religious rituals. The schools in India do not have courses in Hinduism, but teach morals and ethics of all religions (which is sadly lacking in the American educational system). Displays and plays are performed honoring all the different religious leaders. An astrological reading is also done before all weddings to determine the ideal time. The Hindu understanding of marriage is different from Americaʹs. Love comes gradually after marriage, not before. It would have to be this way because the parents or elders arrange it. Spiritual pilgrimages are a very important part of the Hindu religion. They are not required, however it is greatly desired by many devout Hindus. The Ganges river is far the most holy place. The water of the Ganges is said to wash away a personʹs sins. Most Hindus try to bathe in it at least once in their lifetime.
249
Mount Kailasha, in the central Himalayas is also a sacred spot to many Hindus for it is sacred to the God, Shiva. One of Hinduismʹs greatest temples is the spectacular Jagannatha Temple in the city of Puri. Hundreds of thousands of pilgrims gather here for a festival held in June or July. Jagannatha is a form of the God, Vishnu. At this festival an image of Jagannatha is carried through the streets of the city in a type of parade. Cremation is a standard practice for all Hindus. The body is placed on a raised platform and covered in sandalwood. Rituals are performed and hymns recited which remind the mourners that the body dies, but the soul is eternal. Death to the Hindus is a celebration, not a mourning sad ritual, as in our Western culture. The Hinduʹs recognize that the incarnated personality is now a free spirit and they are very joyous about this new life for their loved one. The actual lighting of the funeral pyre is done by the elder son or another family member. Hinduism teaches to have compassion for all living things. Ghandi exemplified this in his teachings of non‐violence. This is also demonstrated in the not killing of the sacred cows that wander the streets of India. In Hindu cosmology, a universe projects from Brahman and endures only for a cycle of 4,320,000,000 human years. Then it is breathed back into the heart of Brahman. (See chapter on the In breath and Out breath of Brahman). This process is repeated over and over again. In Hindu mythology, Brahman appears in the form of the God, Brahma to create each universe, the form of Vishnu to sustain it, and the form of Shiva to eventually destroy it. Integral to every Hindu is to see God in everything. This includes trees, rivers, cows, and ants. This ideal of non‐violence applies to animals as well as humans. Most Hindus are also vegetarians. It is also interesting to mention that nowhere in the world is asceticism considered such a national ideal as in India. Since moksha or liberation from the wheel of rebirth is the greatest ideal for all Hindus, death is the biggest event of their life. This is why many Hindus travel to the holy city of Benares when they about to die.
250
44 The Bhagavad‐Gita ʺGet up and give up your unmanliness and get up and fight. This self pity and self indulgence is unbecoming of the great soul you are.ʺ
KRISHNA SPEAKING TO ARJUNA ON THE BATTLEFIELD
The Bhagavad Gita is one of the holiest and most sublime books that exists on planet earth. If I were told that I had to get rid of all books and could only save one book I would save the Bhagavad Gita. It is really the book of books. Sai Baba has called it the milk or cream of the Upanishads (Wisdom teachings of the Vedas). It is the sublime story of Sri Bhagavan Krishna and His disciple Arjuna. Krishna is the Christ of the Eastern world and in reality is the Christ of the Western world. This is true because Krishna is none other than the Lord Maitreya, our Planetary Christ. He is the teacher of teachers, for He is the president or head of the Great White Brotherhood and Spiritual Hierarchy. Our great teacher and leader is here again as He was 7,000 years ago as Krishna and 2,000 years ago as the Being that overshadowed Jesus, and now physically incarnated in London England. He is the World Teacher that all religions have been waiting for. The Bhagavad Gita is His sublime teaching as expressed by Vyassa. This story becomes even more interesting in that Vyassa is none other than Gautauma Buddha in a past life, who wrote the wisdom teachings down long after they occurred. Who better to write the story down because Arjuna was none other than Gautauma Buddha. The Bhagavad Gita hence is the story of the relationship between the Lord Maitreya and Gautauma Buddha. The Lord Maitreya, according to the channelings of the Tibetan Foundation, is the highest Being to ever graduate from this planetary school. He isnʹt the highest being to come here, but is the highest to graduate.
251
In His life as Krishna over 7,000 years ago, He attained His fifth initiation. In His life overshadowing Jesus, He took His ascension or sixth initiation. Who better to teach the wisdom of the ages than Lord Maitreya and Gautama Buddha. Lord Maitreya is the teacher of Jesus, Kuthumi, El Morya, Saint Germain, Hilarion, Serapis Bey, and all the great masters we revere. He is the teacher of both angels and men. In the Bhagavad Gita He is humanityʹs teacher. The Bhagavad Gita is part of a larger book called the Mahabarata. It is the story of a great war. It is through this back drop of this great battle between the two armies that He teaches the Science of Liberation and God Realization. The actual meaning of the Bhagavad Gita is the ʺSong of Godʺ. The two opposing armies are the ʺdivine natureʺ and ʺdemonic natureʺ which we all have to come to terms with and master. Arjuna, as the unfolding incarnated soul is being pulled by his higher and lower nature which is crippling him spiritually and psychologically. The story begins with Arjuna, who is the leader of the divine army, falling into despondency and depression because he doesnʹt want to fight the demonic army because he, personally, knows many of them. Arjuna has been overcome by maya, illusion, glamour, and negative ego. The Bhagavad Gita is Krishnaʹs attempt to awaken Arjuna to the reality and perspective of his Eternal Self. The Wisdom Teachings of Sri Bhagavan Krisha The first lesson that Krishna teaches is that the wise person does not grieve for the living or the dead because the indweller of the body is none other than the eternal Self. The eternal self is never born and never dies. It is unborn and changeless. It cannot be killed even if the body is slain. When the physical body is worn out it puts on a new one, like a new set of clothes. Weapons cannot hurt it, nor fire burn it, nor water drown it. The eternal Self is invulnerable, indestructible, and immortal. The true yogi lives in a state of consciousness of transcendence of duality, or transcendence of the pairs of opposites. What this means is that the true yogi lives in even‐ mindedness and equanimity whether he or she is experiencing pleasure or pain, profit or loss, victory or defeat, criticism or praise, cold or heat. The yogi stands detached from all greed and attachment. As Arjuna was to later say in his incarnation as the Buddha, ʺAll suffering comes from attachmentʺ. The yogi remains in a state of unconditional love, joy, and 252
inner peace at all times regardless of what is going on outside of himself. This state of equilibrium is called yoga. One of the absolute key teachings of the Bhagavad Gita that is repeated over and over again is the tremendous need to perform oneʹs duty and service in life without being attached to the fruits of oneʹs actions. In other words, taking action in life is essential, however one must not do it to achieve some kind of material or spiritual reward. It is done because it is oneʹs duty, mission, and worship of God, who lives in all humans, plants, and animals as the eternal self. The true yogi sees the eternal self in all beings and all forms. Action without attachment to results, is yoga. A true knower of the Self casts away all material desire, and is only satisfied by the eternal Self. The true yogi has no desire for cravings of pleasure, and is free from passion, fear, and anger. He has total mastery of the physical body, emotions, mind, intellect, and the five senses. Intuitional awareness can not be obtained without self control. All desire for the pursuit of pleasure, power, acquiring and hoarding of material objects becomes removed. All selfish attachment is removed. The yogi is free from lust and has mastery and control over his sexuality. The yogi is neither elated by good fortune nor depressed by bad fortune. They are totally free from attachment and aversion to people and things. The yogi is totally free from the ego cage of ʺIʺ, ʺmeʺ, and ʺmineʺ. The path to self realization is one of renunciation. Renunciation of the above mentioned negative qualities, not renunciation from acting in life. The yogi lives in this world but not of this world. The yogi fights the holy fight, and lives as a spiritual warrior, thinking only of the eternal Self and incurs no sin. There are two paths to self realization, the Jnana Yoga, (The contemplative path of spiritual wisdom), and the path of karma yoga (active path of selfless service). Both of these paths lead to Brahma (God). Every selfless act is born from Brahman, just as every selfish act leads away from Him. Through devotion to selfless work in service of humanity one attains the supreme goal of life. It is better for a man to perform his own dharma (path) imperfectly, than to try and perform another personʹs perfectly. Each person must find their own dharma and not compare or compete with others.
253
Desire and anger are seen by Krishna as the all consuming, all polluting, enemy of the world. Desire is the destroyer of wisdom and discrimination. Senses are superior to the body. The mind is superior to the senses. The intelligence or intellect is superior to the mind. Superior to the intelligence is the eternal Self. The ego has one belief that ʺI am the doerʺ. The reality is that there is no ʺseparate Iʺ other than the eternal Self. The Bhagavad Gita states, ʺperform all actions for My sake (Krishna, the Eternal Self), completely absorbed in the self, and without expectations, fight, ‐ but stay free from the fever of the ego.ʺ When a person lets themselves be run by the senses, they are conditioned to be attracted to the pleasant and to have aversion to the unpleasant. The true yogi living in the consciousness of the eternal Self, does his duty and remains the same. The yogi lives in contentment regardless of what comes. The yogi lets the Atma (Eternal Self) rule the ego and slay selfish desire. It is through humility, self inquiry and service that the yogi is lead to those who will impart great knowledge. The true yogi is fearless, devoted, free from envy, and all self doubts. He knows himself and others as the Divine Self, and not just as a separate physical body. The yogi is free from all sense of expectation and sense of possession. Their minds are fixed on knowledge and all work is performed in the spirit of service. Brahmin is attained by those who see Brahma in every action. The true sanyasin (renunciate) neither hates nor desires. They are free from the pairs of opposites. The Self is seen as one with all other selves. All deeds are performed as an offering to God. A man of knowledge looks with equal eye on a Brahmin priest, a cow, an elephant, dog, or outcast. The Eternal One is essentially the same in all. The knower of the Eternal doesnʹt rejoice on meeting pleasant experiences nor grieves on meeting unpleasant experiences. The person who withstands the impulses originating from lust and anger is a true yogi, and a happy person. The yogiʹs only desire is desire for liberation and self realization. The true yogi is unaffected by likes and dislikes and the bondage of self will. The goal of knowledge and service are totally unified. The yogi is free from delusion and not dependent on any external support. The true yogi is filled with wisdom and knowledge and looks at a lump of earth, a stone and a piece of gold as the same. All are just incarnations of God and yogi
254
sees beyond all appearances. The yogi has an equal regard for friends, companions, enemies, neutral people, the hateful, relatives, saints and sinners. They yogi has an iron will, that is used to abolish self will. The will or personal power is used in service only of the Eternal Self. Krishna very much preached the ʺmiddle wayʺ. In one passage He says, ʺHe who eat too much, he who fast too much, or sleeps too much or too little, cannot perform yoga.ʺ Krishna taught the ideal of moderation in recreation, efforts, actions, sleep, and wakefulness. The yogiʹs mind is calm, passions stilled, and has attained purity. He realizes that he is within all beings and all beings are within his self. The supreme yogi feels the pains and joys of all beings, as if they were his joy and pains. The yogi has trained his mind to rest only in the self. Krishna says that among thousands of men and women, hardly one strives for perfection, and of these successful strivers, only one really knows me. The Eternal Self is the ʺomʺ. Krishna has also delineated four types of virtuous people who seek God. 1. The person in distress. 2. The person seeking knowledge. 3. The person seeking wealth. 4. The person aspiring to wisdom. All four types are seen as virtuous, however, the person seeking wisdom is the most virtuous. The person of wisdom has a steadfast mind and is focused on the Eternal Self as their supreme goal. The Eternal Self resides within all chosen forms of God and religions. At the time of leaving the body, a person will travel to the last thought they have in their mind before they die. Therefore, at all times keep your mind on God and that is where you will go when you physically die. At the time of departure say the word ʺomʺ and you will enter the highest path. Krishna says, the Eternal Self is easily attainable by a steadfast yogi whose mind is fixed on the Eternal Self and constantly remembers the eternal Self. This is attained by complete devotion to God. The Eternal Self is easily attained by those that are attached to nothing but the Eternal Self. There are two paths in life, one leads to liberation and the other to rebirth. Choose who ye shall serve. The ignorant cannot see the Eternal Self when he inhabits a human form. The yogi seeing beyond form has the eyes to see and the ears to hear. The Eternal Self 255
is embodied in His Holiness, the Lord Sai Baba, however, many are fooled by His seeming normal actions of walking around in an average looking physical body. It is through constant striving, firmness, an undivided mind, and unbroken vows, that the Self is attained. The true yogi worships the Eternal Self in all beings. The Eternal Self does not favor or find disfavor in any being. Even the greatest sinner who begins to worship is counted as righteous. No devotee is ever rejected. Those who worship and meditate on the Eternal Self without any other thought, will have their needs provided for. Those who fail to realize the true nature of the Eternal Self must be reborn. It is through single minded devotion that one can see the Self and enter into the Self, and become the Self. Those who worship the Self with a fixed mind, with faith, courage, and are steadfast, they are perfect yogis. They are totally devoted to the welfare of all beings. All actions are performed as if you were performing them for God. This is the path to perfection. The true yogi never hurts any person or creature in the world, and as never hurt by the world. The true yogi is modest, sincere, harmless, forgiving, straight forward, balanced in the mind in favorable and unfavorable conditions, free from pride and deceit, gentle, upright, pure, filled with inner strength, detached from sense objects. The true yogi does not get ʺcompulsively entangledʺ even in oneʹs home and family. They enjoy solitude and not following the crowd. Some realize the Self through the practice of meditation, some through the path of wisdom, and some through the path of service and some through all three paths practiced in integration and balance. The Three Gunas, Qualities, and Types of People Krishna, in Bhagavad Gita, has delineated a fantastic model for understanding oneʹs self and other people. He has delineated the types or qualities that make up the phenomenal world. The ʺsattvic, rajasic, tamasicʺ. The sattvic has to do with law, harmony, purity, goodness. The rajasic with energy and passion. The Tamasic with inertia and ignorance. The ideal is to be sattvic although the Eternal Self, in truth, is beyond all three qualities of energy. Even the sattvic nature can become negative if we become attached to happiness and wisdom. The rajasic nature binds us through passion arising from selfish desire and attachment. The tamas nature binds us through ignorance, indolence and sleep. 256
In essence, the sattvic person finds happiness, rajasic to action, tamasic to distorted understanding, and/or delusion. When sattvic predominates in a personʹs personality the light of wisdom shines. When rajasic predominates, a person pursues selfishness and greedy purposes. When tamasic dominates, a person lives in darkness, slothfulness, confusion. Dying in a state of sattvic nature, the yogi attains the pure worlds of the wise. Those dying in rajasic are reborn among people driven to work. Those dying in tamasic are conceived in the wombs of the ignorant. To my way of understanding, sattvic is balanced, rajasic is to yang, tamasic is to yin. Rajasic might be looked at as more the top dog or superiority complex. Tamas as the underdog or inferiority complex. This is very simplified, but might be helpful to putting Krishnaʹs most profound system of spiritual study into perspective. The fruit of good deeds is sattvic. Rajasic is suffering. Tamasic is ignorance and insensitivity. Sattvic brings understanding, rajasic greed, and tamasic, confusion, infatuation, and ignorance. Sattvic goes upward, rajasic remains the same, and tamasic sinks downward. The true yogi ultimately goes beyond the three gunas feeling no aversion when the forces are active, nor craving when these forces subside. The yogi remains impartial and undisturbed by the action of the gunas. The yogi does not vacillate. However, when dealing with form, manifests the sattvic nature. Such a one is fit for union with Brahman. The yogi avoids qualities such as malice, lack of morals, insatiable desires, scheming, anxiety, hoarding money, hypocrisy, arrogance, conceit, cruelty, harshness, self glorification, fragmented mind, obstinance, violent, demonic, evil thoughts, impure motives, stubbornness, and intoxication of wealth. According to Krishna, the gate that leads to hell is lust, anger, and greed. Sattvic people enjoy food that is mild, tasty, substantial, agreeable, nourishing, and that promotes health, strength, cheerfulness, and longevity. Rajasic people like food that is salty, bitter, hot, sour, and spicy ‐ that promotes pain, discomfort and disease. Tamasic people like overcooked food that has lost its taste and nutritional value. Sattvic people perform sacrifices without thought of reward. Rajasic people perform sacrifices for the sake of show and the good will it will bring to them. The tamasic perform sacrifices ignoring both the letter and the spirit of the law. 257
Krishna states that the ʺdisciplines of the bodyʺ are to offer service to the gods, to the good, to the wise, and to your spiritual teacher; purity, honest, continence, and non‐violence. The ʺdisciplines of speechʺ are to offer soothing words, to speak truly, kindly, and helpfully, and to study the scriptures. The ʺdisciplines of the mindʺ are calmness, gentleness, silence, self restraint, and purity. When these three levels of discipline are practiced without attachment to results and in the spirit of great faith, the sages call this practice sattvic. Giving simply because it is right to give without thought of return is sattvic. Giving with regrets or expectations of receiving something in return is rajasic. Giving at an inappropriate time, inappropriate circumstances, without affection or respect is tamasic. Self sacrifice, giving, self discipline and taking responsibility for oneʹs life and world is sattvic. To avoid action from fear of difficulty or physical discomfort is rajasic. The sattvic person is not intimidated by unpleasant work, nor do they seek a job because it is pleasant. The true yogi does what God guides him (her) to do and remains even minded and not attached to the results. Those who renounce selfish desire and desire for personal reward go beyond the reach of karma. Sattvic knowledge sees the eternal self in all beings. Rajasic knowledge sees all people and animals as separate. Tamasic knowledge sees one small part and mistakes it for the whole. A sattvic worker is free of egotism, selfish attachment, full of enthusiasm, and fortitude in success and failure alike. A rajasic worker has strong personal desires and desires rewards for his action, and is easily swept away by good or bad fortune. The tamasic worker is undisciplined, vulgar, stubborn, deceitful, dishonest, lazy, depressed and prone to procrastination. The ʺsattvic intellectʺ knows when to act and when to refrain from action, what brings freedom and what brings bondage. The ʺrajasic intellectʺ confused right and wrong actions. They cannot distinguish what is to be done from what should not be done. The ʺtamasic intellectʺ is clouded in darkness and has utterly reversed right and wrong. The true yogi is ever joyful and beyond the reach of desire and sorrow. The yogi has become united with Brahman, and has equal regard for every living creature. The yogi has abandoned all outer supports and looks totally to God for 258
protection. The yogi only shares his wisdom with those with whom it is appropriate to do so. Those who teach the supreme mystery of the Bhagavad Gita teach it to all who love God, and performs the greatest act of love. Krishnaʹs Declaration to Arjuna and Arjunaʹs Response As Arjuna began to become awakened from the delusion of his ego, Krishna said to him: ʺGet up and give up your unmanliness and get up and fight. This self pity and self indulgence is unbecoming of the great soul that you are.ʺ He is speaking to each one of us. Arjuna did get up and continued to listen to and absorb Krishnaʹs teaching. Finally at the end of Krishnaʹs teaching Arjuna saidʺ ʺMy delusion is dissolved: I have become aware of my reality, which is God.ʺ
259
45 The Vedas: God’s Revelation ʺIf one fails to realize Brahman (God) in this life before the physical sheath is shed, he must again put on a body in the world of embodied creatures.ʺ THE VEDAS The Hindus have received their religion as a direct revelation from God. There is no human author as in most of the other religions, because no human wrote the Vedas. His Holiness, the Lord Sai Baba, has said that the Vedas came as a direct result of the hearing of the divine sounds of God by the rishis (seers and prophets of ancient India). The Vedas are the scriptures where this divine knowledge was written down. The term Veda comes from the root word ʺto knowʺ. When it is applied to scripture it means ʺBook of Knowledge.ʺ The Vedas and the Hindu religion is by far the oldest of all the major religions. The Vedas are the earliest testaments of the victory of man over himself in discovering the underlying unity of all creation. Sai Baba has called the Vedas ʺthe Breath of Godʺ. The Vedas have no describable origin for, in truth, they are timeless. They lead the seeker on the path to the realm of eternal bliss where no birth or death exists. The Vedas are not the result of studying, reading, or writing books by humans. The Vedas are a direct revelation of Brahma (God). The Vedas have also been referred to as ʺSabda Brahmaʺ (the sound of the Universal Absolute). The Vedas are the philosopherʹs stone that turns all metals into gold, all students into aspirants and all aspirants into sages. They are to be studied reverently and practiced in oneʹs daily life. The Vedas are the embodiments of truth. Recitation of the Vedas purifies the environment and strengthens the will to be true. Sai Baba says that every syllable of the Vedas is a name of God. and it is the mother of all scripture.
260
The Vedas are not just for the people of India, but are for all the people of the earth. The Vedas enable man to get a vision of the Lord. The Vedas are eternal messages from God caught by developed consciousness in the silence of meditation. The Vedas are divided into four great books: the Rig‐Veda, the Yajur‐Veda, the Sama‐Veda, and the Athaarva‐Veda. Each Veda consists of four parts: the Mantra‐Samhitas or hymns, the Brahmanas or explanations of mantras, or rituals, the Aranyakas, and the Upanishads. The four subdivisions of the Vedas is symbolic of the four stages in a personʹs life. The essence of the Vedas is that which is present everywhere and manifests itself under all circumstances as the ʺEternal Selfʺ. This self lives in all people, animals, plants, minerals, and objects in the world. There is nothing but the Self. We are here to realize our identity as the Self and serve the Self in all beings and things. We are here to learn to discriminate and identify with that which is permanent not impermanent. We are here to recognize that God is one, not two. Immortality or liberation can only be won through renunciation of the material world. We must learn to live in the world but not of the world. This can only be achieved through the development of non attachment and self control and mastery over oneʹs thoughts, feelings, emotions, physical body, sexuality, senses, and over identification with physical vision or appearances. The essence of the Vedas is that of ʺloveʺ, and that all men are brothers. The philosophy of the Vedas is called ʺVedanthaʺ. Vedantha means the final product of the fund of knowledge which leads to liberation from the wheel of rebirth. Vedantha teaches that the mind leads man, either into the prison of petty desire or the vastness of spiritual realization. Vedantha is wisdom that leads to the release from the bondage of the material world. It is based on the knowledge of the ʺSelfʺ. It is through right living, balanced living, and unconditional love that we achieve the bliss of God realization. The wisdom of the Vedas and/or Vedantha is the most supreme gain that can be earned in life, for it leads to realizing the ʺSelf. Vedantha is merging with the OM, which leads to Veda (knowledge) ‐ antha (end). Vedantha, hence, leads to the end of knowledge which is liberation, self realization, and immortality!!! 261
The Upanishads The ʺUpanishadsʺ are the most important section of the Vedas. They contain the essence or the knowledge and essence of the Vedas. Few books on planet earth are as soul inspiring and as inspirational. The Upanishads are the products of the highest wisdom, and supreme divine knowledge. The Upanishads give a detailed description on the nature of the Eternal Self and Atman. It teaches the methods of how to attain Brahman (God). The Upanishads are eternal and come directly from Brahman (God). They serve as a means of freedom from earthly bondage. Knowledge of the Upanishads allows one to attain self realization and merge with Brahman. It is this self realization alone that can get rid of ignorance, and help to restore immortality, eternal peace, and bliss. Only knowledge of Brahman can remove sorrows, illusion and pain. The Upanishads are called Vedanta. It is only through discrimination, detachment, self control, and a deep yearning for liberation, that Brahman and self realization can be obtained. The term Upanishad, actually means secret teachings, or secret doctrine. Instead of trying to explain the Upanishads myself, I have researched through the varied ʺUpanishadsʺ in the different sections of the Vedas and chosen some of my favorite stanzas for your supreme enjoyment and spiritual edification. The translation for these quotations from a book called ʺThe Upanishadsʺ by Eknath Easwaran. This is a book I would highly recommend if you are desirous of doing more spiritual study in this area. Quotations Everything is loved not for its own sake, but because the Self lives in it. This Self has to be realized. Hear about this Self and meditate upon Him. When you hear about the Self, meditate upon the Self, and finally realize the Self, you come to understand everything in life.
262
Separateness arises from identifying the Self with the body, which is made up of elements; When this physical identification dissolves, there can be no more separate Self. As a great fish swims between the banks of a river as it likes, so does the sinning self move between the states of dreaming and waking. The Self is free from desire, free from evil, and free from fear. The Self is, indeed, Brahman, but through ignorance people identify it with intellect, mind, senses, passions, and the elements of earth, air, fire, water, and space. This is why the Self is said to consist of this and that, and appears to be everything. As a person acts, so he becomes in life. Those who do good become good. Those who do harm become bad. Good deeds make one pure. Bad deeds make one impure. So we are said to be what our desire is, so is our will. As our will is, so are our acts. As we act so do we become. We live in accordance with our deep, driving desire. It is this desire at the time of death that determines what our next life is to be. We will come back to earth to work out the satisfaction of that desire. But not those who are free from desire. They are free because all their desires have found fulfillment in the Self. They do not die like the others; bur realizing Brahman, they merge in Brahman. Those who realize the Self enter into the peace that brings complete self control and perfect patience. They see themselves in everyone and everyone in themselves. The fourth is the superconscious state called Turiya, neither inward nor outward, beyond the senses and the intellect, in which there is none other than the Lord. He is the supreme goal of life. He is infinite peace and love, realize Him! Turiya is represented by AUM. Realize the self, the shining goal of life! If you do not, there is only darkness. See the Self in all, and go beyond death. 263
Well have you renounced these passing pleasures so dear to the senses, and turned your back on the way of the world which makes mankind forget the goal of life. Far apart are wisdom and ignorance. The first leads one to self realization; the second makes one more and more estranged from his real Self. It is but few who hear about the self. Fewer still dedicate their lives to its realization. Wonderful is the one who speaks about the Self. Rare are they who make it the supreme goal of their lives. Blessed are they who, through an illumined teacher, attain to Self realization. The truth of the Self cannot come through one who has not realized that he is the Self. The intellect cannot reveal the Self, beyond its duality of subject and object. They, who see themselves in all and all in them help others through spiritual osmosis to realize the Self, themselves. The wise realizing through meditation the timeless self, beyond all perception, hidden in the cave of the heart, leave pain and pleasure far behind. Those who know they are neither body nor mind but the immortal Self, the Divine Principle of existence, find the source of all joy and live in joy abiding. I will give you the word all the scriptures glorify, all spiritual disciplines express, to attain which aspirants lead a life of sense mastery. It is OM. This symbol of the Godhead is the highest. Realizing it, one finds complete fulfillment of all oneʹs longings. It is of the greatest support to all seekers. Those whose hearts OM reverberates unceasingly are indeed blessed and deeply loved as one who is the Self. Hidden in the heart of every creature exists the Self, subtler than the subtlest, greater than the greatest. They go beyond sorrow who extinguish their self will and behold the glory of the Self through the grace of the Lord of Love. The Self cannot be known by anyone who desists not from unrighteous ways, controls not his senses, stills not his mind, and practices not meditation. The senses derive from objects of sense perception, sense objects from mind, mind from intellect, and intellect from ego, ego from undifferentiated consciousness, and consciousness from Brahman. Brahman is the first cause and last refuge. Brahman, the hidden Self in everyone, does not shine forth. 264
He is revealed only to those who keep their mind one pointed on the Lord of Love (Self) and thus develop a superconscious manner of knowing. Meditation enables them to go deeper and deeper into consciousness, from the world of words to the world of thoughts, then beyond thoughts to wisdom in the Self. If one fails to realize Brahman in this life before the physical sheath is shed, he must again put on a body in the world of embodied creatures. There are two selves, the separate ego and the indivisible Atman. When one rises above I and me and mine, the Atman is revealed as oneʹs real Self. When all desires that surge in the heart are renounced, the mortal becomes immortal. As long as we think we are the ego, we feel attached and fall into sorrow. But realize that you are the Self, the Lord of Life, and you will be freed from sorrow. When you realize that you are the Self, Supreme Source of Light, Supreme Source of Love you transcend duality of life and enter into the unitive state. Those who dwell on and long for sense pleasure are born in a world of separateness. But let them realize they are the Self and all separateness will fall away. Not through discourse, not through the intellect. Not even through study of the scriptures can the Self be realized. The Self reveals Himself to the one who longs for the Self. Those who long for the Self with all their heart are chosen by the Self as His own. Not by the weak, not by the un‐earnest, not by those who practice wrong disciplines can the Self be realized. The Self reveals Himself as the Lord of Love to the one who practices right disciplines. Before the world was created, the Self alone existed. Nothing whatever stirred. Then the Self thought; Let me create the world. He brought forth all the worlds out of Himself. Practice right conduct, learning and teaching. Be truthful always, learning and teaching. Master the passions, learning and teaching. Control the senses, learning and teaching. Strive for peace always, learning and teaching. Rouse the Kundalini, learning and teaching. Serve humanity, learning and teaching. Beget progeny, learning and teaching. Be truthful always, master the 265
passions, learning and teaching. Learning and teaching are necessary for spiritual progress. This is the essence of essences, the highest, the eighth rung, venerated above all that human beings hold holy. Om is the Self of all. The universe comes forth from Brahman and will return to Brahman. Verily, all is Brahman. A person is what his deep desire is. It is our deepest desire in this life that shapes the life to come. So let us direct our deepest desires to realize the Self. The Self is sure, free from decay and death, free from hunger and thirst, and free from sorrow. The Self desires nothing that is not good, wills nothing that is not good. Seek and realize the Self! Those who seek and realize the Self fulfill all their desires and attain the goal supreme. It is truth the body is perishable, but within it dwells the imperishable Self. This body is subject to pleasure and pain. No one who identifies with the body can escape from pleasure and pain, but those who know they are not the body pass beyond pleasure and pain to live in abiding joy. The world is the wheel of God, turning round and round with all living creatures upon its rim. The world is the river of God, flowing from Him and flowing back to Him. On this ever revolving wheel of being the individual Self goes round and round through life after life, believing itself to be a separate creature, until it sees its identity with the Lord of Love and attains immortality in the indivisible whole. The Lord of Love holds in His hand the world, composed of the changing and the changeless. The manifest and the unmanifest. The separate self, not yet aware of the Lord, goes after pleasure, only to become bound more and more. When it sees the Lord, there comes an end to its bondage. All is change in the world of the senses, but changeless is the Supreme Lord of Love. Meditate on Him, be absorbed in Him, wake up from the dream of separateness. Dedicate yourself to the Lord of Life, who is the cause of the cosmos. He will remove the cause of all your suffering and free you from the bondage of karma. 266
Those who attain the supreme goal of life, realizing the Self and passing beyond all sorrow, shine bright as a mirror which has been cleansed of dust. In the supreme climax of Samadhi they realize the presence of the Lord within their heart. Freed from impurities they pass forever beyond birth and death. Not female, male, nor neuter is the Self. As is the body, so is the gender. The Self takes on a body, with desires, attachments, and delusions. The Self is born again and again in new bodies to work out the karma of former lives. Hard to reach is the supreme goal of life, hard to describe and hard to abide in. They alone attain Samadhi who have mastered their senses and are free from anger, free from self‐will and free from likes and dislikes, without selfish bonds to people and things. Brahman cannot be realized by those who are subject to greed, fear, and anger. Brahman cannot be realized by those who are subject to the pride of name and fame or to the vanity of scholarship. Brahman cannot be realized by those who are enmeshed in lifeʹs duality. The mind may be said to be of two kinds, pure and impure. Driven by the senses it becomes impure, but with the senses under control, the mind becomes pure. It is the mind that frees us or enslaves. Driven by the senses we become bound. master of the senses become free. Those who seek freedom must master their senses. When the mind is detached from the senses one reaches the summit of consciousness. mastery of the mind leads to wisdom. Practice meditation. Stop all vain talk. the highest state is beyond reach of thought, for it lies beyond all duality. Keep repeating the ancient mantram OM until it reverts in your heart. He faces heat and cold, pleasure and pain, honor and dishonor with equal calm. He is not affected by pride, jealousy, status, joy or sorrow, greed, anger or infatuation, excitement, egoism, or other gods, for he knows he is neither body nor mind. 267
The aspirant who is seeking the Lord must free himself from selfish attachments to people, money, and possessions. When his mind sheds every selfish desire, he becomes free from the duality of pleasure and pain and rules his senses. no more is he capable of ill will. No more is he subject to elation, for his senses come to rest in the Self. Entering into the intuitive state he attains the goal of evolution. Truly he attains the goal of evolution. Summation The profundity of the Upanishads can clearly be seen. In the next two chapters I will attempt to give you an even more complete understanding of the entire Vedas, by sharing with you what also might be considered to be the cream of the Vedas, which is the Bhagavad Gita, and the teachings of Sri Bhagavan Krishna (Lord Maitreya). Then for your continued enjoyment, a complete overview of the essential teachings of Sri Sathya Sai Baba, who is the incarnation of Brahma, Shiva, and Vishnu Himself, living in one physical body. The combination of these three chapters will put firmly on the path of understanding this most glorious revelation of God known as the ʺVedasʺ.
268
46 The Sacred Paths of Yoga ʺCare not for criticism when you are in the right path. Yield not to flattery.ʺ SWAMI SIVANANDA The purpose of this chapter is to give you a brief overview of the sacred paths of yoga. To begin this discussion it is important to understand that “Yoga” means “union with God.” There are, however, many ways that this can be achieved. I will attempt to describe them briefly. These are: Hatha Yoga Taraka Yoga Karma Yoga Yantra Yoga Bhakti Yoga Eco Yoga Jnana Yoga Sabda or Nada Yoga Kriya Yoga Mansa Yoga Laya Yoga Siddha Yoga Kundalini Yoga Sankirtan Yoga Asparsha Yoga Lambika Yoga Ashtanga Yoga Yoga of Synthesis Agni Yoga Mantra Yoga Siva Yoga In my first book, ʺThe Complete Ascension Manual for the Aquarian Ageʺ, I spoke of the seven root races that make up our current world cycle and the yogas that were focused upon during these time periods. I will briefly review this here. Polarian, Hyperborean, and Lemurian ‐ Hatha Yoga Atlantean ‐ Bhakti Yoga Aryan ‐ Raja Yoga Meruvian ‐ Agni Yoga or Ashtanga Yoga Paradisian ‐ Unknown
269
These might be considered the major paths of yoga and there are many minor paths and off shoots of these. These are major because Hatha Yoga correlates with the physical yoga. Bhakti with the emotionally focused yoga. Raja with the mentally focused yoga. All different paths of yoga might be considered as spokes on a wheel with God in the center. They all lead to the same place. I, personally, practice what might be termed a yoga of synthesis that integrates all the yogas and extracts the best and finest teachings from all of them. Hatha Yoga This school of yoga was the form focused upon in the Lemurian epoch of our history. It is a yoga focused upon physical purification and training. Its goal is to bring the physical body into a perfect state of physical health, so the soul may have a fitting vehicle of expression to work through. There are many practices, including physical yoga postures and breathing exercises which also act upon the physical nervous system and etheric body which is considered a corollary aspect of the physical body. Hatha Yoga also helps to bring the vital energies of the physical and etheric body under control. As one can see, this is an indispensable yoga for every person to practice on some level and is intimately tied together with passing the first initiation which has to do with physical mastery. The word ʺHathaʺ actually means the conjunction of the sun and the moon. It is this physical balance of these macrocosmic and microcosmic principles that must be balanced within the human body. There are eight main steps in the process of Hatha Yoga. These are: 1. Abstinence 2. Observance 3. Sitting postures 4. Breath control 5. Non‐attachment to possessions
Hatha Yoga also teaches many muscular contractions which are called bandhas and physical gestures that are called mudras. It also teaches the 270
science of Pratyahara which has to do with learning to withdraw the senses from external objects, which is truly the key to effective meditation. If you would like to learn more about Hatha Yoga there are many wonderful books on the market. Two books in particular, I would recommend, are, ʺThe Practice of yogaʺ by Swami Sivananda, and a second book called, ʺYoga Mastering the Secrets of Matter and the Universeʺ, by Alain Danielou. Bhakti Yoga Bhakti Yoga was the yoga of the Atlantean period which dealt with emotional attunement. For this reason it is the yoga of love and devotion. It has also been, to a great extent, a major yoga of the Piscean Age. It is a yoga for people who are more identified with their emotional body. Itʹs method of reintegration with Source is through love. There are nine steps to Bhakti Yoga. These are: 1. Listening 2. Singing of Praise 3. Meditation 4. Worship of the feet 5. Ritual worship 6. Prostration 7. To be a slave to God 8. To be a friend 9. Self surrender Two of the well known spiritual masters that seem to embody this devotional Yoga are Paramahansa Yogananda and Sathya Sai Baba. They both embody this devotional aspect. Two other forms of Bhakti Yoga are: The Way of passionate attachment and the way of transcendent love. ʺThat form of devotion which makes use of emotions and brings joy and peace is called the way of passionate attachment. ʺFrom the Angirasa Daiva Mimansa, sutra. The way of transcendent love sees the whole universe animate or inanimate as pervaded by divinity and experiences the reality, ʺThou art thatʺ. ʺHe who,
271
with his whole being, sees Divinity in all existing things and all things in Divinity, stands highest among the devotees of the Lord.ʺ Followers of Bhakti Yoga often personalize God, as the followers of Krishna and Rama did. They often are very involved with rituals, flowers, incense, beautiful buildings, and all forms which aid in cultivating love for God. Bhaktis are less interested in intellectually understanding God. As you can see, these yogas relate very much to our four body system and how we each relate and identify with our physical, emotional, mental, and spiritual bodies. Bhakti Yoga is also very much involved with self service. It is essential for every person on the spiritual path to practice some form of Bhakti yoga, otherwise they are disowning their emotional body in their pursuit of God realization. We can see that on one yoga is better than another, although there are different yogas that suit certain people better at certain stages of their life and spiritual evolution. Bhakti yoga is the way of the heart, which in turn is the most important spiritual practice of all. Without a healthy physical body and controlled mind, this, in truth, cannot be achieved. Raja Yoga It has been said that the purpose of Hatha yoga is to make Raja yoga possible. Raja yoga cannot be achieved without the training of Hatha yoga and Bhakti yoga, for that matter. Raja yoga is the yoga of the Aryan age. It is for this reason it is the yoga that deals with the controlling and concentrating of the mind, which is the main lesson of this current root race. It is through the concentration of the mind that man gains knowledge and mastery of all things. There are fifteen main steps to Raja yoga. These are: 1. Abstinence 2. Observance (ʺI am the principle of all things, the Brahman.ʺ) 3. Renunciation 4. Silence 5. Solitude 6. Proper use of time. 272
7. Postures 8. Root contraction (Mula‐bandha) 9. Strengthening of the body 10. The straightening of the body 11. Spiritual sight 12. Breath control 13. Pratyhara ‐ ʺSeeing Divinity in all perceptible forms brings delight to the mind and its faculties. Know this as the withdrawal which should be practiced every moment.ʺ 14. Contemplation ‐ ʺThe one changeless thought, ʹI am the principle, the Brahmanʹ, with no other notion, is known under the name of contemplation and is the giver of supreme bliss.ʺ ‐ The Upanishads. 15. Identification ‐ ʺWhen the very notion of contemplation is forgotten, this is known as identification.ʺ ‐ The Upanishads The term Raja yoga means royal yoga. It refers, specifically, to the yoga system of Patanjali. For an in‐depth study of the teachings of Raja Yoga I would guide you to the other chapter in this book on the Yoga Sutras of Patanjali. I have personally found Patanjaliʹs teachings to be some of the most profound I have ever studied. It is a system of study that I find very similar to ʺThe Course in Miraclesʺ in some ways. The only difference is that it was written over 5000 years ago. Raja yoga is especially important to study now because of the period of history of this planet in which we are living. Karma Yoga Karma yoga achieves union with God through ʺright action and through service. Sai Babaʹs famous quote, ʺHands that help are holier than lips that prayʺ, applies here. Karma yoga can also be summed up in the statement by Sri Bhagavan Krishna, in the Bhagavad Gita, when he says, ʺWorshipping Him with proper actions, a man attains realization.ʺ One key to Karma yoga is the performance of right action and service for its own sake, not caring about its immediate or apparent results. Karma yoga, literally means action yoga. It consists of the sacred work of demonstrating oneʹs daily activities totally in harmony with the soulʹs wishes and desires. 273
All actions are done in the attitude of self surrender, with no regard to the fruit of oneʹs actions. This is done without any egotistical attachments. One could say that Mahatma Ghandi embodied the ideals of karma yoga perfectly. It is also the gospel of Krishna in the Bhagavad Gita. A Karma yogi is an instrument of God in the affairs of the world. It is essential that we all integrate Karma yoga along with the other yogas into our daily lives. Jnana Yoga Jnana yoga is the religion of the philosopher and the thinker that wants to go beyond the visible and material reality. The Jnana yogi finds God through knowledge. Jnana yoga is summed up in the Upanishads by the following statement: ʺIn the method of reintegration through knowledge the mind is ever bound to the ultimate end of existence which is liberation. This method leads to all attainments and is ever auspicious.ʺ Jnana yoga teaches seven stages of knowledge. Four states of mind and seven obstacles have to be faced. The four states of mind are: 1. Dispersed state 2. The past approach 3. The grasped state 4. The merging state The seven obstacles are: 1. Good will 2. Reflection 3. Subtlety of mind 4. Perception of reality 5. Freedom from the leaning towards the world 6. Disappearance of visible forms 7. The unmanifest state Jnana yoga is the path of insight or wisdom. It is wisdom based on what Vedanta refers to as higher knowledge rather than lower knowledge. Djwhal Khul might refer to this as the difference between knowledge of the higher mind and the concrete mind.
274
One of the great proponents of Jnana yoga is the Vedas, also known as Vedanta. It is based on the spiritual concept of non‐dualism. Jnana yoga is the path of self realization through gnostic understanding that teaches the ability to discern the real from the unreal. To the Jnana yogi will power and inspired reason are the two guiding principles by which he can attain enlightenment. Jnana yoga has been described as a straight, but steep course. Vedanta lists six principles of Jnana yoga that lead to liberation. These are: 1. Discrimination 2. Renunciation 3. The six accomplishments (Tranquillity, Sense restraint, Actions totally in harmony with God.) 4. Endurance 5. Mental collectedness 6. Faith ...Other practices of Jnana yoga are: 1. Listening 2. Redemption, the sacred teaching 3. Pondering on the importance of meditation ...Jnana yoga, in essence, is the cultivation of the eye of wisdom. Mantra Yoga Mantra yoga finds union with God through proper use of speech and sound. It is the power of the word to create or destroy that Mantra yoga emphasizes. It utilizes the focused intent to make every word you speak in harmony with God and your own soul. Mantra yoga also uses mantrums as an indispensable part of their practice. In the East, the mantra yogi usually uses the aum, so ham, om namah shivaya, or hram, hrim, as their favorite mantrums. The greatest mantra is the syllable, aum. It is considered the mother of all mantras. After this, the Gayatri mantra, which is considered the mantra of Eternal Wisdom in the Vedas. Rhythmic repetition of a mantra is called Japa. This is why this type of yoga has also been called ʺJapa Yogaʺ. One of the greatest proponents of this practice is His Holiness, the Lord Sai Baba. He considers the constant 275
repetition of the name of God and the visualizing of your favorite form of God or Deity as being an indispensable spiritual practice. Most spiritual teachers in the East and West integrate some form of Mantra yoga into their teachings. The practice of mantra yoga takes constant vigilance over every thought you think and word you speak, for every word you speak in your daily life, in truth, is a mantra and word of power. There are different kinds of Japa. 1. Daily japa, usually done in the morning and evening. 2. Circumstantial japa, usually done on festival days. 3. Japa done for some specific desired rest. 4. Forbidden japa, which is done without discipline and with wrong pronunciation. 5. Japa done for penance. 6. Moving japa which is done through your day, which is what Sai Baba has recommended. 7. Voice japa is done out loud for others to hear if appropriate. 8. Whispered japa. 9. The Bee japa becomes the mantra and is murmured like the hum of a bee. The lips and tongue do not move and the eyes are usually closed. 10. Mental japa is done solely in oneʹs mind and is an indispensable method to use in your daily life. 12. The uninterrupted japa is for those who renounce the world. Japa is done continuously and when tired, the yogi meditates and when tired of meditating goes back to japa. When tired of both, think of the Supreme Self. 13. Doing japa with beads or a rosary of some kind. There are sixteen steps of Mantra yoga. They are: 1. Devotion. 2. Purity. 3. Posture. 4. Observance of the calendar which is based on an astrological understanding which defines celebrations, fasts, and so on. 5. The ways of conduct. 6. Concentration. 7. The search for the inner divine countries. These inner countries are considered the abodes of Deities, Masters, and gurus on the inner plane. 8. Breath control. 9. Gesture. 10. Water offering. 276
11. Fire offering. 12. Ritual sacrifice. (fruit) 13. Ritual worship which usually utilizes scents, flowers, incense, lamp, and food of some kind. 14. Repetition of mantras, words of power and names of God. 15. Contemplation. 16. Identification (Samadhi). This is achieved when the meaning of the mantra has been realized and the mind dissolves into the Deity of the mantra. There becomes no separation between seeker, searcher and that which is sought. With identification, the seeker has achieved his goal. Kundalini Yoga or Laya Yoga Kundalini yoga is the method by which certain spiritual practices are utilized to purposely and consciously raise the coiled energy at the base of the spine and try and raise it through the chakras to the third eye and crown chakra, in an attempt to achieve self realization. This type of yoga has also been called ʺAsparsha yogaʺ. It utilizes eight basic steps. These are: 1. Observances and abstinences 2. Purification 3. Courage 4. Steadiness 5. Endurance 6. Subtlety 7. Direct evidence 8. Thoughtless identification ...It also utilizes certain specific breathing exercises, mudras, and bandhas in the process of awakening the kundalini. I have spoken in great detail about the practice of Kundalini yoga in my book on ʺSoul Psychologyʺ, so I will not repeat myself here. I do want to emphasize there that the forced conscious awakening of the kundalini, in point of fact, is a very dangerous proposition unless done under the guidance of a qualified self realized teacher, which, in truth, is hard to find. The raising of the Kundalini is important, however, it does activate quite naturally and in proper timing and order to the well balanced, committed, and integrated disciple on the path, no matter what path you are following. 277
Trying to force the awakening of the kundalini is literally playing with fire. This is not a type of yoga to experiment with haphazardly on your own. This energy raised prematurely will activate and then shoot out your lower chakras and create worlds of problems. Before practicing this type of yoga, a disciple must have mastery over their energies. I would say, hence, it shouldnʹt be focused upon until at least after the third initiation, and again, then only with a qualified spiritual teacher. This type of yoga has also been called Laya yoga. Tantra Yoga Tantra yoga seek to find union with the Divine through the spiritual and divine use of sexuality. It seeks to use sexual energy as a means of attaining self mastery. Tantric yoga philosophy believes that one can achieve the same result through celibacy or sexual union. It is the spiritual science of learning to raise sexual energy up the chakras while actually making love with your partner or spouse. Tantric yoga believes that sexual energy must be controlled, mastered and utilized and not run away from. Sexuality is seen as a sacred energy and is used, but under the guidance of the soul and not the lower self. In my book on ʺSoul Psychologyʺ I have dedicated an entire chapter to this subject, so I will not repeat myself here. It is suffice to say, however, that this type of yoga, in my opinion, is a form that almost all the people on this planet need to come to terms with. Tantra yoga provides a midpoint between the two extremes of celibacy, and being run by the carnal lower self in this regard. Tantra yoga is the spiritual science of how to properly utilize your sexual energy in service of God. Many of the Eastern traditions and fundamentalist religions make sexuality out to be a bad thing, which just isnʹt true. When used properly it can accelerate your path of God realization. 278
Taraka Yoga Taraka yoga is based on the non‐dualist philosophy of Advaita Vedanta. It was thought to have been started by Shankara, about whom I have written extensively in my book, ʺThe Life and Teachings of 40 of the Worldʹs Greatest Saints and Spiritual Mastersʺ. The word Taraka actually means that which delivers. Taraka yoga delivers the practitioner to the unconditioned reality of the absolute. This is achieved through, first of all, the recognition of there being only one single being living in the infinite universe whose name is Brahman or Atman. The goal of Taraka yoga is to convert oneʹs ordinary consciousness to a continuous awareness of this absolute reality. This is achieved, to a great extent, through a series of exercises in which light phenomena play a decisive role. The inner light is produced by a technique known as ʺShambhavi‐mudraʺ. The yogi fixes his or her attention on the third eye, and taught to see and experience the light phenomena of the inner dimensions of reality. There are discernible stages of development in this yogic path. These have been loosely designated as: 1. Inner sign 2. External sign 3. Intermediate sign There is a whole science of these lights and sounds, which remind me very much of Baba Muktanandaʹs experiences which I have recounted in the above mentioned book, also. If you are interested in this type of yoga, I would recommend reading a book called ʺSacred Pathsʺ by George Feuerstein, for a deeper explanation. Yantra Yoga Yantra yoga is the path of union with God through geometric visualization. A yantra is a geometric design. They are highly efficient tools for contemplation, concentration, and meditation. This type of yoga might also be succinctly called mandala yoga. 279
The Buddhist are masters of this type of yoga as seen in their mandala, icons, tonkas, and sand paintings. The American Indians used this type of yoga, also. The Kabbalistic Tree of Life might be in this category also. By tuning into the different aspects of Yantra or geometric visualization one is tapped into certain Deities or major creative spiritual force centers in the universe. The Yantra is like a microcosmic picture of the macrocosm. It is a focusing point and outer and inner doorway. The Yantras are often focused towards a specific Deity and are drawn on paper, wood, sand, metal, or actually done in three dimensional shapes. The yantra must then be integrated into themself symbolically. Their body becomes the Yantra. This, in truth, is not that much different than people focusing on a specific Deity to worship, such as Krishna, or Rama, rather than focusing on an omnipresent and more impersonal conception of God. The Yantra provides a focusing point much like the ten Sepheroth, in the Tree of Life, are windows and doorways into the absolute. The idea is to make the Yantra inwardly and outwardly so real that it becomes alive. In this way it absorbs the practitionerʹs complete attention. They can no longer tell if the yantra is within themselves or if they are within the yantra. The most celebrated yantra in India is the Sri‐Yantra or “auspicious wheel.” It is a symbol of the entire cosmos. It serves to remind the practitioner of the non‐difference between subject and object. Kriya Yoga Kriya yoga is the type of yoga taught by Babaji and Paramahansa Yogananda. I have written extensively about it in my first book, ʺThe Complete Ascension Manual for the Aquarian Ageʺ, in the chapter of ʺBabaji, the Yogi Christʺ. For that reason I am not going to repeat the same information here. I will say, however, that Paramahansa Yogananda has referred to it as the airplane method to God. I have been initiated into this type of yoga, and have found it to be extraordinarily valuable. 280
Sabda or Nada Yoga Sabda or Nada yoga is the method of achieving union with God through sound. One of its greatest proponents was Kabir, (the poet saint) the past life of Shirdi Sai Baba, about whom I have written extensively in my book on ʺThe Life and Teachings of 40 of the Worldʹs Greatest Saints and Spiritual Masters.ʺ Modern day mystery schools based upon Sabda or Nada yoga are Eckancar, John Roger, and Darwin Gross. The practice of Nada yoga has to do with learning to tune and listen to the inner sounds that emanate from the different dimensions of reality. In the chapter on ʺSoul Travelʺ in this book I have extensively listed these sounds that can be listened to in meditation. Part of Sabda or Nada yoga also deals with the intoning of certain mantras and sacred sounds that allows one to soul travel and attune to the dimensions from which these mantras come. This is a most sublime form of yoga and is also the basis of the Sikh religion. Sankirtan Yoga Sankirtan yoga seeks to find union with the Divine through the singing and chanting of bhajans or devotional songs, which are also called sankirtan. Sai Baba is one of the biggest proponents of this type of yoga. What is so beautiful about it is that the songs not only are filled with the sacred names of God, but the songs have very beautiful melodies which allows the emotional body of the practitioner to get involved. Practitioners of Bhakti yoga would especially love this type of yoga. The joy and bliss that comes from singing devotional songs with a loving supportive spiritual community is awe inspiring. I, personally, have a whole set of devotional songs from the Sai Baba Foundation, which I play in my car constantly. Sai Baba has said that the singing of devotional songs is the best spiritual practice for getting rid of the blemish of ego. Devotional songs are a way of practicing mantra yoga, and japa yoga, but doing it with a melody which is much more enjoyable. Temptation doesnʹt arise when your mind is constantly affirming, chanting, and singing your love, devotion and praise of God! 281
Ashtanga Yoga and Agni Yoga There is not a lot of information available on Ashtanga yoga. It is an important path of yoga because Djwhal Khul said that Asntanga yoga is the next yoga for the coming Meruvian root race. Theosophical literature has designated Agni, or fire yoga as the yoga of the next coming root race. It is for this reason that I have put these two together. Ashtanga yoga is a type of power yoga. My wife, Terri, tells me that the actual full name is Ashtanga Vinyasa. She has practiced it, and it is a very active movement oriented type of yoga. Agni yoga was made famous by Nicolas Roerich, who channeled a whole series of books from the Ascended Master, El Morya, in this century on the subject and by the name Agni Yoga. I would guide anyone who is interested in this subject to those set of books, of which I have looked at but not read myself. These teachings of El Morya, through Nicolas Roerich, were a dispensation of teachings much like those Madam Blavatsky and Alice Bailey channeled, except probably more of the first ray rather than the second ray, since El Morya is the Chohan for the first ray. Eco Yoga Eco yoga is one of the newer yogas, and is the yoga of ecological and environmental sanctification and respect. It sees all life as being interconnected and interdependent. It is, hence, the study and practice of the inter relatedness between minerals, plants, animals, humans, and the environment. This type of yoga may be one of the most important of all because if we donʹt learn to respect and sanctify the Earth Mother and all life that lives upon her, we will destroy the school that allows us to practice all the other yogas. I have written extensively, in my other books, about the need to take care of our environment and work cooperatively with the nature kingdoms, so I wonʹt repeat myself here. It is suffice to say that God lives as much in the earth, a river, a mountain, a city, a plant, a mineral, an insect, an animal, in the air, the forests, in the physical body, as He does in higher dimensions of reality. 282
To not sanctify our environment is literally to deface and destroy Godʹs physical body. We wouldnʹt do this to our own physical body, why would we show such little respect to His. The true spiritual path is to bring heaven to earth, and recognize the material universe as one of Godʹs most beautiful and treasured heavens. Shiva Yoga This path of yoga is for those seekers who wish to merge the Shiva aspect in Hindu tradition. The Hindu trinity is made up of Brahma, Shiva, and Vishnu. The most popular forms of Vishnu worship in India are the followers of Rama and Krishna, who are incarnations of Vishnu. There is also a path of yoga called Brahmanism that worships Brahman. Shiva yoga has five parts: 1. Knowledge of Shiva 2. Devotion to Shiva 3. Contemplation of Shiva 4. Observances of the austerities connected with Shiva 5. Ritual worship of Shiva Integral Yoga Integral yoga is the term given to the yoga created by Sri Aurobindo, the self realized master from India who lived earlier in this century. I am not well versed on his particular slant of the Vedic teachings, however, I have always very much respected his contribution. I am reminded of a story about him that occurred, I believe, on November 24, 1923. He was meditation and received a vision that Krishna had incarnated into the physical world on the previous day. The previous Sathya Sai Baba had incarnated into a babyʹs body in Southern India. One of the integral teachings of Sri Aurobindoʹs yoga was his commitment to political action as well as his inner spiritual work. In this regard he was more balanced than some of the eastern spiritual traditions of non‐involvement with the material world. 283
A lot of his teachings on integral yoga he developed with his partner who was referred to as the Mother. For those interested in studying his teachings in specific detail I would recommend reading his two volume set of books called, ʺLetters on Yoga, Volume One and Twoʺ. He was a prolific writer and one of his teachers was Sri Sankara, the great Hindu Master who lived in the Eighth Century. Yoga of Synthesis The yoga of synthesis is the type of yoga I, personally, recommend practicing. It is the yoga that integrates all paths of yoga, all spiritual paths, all religions. It is an eclectic and universalistic path that garnishes the best from each path and integrates them into one cohesive unified whole. This is not to say that you might not emphasize a certain path in your life or in a certain phase of your life, or even in a certain incarnation. In the larger context, however, all paths are one and spokes on the wheel. No one path of yoga is better than any other. They are all important and essential to our full and total realization of God.
284
47 The Yoga Sutras of Patanjali ʺBy intense devotion to Ishvara (God), knowledge of Ishvara is gained.ʺ
A YOGA SUTRA OF PATANJALI
The yoga sutras of Patanjali, by the God realized saint Patanjali was given somewhere between 820 BC to 200 BC. Patanjali was the first to write down these teachings, for previous to this, the teachings were given orally. For this reason He is regarded as the founder of the science of Raja Yoga, or the ʺKingly Science of the Soulʺ. The great value of His teachings can be seen in the fact that we are currently in the Aryan Age, whose focus is the mastery of the mind. Raja Yoga is the science of yoga that deals with the right use of the mind, as an instrument for soul and hence, for self realization. In the Lemurian root race the yoga focused on was Hatha Yoga and Laya Yoga because the lesson was physical attunement. In the Atlantean root race, the yoga focused on was Bhakti Yoga, because of the emotional focus. Raja Yoga is the perfect yoga for our current root race. The future yoga will be Ashtranga Yoga, for the next coming root race that has not fully arrived yet. Raja Yoga helps to bring about the mastery of the mental body and will lead humanity to the fifth initiation. In Alice Baileyʹs book, ʺLight of the Soul ‐ The Yoga Sutras of Patanjaliʺ, she says that the three books that every student should have in their hands and study are, ʺThe Bhagavad Gitaʺ, ʺThe New Testamentʺ, and ʺThe Yoga Sutras of Patanjaliʺ. ʺThe Yoga Sutras of Patanjaliʺ are a step‐by‐step system of unfolded and graded spiritual development. They remind me a little bit of ʺThe Course in Miraclesʺ by the Master Jesus. Each sutra is a one sentence long aphorism or teaching. There are 195 sutras in all and are divided into four books. Book one deals with the problem of union. Book two deals with the steps to union.
285
Book three deals with union achieved and its results and book four deals with illumination. One other interesting fact made known by Djwhal Khul, in the Alice Bailey books is that the Yoga Sutras of Patanjali are the basic teachings of the trans‐ Himalayan school to which many of the Masters of Wisdom belong. This would certainly have included Djwhal Khul, Kuthumi, and the Master El Morya. The yoga sutras form one of the six systems of Hindu philosophy. The Upanishads, the wisdom teachings of the Vedas uphold the yoga sutras of Patanjali as being among the six systems as containing the most efficacious methods for achieving direct perception of truth. The yoga system of Patanjali has been called the Eight Fold Path which leads to the final goal of ʺKaivalyaʺ (absoluteness) in which the Yogi realizes truth beyond all intellectual apprehension. I would like to introduce you to these sutras since I would imagine that most of my readers have not been exposed to them. This particular graded series of lessons is one of the most valuable courses in spiritual development I have ever found. For the purposes of this chapter I have extracted what I consider to be the most valuable sutras and will share these with you in the order they are presented by Patanjali. After each sutra I will give a short commentary if I think it is needed. If there is no commentary, it just means the meaning given by Patanjali is straight forward and self explanatory and not needing my comments. After reading this chapter you will have an excellent understanding and sense of the overall teachings. The particular translation of Patanjaliʹs sutras which I am using are those of Djwhal Khul, in the Alice Baileyʹs book, ʺThe Light of the Soulʺ, and my own. 286
The Yoga Sutras of Patanjali Book One 1. ʺAUM. (OM) The following instruction concerns the science of union.ʺ 2. ʺThis union (or yoga) is achieved through the subjugation of the psychic nature and the restraint of the chitta (mind).ʺ ‐ The subjugation of the psychic nature which this lesson refers to is the control of the emotional body, desire nature, and subconscious mind. 3. ʺWhen this has been accomplished, the yogi knows himself as he really is in reality.ʺ ‐ Who the yoga really is, of course, is the soul and eternal spirit. 4. ʺUp till now the inner man has identified himself with his forms and with their active modifications.ʺ ‐ Man has seen himself as his (physical, emotional, mental, and/or etheric) bodies, and/or all of the changes these bodies go through. 7. ʺThe basis of correct knowledge is correct perception, correct deduction and correct witness (accurate evidence).ʺ ‐ This lesson deals with the correct use of the mind and the need for proper detachment, and ability to see life from the soulʹs perspective. and perceiving life from the Christ consciousness, not the negative ego consciousness. 8. ʺIncorrect knowledge is based upon perception of the form and not upon the state of being.ʺ ‐ The choice for every person is to see themselves and others as just a body (physical, emotional, or mental), or as the Eternal Self living within all bodies. 12. ʺThe control these modification of the internal organ, the mind, is to be brought about through tireless endeavor and through non‐attachment.ʺ ‐ Tireless endeavor is one quality that many aspirants on the path lose. It is tied up with the lesson of maintaining oneʹs personal power and self mastery at all times, and is all connected with what Patanjali calls fiery aspiration towards God and self realization. 13. ʺTireless endeavor is the constant effort to restrain the modifications of the mind.ʺ
287
‐ Sai Baba has called the mind the monkey mind. It is essential to maintain constant vigilance over it, since it is our thoughts that create our reality. 14. ʺWhen the object to be gained is sufficiently valued, and the efforts towards its attainment are persistently followed without intermission, then the steadiness of the mind is secured.ʺ ‐ The object the disciple is seeking is complete merger with the soul and spirit (Monad). This unceasing persistent effort leads to learning to keep the mind steady in the light, as Djwhal Khul always likes to say. The Disciple learns to remain in the Christ consciousness at all times as well as attuned to the Higher Self and soul. This becomes an automatic process as the conscious and subconscious minds are reprogrammed to stay attuned to the superconscious at all times. It is a matter of where you keep your attention or focus. Mastery is gained and the lower self, material desire, and negative ego literally die. 15. ʺNon‐attachment is freedom from longing for all objects or desires, either earthly or traditional, either here or hereafter.ʺ ‐ The idea is to die to material desire and makes oneʹs only desire, that for ascension, or God realization. All desires other than this are hindrances on the path. 16. ʺThe consummation of this non‐attachment results in an exact knowledge of the spiritual man when liberated from the qualities or gunas.ʺ ‐ This non‐attachment leads to the realization of the Monad or Spiritual Self. This is one step beyond even soul realization. Liberation from the gunas or qualities has to do with the three qualities of matter in Hindu thought. These are sattva (rhythm or harmony), rajas (activity), tamas (inertia). The disciple gains knowledge of the spiritual man because his detachment has led him to be the cause of his reality and the chooser of all form and qualities. 18. ʺA further stage of samadhi (enlightenment) is achieved when through one‐pointed thought, the outer activity is quieted. In this stage the chitta (mind stuff) is responsive only to subjective impressions.ʺ ‐ The discipleʹs total focus is only on the guidance from soul and spirit and not the outer world and negative ego.
288
19. ʺOther yogins (yogiʹs) achieve samadhi and arrive at a discrimination of pure spirit through belief, followed by energy, memory, meditation and right perception.ʺ ‐ This lesson is pretty straight forward. The only thing I would add is that energy follows thought, and the memory function becomes in service of the soul, which allows the disciple to maintain what the Buddhists call ʺmindfulnessʺ, of the things that God would have us be mindful of. Right perception comes from perceiving life from the Christ consciousness, not the ego consciousness. Meditation is essential for self realization. 21. The attainment of this stage (spiritual consciousness) is rapid for those whose will is intensely life.ʺ ‐ This lesson, I believe to have two meanings, in terms of the word will. First of all, the single most important quality for psychological and spiritual growth is the development of personal power which is will. The disciple who learns to own their power in all situations and at all times, in service of God will make super accelerated progress. The second meaning of will is the Monad or Father in heaven, who embodies the Will aspect of the Creator. Spiritual consciousness as opposed to soul consciousness is an attunement to this energy. Soul consciousness carries the vibration of love/wisdom. 22. ʺThose who employ the will likewise differ, for its use may be intense, moderate, or gentle. In respect to the attainment of true spiritual consciousness there is yet another way.ʺ ‐ Every disciple must learn to own oneʹs power to achieve self realization, however, how a disciple or Master uses this personal power is different. This reminds me of Paramahansa Yogananda and his guru Sri Yukteswar. Sri Yukteswar was very severe and disciplined in the use of his will. Paramahansa Yogananda was much more loving and gentle. Each attained self realization, however their style was different. The path of yoga, as outlined by Patanjali is to use the will, and discrimination to determine the difference between the self and the not self, or between the Christ consciousness and negative ego consciousness. This path is more of a mental path since, by definition, it is that of Raja Yoga, and is appropriate for the Aryan race. Some disciples may use another path such as the path of Bhakti (devotional Yoga. Other disciples may begin to use
289
Ashtanga Yoga, (Aquarian age Yoga). (See the chapter on the 22 Paths of Yoga.) 23. ʺBy intense devotion to Ishvara, knowledge of Ishvara (God) is gained.ʺ ‐ Ishvara is the son of God, the Cosmic Christ, or the realization of the soul. A disciple can realize the soul or the Christ through intense devotion or Bhakti. 24. ʺThis Ishvara is the soul, and untouched by limitation, free from karma and desire.ʺ 25. In Ishvara (the soul), the germ of all knowledge expands into infinity.ʺ 26. ʺIshvara, being unlimited by time condition, is the teacher of the primeval lords.ʺ ‐ The soul is beyond time and space. Time is a mental construct of the incarnated personality in the world of matter. The soul and spirit are the teachers of all disciples and all initiates. 27. The word of Ishvara is AUM (or OM). This is the pranava.ʺ ‐ The word AUM is the word or sound of all forms existing in physical plane existence. It is the word of glory. It is the pranava, the sound of conscious life itself. AUM is the arrow to Brahman. It is the sound that God hears as humans breathe. When rightly understood and spoken, it causes the Christ of soul aspect to shine forth. It is the sound which brings forth, in manifestation, the incarnated personality. It releases the soul from all limitations. It is the integrator and synthesizer of spirit, soul, and body. It is the word of the fifth root race (Aryan race). The Master, or God within is the word AUM. 28. ʺThrough the sounding of the word and through reflection upon its meaning, the way is found.ʺ 29. ʺFrom this comes the realization of the Self (the soul) and the removal of all obstacles.ʺ 30. ʺThe obstacles to soul cognition are bodily disability, mental inertia, wrong questioning, carelessness, laziness, lack of dispassion, erroneous perception, inability to achieve concentration, failure to hold the meditative attitude when achieved.ʺ
290
31. ʺPain, despair, misplaced bodily activity and wrong direction (or control) of the life currents are the results of the obstacles in the lower psychic nature.ʺ ‐ Pain comes when the emotional body is not managed properly. Despair is created by misuse of the mental body. Misplaced bodily activity occurs, obviously, on the physical plane level. Life currents deal with the etheric body. When these four bodies are not managed properly by the conscious mind in service of the soul this is what takes place. 32. ʺTo overcome the obstacles and their accompaniments, the intense application of the will to some truth (or principle) is required. ‐ In the Alice Bailey book, ʺThe Light of the Soulʺ, Alice Bailey and Djwhal Khul give a small chart to help disciples to focalize their energies on the one truth or principle that is needed. Obstacle Remedy 1. Bodily disability Wholesome, sane living 2. Mental inertia Control of the life force 3. Wrong questioning One pointed thought 4. Carelessness Meditation 5. Laziness Self‐discipline 6. Lack of dispassion Correct analysis 7. Erroneous perception Illumination 33. ʺThe peace of chitta (mind stuff) can be brought about through the practice of sympathy, tenderness, steadiness of purpose, and dispassion in regard to pleasure or pain, or towards all forms of good and evil.ʺ ‐ Dispassion towards pleasure or pain and all forms of good and evil deals with the need for what Djwhal Khul has called ʺdivine indifferenceʺ. It comes from having detachment, and what the Bhagavad Gita refers to as transcendence of duality. God consciousness is one of having evenmindedness and equanimity if you have pleasure or pain, profit or loss, sickness or health, criticism or praise. The disciple learns to stay in inner peace and joy at all times while, maintaining compassion, but not over‐identified empathy. The disciple learns not to live on an emotional roller coaster of the subconscious mind, negative ego, mental, emotional, etheric, and physical bodies. The incarnated personality, now merged with the soul, is the divine observer and changeless, yet deals with the form side of life appropriately. 291
34. ʺThe peace of the chitta is also brought about by the regulation of the prana or life breath.ʺ ‐ This lesson deals with the importance of rhythmic and structured regulation of oneʹs daily activities in life in terms of wise time and energy management. The second aspect of this lesson deals with the importance of breath itself. The breath is really the foundation of all occult spiritual work. Not only do incarnated personalities breathe, but so do Ascended Masters and God, Himself. God breathes in and breathes out the universe. In Hindu philosophy, the Science of Breath is called the Science of Pranayama. 36. ʺBy meditation upon light and upon radiance, knowledge of the spirit can be reached and thus peace can be achieved.ʺ 37. ʺThe chitta (mind stuff) is stabilized and rendered free from illusion as the lower nature is purified and no longer indulged.ʺ ‐ Too many aspirants on the path indulge the lower self, emotional body, desire body, desire body, and five senses. As these are mastered, the four lower bodies (physical, emotional, mental, and etheric) become purified. 38. ʺPeace (steadiness of the chitta) can be reached through meditation on the knowledge which dreams give.ʺ ‐ This can refer to the dreams that we have every night while we sleep, and the dreams visions, reveries that come from meditation. We are taught in this world to think of what we experience during sleep as a dream. In truth, that may be more reality, and waking consciousness, more the dream. The inner world is reality, the outer world, we are just visiting and is more than the dream, in truth. 39. ʺPeace can also be reached through concentration upon that which is dearest to the heart.ʺ ‐ Concentrate on the soul and spirit at all times and peace will be attained, for you will merge with its consciousness, if your concentration is unceasing. 40. ʺThus his realization extends from the infinitely small the infinitely great. And from annu (the atom or speck) to the Atma (spirit) his knowledge is perfected.ʺ ‐ The microcosm is like the macrocosm. This lesson can be summed up by an ancient hidden scripture which states. ʺWithin the speck God can be seen. Within the man God can reign. Within Brahma both are found; yet all is one. The atom is as God, God as the atom.ʺ 292
41. ʺTo him whose vrittis (modifications of the substance of the mind) are entirely controlled there eventuates a state of identity with and similarity to, that which is realized. The knower, knowledge and the field of knowledge become one, just as the crystal takes to itself the colors of that which is reflected into it.ʺ 45. ʺThe gross leads into the subtle and the subtle leads in progressive stages to that state of pure spiritual being.ʺ ‐ Matter is densified spirit, spirit is refined matter. The spiritual path leads us from the grossest matter through the seven levels of initiation to ascension where matter is transformed completely into light or pure spiritual being. 47. ʺWhen this super‐contemplative state is reached, the yogi acquires pure spiritual realization through the balanced quiet of the chitta (mind stuff).ʺ 48. ʺHis perception is now unfailingly exact, (or his mind reveals only the truth).ʺ ‐ When merger with the Self is reached, perception becomes perfect, and only truth exists. 49. ʺThis particular perception is unique and reveals that which the rational mind (using testimony, inference, and education) cannot reveal.ʺ ‐ Merger with the Eternal Self brings forth a means of processing information that utilizes the other 90% of our brain that the rational mind does not have access to. 50. ʺWhen this state of perception is itself also restrained (or superseded), then is pure Samadhi achieved.ʺ ‐ Samadhi being that state of consciousness that is not just thinking with the Christ mind, but actually completely merged with the Eternal Self. The omniscience, omnipresence, and omnipotence of Sathya Sai Baba, or His past life as Shirdi Sai Baba are examples of what is available to us when a being is merged in that state constantly. In Hindu thought there are levels of Samadhi also. This relates to the dimensions of reality moving all the way up into the cosmic planes of consciousness. 293
Book II The Steps to Union 1. ʺThe yoga of action, leading to union with the soul is fiery aspiration, spiritual reading and devotion to Ishvara (the soul).ʺ ‐ One of the most important qualities a disciple needs to cultivate is fiery aspiration and/or enthusiasm for God in their spiritual path. This can be cultivated by spiritual reading, and devotional love for God. Did not Jesus say, that the whole law could be summed up: ʺLove the Lord, thy God with all thy heart and soul and mind and might, and love thy neighbor as thou love thy self.ʺ This commandment contains the fiery aspiration and the devotion to God. The yoga of action is Karma Yoga. The yoga of devotion is Bhakti Yoga. The yoga of the mind is Raja Yoga. The three of them combined, give us the fiery aspiration, devotion, and spiritual reading. Patanjali was very exact in his science, hence the physical, emotional, and mental man. 2. ʺThe aim of these three is to bring about soul vision and to eliminate obstructions.ʺ ‐ Soul vision is another name for the Christ consciousness and opposed to negative ego consciousness. 3. ʺThese are the difficulty producing hindrances: Avidya (ignorance), and the sense of personality, desire, hate and the sense of attachment.ʺ ‐ Personality is the sense of negative ego, separateness, selfishness. The other qualities mentioned are self explanatory. 4. ʺAvidya (ignorance) is the cause of all the other obstructions, whether they be latent, in process of elimination, overcome, or in full operation.ʺ ‐ Ignorance stems from ego. As Sai Baba says, ʺGod equals man minus ego.ʺ Ego manifests as Djwhal Khul says, as glamour, maya, and illusion, on the emotional, mental, and etheric planes and bodies. 5. ʺAvidya is the condition of confusing the permanent, pure, blissful, and the Self, with that which is impermanent, impure, painful and the not self.ʺ ‐ Are you a physical, emotional, mental, body or are you the Eternal Self living within these bodies?
294
6. ʺThe sense of personality is due to the identification of the knower with the instruments of knowledge.ʺ ‐ Again, are you the Eternal Self (the knower) utilizing your bodies, five senses, desires, emotions, thoughts, sensations, feelings, or are you identified with and being victimized by these instruments of knowledge? 7. ʺDesire is attachment to objects of pleasure.ʺ ‐ To pass the fourth initiation one must release all attachments and release all material desire. Your only desire should be to become desire‐less. Said in another way, your only desire, being to achieve liberation so you may be of greater service. 8. ʺHate is aversion for any object of the senses.ʺ ‐ The true yogi neither feels aversion or desire. They are two sides of the same coin. The true yogi remains in ʺdivine indifferenceʺ. 10. These five hindrances, when subtly known, can be overcome by an opposing mental attitude. ‐ The five hindrances are ignorance, sense of personality, desire, hate, and the sense of attachment.ʺ ‐ This gets into the science of attitudinal healing. Patanjaliʹs Yoga Sutras are really very similar to the lessons of the ʺCourse in Miraclesʺ. The Course in Miracles is the science of attitudinal healing. Emotions, be they positive or negative, come from the way you think. this is a fact and this is spiritual law. The easiest way to get rid of any negative quality is by using an ʺOpposing mental attitudeʺ. Replace ignorance with knowledge. Replace grudges with forgiveness. Replace doubt with faith. Replace desire with desirelessness. Replace fear with love. Replace attachment with non‐attachment or preferences. 11. ʺThese activities are to be done away with through the meditation process.ʺ ‐ The meditation process is a general term for doing your psychological and spiritual work of positive affirmations, visualizations, self hypnosis, self suggestion, mantras, words of power, repetition of the name of God, and meditation itself in the sense of attuning to the soul and spirit. 13. ʺSo long as the roots (samkaras) exist, their fruitions will be birth, life, and experiences resulting in pleasure or pain.ʺ ‐ The base of these negative or evil roots is ego. As long as ego or separateness and fear remain, future rebirth is insured, as is pleasure and 295
pain. When negative ego, glamour, maya, and illusion, are rooted out, liberation is achieved, and duality is transcended. Duality and ego are one and the same also. When duality is transcended, evenmindedness, equanimity and unceasing joy is achieved.ʺ 14. These seeds (samskaras) produce pleasure or pain according as their originating cause was good or evil.ʺ ‐ All seeds, whether good or evil, are thoughts. Past life karma or this life karma are just thoughts that have been programmed into the subconscious mind. The most important concept is that all thoughts, be it from past lives or this one, can be reprogrammed. Wisdom, good thoughts, good feelings, and good deeds erase karma. 16. ʺPain which is yet to come, may be warded off.ʺ ‐ This is achieved through a changed attitude of mind and the reprogramming of the conscious and subconscious mind in the pattern of the Christ consciousness. Did not the Bible say, ʺLet this mind be in you that was in Christ Jesus.ʺ The subconscious can be completely cleansed of all mental and emotional toxins, just as the physical body can be cleansed of physical toxins. Purify your four bodies and pain or karma will be warded off. 21. ʺAll that is, exists for the sake of the soul.ʺ ‐ The only purpose of earth life is to realize the soul and then the spirit. Earth is a school for spiritual evolution. There is absolutely no other reason to be here but this. If for even a second, you consider any other reason you are, then moving into illusion. The ego will tell you that the world is for very selfish, hedonistic, power hungry, and pleasure seeking purposes. Choose who ye shall serve. 22. ʺIn the case of the man who has achieved yoga (union) the objective universe has ceased to be. Yet it existeth still for those who are not yet free.ʺ ‐ You either see with your spiritual eyes or your material eyes (ego). You either see the Eternal Self behind all appearances of form, or you see and identify with material form and hence do not see the soul behind all things. The spiritual Master has achieved liberation from the three lower worlds. He can live in this world, but not of this world. 25. ʺWhen ignorance is brought to an end through non‐association with things perceived, this is the great liberation.ʺ
296
‐ When self mastery is attained, through detachment, discrimination, renunciation, Christ or spiritual vision, relinquishment of desire, transcendence of duality and ego, mastery of the five senses, and becoming a cause of oneʹs reality in service of the soul and spirit, liberation is achieved. 26. ʺThe state of bondage is overcome through perfectly maintained discrimination.ʺ ‐ Discrimination between that which is of God and that which is not of God, that which is permanent and that which is impermanent, between the self and the not self, between Christ consciousness and ego consciousness, between appearances and the reality which lies behind all appearances. 27. ʺThe knowledge (illumination) achieved is seven fold, and attained progressively.ʺ ‐ Hindu philosophy maintain that there are seven stages of illumination. 1. ʺI have known all that was to be known. Nothing further remains to know.ʺ ‐ In other words the basic lessons needed to be learned in this earthly school have been learned. 2. The stage where the disciple frees himself from every known limitation. 3. The stage where the discipleʹs consciousness has shifted from the ego personality to that of the soul, hence, nothing remains to attract the disciple to the three lower worlds. 4. The stage where the disciple fulfills his dharma (life path) and accomplishes his mission. 5. The stage where complete control of the mind is achieved and the mind is at rest. 6. The stage where the disciple realizes that matte or form has no power over him. 7. Full self realization which, in this case, would be the fifth initiation or merger with the Monad or Eternal Self in 297
consciousness. The disciple now knows himself as the ʺI Am that I Amʺ, as the Eternal Self. The disciple has moved from soul realization to self realization. 28. ʺWhen the means to yoga have been steadily practiced and when impurity has been overcome, enlightenment takes place leading up to full illumination.ʺ 29. ʺThe eight means of yoga are, the commandments or yama, the rules or nijama, posture or asana, right control of life force or pranayama, abstraction or pratyahara, attention or charana, meditation or dhyana, and contemplation or samadhi.ʺ ‐ The yoga system of Patanjali is known as the eight‐fold path. This is differentiated from the eight fold noble path of Gautauma Buddha. 1. The first steps of Patanjaliʹs path are moral conduct: non‐ injury to others, truthfulness, non‐stealing, sexual control, and non‐covetousness. 2. Niyama (religious observances) are purity of body, and mind, contentment in all circumstances, self discipline, self study (contemplation), and devotion to God and guru. 3. Right postures: The spinal column must be held straight and the body firm in a comfortable position for meditation. 4. Pranayama, control of prana, breath, and subtle life currents. 5. Pratyahara (withdrawal of the senses from external objects.) 6. Dharana ‐ Concentration or holding the mind to one thought. 7. Dhyana ‐ Meditation. 8. Samadhi ‐ (Superconscious direct experience). 298
This eight fold path of yoga leads to the final goal of kaivalya (absoluteness) in which the yogi realizes the truth beyond all intellectual comprehension. 30. ʺHarmlessness, truth to all beings, abstention from theft, from incontinence (sexual control), and from avarice, constitute yama or the five commandments. 31. ʺYama (the five religions observances and commandments constitutes the universal duty and is irrespective of race, place, time, or energy.ʺ 32. ʺInternal and external purification, contentment, fiery aspiration, spiritual reading and devotion to Ishvara (soul) constitutes nijama or the five commandments.ʺ 33. ʺThoughts contrary to yoga are: harmfulness, falsehood, theft, incontinence, and avarice, whether committed or approved of, whether arising from avarice, anger or delusion; whether slight in doing, middling or great. These result always in excessive pain and ignorance. For this reason the contrary thoughts must be cultivated.ʺ 35. ʺIn the presence of Him who has perfected harmlessness, all enmity ceases.ʺ ʺWhen the truth to all beings is perfected, the effectiveness of His words and acts is immediately to be seen.ʺ 37. ʺWhen the abstention from theft is perfected, the yogi can have whatever he desires.ʺ ‐ Does not the Bible say, ʺSeek ye the kingdom of God and all things shall be handed unto thee.ʺ 38. ʺBy abstention from incontinence, energy is acquired.ʺ ‐ Here the need is to raise the sexual energy and develop self mastery over it. 39. When abstention from avarice is perfect, there comes an understanding of the law of rebirth.ʺ ‐ It is desire which causes a soul extension to have to incarnate into matter. When desirelessness is achieved, the understanding and need for rebirth ends. 40. ʺInternal and external purification produces aversion for form, both oneʹs own and all forms.ʺ 299
‐ Again, the shift to spiritual vision rather than material vision is the purification. 41. ʺThrough purification comes also a quiet spirit, concentration, conquest of the organs, and ability to see the Self.ʺ 42. ʺAs a result of contentment, bliss is achieved.ʺ ‐ Bliss is the state of consciousness of union with the Eternal Self. 43. ʺThrough fiery aspiration and through the removal of all impurity, comes the perfecting of the bodily powers and of the senses.ʺ 44. ʺSpiritual reading results in a contact with the soul.ʺ 45. ʺThrough devotion to Ishvara, the goal of meditation is reached.ʺ ‐ Devotion is extremely important on the spiritual path because it brings forth oneʹs emotions, and most specifically, the emotion of love for God and all His kingdoms. God responds to a devoted heart. 46. ʺThe Posture assumed must be steady and easy.ʺ 47. ʺSteadiness and ease of posture is to be achieved through persistent light effort and through the concentration of the mind upon the infinite. 48. ʺWhen right posture (asana) has been attained there follows right control of prana and proper inspiration and expiration of the breath.ʺ ‐ (I highly recommend taking a Hatha Yoga class if you have never done so before.) 54. ʺAbstraction (pratyahara) is the subjugation of the senses by the thinking principle and their withdrawal from that which has hitherto been their object.ʺ 55. ʺAs a result of these means, there follows the complete subjugation of the sense organs.ʺ 300
Book III Union Achieved and Its Results 1. ʺConcentration is the fixing of the chitta (mind stuff) upon a particular object. This is dharana.ʺ ‐ The object can be a mental ideal, or idea. a quality, a visualization, and internal or external object, a spiritual Master, a feeling, the third eye, at the consciousness behind the form. 2. ʺSustained concentration is meditation.ʺ 3. ʺWhen the chitta becomes absorbed in that which is the reality (idea embodied in the form), and is unaware of separateness or of the personal self, this is contemplation or samadhi.ʺ 4. ʺWhen concentration, meditation, and contemplation form one sequential act, then is sanyama achieved.ʺ ‐ Sanyama means the synthesis or integration of the three stages of the meditation process. 5. ʺAs a result of sanyama comes the shinning forth of the light.ʺ 6. ʺThis illumination is gradual; It is developed stage by stage.ʺ 18. ʺKnowledge of previous incarnations becomes available when the power to be thought images is acquired.ʺ 19. ʺThrough concentrated meditation, the thought images in the minds of other people become apparent. 23. ʺUnion with others is to be gained through one pointed meditation upon the three states of feeling (compassion, tenderness and dispassion).ʺ 25. ʺPerfectly concentrated meditation upon the awakened light will produce the consciousness of that which is subtle, hidden or remote.ʺ 32. ʺThose who have attained self mastery can be seen and contacted through focusing the light in the head. This power is developed in one pointed meditation.ʺ 301
33. ʺAll things can be known in the vivid light of the intuition.ʺ 34. ʺUnderstanding of the mind consciousness comes from one pointed meditation upon the heart center.ʺ ‐ The spiritual understanding is always to think with oneʹs heart not just with oneʹs mind. 35. ʺExperience of the pairs of opposites comes from the inability of the soul to distinguish between the personal self and the spirit. The objective forms exist for the use of the spiritual man. By meditation upon this, arises the intuitive perception of the spiritual nature.ʺ 36. ʺAs a result of this experience and meditation, the higher hearing, touch, sight, taste, and smell are developed, producing intuitional knowledge.ʺ The following charts are from Alice Baileyʹs book, ʺThe Light of the Soulʺ. It depicts the psychic nature as it develops on the first five dimensions of reality. I think you will find this very interesting. PLANE SENSE Physical 1. Hearing 2. Touch, feeling 3. Sight 4. Taste 5. Smell Astral 1. Clairaudience 2. Psychometry 3. lairvoyance 4. Imagination 5. Emotional idealism Mental 1. Higher clairaudience 2. Planetary psychometry 3. Higher clairvoyance 4. Discrimination 5. Spiritual discernment Response to group vibration Spiritual telepathy 302
Buddhic 1. Comprehension 2. Healing 3. Realization 4. Perfection 5. All knowledge a. The First Sense Hearing. 1. Physical hearing. 2. Clairaudience. 3. Higher clairaudience. 4. Comprehension (of four sounds) 5. Beatitude. b. The Second Sense Touch or feeling. 1. Physical touch. 2. Psychometry. 3. Planetary psychometry. 4. Healing. 5. Active service. c. The Third Sense Sight 1. Physical sight. 2. Clairvoyance. 3. Higher clairvoyance. 4. Divine vision. 5. Realization. d. The Fourth Sense Taste 1. Physical taste. 2. Imagination. 3. Discrimination. 4. Intuition. 5. Perfection. Smell e. The Fifth Sense 1. Physical smell. 2. Emotional idealism. 3. Spiritual discernment. 4. Idealism. 303
5. All knowledge. Many people donʹt realize that there are psychic senses on each plane of development. 37. ʺThese powers are obstacles to the highest realization, but serve as magical powers in the objective worlds.ʺ ‐ Many disciples get caught in the glamour of the psychic world and hence, fail to reach to the highest level which is the soul and the Monad. It is not that these psychic senses are bad, it is just that they must be used only in service of the soul and Monad, and not be used by the negative ego. There are many seekers on the path who are extremely psychically developed, yet are totally run by their ego and lower self. There are many people who are great channels, and the same phenomena takes place. There are many traps on the spiritual path. Djwhal Khul has called these the ʺglamours on the pathʺ. The psychic level is a different level of development than the spiritual level. I have known psychics who didnʹt even believe in God, if you can believe that. 39. ʺBy subjugation of the upward life there is liberation from water, the thorny path, and mire, and the power of ascension is gained.ʺ ‐ Freedom from water is symbolic of being liberated from the emotional nature. Liberation from the thorny path symbolizes the path of physical life. Liberation from the mire symbolizes liberation from desire and the lower self. Here we see the first time that Patanjali speaks of ascension or the sixth initiation. 42. ʺBy one pointed meditation upon the relationship existing between the body and the akasha, ascension out of matter (the three worlds) and power to travel in space is gained.ʺ 45. ʺThrough this mastery, minuteness and the other siddhis (powers) are attained, likewise bodily perfection and freedom from all hindrances.ʺ ‐ A yogi has the ability to make himself in consciousness as small as an atom or as large as the infinite universe. The siddhas or powers can also be a trap for initiates who have not yet achieved ascension. Sometimes the siddhis or powers can become more important to an initiate than God. This will ultimately lead to the loss of these powers, and karmic repercussions. 49. ʺThe man who can discriminate between the soul and spirit achieves supremacy over all conditions and becomes omniscient.ʺ 304
‐ This lesson deals with the understanding that at the third initiation the disciple merges with the soul. However, at the fifth initiation and at the sixth initiation the initiate merges with the spirit. Merging with the soul is just an intermediate step, however. a supremely important one. The soul is the intermediary between the incarnated personality on earth and the spirit or Monad in heaven. The soul is the Higher Self. The next step after merging with the spirit, is to merge with God directly at the co‐creator level on cosmic dimensions of reality. 55. ʺWhen the objective forms and the soul have reached a condition of equal purity, then is at‐one‐ment achieved and liberation results.ʺ When the four bodies are aligned with the soul and spirit, and are all equally purified, liberation from the wheel of rebirth results. All lessons in this mystery school called earth life have been learned. Book IV Illumination 1. ʺThe higher and lower siddhi (powers) are gained by incarnation, or by drugs, words of power, intense desire or by meditation.ʺ ‐ These five methods for obtaining the siddhis or powers relate to the five planes of consciousness. Incarnation is the physical plane method. Drugs blast open the astral consciousness. (I am not recommending this method.) Words of power are the mental plane method. Intense desire is the Buddhic plane method. Meditation is the atmic plane method. 2. The transfer of the consciousness from a lower vehicle into a higher is part of the great creative and evolutionary process.ʺ ‐ The process of moving through the seven levels of initiation speaks just to this process. At each state and initiation the disciple becomes polarized or identified to the next higher dimension or vehicle (body). The first initiation is focused on the physical vehicle. The second initiation focuses on mastery of the emotional vehicle. The third initiation deals with mastery of the mental vehicle. The fourth initiation becomes focused in the Buddhic vehicle and plane of consciousness. The fifth initiation is focused in the atmic vehicle and dimension of consciousness. The sixth initiation moves into the light body, or ascension vehicle. At each initiation there is a transfer from a lower vehicle to a higher one just above it. 305
4. ʺThe ʺI AMʺ consciousness is responsible for the creation of the organs through which the sense of individuality is enjoyed.ʺ ‐ The I Am consciousness, of course, is the Monad or spirit. 5. ʺConsciousness is one, yet produces the varied forms of the many.ʺ 24. ʺThe mind stuff also, reflecting as it does an infinity of mind impressions, becomes the instrument of the self and acts as a unifying agent.ʺ ‐ The mind, when working properly, serves as a unifying agent. When the mind is serving the negative ego it serves as a separating agent. This is one of the keys to understanding Raja Yoga. 29. ʺThe man who develops non‐attachment, even in his aspiration after illumination and isolated unity, becomes aware. Eventually, of the overshadowing cloud of spiritual knowledge.ʺ ‐ This has also been referred to as the ʺrain cloud of knowledgeable things.ʺ This knowledge is held within the light body. The idea is to call forth the light body and merge with it so this knowledge becomes readily available in your every day existence. There are two levels of light bodies. There is the soul light body and the monadic light body. 30. ʺWhen this stage is reached then the hindrances and karma are overcome.ʺ 31. ʺWhen, through the removal of hindrances and the purification of the sheaths, the totality of knowledge becomes available, naught further remains for the man to do.ʺ ‐ The purpose for incarnating has been fulfilled. Summation The profundity of these sutras or lessons are quite obvious. The meditating upon these lessons and the lessons in ʺThe Course in Miraclesʺ by Jesus, I personally feel, would give a person a supreme understanding of union with God through Raja Yoga. For those people who wish to study these lessons in even a more in‐depth fashion, do get Alice Baileyʹs book, ʺThe Light of the Soulʺ. Om Shanti, Shanti, Shanti, Om
306
48 The Church’s Contamination by Ego
ʺHe that hath no sin, let him cast the first stone.ʺ THE MASTER JESUS
It must be understood that the most important relationship in a personʹs life is their relationship to themselves, not their relationship to God. This sounds blasphemous, but it is true. If a person is not right with him or her self they will project their wrong relationship to self onto everything in their life including their relationship to God. If a person doesnʹt learn to control their lower self and negative ego then it will interpret life for the person. This goes on in all areas of life including religion. The negative ego and lower self has been allowed to interpret the Bible and the teachings of Jesus. As Djwhal Khul has said in the Alice Bailey books, that Christ hasnʹt failed, it is the ʺhuman elementʺ which has prostituted the truth which he presented. Djwhal goes on to say, in the Alice Bailey book, ʺProblems of Humanityʺ, theology, dogma, doctrine, materialism, politics, and money have created a vast dark cloud between the churches and God. The two major factors which are responsible for the failure of the churches, according to Djwhal Khul, are: 1. Narrow theological interpretations of the scripture. 2. Material and political ambitions of clergy. The teachings of traditional and fundamentalist Christianity are incredibly confused. These are well meaning good people who have accepted a false doctrine made up by ignorant men. Some of the misconceptions are as follows. The first great misconception is that Jesus is the only son of God, and the rest of us lowly sinful worms. As we all know, every person on earth or any where else, is a son of God just as Jesus is. This is clearly what Jesus taught. There is no such thing as an original sin. Each of us is the eternal self, the Christ. In truth, we are on the earth to realize it.
307
Jesus, whom the Christian church makes out to be more special than everybody else, in truth was only a third degree initiate when he incarnated into earth and died on the cross as a fourth degree initiate. He did not ascend as the Christian church says. The traditional Christian church has completely missed the fact that the Lord Maitreya, the planetary Christ, and head of the Great White Brotherhood, was overshadowing Jesus the last three years of his life. It was really Maitreya doing all the miracles. It was Lord Maitreya who ascended, not Jesus. Lord Maitreya was the realized Christ, not Jesus. Jesus was his instrument. The traditional Christian church believes that Jesus was crucified to redeem man from sin. Man has no sin, only mistakes, and lessons, and his own personal karma that must be balanced. This is another total misconception. The ʺCourse in Miraclesʺ teaches that Jesus was crucified to teach an extreme lesson of love and forgiveness. Jesusʹ crucifixion does not take away our sins because first we have no ʺeternal stains on our characterʺ, secondly every person is responsible for his or her own personal karma and Jesusʹ crucifixion did not lift that responsibility. Traditional Christianity believes that if you accept Jesus as your personal savior, you are saved and will go to heaven and be with Jesus. Every one else will go to hell, which is a place of eternal damnation or actually ʺphysically dieʺ and be obliterated. This is an incredibly confused doctrine. First off, there are many dimensions in Godʹs creation and accepting Jesus is not necessarily going to get you anywhere. Where you go when you die is the level of initiation you have obtained through your life on earth. Accepting Jesus or going to church on Sunday doesnʹt mean anything. It is what is in you heart and in your every thought, word and deed throughout your life that will determine your spiritual progress. Salvation is not up to God or Jesus. Your salvation is up to you. God has given us everything. He always has and always will. It is we, on earth, who have separated ourselves from God through our own thinking. Each of us is the Christ, in truth. We are here on earth to demonstrate this truth. 308
We do not need a priest to serve as an intermediary to tell us how to interpret Godʹs word or the Bible. The traditional Christian church tells us that the Bible is written by God. That is completely false. The Bible was written by man. The Bible is mostly manʹs interpretation of God, not Godʹs direct revelation. It must also be understood that the Bible was written 2000 years ago and is outdated to a certain extent. The Bible is a fantastic book, however the real problem comes in who is ʺinterpretingʺ it. The interpretation of the Christian church as to what the Bible says are incredibly confused, and distorted. They will come to your door and tell you it is right in the Bible. It is not right in the Bible, it is in their interpretation of the Bible. It also must be understood that the people who ran the church would actually extract and cut out the things from the Bible that they didnʹt like. An example of this is reincarnation. The bible used to be filled with references to reincarnation. In 505 AD. the Ecumenical Council made a decree to extract all references to reincarnation from the Bible. This is an ʺindisputable factʺ, for it is in the minutes of the meeting, which can be looked up in the appropriate historical reference book. The traditional Christian church believes that anyone who disagrees with them is of the devil. First of all, there is no devil, there is only glamour, maya, and illusion. Secondly, this belief is just a product of their incredible self righteousness. They actually believe that the Bible and teachings of Jesus is the only path to God. All other religions and spiritual Masters, such as Buddha, Krishna, Sai Baba, Hinduism, Judaism, the Islamic faith are all of the devil. They say they follow the teachings of Jesus who clearly preached unconditional love. Yet this group is one of the most conditionally love, judgmental, intolerant, attacking, self righteous, group of people on planet earth. Their religion is based on fear and guilt. Anything that goes wrong, they believe, is God punishing you. This, of course, is complete illusion, because God doesnʹt create our reality, we do. This is just a convenient tool and weapon of the church higher‐ups to control the people. They actually make God out to be judg‐mental, attacking,
309
and angry, much like the Old Testament God of ancient Judaism. If you donʹt do what the church says you are destined for hell fire and eternal damnation. They make the spiritual path out to be a path of suffering, and teach people to be martyrs. The spiritual path, in truth, is a path of boundless joy, and one of balance. The church teaches a type of conditional immortality. This means, do what the church says or you will die. This is absurd because all people are immortal. Death is a complete impossibility, regardless of oneʹs level of evolution. Hell is not a place of eternal damnation. It is a place and state of consciousness that can be evolved out of. Another abhorrent teaching of the traditional Christian church is how they teach their followers to proselytize. They are taught to lay their trip on other people and not respect the beliefs or space of other people. They believe in a last judgment where Christ or God judges everyone and decides if you will be obliterated, go to hell, or go to heaven. This is totally absurd. God and Christ are incapable of judgment by definition. The only judgment, or really spiritual discernment, is done by ourselves. If we havenʹt learned our lessons then we will have to reincarnate again and come back to school. The church has no recognition of this fact or the fact that Jesus has had many incarnations which are listed in my first book in the chapter, ʺUntold Story of Jesus the Christʺ. Another thing the Christian church has conveniently failed to mention is the fact that Jesus studied Eastern religion, Buddhism, and was initiated in the great pyramid of Egypt. They also have purposely hid the manuscripts telling of His life as an ʺEsseneʺ. All these manuscripts are in the Vatican secret libraries, but the general public will never see them because it would destroy the foundation of the entire church if it ever got out. The fundamentalist Christian church is incredibly judgmental and intolerant. Their views on homosexuality and abortion are two indications of this. On abortion they confuse the physical body with incarnated personality who is just inhabiting the body. On homosexuality, Jesus taught unconditional love and non‐judgmentalness, and the fundamentalist Christian church practice neither. 310
The traditional Christian churches have formulated a body of doctrine which Jesus and the Lord Maitreya know nothing about. They have created an actual tomb, for true Christian teachings. The Christian church, over the last 200 years, has been militant, fanatical, and grossly materialistic. Look at the crusades, as one striking example. Look at the fanaticism of the pro life group. The churches have been more interested in making beautiful, ornate, glamorous churches than in helping the poor. The money they gather supports a powerful Ecclesiastical hierarchy. In the Catholic church, the views of the Pope are seen as infallible, which is clearly absurd when you look at some of the bizarre teachings of the Catholic church. Catholics arenʹt supposed to use condoms of practice birth control which is one example. The Catholic church has a planned policy to keep the masses of people ignorant. They are totally against any new and evolutionary presentation of truth. The fundamentalist Christian churches are completely stuck in the past. There is no continuing revelation of God. The Christian church is doing the exact same thing the Jewish religion did with the coming of Christ 2000 years ago. The Jewish religion remained stuck in the law, and didnʹt allow themselves to evolve to the next dispensation of truth. The traditional Christian church is now doing the exact same thing. Lord Maitreya, the Planetary Christ, is on the planet and when He declares Himself they will reject him. They believe Jesus is coming, and that is not true. Who they are waiting for, in truth, is the Christ. He is here and they will look at Him as the devil, because this doesnʹt correspond with their ignorant doctrine. Then all we have to do is look at the television ministers, who , for the most part with a few exceptions, are interested in collecting money more than anything else. It is also no accident that half of the famous ones have been caught having affairs. The church has no relationship to the Ascended Masters or the true Spiritual Hierarchy that governs this planet. They are filled with bigotry, selfishness, greed and narrow mindedness. Something you might ask yourself is whether Jesus and the Lord Maitreya would feel comfortable in their own church. 311
One of the worst teachings is that of prophecy. They are holding on to prophecies that were given in the Bible anywhere form 2000 to four thousand years ago which are totally outdated. They teach and are projecting an Armageddon and end to the world which is clearly not going to happen. I am not saying that this was not a possibility when these prophecies were given in ancient times. However. mankind has evolved and overcome the need for these things to happen. That is the whole purpose of prophecy. The purpose of it is to warn us to change, because God gave us free choice. The ignorant Christian church thinks that if it is in the Bible it has to happen. What they are doing is projecting their mind power to make Armageddon and the end of the world happen. They will actually be disappointed if it doesnʹt happen. In ending this chapter I want to say that most of the people in the church are incredibly good, well meaning people. They are being poisoned by a false doctrine and teaching. The coming declaration of the reappearance of the Christ and the externalization of the Hierarchy will bring about the coming ʺnew world religionʺ which will give the more traditional people of the world a new alternative. It will be a universalistic religion that accepts all religions as equally valid. It will cleanse all religions of the cancer of glamour, maya, illusion and ego. The new age movement has been the initial thrust that is leading the world in this universalist, loving and non‐judgmental direction.
312
49 An Esoteric Understanding of Judaism ʺBe still, and know I am Godʺ
DAVID ‐ FROM THE PSALMS
The religion of Judaism cannot be separated from the history of its people. The founder was the first great Jewish prophet, Abraham (the Ascended Master, El Morya). Abrahamʹs teacher was the great spiritual master, Melchizadek (the Master Jesus in a previous incarnation). We see in this regard, that Judaism, Christianity, the Order of Melchizadek are all inseparable. Adding to this was the fact that Edgar Cayce, in his channelings of the Universal Mind, said that the Essenes, which was a Jewish sect, had itʹs true inception at the time of Melchizadek. The Virgin Mary, her husband, Joseph, John the Baptist (Elijah in a past life) were all Essenes. The same souls who started Judaism started Christianity. It was through Abraham, in his training from Melchizadek, that the first true understanding of monotheism began. Previous to this time, except for maybe Hinduism, all other forms of religion were polytheistic. This was a major break through in historical transformation of this planet. Jesusʹ connection to Judaism continued after Melchizadek, when he came back in future incarnations as told in the story of Joseph of the coat of many colors, and dream interpreter for the Pharoah. He later incarnated as Joshua, who led the Jewish people to the promised land after Moses died. Any competition between the two religions is ludicrous for it is the same souls involved with both religions. The two greatest prophets of the Jewish religion, in all its history, were Abraham and Moses. What stands out as a key principle in understanding Judaism is the issue of the Jewish peopleʹs ʺcovenantʺ with God.
313
This covenant was first established by Abraham and later re‐established with Moses. At the time of Abraham the name of God was pronounced ʺEl‐ Shaddaiʺ. Later in Jewish history with the coming of Moses, God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai and told him His name was ʺI Am That I Amʺ or just ʺI Amʺ. In Hebrew this is pronounced ʺEayeh Asher Eayehʺ, or ʺYHWHʺ. Translators in the Bible later changed this to Jehovah, which is not really an accurate translation. In Hebrew this would be Yod Hay Wah Hay, or Yod Hay Vav Hay. The other name for God that was used over 2500 times in the Old Testament was ʺElohimʺ. This is very interesting given the fact that the Elohim are the Creator Gods, who helped God create the infinite universe. God was seen as having such a sacred name that Jewish teachings held that it could not be spoken. Given this fact, they often used the name ʺAdonaiʺ to refer to God. The Kaballah, which is the aspect of Judaism which deals with Jewish ʺmysticismʺ, and the book, ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ both refer to God with all these names, however ʺYHWHʺ is the most common. (See chapters on the Kaballah and on the Keys of Enoch). Abrahamʹs covenant with God can be seen in the book of Genesis when God said, ʺAnd I will make of thee a great nation, and I will bless thee, and make thy name great; and be thou a blessing.ʺ He was not afraid, for he had the promise of his Godʹ ʺAnd I will bless them that bless thee, and him that curseth thee will I curse; and in thee shall all the families of the earth be blessed.: When Abraham was ninety years old and nine, this covenant was reaffirmed when God said; ʺI am God Almighty; Walk before me, and be thou wholehearted . . . And I will make my covenant between me and thee, and will multiply thee exceedingly ... as for me, behold, my covenant is with thee, and thou shalt be the father of a multitude of nations ... and I will make nations of thee, and kings shall come out of thee. And I will establish my covenant between me and thee and thy seed after thee throughout their generations for an everlasting covenant, to be a god unto thee and to thy seed after thee. And I will give unto thee and to thy seed after thee, the land of thy sojournings, all the land of Canaan, for an everlasting possession; and I will
314
be their God ... and as for thee, thou shalt keep my covenant, thou, and thy seed after thee throughout their generations.ʺ This is quite a powerful passage in the old testament and God has truly kept His word to this day. It is from this covenant that Judaism, Christianity, the Order of Melchizadek, the Essenes, and the Islamic religion were all born. The Islamic religion is part of this story according to Mohammed, their prophet. He totally believed that Islam had its antecedents in the succession of prophets of Abraham, Moses, and Jesus. These prophets are all believed in by Moslems, however, they also believe that Mohammed was the greatest, or revealed the greatest revelation of God. Another part of the connection is that Islam had its roots from Abrahamʹs son, Ishmael, according to Islamic teaching. Judaism had its roots from Abrahamʹs sonʹs Isaac and Jacob. This covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob was reinforced five hundred years later with the coming of Moses, who is considered the greatest of the Jewish prophets. Everyone knows his story of Moses so there is no need to go into it except for one part. The most significant moment in Moses life was his climbing of Mount Sinai when he spoke to God as symbolized by the burning bush. This story was always of great interest and meaning to me, personally, and I was always curious as to whom Moses was speaking. Was he speaking to his Higher Self, his Monad, an Angel, an Ascended Master? I asked Djwhal Khul about this and He told me that He was actually speaking to ʺGodʺ. This powerful revelation and reaffirmation of the covenant with the Jewish was seen in the Old Testament, in the book of Exodus; ʺAnd the angel of the Lord appeared unto Moses in a flame of fire out of the midst of a bush; and he looked, and behold the bush burned with fire, and the bush was not consumed ... God called unto him out of the midst of the bush and said, ʺMoses, Moses.ʺ and he said; ʺHere Am I.ʺ and he said, ʺDraw not nigh hither; Put off thy shoes from off thy feet, for the place whereon thou standest is holy ground... I am the God of thy father, the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob...ʺ Later Moses asked what was Godʹs name. the answer came, ʺI Am That I Am. Thus shalt thou say unto the children of Israel. ʺI Amʺ hath sent me unto you. 315
(See chapter on the Mighty I Am Presence.) The highlight of this revelation came later when YHWH gave Moses the Ten Commandments, ʺI Am the Lord thy God, who brought thee out of the land of Egypt, out of the house of bondage. ʺThou shalt have no other Gods before me. Thou shalt not make unto thee a graven image, nor any manner of likeness, of anything that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth; Thou shalt not bow down unto them, nor serve them; Thou shalt not bow down unto them, nor serve them; For I, the Lord thy God, am a jealous God, visiting the iniquities of the fathers upon the children unto the third and fourth generation of them that hate me; and showing mercy unto the thousandth generation of them that love Me and keep my commandments. ʺThou shalt not take the name of the Lord thy God in vain; For the Lord will not hold him guiltless that taketh His name in vain. ʺRemember the Sabbath day, to keep it holy. Six days shalt thou labor, and do all thy work, but the seventh day is a Sabbath unto the Lord thy God. In it thou shalt not do any manner of work, thou nor thy son, nor thy daughter, nor thy man‐servant, nor thy mad‐servant, nor thy cattle, nor thy stranger that is within thy gates; For in six days the Lord made heaven and earth, the sea, and all that in them is, and rested on the seventh day; Where for the Lord blessed the Sabbath day, and hallowed it. ʺHonor thy Father and thy Mother, that thy day may be long upon the land which the Lord thy God giveth thee. ʺThou shalt not murder. ʺThou shalt not commit adultery. ʺThou shalt not steal. ʺThou shalt not bear false witness against thy neighbor. ʺThou shalt not covet thy neighbors house; Thou shalt not covet thy neighbors wife, nor his man servant, nor his maid servant, nor his ox, nor his ass, nor anything that is thy neighbors.ʺ It must be understood that at the time that the Jewish people lived, in terms of the period of history I am writing about, civilization and consciousness was not very advanced. It was the purpose of Melchizadek, Abraham, and
316
Moses, to establish this covenant between the Jewish people and God, and to lay down the laws by which they would live. Part of the Jewish teaching was the looking forward to the coming of the ʺMessiahʺ. Melchizadek, Abraham, and Moses were the great spiritual teachers and masters of the astrological age of Aires, in planetary astrology. Melchizadek and Abraham began this dispensation in approximately 2000 BC. Planetary astrology dictates the coming of an Avatar or Great Spiritual teacher every 2000 years. Jesus Christ was born into a Jewish family, who were members of the Jewish community known as the Essenes. (See chapter on Essenes). Many people forget that Jesus was a Jewish rabbi. Jesus was the Messiah that the Jewish people were looking for. The problem was that the Sanhedrin and Jewish authorities were holding on top too tightly to the ʺLawʺ as set down by Moses and the Jewish prophets, to see that Jesus was bringing the next dispensation of the Jewish religion. Jesus was bringing the understanding, that love was even greater than the law. Some Jewish people recognized Him as the Messiah, however, most of those in control didnʹt. This is no judgment, just a simple statement of fact. This created the schism between Judaism and Christianity which, in truth, was and still is the same religion at itʹs core. The Jews didnʹt, to a large degree, recognize Jesus as the son of God, the Christ. The problem came later in that Christians distorted Jesus Christʹs teachings, saying He was ʺthe only son of Godʺ. The truth being, of course, that we are all the ʺChristʺ. The Jewish people didnʹt allow their religion to continue to evolve. In truth this can be said about almost all the major religions. Most of the major religions were created 2,000 to 3,000 years before. Many of the understandings are outdated and were brought forth only for that time period. People must understand that religion and consciousness is an evolving thing. Djwhal Khul said about the Alice Bailey books, that some of the material would be outdated in twenty or thirty years. Each initiation we go through, we have to die to a certain level of understanding and be reborn to a new one. This is true of races of people as a whole. 317
Each root race bring through a new level of understanding and attunement. Too many religions are trying to hold on too tightly to the past instead of building upon it. Jesus was not trying to create a new religion, He was trying to build upon the wonderful foundation Abraham and Moses, and other prophets had laid down. The low level of consciousness of the period of history we are speaking of caused the Jewish people and the Christians in the last 2000 years to misinterpret what the great prophets were really saying. Because of their wrong relationship to self, and lack of control of their own negative ego, they projected onto God human qualities. This has occurred in Judaism, Christianity, the Islamic faith, Buddhism, and really, in all religions. In Judaism this is seen as the angry and jealous Old Testament God. In Christianity, as the Fundamentalist Christian understanding of God. Buddhism went so far as to not even believe in God. In Islamic teachings, the vengeful God was portrayed. This is not judgment upon these religions, but rather, the natural process of manʹs wrong relationship to himself and the corresponding projection that, hence, has to take place. The issue of the Messiah has, again comes to the forefront in our world today. 2000 more years have gone by and we are at the end of another age, the Piscean Age and the beginning of the Aquarian Age in planetary astrology. Again it is time for the Spiritual Avatar to return. The Jews are again prophesying the coming of the Messiah. The Christians are prophesying the coming of Jesus. The Moslems are prophesying the coming of the Imanmadhi. The Buddhists are prophesying the coming of Buddha Maitreya. We are in the exact same position we were 2000 years ago. The Messiah is here and His name is Lord Maitreya, the head of the Great White Brotherhood. Will the Jews recognize Him? With no judgment intended, I doubt it. Will the fundamentalist Christians recognize him? He is not Jesus, so I doubt it. Will the Buddhists and Moslems recognize him? It is unlikely the Moslems will, and the Buddhists remain to be seen. This is part of the reason Lord Maitreya has not declared Himself. Those people who are involved with ʺtraditional religionʺ are still too stuck in their separative traditions to see that the Spiritual Avatar and World Teacher they
318
seek is right before them, but they donʹt have the eyes to see or the ears to hear. This is part of the reason why the new age movement is so important. One other very important issue I want to tackle here is the issue of the ʺchosen peopleʺ, and the reason that the Jews have suffered and been persecuted so greatly throughout history. These two points are two different subjects, in reality. However, they may have some partial correlation. First it must be understood that the Jewish people are not chosen people. As ʺThe Course in Miraclesʺ says, ʺall are chosen, but few choose to listenʺ. The Jewish people chose God, and to follow His commandments. This statement has been misinterpreted at times by both Jews and Christians to be some kind of ʺegotistical, superiorʺ statement. If the Jewish people used it in this way, then, as the Bible says, ʺAfter pride cometh the fall.ʺ There are some Jewish people who have used this statement in this way and this can cause nothing but a karmic backlash from others. In otherʹs situations non‐Jews may have interpreted this statement to mean pride, which caused them to fight back out of their own false pride. Other reasons for the Jewish peopleʹs suffering and persecution was the strict set of laws they were required to live by which made them different from other people. It is the nature of the negative ego to not like people who are different. Another reason may be the issue of what I spoke of earlier as their holding on to the law and tradition so tightly and not being willing to evolve their religion and understanding. This could create a kind of separateness. Another reason is a clannishness that gets reinforced one thousand times over each time they would be persecuted. I was raised Jewish and I sense a certain need of the Jewish people to keep themselves separate on some level. This can only create a backlash. This may be changing somewhat in modern times with most of the Jewish population living in America. By no means do I mean to be critical of the Jewish people or religion in making some of these points. These same points can be easily applied to certain aspects of Christianity (fundamentalist movement). I could make these points with Hinduism with their caste system. I could make the same points with the Islamic teachings and their fundamentalist movements. 319
There is no judgment or blame in any of this. We are attempting here, to use the sword of spiritual discernment and discrimination to separate out where ʺglamour, maya, illusion, and egoʺ may have infiltrated and misinterpreted the true teachings of all the great originators of these religions. In the future it will be essential for all the world religions to come into a more universalistic understanding of religion, and let go of the ʺegoʺ that says theirs is the only true way to go. The ego has infiltrated all the worldʹs religions and this is a fact. This is why so many people have left religion and have sought what I would call ʺspiritualityʺ instead. This book and chapter is an attempt to bridge this gap by understanding the antecedent causes of this schism, so religion can take its true and proper place in the world. Religion is a wonderful thing as long as the negative ego isnʹt its guide and organizer. The Great White Brotherhood and Spiritual Hierarchy, in its infinite compassion understands most clearly these problems and that is why it is sending the Jewish people within the next ten years (the end of this century) its own personal Messiah besides the Lord Maitreya. This will basically be true of all the worldʹs religions. Specific Masters working under the Lord Maitreya, will be sent to reform these religions in the directions I have mentioned. Jesus will be reforming Christianity from the inner plane. Two Buddhist Masters will be reforming Buddhism. A new world religion is coming that will incorporate all religions as valid paths back to the creator. The Old Testament and Noahʹs Ark The story of Noahʹs ark in the Old Testament, is making reference to the destruction of Atlantis. The prophets of Atlantis knew the earth changes and destruction was coming so they guided those that served the Law of One to leave. Noahʹs ark is a literal and symbolic depiction of this story. A friend recently told me about an hour long documentary on PBS that actually told of and showed the finding of the Noahʹs ark. If I am not mistaken they found it on top of Mount Ariat in Turkey. It is frozen in the snow on the top of the 320
mountain, and can clearly be seen in the summer when the snow melts. The ark has split in half, but the compartments inside and the overall shape of it can clearly be seen. Moses and the Story of the Parting of the Red Sea I have always been curious as to the truth of this story in the Bible about Moses parting the Red Sea to escape the Pharaohʹs army. I proceeded to ask Djwhal Khul about this and what He told me was that it was a true story. It didnʹt exactly happen as the movie portrayed, however, the Red Sea did part for Moses to allow the Jewish people to escape. I asked Djwhal how Moses did this and He said that it was ʺan act of Godʺ. Moses prayed for help and God responded with what we would call a miracle. While I was on the subject, I also asked Djwhal Khul about the ten plagues that Moses called forth to convince the Pharoah to let the Jewish people go. He told me that these did happen in reality and that it was the power of God that Moses called forth that caused them. This is not just a Biblical story, it did actually happen!!! The Story of Adam and Eve in the Old Testament According to the Universal Mind, as channeled through Edgar Cayce, Adam and Eve were true Biblical figures. As I told, in the chapter on the Story of Creation, Adam was an incarnation of Jesus. His fall was both an actual personal story, and a symbolic one for all mankind. The Teachings of Judaism Judaism is a strongly earthly focused religion. It is more focused on this life than an after life. Much like Confucianism, its main focus is that of ethics and the doing of Godʹs will. The heart of the Jewish religion is set down in the Torah.
321
The Torah stands for the five books of Moses. Judaism, however, does rely on other scripture, which is sometimes loosely described as the Torah (Law and Teaching). The Torah sets down hundreds and hundreds of laws by which the Jewish people are to live. Some of them are quite practical and deal with all areas of Jewish life on spiritual, mental, emotional, and practical earthly levels. A central concept of Judaism is the ideal of ʺMitvahʺ or doing good deeds. Ancient Rabbis listed 613 mitsvahs, ranging from visiting the sick, to studying the Torah. Judaism sees man as having free will, and being constantly faced with the choice between good and evil. The Jewish path is one of loving God, and trying to be like Him, which means loving oneʹs fellow man. Traditional Judaism does not believe in reincarnation, however, there is some vague belief in an after life. It is interesting, however, that in the Kabbalistic aspect of Judaism, which is Jewish mysticism. reincarnation is believed in. The problem is that the Kabbalistic teachings, which are kind of like the secret Jewish teachings, are not presented to the general public. The Kabbalistic teachings are like what the Jewish sect who were called the Essenes, were involved with. Kabbalistic teachings are so exciting and filled with the true spirit of God that I have included a chapter in my book on the Kabbalah and ʺthe Keys of Enochʺ to share this tremendous teaching with you. I was so very happy to find the Jewish religion is tremendously rich in this regard if one delves a little deeper into the secret teachings. Even though I am raised Jewish, I see myself as a universalist who believes in all religions and all spiritual paths. How can one choose between Abraham, Melchizadek, Moses, Jesus, Krishna, Buddha, Rama, Sai Baba, Lord Maitreya, Mohammed, Confucius, Lao Tse, Zoroaster. They are all so incredibly beautiful it is impossible to choose just one. I have reconciled this by choosing Them all. I like what Sai Baba says in this regard. ʺWhatever religion you are involved in, keep it, for I am in all of them.ʺ Whatever form you call on, He will respond. I enjoy shifting from one to another at different phases of my life, for they each bring forth a different flavor and feeling that is unique to each form. In Jewish law, a Jew does not cease being a Jew simply because he or she lapses from observance. Raising a family is a sacred duty to most Jewish 322
families. It is through this family loyalty that they express loyalty to Judaism. Jewish families are very much into celebrating the rich Jewish heritage and tradition that comes forth in the celebration of the different Jewish holidays. There are three branches of Judaism, Orthodox, Conservative, and reform. The three branches agree on most matters of Theology, but not on how Judaism is practiced. There are also many Jewish people who look at Judaism as more of a culture heritage rather than a religion. This is not discussed a lot, but in my observation is quite widespread. The acknowledged foundation of Judaism are the ʺPrinciples of Faithʺ, ʺthe Ten Commandmentsʺ, the ʺGolden Ruleʺ, and the ʺLaws of Holinessʺ. Few religions can boast of such a close knit family as the tradition of Judaism. In Judaism, the physical world is seen as good and it is meant to be enjoyed. Sabbath services are held in the Synagogue on Friday evenings and Saturday mornings. There are no pictures or images of God in the temple or synagogues because of the commandment not to have graven images. The chief officer in the synagogue is the Rabbi (teacher). The Jewish state is called Israel (means Jacob, son of Abraham). The children of Israel were first of all, his twelve sons which made up the twelve tribes. The prophets are the exponents of the highest elements in the Hebrew religion. Some of the major prophets were Issiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, Samuel (Saint Germain), Joshua (Jesus), Elijah (John the Baptist), Amos, Hosea, and Micah. The ʺTalmudʺ is the later Jewish interpretation of the Bible. The Talmud also developed a belief in life after death. Ancient Judaism was very weak on this point. The Biblical command, ʺLove thy neighbor as thyselfʺ also runs through this teachings. Moses Maimonides, a Jewish philosopher in the twelfth century AD set out thirteen principles which have been accepted as a summary of the Jewish creed and are incorporated in the authorized daily prayer book. These thirteen articles of faith are: Faith in God, the Creator His Unity His Incorporeality His Eternity To Him, alone, Worship is due 323
Belief in the words of the Prophets Moses, as the Greatest Jewish Prophet The Revelation of the Laws of Moses, The Law as Unchanging Belief in Godʹs All‐Knowledge His rewards and Punishments The Coming of the Messiah The Resurrection of the Dead The most famous book of the Kabbalah was the Zohar, Book of Splendor, attributed to Moses of Granada, who died in 1305. It is also from the Kabbalistic teachings came the understanding of the tree of life which I will share with you in that chapter later on in this book. There are approximately 12 million Jews in the modern world today, with over half of them in the United States. This is despite over 6 million being massacred by the Nazis in World War II. From that carnage one creative event in history did occur which was the establishment of the Jewish State of Isreal in 1948. This was the fulfillment of Godʹs covenant with Abraham over 4000 years ago. Judaism Judaism is a wonderful religion with a very rich tradition. I have much appreciation for all I have gained from this experience of being incarnated into a Jewish family. The glamours and illusions of Judaism are quite interesting. First off, Djwhal Khul has said that the Jewish race actually came from the previous solar system. There are apparently seven different progressing solar systems when one studies in‐depth occult knowledge. The Jewish race was the most advanced of the past solar system. The major glamour has been not allowing themselves to assimilate, and hence have created separation. The Jewish people performed a great service from the time of Abraham and the greatest Jewish prophet, Moses. The Jewish race carried forth Godʹs law. The only problem was that when the new dispensation of the Piscean Age arrived, they stayed stuck in the Law and didnʹt allow the next progressive revelation to be acknowledged. 324
50 The Essene Brotherhood
ʺDo not try and take the speck out of the eye of your brother when you have a log in your own eye.ʺ JESUS CHRIST
As I have mentioned in the last chapter, the Essene brotherhood really had its inception at the time of the Great Spiritual Master, Melchizadek, who lived on this planet in 1973 BC.. This, again, was an incarnation of Jesus Christ. So very few people realize that Jesus really began the Essene movement, as well as facilitating the origin of the Jewish religion through Abraham and beginning the Christian religion Himself with the help of the Lord Maitreya. The development of the Essene brotherhood over the next almost 2000 years can be seen in the development of the Jewish religion. First it must be understood that the Essenes were a Jewish sect. They represented however, more of what might be called ʺJewish mysticismʺ. The Jewish mystics studied the Kabbalah, which taught belief in reincarnation, astrology, the tree of life, channeling, prophecy, soul travel, psychic development, angels and all the things that the people reading this book are so interested in. The development of the Essenes, from the time of Melchizadek and the Order of Melchizadek, began with Abraham (El Morya) and continued onward through Jacob and the story of Jacobʹs ladder, and how Jacob wrestled with the Angel. It continued on through the biblical story of Joseph (incarnation of Jesus) and His coat of many colors. He was thrown into the ditch by his jealous brothers, and eventually became the dream interpreter of the Pharaoh. Then the development continues on to the great spiritual Master Moses, who led the Jewish people out of bondage in Israel. It was Moses who spoke to God in the burning bush on Mount Sinai. Gold told him that his name was ʺI Am That I Amʺ. Moses was given the Ten Commandments which are very similar to the original teachings that Melchizadek (Jesus) gave to Abraham.
325
(You can read about this in my chapter on Melchizadek and the Order of Melchizadek in this book.) One other super interesting piece of information that Djwhal Khul told me about Moses is that when he spoke to the burning bush on top of Mount Sinai, he was actually having a ʹrevelation from God.ʺ When I say God, I donʹt mean his soul, and I donʹt mean his monad or spirit. I mean was having a direct revelation of the Godhead. Djwhal Khul also told me that Moses ascended at the end of his incarnation as Moses. Moses was the great spiritual Master who brought forward Godʹs laws. Moses and the Jewish people wandered in the desert for forty years, and upon Moses death (ascension), Joshua (incarnation of Jesus) took over and led the Jewish people into the promised land. This whole period of history, of which I have been speaking, continued on to the incarnation of the Messiah (Jesus) when the great Jewish prophets lived and carried forth this mystical lineage. Some of these prophets were Samuel, Isiah, Jeremiah, Ezekial, Hosea, Joel, Amos, Obadian, Johan, Micah, Nahum, Habakkuk, Zephaniah, Haggai Zechariah, Malachi. Carrying forth this lineage were the writings of Elisha, Daniel, Ezra, and Nehemiah. Then we had the great Jewish kings, King David, and King Solomon. We also had Enoch (another incarnation of Jesus), who wrote ʺThe Book of Enochʺ, as well as the modern book I have mentioned called, ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ. Then there was Elijah (John the Baptist) who began the school of the prophets on Mount Carmel. This Jewish lineage, in truth, was also the Christian lineage. Essene lineage, and lineage of the Order of Melchizadek set the stage for next dispensation of spiritual teachings for mankind. Moses brought forth the law. Buddha, five hundred years previous, brought forth the wisdom of God to mankind. Jesus and the Lord Maitreya would carry forth the law of Moses, the wisdom of the Buddha, but also bring forth the love principle of God. It must be understood that Jesus was a Jewish rabbi, and purposely incarnated into a Jewish family that was involved in the Jewish sect called the Essenes. The problem was that the Jewish rabbis who controlled the Jewish religion as a whole, didnʹt recognize Jesus as the Messiah He truly was. Jesus was not trying to discount the Jewish religion, but was rather building upon 326
it. The Jewish rabbis who ran things were trying to hold on to the past Jewish dispensation that focused upon the law. This same conflict still holds true 2000 years after Jesusʹ life. In our culture today we have the people involved in ʺtraditional religionʺ, and then the people involved in the ʹnew age movement of spiritualityʺ. We have traditional Christianity and then esoteric or mystical Christianity. In Judaism, we have the traditional Judaism, and then we have the Kabbalah which is Jewish mysticism. (See chapter on Kabbalah and the Tree of Life.) I was raised Jewish, however, with no criticism intended, I personally found traditional Judaism very boring. I never related to it and considered myself more of a universalist. In more recent years I have found a new found interest and appreciation for Judaism in my intensive study of the Kabbalah, and ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ (See chapter on Kabbalah and the Tree of Life). The Essenes have actually given me a new found appreciation of Jewish mysticism also, as I am sure you will appreciate also upon reading this chapter. Jesus was the Messiah that the Jewish people were waiting for, however it was only the Jewish sect known as the Essenes who recognized it. Moses had established monotheism which really began from Melchizadek who taught Abraham this principle and truth 2000 years previous. Recorded History of the Essenes The actual recorded written history of the Essenes originated around 200 BC., and ended around 100 AD.. The Edgar Cayce readings of the Universal Mind tell us that Mary, Joseph, John the Baptist, the innkeeper at Bethlehem, and Jesus, himself, were all Essenes. The discovery of the Dead Sea Scrolls in 1947 have given absolute proof of the Essenes existence. Edgar Cayce also suggests that Zebedee, John, James, and Andrew all had close ties with the Essenes. Edgar Cayce was correct about the location of the Essene community eleven years before the Dead Sea Scrolls were discovered. The Dead Sea Scrolls were found in Qumran, at the north west coast of the Dead Sea. Excavations began in the Qumran ruins in 1949 and continued for 327
five years. What was uncovered was an Essene establishment. A monastery, a house of studies, a school, and it was right where Edgar Cayce said it would be. According to Edgar Cayce only a fraction of the Essenes lived in the monastery. Thousands of them lived throughout the Middle East, living normal lives. They were bound with the conviction that the Messiah would be born within their ranks. Philo, the Jewish Philosopher Philo, the Jewish philosopher, wrote about the Essenes in 20 AD. He said that the Essenes were a Jewish sect that numbered around 4000. He called them Essaie because of their ʺsaintlinessʺ. He said they were worshippers of God, who did not do animal sacrifice. They regarded a reverent mind as the only true sacrifice. No slaves were found among them because they saw all men free and as brothers. Moral, philosophy and ethic was their chief preoccupation. The seventh day they especially studied for this was their Sabbath. They were taught piety, holiness, justice, and the art of regulating home and city. The essence of what they taught was love of God, virtue, and love of mankind. They were indifferent to money, worldly possessions, and pleasure. Their love of man, kindliness, equality, and fellowship passing beyond all description. All money was placed within a common fund, out of which the sick were supported when they could not work. Josephus, 75 A.D. to 85 A.D. Josephus wrote that the Essenes were Jews by birth but seemed to have a greater affection for one another than the Pharisees, and Sadducees. They rejected pleasure as evil, but greatly valued self control and discipline over the passions. They clothed themselves in white garments. Their piety towards God was quit extraordinary. Before the sun would rise they would not speak of profane matters. They began their days with prayer and ritual bathing and baptism. The priest would always say grace before eating, and the praise to God after the meal. 328
They are adamant for fidelity and are the ministers of peace. What ever they say in normal conversation is firmer than an oath. They never swear. They spend a great deal of time in studying the writings of the ancients. Each candidate, to become an Essene, passed through a period of preparation and purification which extended over three years. The first year he or she was required to turn over all property to the common treasury. The candidate was then given the ordinances and rules, a spade, an apron and a white robe. After the first year of probation the candidate was allowed to enter the second stage. In this second stage the candidate enjoyed a closer relation and fellowship with the other candidates and was involved in more of the ceremonies and closed rites. At this second stage the candidate could not hold office or sit at the common table. The candidate entering the third rank was required to take a solemn oath to never reveal the secrets of the Essene order and to practice piety towards God and charity to his fellowman. Also required is a vow that he will do no harm to his fellow man, either of his own accord, or by command of others. He can, at no time, abuse his authority or put himself above others. Any Essene caught in committing a crime would be cast out of the society. Josephus went on to describe the Essenes as being most accurate and just. They do not pass sentence in their communal court of law with fewer than one hundred members present. What they most honor after God, is the law of Moses. They are stricter than any other Jewish sect from resting from their labors on the seventh day. They live incredibly long lives, many of them beyond one hundred. When captured and tortured by the Romans, they could not be made to shed a tear or flatter their tormentors. Their doctrine is that their physical bodies are corruptible, but their souls are immortal and continue forever. Many of the Essenes are great prophets of the future, and seldom miss in their predictions. Pliny, a Roman who wrote about the Essenes said; ʺToward the West of the Dead Sea the Essenes establish their communities. They are a hermetical society, marvelous beyond all others throughout the whole earth.ʺ The Essenes at Qumran conducted a religious service every morning during the rising of the sun. They were also totally aware of their role in the
329
preparation, birth and training of Jesus. They were also well versed in the study of reincarnation. The Essenes considered women as equals with men. Membership in the Essenes was totally based on free choice. Elijahʹs school of the prophets on Mount Carmel in past times had been a part of the Melchizadek training, as has the work of the prophet, Elisha, who was a disciple of Elijah (John the Baptist incarnation). This work was also carried on by the prophet, Samuel (Saint Germain incarnation). The life of the Essenes was given to alms, good deeds, and missionary activities, according to Edgar Cayce. The daily life in the monastery of the Essenes was austere and strict. However, both Josephus and Philo attest to the fact that the Essenes were a happy, industrious, and optimistic people. They were also very clean. They wore special clothes for their two meals a day. One meal was at eleven in the morning, and the other after sunset. Their members were not to argue, bear grudges or be critical of anyone. If a disagreement developed they were to discuss it in a loving way between themselves. If no compromise could be reached, a third person was to listen and try to settle the matter. If this failed they were to go before the council of twelve Elders and three priests. Their decision was law. Punishments for infractions were very severe. Speaking brusquely was punished by having oneʹs food rations cut for a year. For falling asleep or spitting in a public session it was cut for a month. ʺJudyʺ, who was the head of the Essenes, was incarnated in this century and came to Edgar Cayce for a reading. Among many of her functions was to be a record keeper of the Essene material. In some of Edgar Cayceʹs readings the Universal Mind said that He was actually reading from the Akashic records some of the records that Judy had written at that time. Another interesting thing that Cayce said was that there were opposite groups of Essenes. In other words there were sects within the Essene movement itself. The philosophical dividing point seemed to be whether man could make things happen or if God made things happen. The truth, of course, is that both are true, although we do cause our own reality. The Essenes were also opposed to taking oaths. They were taught that a simple ʺyesʺ or ʺnoʺ given in common conversation was the only oath they 330
needed to make for their word was as good as law to them. The Essenes had the highest level of integrity. The Qumran writings of the Dead Sea Scrolls also established the fact that they revered the ʺBook of Enochʺ, which, again, is differentiated from the modern day ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ. The Book of Enoch was almost like a bible of its time. The dead Sea Scrolls show an absolute confirmation that the Essenes had a great understanding of astrology. One of the Dead Sea Scrolls described the influence of the heavenly bodies on the physical and spiritual characteristics of those born in certain sections of the zodiac. Some people of their time referred to the Essenes as the ʺsilent onesʺ because of the silence they kept during their morning rituals and prayers. The Essenes also believed very greatly in the spiritual importance of baptism. The Essenes had an initiatory type of baptism, and then a daily more personal baptism. In the excavations at Qumran where the Dead Sea Scrolls were found, they found meeting rooms, classrooms, kitchen, a room for copying scrolls, and around the building a series of pools, connected by a series of canals. The Essenes were also known as people of ʺhidden strengthʺ. Josephus stated that through superior mental will, they seemed to be above pain. The treasures in which the Essenes were interested, were those that were stored in Heaven (causal body or soul body). It was only after the third year that a candidate was allowed to be present at the ʺHadothʺ or secret meetings. The principle teacher for the Essenes was the Rabban, or Rabboni which means Master. The Rabbanʹs assistant was known as the Rabbi or teacher. The Rabbi was assisted in his duties by another assistant known as the Rab, or assistant teacher. These three were the spiritual leaders or the Essenes. The Rabban, Rabbi, and Rab, are symbolically associated with the monad, soul, and personality. The Essenes, in order to preserve their sacred records from the Romans and other profane groups, would hide their scrolls in caves, crypts, and pottery jars especially made for this purpose. It is scrolls such as these that were found in 1947 near the Dead Sea. Two of these Dead Sea Scrolls were termed the ʺManual of Disciplineʺ and the War of the sons of light with the sons of darknessʺ. Another one was called the ʺcopper scrollʺ which listed the material possessions of the Essenes. 331
The Essenes were also expert Kabbalists, and believed very much in the law of tithing. Some of the Essenes were celibates, and some were householders. No earthly subjects were discussed until the morning prayer and baptism service was completed. The Dead Sea Scrolls also refer to a ʺteacher of righteousnessʺ that lived approximately 100 years before the time of Jesus. He was a priest and recipient of divine revelation. I have not as yet been able to figure out who He was. The Essenes were also quite adept at dream interpretation as well as receptive to divine revelation. The Practice and the Therapeutici The Essenes were loosely divided in two groups, the ʺpracticiʺ and the ʺtherapeuticiʺ. The practici or practitioners were focused on the more physical survival sorts of jobs such as making pottery, clothing, growing food, and carpentry. The ʺtherapeuticiʺ were the healers. The Essenes taught that the physical body was the temple of the soul. Their healing methods were divided into three categories. They were first master herbalists. They were master in understanding the healing properties of herbs, roots, leafs, barks and plants. The second method of healing was in the use of healing stones, rock and hardened earth, hence using the mineral kingdom. Jesus, in the bible, prescribed clay to be placed on the blind manʹs eye, which He most probably learned in His training with the Essenes. The third healing method was healing with the use of spiritual energy of the soul, monad and God. The Essene Gospel of Peace The Essene ʺGospel of Peaceʺ is an extraordinary book and source of information on the Essenes, that not very many people in this world know about. It was discovered in the ʺsecret archives of the Vaticanʺ, by Edmond Bordeaux Szekeley. It is the original manuscript of St. Jerome in the middle of the Fourth Century that he translated for the Pope at that time. The manuscript was thought to be lost, however, survived in the Benedictine Monastery of Monte Cassino. 332
There are other documents that reference the Essenes in these archives, however, I donʹt think the Catholic church is too hot about releasing them. An understanding of Essenes does change their interpretation of what really went on. St. Jerome was one of the most brilliant scholars and translators of his time and was apparently quite gifted at soul travel. He had become the personal secretary for the Pope which is how he had access to such extraordinary documents. Edmond Bordeaux Szekeley has eloquently presented this material in a series of books on his life long research of the Essenes. He has come up with absolutely profound teachings and understandings of Essene philosophy which I would like to share with you now. The Tree of Life and Angelology One of the areas that the Essenes were most attuned to, of everything I mentioned in this chapter, is angels. They developed a whole science to the study of angels called ʺAngelologyʺ. They saw angels as the forces of the universe. These invisible angels were sources of tremendous power and energy. The Essenes developed a ʺTree of Lifeʺ which represented fourteen positive angelic forces. Seven of these were of the heavenly nature and seven of a more earthly nature. The tree of life was symbolized as having seven branches reaching towards the heavens and seven roots reaching into the earth. Man was seen sitting in a type of yoga posture half way between heaven and earth. The esoteric significance of the number seven is quite obvious here. The seven earthly forces, powers, and roots were: The Earthly Mother, The Angel of Earth, The Angel of Life, The Angel of Joy, The Angel of the Sun, The Angel of Life, and The Angel of Air. The seven powers, forces, and branches in the heavenly region of the tree were: Heavenly Father, The Angel of Eternal Life, The Angel of Peace, The Angel of Love and Wisdom, The Angel of Power, and the Angel of Creative Work. 333
According to Edmond Bordeaux Szekeley Within this ʺTree of Lifeʺ there is also a specific vertical relationship or correspondence between certain roots and certain branches of the tree. The Heavenly Father and Earth Mother The Angel of Eternal Life and the Angel of Earth The Angel of Creative Work and the Angel of Life The Angel of Peace and the Angel of Joy The Angel of Power and the Angel of the Sun The Angel of Love and the Angel of Water The Angel of Wisdom and the Angel of the Air This ʺTree of Lifeʺ allowed the Essenes to understand that they were surrounded by invisible spiritual forces within both the heavens and within nature and the earth. Every day the Essenes would have certain prayer and meditative rituals where they would commune with these forces. These exercises they practiced were said to have originated from ʺEnochʺ. Every day of the week in their morning and evening communions they were assigned a different angel to pray and meditate upon.
The Morning Communions 1. The Earth Mother ‐ Saturday morning 2. The Angel of the Earth ‐ Sunday morning 3. The Angel of Life ‐ Monday morning 4. The Angel of Joy ‐ Tuesday morning 5. The Angel of the Sun ‐ Wednesday morning 6. The Angel of Water ‐ Thursday morning 7. The Angel of the Air ‐ Friday morning
The Evening Communions 1. The Heavenly Father ‐ Friday evening 2. The Angel of Eternal Life ‐ Saturday evening 3. The Angel of Creative Work ‐ Sunday evening 334
4. The Angel of Peace ‐ Monday evening 5. The Angel of Power ‐ Tuesday evening 6. The Angel of Love ‐ Wednesday evening 7. The Angel of Wisdom ‐ Thursday evening
Noon Contemplations A third group of practices were held each day of the week at noon. 1. Peace with the Body ‐ Friday noon 2. Peace with the Heavenly Father ‐ Saturday noon 3. Peace with the Earthly Mother ‐ Sunday noon 4. Peace with Culture ‐ Monday noon 5. Peace with Humanity ‐ Tuesday noon 6. Peace with the Family ‐ Wednesday noon 7. Peace with the Mind ‐ Thursday noon In these noon contemplations they would call upon the heavenly Father to send His Angels of Peace to balance and harmonize these different areas of their lives. The Great Sabbath and Essene Vows Every seventh Sabbath was called the Great Sabbath. This was a transcendental peace, that acknowledged all aspects of peace. According to the research done by Edmond Bordeaux Szekeley, in his book, ʺFrom Enoch to the Dead Sea Scrollsʺ, candidates to become a member of the Essenes were on a seven year, not a three year, probationary period. Once passing this seven year period they then had to take the ʺGreat Sevenfold Vowʺ. This vow was to never reveal the communions to anyone without permission, and never to use the power and knowledge obtained for material or selfish purposes. 335
Prologue to the Communions Before actually speaking the words of the communion to reference a particular angel on the ʺTree of Lifeʺ, the Essene would say the following prayer/Affirmation. ʺI enter the eternal and infinite garden with reverence to the heavenly Father, the earthly Mother, and great Masters, reverence to the holy, pure and saving teaching, reverence to the brotherhood elect.ʺ Then they would actually do a communion with an angel. For example, to commune with the earth Mother on Saturday morning they would say: ʺThe earthly Mother and I are one. She gives the food of life to my whole body.ʺ The Essene member would then contemplate and meditate on the earth Mother and the earth energies and the food and sustenance she supplies. I am not going to go through all the prayers and communions or all the Angels in this book. I would, again, guide you to read Szekeleyʹs book ʺFrom Enoch to the Dead Sea Scrollsʺ, which is where I have sourced all the information in this chapter starting with the section on the Essene Gospel of Peace. You can read the whole book in an hour and it is packed full of all the rituals the Essenes practiced. I have attempted here to give you a skeletal outline and feeling for the teachings and lifestyle. My thanks to Edmond Bordeaux Szekeley for his wonderful research and light which he has brought to more greatly understanding the Essene Brotherhood. I would like to end this chapter with one more quote from his book, which is the seven fold vow that the candidate to the Essene Brotherhood was given and required to take before being given the actual understanding of the ʺTree of Lifeʺ and daily communions with the angels. The Seven‐Fold Vow 1. ʺI want to and will do my best to live like the ʺTree of Lifeʺ, planted by the great Masters of our brotherhood, with my heavenly Father who planted the eternal garden of the universe and gave me my spirit; with my earthly 336
Mother who planted the great garden of the earth and gave me my body; with my brothers who are working in the garden of our brotherhood. 2. I want to and will do my best to hold every morning my communions with the angels of the earthly mother, and every evening with the angels of They heavenly Father, as established by the great Masters of our brotherhood. 3. I want to and will do my best to follow the path of the seven‐fold peace. 4. I want to and will do my best to perfect my acting body, my feeling body, my thinking body, according to the teachings of the great Masters of our brotherhood. 5. I will always and everywhere obey with reverence my Master, who gives me the light of the great Masters of all times. 6. I will submit to my Master and accept His decision on whatever differences or complaints I may have against any of my brothers working in the garden of our brotherhood; and I shall never take any complaint against a brother to the outside world. 7. I will always and everywhere keep secret all the traditions of our brotherhood which my Master will tell me; and I will never reveal to anyone these secrets without the permission of my Master. I will never claim as my own, the knowledge received from my Master and I will always give credit to Him for all this knowledge. I will never use the knowledge and power I have gained through initiation from my Master for material or selfish purposes.ʺ Summation In reflecting on my personal feelings about the Essenes, I would imagine that it would be hard for anyone to be anything but deeply moved by their purity and devotion to God. The things that stands out most to me, however, is the ʺTree of Lifeʹ, and the incredible balance they achieved in integrating both the heavenly and earthly aspects of life. So many of the spiritual teachings of our day are so top heavy on the spiritual side, and not enough time is given to understanding Pan, Nature Devas, Nature Spirits, Elemental Kingdom, the physical body and the Earth Mother. 337
The ʺTree of Lifeʺ is such a beautiful symbol and metaphor for this process. Most spiritual paths with which I have been involved on this earthly side of life and the angels and spirit beings who live within the material aspect of creation are not honored and sanctified as the Essenes have done. If there is one thing I, personally, take away besides their inspiring commitment to God, it is their sanctification of the heavenly Father and the Earth Mother.
338
51 The Kabbalistic Tree of Life The Kabbalah is the secret doctrine, the esoteric, mystical aspect of the Jewish religion. I was raised in the Jewish religion in this particular lifetime but had no exposure to the Kabbalah until the past three or four years. The Jewish religion is very beautiful; however, it didn’t really satisfy me spiritually until I uncovered this sublime metaphysical system. It has been through the Kabbalah, the Tree of Life, and the Keys of Enoch that I have discovered the spiritual goldmine of Judaism. It is one of the most profound systems of spiritual growth I have ever studied, and I consider myself just a beginner. In it is total understanding. My purpose here is to give you a basic framework that will encourage you to explore its hidden mysteries more deeply. I will use the Kabbalistic Tree of Life as the foundation for the discussion. A series of diagrams of the Tree of Life will serve as a map for your inward journey. Tree of Life Number One The Tree of Life embodies the most sacred teachings of the Jewish religion. It had its antecedents in the time of the Order of Melchizedek and of Abraham, the Father of the Jewish people. Only a very small number of Jewish rabbis were Kabbalists. The Tree of Life provides a visual understanding of the story of creation. The ten circles on the tree are caUed Sephiroth, or Lights. They are a tenfold division of creation. They are individualistic, but they make‐up a whole. In a sense, they provide ten windows for looking upon God’s creation. Djwhal Khul has said that you could study the Tree of Life for centuries and not uncover its vastness. It embodies the journey of existence through creation. If you start at the top of the tree and move down, you see spirit descending into matter; if you start at the bottom of the tree and move up, you see matter returning to spirit. 1 Crown KETHER
339
2 Wisdom CHOKMAH 3 Understanding BINAH 4 Mercy CHESED 5 Severity GEBURAH 6 Beauty TIPHARETH 7 Victory NETZACH 8 Splendor HOD 9 Foundation YESOD
340
10 Kingdom MALKUTH In this second diagram, you will note three terms have been added at the very top of the tree: “Ain,” “Ain Soph,” and “Ain Soph Aur,” meaning “negative existence,” “undifferentiated illimitable one,” and “boundless universal Light.” These three terms in Kabbalistic teachings refer to stages of the unmanifest spirit before the actual descending of spirit, or what you might call manifestation. AIN NEGATIVE EXISTENCE AIN SOPH UNDIFFERENTIATED ILLIMITABLE ONE AIN SOPH AUR BOUNDLESS UNIVERSAL LIGHT 1 Crown KETHER 2 Wisdom CHOKMAH 3 Understanding BINAH 4 Mercy CHESED
341
5 Severity GEBURAH 6 Beauty TIPHARETH 7 Victory NETZACH 8 Splendor HOD 9 Foundation YESOD 10 Kingdom MALKUTH The actual point of manifestation on the Tree of Life is the very top Sephiroth, or Light, which the diagram depicts as Kether. Djwhal Khul has said its color is white. Kether can be equated with the point at which you emerged as a monad, or spiritual spark, from the Source, or from the nonmanifested state. As the monad emerges, it comes forth through the energies of the Kether. the crown of the tree. The power name of God for the Kether is Ehyeh (or Eheih) Asher Ehyeh which means “I Am That I Am.” The next Sephiroth, on the upper righthand side of the tree, is known as Chokmah. Chokmah, according to Djwahl Khul, is the Light., or Sephiroth, that contains all of the potentialities of creation. Chokmah is considered the male, or
342
father, aspect of the tree. The term that is associated with it is wisdom. The Hebrew power name of God that is associated with it is Yod Hay Wah Hay or Yod Hay Vav Hay which means “Jehovah.” This leads the monad, on its continuing journey, across the tree to the upper lefthand side. This is the Sephiroth called Binah. It is associated with the term understanding. It is the mother, or female, aspect of the tree. The Hebrew power name of God that is associated with it is the word Elohim, the Divine Mother aspect of creation, which means, literally, All That God Is. Binah functions to receive what has been given. Whereas in Chokmah, the monad received the outline of creation, in Binah, the monad receives the purposes and the manifested ways in which it may serve on the spiritual plane. These three Sephiroth—Kether, Chokmah, and Binah—form a triad that the Kabbalah calls the Supernal Triad. In the Alice Baily teachings, it is the upper spiritual triad the monad uses as it serves the Creator on the spiritual plane. Djwhal has referred to them as Atma, Buddhi, and Manas, or spiritual will, intuition, and higher mind. As you begin to move down the tree, you move into the soul level of existence, wherein lies another triad. (Moving down the tree even farther, you come to the lower spiritual triad, the personality level, which I will speak of in a little while. Do you see how exciting this is starting to become? This tree of life is literally a map of Creation.) The Soul Level of Existence The next three Sephiroth deal with the soul level of existence. The first one, on the middle righthand side of the tree, is known as Chesed, the next Geburah, and the next Tiphareth. These three have been termed “rnercy,” “severity,” and “beauty.” This triad is related to the fifth and sixth initiations, which deal with monadic merger and, of course, ascension. Studying this middle triad helps the incarnated personality to merge in consciousness with the higher self, oil soul, and to understand which aspects within self must be developed in order to function here on Earth. The Sephiroth of Chesed contains unconditional universal love. The Sephiroth of Geburah serves as the perfect balance for Chesed—divine will. The tree is balanced from top to bottom within the understanding of yin and yang. Unconditional love and divine will must be perfectly balanced if you are to realize the soul and monadic levels of consciousness. The Sephiroth of Tiphareth is the center of the Kabbalistic Tree of Life.
343
According to Djwhal Khulʹs interpretation of the Kabbalah (which is the system I am focusing on here), Tiphareth is the soul and the Christ consciousness. All the lines, or energy pathways, of the tree flow through it. Your true identity lies here. If you are identified with the triad that lies below this one, you are identifying yourself as a personality or physical body rather than as a soul. As you evolve through the middle of the tree to the upper spiritual triad, you vill eventually see yourself as soul and then as monad. You are steeped in glamour, illusion, and maya until you realize Tiphareth. The Lower Spiritual Triad The three Sephiroth that make up the lower spiritual triad are Netzach, Hod, and Yesod. In English, they have been referred to as “victory,” “splendor,” and “foundation,” the three aspects of the personality. They are only a reflection of the soul level of existence, just as the soul level is a reflection of the monadic level of existence. The Sephiroth of Netzach feels life and is associated with the doingness of the personality. The opportunity in Netzach is to transcend the less desirable feelings of the lower‐self and begin to manifest the feelings of the Higher Self and soul which, in essence, are unconditional love, compassion, and joy, thus enabling the incarnated personality to enjoy the more harmonious aspect of this Sephiroth. Straight across the tree is Hod, the logical, rational, analytical mind, which is the perfect balance for Netzach, the feeling aspect. On the monadic level, the Divine Father and Divine Mother are balanced. On the soul level, divine will and divine love are balanced. On the personality level, feeling and thinking are balanced. The next Sephiroth is Yesod. Yesod is the center of the personality level so, of course, it refers to the subconscious mind, the focus and controlling factor of the personality. The ideal is to raise the personality level and the subconscious patterns to the level of Christ consciousness. The final Sephiroth is known as Malkuth. This Light deals with physical existence. Earth life can, hence, be considered to be one‐tenth of total existence. If you are materialistic in your focus, you are missing literally nine‐tenths of God’s Creation. Malkuth gives the incarnated personality the opportunity to launch itself upward on the Tree of Life.
344
Expanded Understanding The chart below is from Ann Williams‐Heller’s book, Kabbalah: Your Path to Inner Freedom. In it she lists the ten Sephiroth along with the power name of God associated with each Sephiroth, the English interpretation of this name, and the astrological sphere associated with each Sephiroth. The Ten Branches of the Tree of Life English Hebrew God‐Name Meaning One The Crown Kether Ehyeh I Am That I Am I Shall Be There Two Wisdom Chokmah Jehovah The Lord Three Under‐ Binah Jehovah God of Gods standing Elohim (Neptune) Four Mercy, Chesed, El God, the Abundance Geburah Mighty One Five Justice, Geburah, Elohim God of Battles Severity Din, Gabor God Almighty Neptune?) Pachad God the Potent Six Beauty, the Tiphareth YHVH, God the Strong King Aloah wa Daath Seven Victory, Netzach Jehovah The Lord of Firmness Tsabaoth Hosts Eight Glory in Hod Elohim The God of Splendor Tsabaoth Hosts
345
Sphere The Prime Mover The Zodiac (Uranus?) Saturn
Jupiter
Mars (Pluto,
Sun
Venus
Mercury
Nine The Yesod Shaddel The Almighty Levanah, the Foundation El Chai Living One God Moon Ten The Malkuth Adonai The Lord and The Four Kingdom Malekh King, Elements, the Lord Made the Seven Manifest in Planetary Nature Powers The Three Pillars The Tree of Life can also be divided into three pillars or columns. The Sephiroth on the right side of the tree have been referred to as the Pillar of Mercy. The left column has been called the Pillar of Severity. The middle column has been called the pillar of Mildness or Equilibrium. This reminds me of Buddha’s Middle Path and also of the Hindu teachings dealing with the spinal column and the raising of the kundalini. The sushumna, the ida, and the pingla. make up the etheric nervous system of the human being. The kundalini, when awakened, rises up the sushumna. to the crown; the ida and pingala are the female and male aspects of the sushumna. There is obviously a macrocosm /microcosmic correlation between the etheric nervous system and the Tree of Life. Djwhal Khul teaches that there are two paths up the tree: the zigzag path and the path straight up the middle of the tree. The path up the middle relates to what I referred to in The Complete Ascension Manual as the short path of ascension. The zigzag path is the more complete path of ascension. Many incarnate personalities have taken the short path of ascension and are now returning to take the complete path of ascension which includes balancing all the opposites and ascending for your entire soul group and not just for yourself. The Seven Dimensions of Reality There are seven dimensions of reality, according to Djwhal Khul. These seven planes can be correlated with the ten Sephiroth: Logoic Plane
Kether
346
Monadic Plane Binah; Chokmah Atmic Plane Geburah; Chesed Buddhic Plane Tiphareth Mental Plane Hod; Netzach Emotional Plane Yesod Physical Plane Malkuth These, of course, are the seven subplanes of the cosmic physical plane through which hurnanity is now evolving. This Tree of Life is a mirror, on this level of evolution, for the cosmic Tree of Life through which humanity will have to evolve later in its evolutionary progression. The Archangels Each of the ten Sephiroth is associated with a specific archangel: Kether Chokmah Binah Chesed Geburah Tiphareth Netzach Hod Yesod
Metatron
Ratziel
Tzaphkiel
Tzadkiel
Khamael
Michael
Auriel
Raphael
Gabriel
347
Malkuth
Sandalphon
The Elements There is an element associated with each Sephiroth: Kether Chokmah Binah Chesed Geburah Tiphareth Netzach Hod Yesod Malkuth
Hydrogen
Uranium
Oxygen
Carbon
Nitrogen, Steel, Iron
Gold
Copper
Mercury
Quartz
Earth, Air, Fire, Water
The Colors A specific color is associated with each Sephiroth: Kether Chokmah Binah Chesed Geburah
White
Gray
Black
Blue
Red
348
Tipareth Netzach Hod Yesod MaIkuth
Yellow
Green
Orange
Purple
Mixed Colors
The Angelic Hosts Each Sephiroth has a connection with a particular group of angels: Kether Chokmah Binah Chesed Geburah Tipareth Netzach Hod Yesod Malkuth
Hyos Ha Kodoish
Auphanim
Aralim (Thrones)
Chasmalim (Brilliant Ones)
Seraphim
Malachim
Elohim
Beni Elohim
Kerubim
Ahim (Soul of Fire)
The Lord’s Prayer Every phrase of the Lord’s Prayer is associated with a Sephiroth:
349
Kether Chokmah Binah Chesed Geburah Tiphareth Netzach Hod
Our Father
Which art in Heaven
Hallowed be Thy name
Thy kingdom come
Thy will be done
On Earth as it is in Heaven.
Give us this day our daily bread And forgive us our trespasses as we forgive those who trespass against us.
Yesod Lead us not into temptation Malkuth For Thine is the kingdom Tiphareth And the glory Kether Forever and ever. Amen The Major Arcana of the Tarot Between each of the ten Sephiroth are twenty‐two pathways, lines of energy that connect the Sephiroth. These twenty‐two pathways themselves have exact meanings. They have been related to the twenty‐two cards of the Tarot’s major arcana The Tree of Life The Tree of Life can also be seen as the human body, with the middle Sephiroth representing the chakras, Kether being the crown, Tiphareth the heart chakra, Malkuth the physical body, and Yesod, the second chakra. Daath, the hidden Sephiroth, might be the third eye.
350
You can be creative and come up with your own interpretations and insights. The Tree of Life provides literally infinite potentialities. Correlations of the Sephiroth 1. Kether Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image: 2. Chokmah Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards Color: Magical Image: 3. Binah Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image: 4. Chesed Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image: 5. Geburah Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image:
Union with God Attainment The four aces Brilliance Bearded king in profile
The vision of God face to face Devotion The four twos Pure soft blue A bearded male figure
The vision of sorrow Silence The four threes Crimson A mature woman
The vision of love Obedience The four fours Deep violet A mighty crowned and throned king
The vision of power Courage The four fives Orange Almighty warrior in his chariot
351
6. Tiphareth 7. Netzach 8. Hod 9. Yesod
Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image:
The vision of harmony Devotion to great work The four sixes Clear rose‐pink A majestic king, a child, a sacrificed god
Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image:
The vision of beauty triumphant Unselfishness The four sevens Amber A beautiful naked woman
Experience: Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image:
The vision of surrender Truthfulness The four eights Violet/purple A hermaphrodite
Experience:
Virtue: Tarot Cards: Color: Magical Image:
The vision of the machinery of the universe Independence The four nines Indigo A beautiful, naked, strong man
10. Malkuth Experience: The vision of holy guardian angel Virtue: Discrimination Tarot Cards: The four tens Color: Yellow Magical Image: A young woman, crowned and throned Jacob’s Ladder and the Hidden Sephiroth Djwhal Khul has added to the Tree of Life an understanding that has to do with adding rungs, or overlaying a second Tree of Life on the already existing one. This has been esoterically termed “climbing Jacob’s Ladder.” It is done by 352
moving the second tree one step upward from the previous one in terms of the ten Sephiroth. When this is done, Malkuth, at the bottom of the first tree, has now moved up and overlies the Sephiroth of Yesod, with all the other Sephiroth on the new tree being raised up in a corresponding fashion. It is only when the new Tree of Life is added that rays eleven and twelve find a home, since there are only ten Sephiroth on the first Tree of Life. This causes a very interesting thing to happen. Yesod, in the first tree, is now raised to the level of Tiphareth. This is the personality merging with the soul consciousness, or Christ consciousness. Tiphareth, in the first Tree of Life, is now raised to the hidden Sephiroth of Daath. Daath has been associated with hidden knowledge; in other words, the soul is raised into the hidden knowledge. Daath, according to Djwhal Khul, is activated only in the enlarged, evolutionary Tree of Life. To work with Daath, a person must be approaching the third, or soul merge, initiation. Geburah, in the first Tree of Life, is now raised to Binah. Logical thinking is hence raised to divine will. Netzach is raised to Chesed; personality‐level feelings are raised to the unconditional love and compassion of Chesed. Geburah and Chesed move to Binah and Chokmah, the soul level of experience now being raised to the monadic, or spiritual, level of consciousness at the fifth and sixth levels of initiation. As you can understand, there is endless material here for your contemplation. I am just providing skeletal basics for your continued study. The four books I recommend studying if you would like to learn more are Cabala by Janet McClure; The Mystical Quabalah, an incredible book by Dion Fortune, which might be the best book ever written on the subject; Kabbalah, Your Path to Inner Freedom by Ann Williams‐Heller, and The Book of Knowledge: The Keys of Enoch by J.J. Hurtak. I am indebted to these authors for much of the material in this chapter. Summation The Kabbalah embodies the true wisdom teachings of Israel; it might be considered “the Yoga of the West.” It provides the foundation for modern Western occultism. The Tree of Life is an excellent meditation symbol for understanding the spiritual path. It reduces to a diagrammatic form every force and factor in the manifested universe that the monad, soul, and personality must deal with and balance. It is a spiritual map. It might be looked at as a dream
353
symbol of the universal mind, a picture arising from the subconscious mind of God. The tree applies not only to the macrocosm but also to the microcosm. Each individual symbol of the tree represents a cosmic force you can get in touch with through meditation. The Tree of Life as a whole is a composite symbol that represents the cosmos in its entirety and the soul of man as he relates to it. May it bring you many hours of beautiful meditation on the divine during your journey home.
354
52 The Keys of Enoch ʺKodoish, Kodoish, Kodoish Adonai Sabayothʺ
ENGLISH ‐ MEANING
ʺHoly, Holy, Holy, is the Lord God of Hostsʺ ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ is not a channeling of God, it is a ʺrevelation of Godʺ. It is truly one of the most profound books I have ever studied and read. It is not my purpose here to explain ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ for that is beyond what can be taught. My purpose here is, rather, to give you, my reader, a brief introduction to this most profound teaching brought forth by J.J. Hurtak. On the title page of ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ the following inscription is given: ʺA teaching given on seven levels to be read and visualized in preparation for the Brotherhood of Light, to be delivered for the quickening of the people of Light.ʺ
ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ is not a spiritual self help book, but more like a science book of the metaphysical universe. It is one of the few metaphysical books that I donʹt recommend reading with your left brain, as much as with your right brain. This may sound strange, but I also recommend reading the introduction and the glossary of the books ***keys before attempting to read the actual text. It is also one of those books that I recommend putting under your pillow or mattress as you sleep at night to soak in the profound teachings on a subconscious level. I personally do not claim to be an expert on the Keys. My only claim to even write this chapter is that I have read the book, which is no easy task. I also am constantly drawn back to it, and refer to it often. also serves as a wonderful reference book. It is especially good for those people who are drawn to the teachings of Kaballah and Jewish mysticism, for it is written from this cosmic vantage point. However, it is totally universalistic in nature.
355
The 64 Keys of Enoch were actually revealed to J.J. Hurtak in a most profound out‐of‐body, soul travel experience. Hurtak was sitting in his room in a state of prayer when his room became filled with light and the Ascended Master Ophanim Enoch appeared. Enoch asked Hurtak whether he was ready to go into the Fatherʹs midst, and he said he was. A great field of light was placed around his body, and they immediately left in their soul bodies. He was first taken through a region of stars known as Merak and Muscida, and then up through the mid‐way station of Arcturus. It was after this that Hurtak had to exchange his current body for a garment of light, the vibration was so high. He was then guided up into what was referred to as the seventh heaven. It was here that he saw the Elohim Masters. He was then taken through the star field of Oronis, and up through a field of light called Mintaka, where he met the Archangel Metatron, the creator of the electronic outer light in our physical universe. The light was of such a high frequency of energy that Hurtak would have been overwhelmed except for Metatronʹs help. Metatron then took Hurtak in the presence of the ʺDivine Fatherʺ. This was done by traveling through the spiritual door of Omega Orion, which served as a grand entrance to regions of pure energy emission. It was here that Hurtak said he saw the face of the ancient of Days, the Divine Father, face to face. He described His thrown as a pyramid of living light, and the Divine Father, with flowing white hair, and His face with overwhelming joy and love. He referred to the Divine Father as YHWH, and around Him he saw the twenty four Elders of Light who were singing: ʺKodoish, Kodoish, Kodoish, Adonai Tsebayothʺ. (Holy, Holy, Holy, is the Lord God of Hosts). On the right hand of the Father, he saw Jesus Christ. Hurtak was told that his work was part of the work of Enoch. He was also told that the time was at hand for the ʺExternalization of the Fatherʹs Hierarchyʺ, so that His kingdom will come on earth as it is in heaven. Hurtak was then taken to many other regions of Godʹs universe for instruction. While still at the throne, however, he saw a burning scroll which 356
was rolled up as a cylinder. Out of this scroll a light was projected into Hurtakʹs third eye, which were the 64 Keys of Enoch, which is the a basis for this sublime book. The purpose of the Keys, in part, is to make ready the earth for the descent of the Melchizadek Brotherhood and to make ready for the descent of the 144,000 Ascended Masters, who will help to redeem the meek and righteous of the earth. He was shown how the seventy Brotherhoods of Light on the inner plane serve as a field of intelligence in the repairing of the universes so that they can evolve into the infinite wisdom and glory of the eternal Mind of YHWH (God). Each key is encoded in fire letters, so that a new spectrum of light can biochemically respatialize us by activating the chemistry in our minds to participate on the many dimensions of reality of God. ...With this vision received, Hurtak returned to the earth plane to write the words and information received into the ʺBook of Knowledgeʺ. The sixty four keys given by Enoch and Metatron were given to help coordinate the sixty four unique areas of scientific knowledge which are now being simultaneously advanced. Hurtak says that the keys have been given to assist all of the basic scientific disciplines make a quantum leap forward into the new consciousness of light. The keys are to focus scientific research on the planet, with respect to the larger blueprint of life. Hurtak was also told that to be able to work the keys, one must be able to go into the fourth dimension. Here the intellect must bow to the spiritual mind. Enoch also said that the keys were not only for this planet, but also were given in preparation for our work with other planets. The actual keys were given on January 23, 1973, to prepare mankind for the activation of events that will be taking place in the thirty years leading up to the year 2003. The keys were given to Hurtak in this out of body experience in the higher spiritual planes so that they would not be contaminated by the fallen thought forms of collective humanity. Hurtak also states that the keys were given in a special sequence and order which allows them to mathematically connect with one another so as to explain the interpretation of universes, and how spiritual intelligence works through the keys. 357
Enoch said, the first fifty four keys are to be the foundation for the ten commandments. The final ten keys will give the grid system of life, and the resurrection and respatialization of the collective humanity that will proceed into the universal ʺI Am That I Amʺ. Summation The purpose of this chapter is to just give you a little taste of this ʺrevelation of Godʺ, so as to inspire you to buy or borrow the book and work with it yourself in whatever way you are guided to. It is very difficult to read, however, donʹt let that stop you. As I have already said,, just reading the introduction, the glossary, and the sixty four keys is worth buying the book, in my opinion. If you go in to reading the book in advance from your right brain, you wonʹt be overwhelmed. I did a very interesting meditation with ʺThe Keys of Enochʺ that I recommend that you try. After going into a deep meditation call forth to Helios, our Solar Logos, to anchor the sixty four Keys of Enoch into your consciousness in all five sacred languages. All you have to do is ask for this and it will be done on subtle inner plane level. Then upon reading the keys this information will be subconsciously triggered.
358
53 The Mighty I Am Presence ʺI Am the resurrection and the lifeʺ
JESUS CHRISTʹS FAVORITE AFFIRMATION ACCORDING TO THE I AM DISCOURSES OF SAINT GERMAIN
Of the many teachings and systems of spiritual study I have been involved with, one of the most interesting and useful is the ʺI AMʺ teachings of Saint Germain. The ʺI Am Discoursesʺ are a set of books that were channeled by Godfrey Ray King in the 1930ʹs and 1940ʹs. Godfrey Ray King was trained as a channel and brought forth from Saint Germain and later other Ascended Masters, these beautiful teachings. My personal orientation is more in alignment with Djwhal Khulʹs teachings through the Theosophical Society and the Alice Bailey, and Tibetan Foundation material. However, I find that the Saint Germain teachings dovetail perfectly with this material. The teachings are very simplistic and non‐denominational. I believe that Saint Germain purposely wrote these books in this simplistic way so the average person could read them and understand them and not get overwhelmed in all the occult information as was presented in the Theosophical literature. I do not say this to criticize the Theosophical literature, for I have benefited greatly from this material, but it is an obvious fact that many of these books are extremely difficult to read. The ʺI AMʺ teachings are just the opposite and donʹt overwhelm the reader with a lot of Eastern or religious terminology that might overwhelm the average reader. The basic concept of the I Am teachings of Saint Germain is that the most powerful name of God in this world is the name ʺI Amʺ. When Moses climbed Mount Sinai to speak with God, and he saw the burning bush, God said to him that his name was ʺI Am That I Amʺ.
359
Any time we use the words ʺI Amʺ, we are affirming Godʹs name and our own. When a person says the statement, ʺI amʺ ...going to the store. They are really saying, I am (or God) is going to the store, without even realizing it. Saint Germain and the other Ascended Masters suggest that whenever we use affirmations we should use the words ʺI Amʺ to begin that affirmation. For example I could say, ʺI Am the Ascended Master I wish to be now.ʺ The affirmation becomes much more powerful if we use the words, ʺI Amʺ to begin the affirmation. Saint Germain said that Jesus Christʹs favorite affirmation was, ʺI Am the resurrection and the life!ʺ He apparently used this affirmation often in His life in Palestine. The following list of affirmations are from the books the ʺI Am Discoursesʺ by Godfrey Ray King. I did not write these myself. These are exactly as Saint Germain and the Ascended Masters channeled them. I would highly recommend that you pick your favorite ones out of the list and use them every day. I would also highly recommend that you read the books by Godfrey Ray King. Other teachings have followed in more recent times, however, in my opinion, these were the first and purest. There are also “I AM” Foundations and organizations in many cities. I know for a fact that there is one in Mount Shasta and in Los Angeles if you want more information and more materials and input. I AM Affirmations of Saint Germain And Godfrey Ray King Be still and know I AM God! I AM God living in this body as (your name)! I AM a fully liberated God living in this body as (your name)! I AM the Mighty I AM Presence! I AM the Ascended Master (your name)! In the name of the Beloved Presence of God, who I AM! By the power of God, who I AM! The Mighty I AM presence is my real self! I AM the Resurrection and the Life! I AM the Truth, the Way and the Life! I AM the embodiment of Divine Love! 360
I AM the open door which no man can shut! I AM God in action! I AM the Scepter of Dominion, the Quenchless Flame, the Dazzling Light and Divine Perfection made manifest! I AM the Revelation of God! I AM the baptism of the Holy Spirit! I Am the Ascended Being I wish to be now! I AM the Realization of God! I AM an open door to all revelation! I AM the Light, that lights up every room I enter! I AM the Presence of God in action this day! I AM That I AM! I AM the Eternal Liberation from all human imperfection! I AM a perfect channel and instrument of God! I AM the presence filling my world with perfection this day! I AM an invincible Body of Light! I AM the Light, that lights every man that comes into the world! I AM the Victory in the Light! Forgive them, Father, They know not what they do! I AM the Cosmic Flame of Cosmic Victory! The second basic concept of the I AM teachings is that of the ʺMighty I Am Presenceʺ. The Mighty I AM Presence is the first individualized spiritual spark that God created. In the Alice Bailey, and Tibetan Foundation material of Djwhal Khul this was earlier referred to as the Monad. Moses called this spark the ʺI Am That I Amʺ. In the beginning God created trillions of Monads, individual sparks of God, I Am Presences. When we pray to God, Saint Germain suggests in these books that we pray to the ʺMighty I Am Presenceʺ. I, personally, really like the sound of this. In some ways I feel more comfortable praying to my Mighty I Am Presence rather than calling my God Self my Monad. These words or terms can be used interchangeably, whichever you feel comfortable with. I use both terms, myself. When I say the words, ʺMy Mighty I Am Presenceʺ, I get this surge of power and energy that I really like.
361
Saint Germain and the Ascended Masters, as channeled through Godfrey Ray King, strongly recommended throughout your day praying and calling to your Mighty I AM Presence for help. The basic spiritual law of the universe is that God, Spirit, and the Ascended Masters are not allowed to help unless you ask for help. They are not allowed to impinge on our free will, and or free choice. They desperately want to help, but are just waiting for our request. The following are some examples of Mighty I Am Presence prayers, as channeled by Godfrey Ray King. I think you will find them very powerful. Spiritual Prayers Mighty I Am Presence!!! Charge my entire mind, emotions, and body with Thy Ascended Master consciousness and keep it eternally sustained and all powerfully active! Mighty I Am Presence!!! I call you into action to charge your Cosmic Flame of cosmic Victory into my thoughts, emotions, body, and world and wipe out all else! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Take out of my feeling world every single thing that seems to obstruct the way and release of Your Mighty Intelligent Energy to go forth and produce the perfect results I desire! Mighty I Am Presence!!! I call you into action to take dominion over my thoughts, feelings, emotions, body, home, world, and daily activities! Produce Your Perfection and hold Your Dominion! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Take my love and let it flow in fullness and devotion to Thee! Take my hands and let Them work incessantly for Thee! Take my soul and let it be merged in Oneness with Thee! Take my mind and thoughts and let them be in tune with Thee! Take my everything and let me be an instrument of Thy work! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Take complete control of my being, world, and activity! See that I make my Ascension in this embodiment! For I Am the Resurrection, the truth, and the life! I Am the Ascension in the Light!!! 362
Mighty I Am Presence!!! Charge, intensify, and expand your Cosmic Flame of Cosmic Victory around me! See that I feel naught but your Ascended Master Victory! Mighty I Am Presence!!! I call you forth to place around me the Cosmic Armor of the Cosmic Flame of Cosmic Victory!!! Mighty I Am Presence!!! I face Thy eternal sunrise and receive Thy Mighty Radiance and Activity visibly manifest in my experience now! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Consume and dissolve in me all negative egotistical qualities; Their cause, effect, record, and memory, and replace them with the fullness of Thy Perfected Spiritual Qualities! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Come forth and charge my being and world every second of this day and forever more with Ascended Master Perfection! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Charge me so full of Divine Love that every person, place, condition, and thing I contact becomes instantly harmonious and obedient to the I Am Presence! Mighty I Am Presence!!! See that this home and environment and all connected with it are governed harmoniously and that all who enter, manifest only Ascended Master consciousness and activity! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Fill me with your Divine Love, Power, and Perfect Intelligent Direction! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Charge me and my world with the Violet Consuming Flame of Divine love which consumes all that is undesirable and keep me clothed forever with Thy Almighty Perfection! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Consume in me and my world all doubt, fear, jealousy, pride, resentment, irritation, criticism, condemnation, and judgment ‐‐‐ their cause, effect, record and memory, replacing them by the fullness of the Perfection which Thou art! Keeping it self‐sustained in the ever‐ expanding Light of Thy Glorious Presence!
363
Mighty I Am Presence!!! Descend into this, Thy Mind and Body! Take full conscious control this instant of all its activities and hold Thy Dominion and Victory here forever! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Come forth! Charge my being and world with That Light and Love as of a thousand suns, and crowd my path with showers and showers of Mighty I Am Presence!!! Take complete possession of my attention and fill them entire with Thyself! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Protect me from the human suggestions of the outer world! That I may go forth only accepting Thy Mighty Self and Thy Perfection forever!!! Mighty I Am Presence!!! Move everywhere before me today! And do all for me and through me perfectly!!!
364
54 Sufism ʺPrayer carries us halfway to Allah: Fasting takes us to the door of His palace: Charity gains us admission.ʺ SUFI SCRIPTURE Sufism began after the first Century of Islam, as a struggle against the increasing distortions of Islam and its teachings. Sufism is very much a part of the Islamic teachings, however, seems to represent the more mystical aspects of the Islamic Faith. Sufism has come to mean those who are interested in inner knowledge, or inner awakening and enlightenment. Sufism is a path of self purification and a purification of the heart. Many of you may have heard of, or participated in Sufi dancing. It is a group dance that creates a harmony and oneness through its designed movements. Sufism has also been defined as those adopting every higher quality and leaving other lower qualities behind. It is a science by means of which one learns to behave, in order to be always in tune and in harmony with Allah. Sufism emphasizes right relationship between man and Allah. Sufism most definitely believes in the teachings of Mohammed. Sufism believes in personal and universal courtesy. It begins with the following of Islamic Law. Sufism, however, attempts to go beyond the Islamic practice of just following the outer law, and attempts to go much deeper. A great emphasis of Sufism is to bring about the development of the whole person. Since the early history of Sufism, it has often been denounced by the scholars and leaders of traditional Islamic practice. This has led to a great deal of persecution. There have also developed a great many different Orders of the Sufi religion. They seem to be much more focused on inner development and the unseen world than traditional Moslems.
365
The traditional Muslims take the outer laws very seriously and donʹt think the outer world should be renounced. Sufism leads one to achieve inner contentment in all situations, and circumstances. They very much teach the need for detachment and the surrendering of all material desire. Their focus is on that which is permanent (spiritual reality) rather than the impermanence of the material world. Difficulties are seen as blessings for they facilitate awakening. They see the self‐knowledge as the most difficult and most essential of all sciences for any human being to study. Sufism could also be described as liberal Islam, with a coloring of Vedanta. (See chapter on Vedanta and the Life of Ramakrishna and Swami Vivekananda.) The Sufi mystics see God in all people and in all objects. The Sufi mystic is free of all egoism, lust, greed, anger, and pride. The Sufi mystic consecrates all his acts to the unity of God, the brotherhood of man and self surrender to the Lord. Sufiʹs want to stay very much in the world but to be above worldliness. The Sufi strives for absolute beauty, absolute love, and absolute bliss at all times. The Sufi path is one of annihilation of the lower self and negative ego. Their spiritual practices consist of: Concentration Meditation Obedience to Guru Poverty Discipline Fasts Penances Recitation of the name of the Lord The use of a Rosary Rhythmic and controlled breathing Prayer Universal Love Non‐violence Detachment Introspection Dispassion Purity of heart and self control to attain union with God 366
The following are quotes from Sufi scripture: ʺPrayer carries us half‐way to Allah; Fasting takes us to the door of His palace: Charity gains us admission.ʺ ʺHe needs to other rosary whose thread of life is strung with beads of love, service, charity and renunciation.ʺ ʺHappy are the believers who humble themselves in prayer and who keep aloof from vain words, who do charitable acts, and who restrain their appetites.ʺ ʺDo good, because God loveth those who do good.ʺ
367
55 Shinto: the Way of the Gods ʺEven the wishes of an ant reach heavenʺ
SHINTOISM
Shintoism is the name of the religion that the Japanese have worshipped from time immemorial. Shinto means ʺthe Way of the Godsʺ, or ʺGod Like Wayʺ. It seems to have a similar type of meaning that Taoism has. Shinto is an all pervading indefinable way, which is quite universal. Shintoism is a religion of the heart. It pervades Japanese culture, family ethics and national structure. It is the chief ingredient which has regenerated, and revitalizes the social and religious life of Japan. It has a quality of being polytheistic because of the multitude of gods that are worshipped. According to Shinto theology, Ame‐no‐mi‐naka‐nushi is the absolute Universal Self. The visible universe is (Ken Kai). The invisible world is (Yu Kai). Both of these have come into being from Ame‐no‐mi‐naka‐nushi, and three sub dieties. Fundamental to this structure of the universal way is absolute loyalty to the sovereign emperor who is regarded as a direct descendant and representative of the highest God. Also fundamental is respect for ancestors, and love and respect for parents and children. As mentioned before, there are many Gods in Shintoism, but the sun God Anaterasu‐omi Kami, is the Supreme Highest. Purity is one of the highest ethics in Shintoism. This is broken down into outer purity or purity of the body, and inner purity or purity of the heart. A person with inner purity is seen as being able to attain God realization. One other strong guiding principle is that of sincerity. There are ten main precepts or ideals in Shintoism and they read as follows: 1. Do not transgress the will of the Gods.
368
2. Do not forget your obligation to ancestors. 3. Do not offend by violating the decrees of the state. 4. Do not forget the profound goodness of the Gods, through which calamity and misfortunes are averted and sickness is healed. 5. Do not forget that the world is one great family. 6. Do not forget the limitation of your own person. 7. Do not become angry even though others become angry. 8. Do not be sluggish in your work. 9. Do not bring blame to the teachings. 10. Do not be carried away by foreign teachings. One of the common Shinto prayers reads as follows: ʺOur eyes may see some uncleanliness, but let not our mind see things that are not clean. Our ears may hear some uncleanliness, but let not our mind hear things that are not clear.ʺ Shinto Quotations ʺThe heart of the person before you is a mirror. See there your own form.ʺ ʺEven the wishes of an ant reach to heaven.ʺ ʺLeave the things of this world and come to me daily with your bodies and pure hearts.ʺ ʺA single sincere prayer moves heaven. You will surely realize the Divine Presence through sincere prayer.ʺ ʺWhere you have sincerity, there also is virtue. Sincerity is a witness to truth. Sincerity is the mother of knowledge. Sincerity is a single virtue that binds Divinity and man in one.ʺ ʺRetribution for good or ill is as sure as the shadow after substance.ʺ ʺTo do good is to be pure. To commit evil is to be impure.ʺ ʺTo admit a fault is the beginning of righteousness.ʺ 369
ʺThe first and surest means to enter into communion with the Divine is sincerity. If you pray to a deity with sincerity, you will surely feel the Divine Presence.ʺ 370
56 Baha*i: the Worldʹs Newest Religion ʺAll races and religions are one.ʺ
THE PROPHET BA HA*U*LLAH
One of the worldʹs newest religions is called the Baha*i Faith. In my research about it, I was very impressed with many of its ideals and concepts. It is a world wide religion of Iranian origin, which holds to the belief that its teacher ʺBaha*u*llah is the prophet of God for our age. Although Baha*u*llah is considered the major prophet of this age, actual religion had its first inception from his teacher, Mirza Ali Mohammed, who lived from 1819 to 1850. Mirza was involved with the Sufis which was the more mystical side of the Islamic religion. He became like the Messiah, or what is called the ʺMahdiʺ for the Sufis. This group became known as the ʺBabistʺ. The teachings spread rapidly, however, the Persian government heavily persecuted the people involved and Morza Ali Mohammed died a martyr. Bah*u*llah was his disciple and declared to his followers that he was the next prophet of God that Mirza Ali Mohammed had prophesied about. In the Baha*iʹs faith these two men are considered the co‐founders, however, Bah*u*llah represents the full culmination of the revelation. One of the interesting concepts in the Baha*iʹs Faith is the concept first of the world and all races and religions being one. The Baha*is acknowledge all the founders of all the religions (Jesus, Buddha, Krishna, Zoroaster, Moses, Confucius, Lao Tse, etc.) as manifestations and messengers of God. Each prophet is seen as bringing forth from God the message that is needed at that particular time in history. So each century is seen as having a progressive type of revelation. So the Bah*is really believe in all religions. Baha*u*llah is seen as bringing forth the next dispensation of teachings in a long line of great prophets and world teachers.
371
The key principle or ideal of the Baha*iʹs faith is to love and serve humanity, and to work for universal peace and brotherhood. A Baha*i is seen as any person who lives the teachings. In this respect, a person could keep their Christian faith, for example, and still be a Baha*i. Although the Baha*is believe in a world after, however, their main work is to focus on bringing the kingdom of God on earth now. The teachings are very Christ like, however, they donʹt identify just with the Christian religion. They love and respect all religions, all people, and all nations. All people are seen of one race regardless of skin color, creed, or religious affiliation. Baha*is are taught to be; truthful, hospitable, unconditionally loving, work ethic, sacrifice, service, prayerful, enjoyment of earthly life, acquisition of knowledge, dietary laws, cooperation, equal rights for men and women, help the poor, sick, and disabled, to never hurt others, to always see the good in others, never the bad, no gambling, narcotics or alcohol, holy life, clean minded, no carnal sexuality, good example to the community, modest, humble, self‐effacing, selflessness, obedience to God and Godʹs laws, non‐ attachment, acceptance, humble, humility, study of Baha*i writings, self supporting, joyous under all conditions, non‐judgmental, turn the other cheek, love your enemies, spread the teachings, patience. Marriage is encouraged in the Baha*i faith, however, chastity before marriage, and absolute faithfulness to oneʹs partner is seen as essential. Another interesting concept of the Baha*i faith is the belief for the need of a universal language. The idea is that each country throughout the world will keep their main language, however, would learn a secondary language agreed upon by the world community. This would allow all peoples of all countries to have a commonality in language with the rest of the human race. Baha*is also see true religion and science as always being in agreement. In truth, they are two sides of the same coin. They also believe that society must not permit extremes of wealth or poverty. Baha*u*llah believed in an economic system based on graduated taxation. When a person was earning just enough to live a comfortable life he or she should not be taxed. The more a person makes over their needs, the more they should be taxed. People who are ill, or have a bad harvest on their farm, for example, should be helped out so no human being should be permitted to live below a certain standard. 372
The interesting thing about the Baha*i faith is it also delves into social, economic, and political issues. These aspects of society are not seen as separate from the rest of life. The Baha*i faith also teaches religion without the need for clergy. There is a spiritual assembly that helps to run and organize the communityʹs affairs, however, clergy arenʹt used as a mediator between the person and God. Divorce in the Baha*is faith is deplored, but is permissible. No guilt is attached to it. After separating, Baha*i followers are not supposed to see other members of the opposite sex with a view to remarry. The teachings suggest a need to strive toward reconciliation with oneʹs legal partner. After this twelve month waiting period, then the spiritual assembly helps to facilitate divorce proceedings if that is what the couple wants. Baha*is are also encouraged not to become identified with political figures, political parties and political discussions. The danger here seems to be that of creating separation or lack of unity and love between all people which is so central to the Baha*i teachings. Baha*is also believe in the importance of supporting oneʹs government and not joining underground movements that might seek to overthrow those in power. Baha*i youth, however, automatically ask for non combatant military status when registering for military service. All Baha*is are required to write a will and testament so if anything should ever happen, there will be no legal and family friction. Baha*is are expected to educate their children in the Baha*iʹs teachings and to also celebrate the nine Baha*is holy days. The Baha*i faith is very community oriented and it is very clear in the teachings that no man is an island unto himself. In terms of an after life, death is clearly not the end of life. It is seen as a release from an outer shell to a new and even more wonderful world of experience. Heaven and hell are seen as states of consciousness, rather than as just places. The soul, at birth, is seen as like a bud in a flower that is waiting to grow. Each personʹs good and bad deeds and thinking will determine whether it blooms or becomes retarded in its growth. 373
Summation The three things that stand out to me, personally, about the Baha*i faith is, first the honoring and recognizing of all prophets of God, and all religions. Secondly, the tremendous focus on universal brotherhood, among nations, religions, and people of all races, creeds and colors. Thirdly, is how the teachings also deal with social, political, economic, scientific, and educational issues of our time. In our Western culture, there is a very strange and bizarre dichotomy of church and state. Religion and all ramifications of earthly life cannot be separated, in truth. The key is for this integration to take place in a non‐ biased, non egotistical manner. Religion amd politics have not been able to achieve this state of consciousness. The Baha*i faith, in my opinion, from the little I have studied it, seems to have taken a giant step in transcending religious bias, in seeking to blend spirituality with some of the pressing social, political, economic and scientific problems of our time.
374
BIBLIOGRAPHY Anka, Darryl ‐ Bashar: Blueprint for Change ‐ New Solutions Publishing, Seattle, WA 1990 Bahree, Patricia ‐ The Hindu World ‐ Silver Burdett Co., Morristown, NH 1982 Baswaran, Eknath ‐ The Upanishads ‐ Nilgiri Press, Petaluma, CA 1987 Baswaran, Eknath ‐ The Bhagavad Gita ‐ Nilgiri Press, Petaluma, CA 1985 Beauliew, John ‐ Music and Sound in the Healing Arts ‐ Station Hill Press, Barrytown, NY 1987 Beesley, R.P. ‐ Yoga of the Inward Path ‐ White Lodge Publications 1974 Bernard, Dr. Raymond ‐ The Hollow Earth ‐ Citadel Press, New York 1969 Bittleson, Adam ‐ Our Spiritual Companions ‐ Floris Books, Edinburgh 1980 Chaney, Earlyne ‐ Beyond Tomorrow ‐ Astara Inc., Upland, CA 1985 Cheney, Margaret ‐ Tesla: Man Out of Time ‐ Bantam Doubleday, New York 1981 Cooper, William ‐ Behold a Pale Horse ‐ Light Technology Publishing, Sedona, AZ 1991 Daniel, Alma Y. Wyllie, Timothy & Ramer, Andrew ‐ Ask your Angels ‐ Ballantine Books, New York 1992 Danielou, Alain ‐ Yoga ‐ Inner Traditions International, Rochester VE 1991 Denaerde, Stefan & Stevens, Wendelle ‐ UFO: Contact from Planet Targa ‐ Wendelle Stevens, Tuscon, AZ 1982 Elkins, Don & Rueckert, Carla & McCarty, James A. ‐ The Ra Material ‐ Whitford Press, West Chester PA 1984 Feuerstein, Georg ‐ The Sacred Paths ‐ Larson Publications, Burdett, NY 1991 Findhorn Community ‐ The Findhorn Garden ‐ Harper & Row, New York 1975 Fortune, Dion ‐ The Mystical Qabalah ‐ Weiser, York Beach, ME 1984 Gardner, Edward L. ‐ Fairies ‐ Quest Books, Wheaton, IL 1966 Gaver, Jessyca R. ‐ The Bahaʹi Faith ‐ Award Books, New York 1967 Goldman, Karen ‐ The Angel Book ‐ Simon & Schuster, New York 1988 Haeri, Shaykh F. ‐ Sufism ‐ Element Books, Dorset, England 1990 Haich, Elisabeth ‐ Initiation ‐ Seed Center, Palo Alto, CA 1960 Hawken, Paul ‐ The Magic of Findhorn ‐ Harper & Row, New York 1975 Heline, Corinne ‐ Color and Music in the New Age ‐ DeVorss & Co., Marina del Rey, CA 1964 Khul, Djwhal ‐ The Cabala ‐ Tibetan Foundation, Los Angeles, CA King, Godfre Ray ‐ Ascended Master Light ‐ Saint Germain Press, Schaumburg, IL 1938 King, Godfre Ray ‐ The ʺI AMʺ Discourses ‐ Saint Germain Press, Schaumburg, IL 1935 Kittler, Glenn D. ‐ Edgar Cayce on the Dead Sea Scrolls ‐ Warner Books, New York 1970
375
Kirkwood, Annie Maryʹs Message to the World ‐ Nevada City, CA 1991 Lawrence, Brother ‐ The Practice of the Presence of God ‐ Templegate, Springfield, IL 1974 Levi ‐ The Aquarian Gospel of Jesus Christ ‐ DeVorss & Co., Marina del Rey, CA 1907 Long, Max Freedom ‐ The Secret Science at Work ‐ DeVorss & Co., Marina del Rey, CA 1953 Milanovich, Dr. Norma J. ‐ We, The Arcturians ‐ Athena Publishing, Albuquerque, NM 1990 Montgomery, Ruth ‐ Strangers Among Us ‐ Fawcett Crest, New York 1979 Newhouse, Flower A. ‐ Rediscovering the Angels ‐ Christward Ministry, Escondido, CA 9050 Printz, Thomas ‐ The Seven Mighty Elohim Speak ‐ Ascended Master Teaching Foundation, Mt. Shasta, CA 1986 Purchit, Swami ‐ The Geeta ‐ Faber & Faber, London 1935 Ribera, Antonio ‐ UFO: Contact from Planet Ummo ‐ Wendelle Stevens, Tuscon, AZ 1985 Rodriguez‐Montiel, Zithe & Hernandez, R.N. ‐ UFO: Contact from Andromeda ‐ Wendelle Stevens, Tuscon, AZ 1988 Sen, K.M. ‐ Hinduism ‐ Penguin Books, London 1961 Singh, Isbar ‐ The Philosophy of Guru Nanak ‐ Atlantic Publishers, New Delhi, India 1987 Sivananda, Swami ‐ Practice of Yoga ‐ Divine Life Society, India 1984 Stearn, Jess ‐ Edgar Cayce: The Sleeping Prophet ‐ Bantam Books, New York 1967 Steiger, Brad & Sherry Hansen ‐ Star Born ‐ Berkeley Books, New York 1992 Stevens, Wendelle C. ‐ UFO: Contact from the Pleiades ‐ Wendelle Stevens, Tuscon, AZ 1978 Stranges, Dr. Frank E. ‐ The UFO Conspiracy ‐ I.E.C. Publishing, Van Nuys, CA 1985 Stranges, Dr. Frank E. ‐ Stranger at the Pentagon ‐ I.E.C. Publishing, Van Nuys, CA 1991 Szekely, Edmond B. ‐ The Essene Gospel of Peace ‐ Int. Biogenic Soc., London 1978 Szekely, Edmond B. ‐ From Enoch to the Dead Sea Scrolls ‐ Int. Biogenic Soc., London 1981 Temple, Robert K.G. ‐ The Sirius Mystery ‐ Destiny Books, Rochester, VE 1976 Twitchell, Paul ‐ Eckankar: The Key to Secret Worlds ‐ Eckankar, Minneapolis, MN 1969 Tuella ‐ Ashtar: A Tribute ‐ Guardian Action Int., Salt Lake City, UT 1980 Williams‐Heller, Ann ‐ Kabbalah: Your Path to Inner Freedom ‐ Quest Books, Wheaton, IL 1990
376
CCCCC About the Author Dr Joshua David Stone had a Ph.D. in Transpersonal Psychology and was a Licensed Marriage, Family, and Child Counselor in California. In November 2004 Dr Stone officially launched the ʺI AM Universityʺ, which is an actual university that Dr Stone runs on the inner plane and has been guided by Spirit and the Ascended Masters to anchor and externalize on Earth. The ʺI AM Universityʺ is the premier training facility on Planet Earth for realizing oneʹs ascension, oneʹs 12‐22 levels of initiation and light body, enlightenment, consciousness development, and Self and God Realization. It is the fast path and rocket ship to becoming a fully realized ʺIntegrated Ascended Masterʺ on Earth in this lifetime! In 2005 Dr Stone passed on to the Spirit world where he continues to run the inner plane I AM University and Spiritually supports the continued expansion of his work through the platform and vehicle of the earthly/outer plane I AM University! He is now in training with Lord Maitreya and the Spiritual Hierarchy in preparation of serving as the future head of the Spiritual Hierarchy for Planet Earth when his training to do so is complete!
377
CCCCC I AM UNIVERSITY Dr Joshua David Stone & Gloria Excelsias Postfach 61, 1041 Vienna Austria ‐ Europe Phone: +43 – 1 – 5058001 Fax: +43 – 1 – 5058002 Email Dr Stone:
[email protected] Email Gloria:
[email protected] Website: www.iamuniversity.org
CCCCC Copyright © 1997 Dr Joshua David Stone & Gloria Excelsias All Rights Reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the permission in writing from the copyright owner!
378
